BS-600 Operation Manual V8.0 en

BS-600
Chemistry Analyzer
Operator’s Manual
Volume I
© 2015-2023 Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights Reserved.
For this Operator’s Manual, the issue date is 2023-04.
i
Publication Information
Publication version Revision date Change description
1.0 2015-01 First version
2.0 2015-03 Modified the maintenance steps of

replacing sample mixer
3.0 2018-03 Deleted the pictures of the water supply
module and drainage module.
4.0 2019-04 Safety standard was upgraded
5.0 2020-09 Added HbA1c function
6.0 2020-10 1. Added result flag REE

2.Modified the registration certificate
number
7.0 2021-11 Added contents according to the
requirements of REGULATION (EU)
2017/746 OF THE EUROPEAN
PARLIAMENT AND OF THE COUNCIL of 5
April 2017 on in vitro diagnostic medical
devices and repealing Directive
98/79/EC and Commission Decision
2010/227/EU, unique device identifier,
and electronic interfaces.
8.0 2023-04 Corrected ISE chemistries test speed.
ii
Intellectual Property Statement
SHENZHEN MINDRAY BIO-MEDICAL ELECTRONICS CO., LTD. (hereinafter called Mindray)
owns the intellectual property rights to this Mindray product and this manual. This
manual may refer to information protected by copyright or patents and does not convey
any license under the patent rights or copyright of Mindray, or of others.
Mindray intends to maintain the contents of this manual as confidential information.
Disclosure of the information in this manual in any manner whatsoever without the
written permission of Mindray is strictly forbidden.
Release, amendment, reproduction, distribution, rental, adaptation, translation or any
other derivative work of this manual in any manner whatsoever without the written
permission of Mindray is strictly forbidden.
, , , , BeneView,
WATO, BeneHeart, are the trademarks, registered or otherwise, of Mindray in China
and other countries. All other trademarks that appear in this manual are used only for
informational or editorial purposes. They are the property of their respective owners.
iii
Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party
Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.
All information contained in this manual is believed to be correct. Mindray shall not be
liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in
connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this manual.
Mindray is responsible for the effects on safety, reliability and performance of this product,
only if:
 all installation operations, expansions, changes, modifications and repairs of this
product are conducted by Mindray authorized personnel;
 the electrical installation of the relevant room complies with the applicable national
and local requirements; and
 the product is used in accordance with the instructions for use.
Warning
It is important for the hospital or organization that employs this equipment to carry out a
reasonable service/maintenance plan. Neglect of this may result in machine breakdown
or personal injury.
Note
This equipment must be operated by skilled/trained clinical professionals.
iv
Warranty
THIS WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES,
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Exemptions
Mindray's obligation or liability under this warranty does not include any transportation
or other charges or liability for direct, indirect or consequential damages or delay
resulting from the improper use or application of the product or the use of parts or
accessories not approved by Mindray or repairs by people other than Mindray authorized
personnel.
This warranty shall not extend to:
 Malfunction or damage caused by improper use or man-made failure.
 Malfunction or damage caused by unstable or out-of-range power input.
 Malfunction or damage caused by force majeure such as fire and earthquake.
 Malfunction or damage caused by improper operation or repair by unqualified or
unauthorized service people.
 Malfunction of the instrument or part whose serial number is not legible enough.
 Others not caused by instrument or part itself.
Customer service department

Manufacturer: Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd.
Address: Mindray Building, Keji 12th Road South, High-tech
industrial park, Nanshan, Shenzhen 518057,P.R.China
Website: www.mindray.com
E-mail Address: [email protected]
Tel: +86 755 81888998
Fax: +86 755 26582680
EC - Representative
EC-Representative: Shanghai International Holding Corp. GmbH(Europe)
Address: Eiffestraβe 80, 20537 Hamburg, Germany
Tel: 0049-40-2513175
Fax: 0049-40-255726
v
vi
Preface
This manual contains the instructions necessary to operate the product safely and in
accordance with its function and intended use. Please read this manual thoroughly before
using the product. This manual is based on the maximum configuration and therefore
some contents may not apply to your product. It you have any questions, please contact
us.
Observance of this manual is a prerequisite for proper performance and correct
operation, and it ensures patient and operator safety. All graphics including screens and
printouts in this manual are for illustration purpose only and must not be used for any
other purposes. The screens and printouts on the product should prevail.
Preface-1
Preface
Preface-2
Safety Information
This chapter provides you with safety symbols used in this manual and their meanings,
summarizes the safety hazards and operating precautions that should be considered
seriously when the instrument is being operated, and lists the labels and silkscreen that
has been applied to the instrument and their indications.
Safety Information-1
Safety Information
Safety Symbols
Safety symbols are used in this manual in order to remind you of the instructions
necessary to operate the product safely and in accordance with its function and intended
use. A safety symbol and text constitutes a notice as shown in the table below:
Symbol Meaning
Caution
Biological risks
Safety Information -2
Safety Information
Summary of Hazards
Introduction
Observe the following safety precautions when using the product. Ignoring any of these
safety precautions may lead to personal injury or equipment damage.
WARNING
If the product is used in a manner not specified by our company, the protection provided
by the product may be impaired.
Electric Shock Hazards

Observe the following instructions to prevent electric shock.
WARNING
 When the MAIN POWER is turned on, users other than the servicing personnel
authorized by our company must not open the rear cover or side cover.
 Spillage of reagent or sample on the product may cause equipment failure and even
electric shock. Do not place sample and reagent on the product. In case of spillage,
switch off the power immediately, remove the spillage and contact our Customer
Service Department or your local distributor.
Moving Parts Hazards

Observe the following instructions to prevent personal injury caused by moving parts.
WARNING
 Do not touch such moving parts as sample probe, reagent probes, mixers, cuvette
wash station, sample carousel, reagent carousel and reaction carousel, when the
system is in operation.
 Do not put your fingers or hands into any open part when the system is in operation.
Photometer Lamp Hazards

Observe the following instructions to prevent personal injury caused by photometer
lamp.
WARNING
 Eye injury could occur from light emission from the photometer lamp. Do not stare
into the lamp when the system is in operation.
 If you want to replace the photometer lamp, first switch off the MAIN POWER and
then wait at least 5 minutes for the lamp to cool down before touching it. Do not
touch the lamp before it cools down, or you may get burned.
Safety Information
Laser Beam Hazards

Observe the following instructions to prevent personal injury caused by laser beam.
WARNING
Light emitted by the bar code reader may cause eye injury. Do not stare into the laser
beam radiated from the bar code reader when the system is in operation.
Sample, Calibrator and Control Hazards

Observe the following instructions to protect against the biohazardous infection by
samples, calibrators and control samples.
BIOHAZARD
 Inappropriately handling samples, controls and calibrators may lead to biohazardous
infection. Do not touch samples, mixtures or waste with your bare hands. Wear gloves
and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles.
 In case your skin contacts the sample, control or calibrator, follow the standard
laboratory safety procedure and consult a doctor.
Reagent and Wash Solution Hazards

Observe the following instructions to protect against the biohazardous infection by
reagents and wash solution.
WARNING
Reagents and concentrated wash solution are corrosive to human skins. Exercise caution
when using reagents and concentrated wash solution. In case your skin or clothes contact
them, wash them off with soap and clean water. If reagents or wash solution spills into
your eyes, rinse them with much water and consult an oculist.
Waste Hazards
Observe the following instructions to prevent environmental pollution and personal
injury caused by waste.
BIOHAZARD
 Some substances contained in reagent, control, concentrated wash solution and
waste are subject to regulations of contamination and disposal. Dispose of the waste
in accordance with your local or national rule for biohazard waste disposal and
consult the manufacturer or distributor of the reagents for details.
 Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles.
System Disposal Hazards

Observe the following instructions to dispose of the waste analyzer.
WARNING
Materials of the analyzer are subject to contamination regulations. Dispose of the waste
analyzer in accordance with your local or national rule for waste disposal.
Safety Information
Fire and Explosion Hazards

Observe the following instructions to prevent fire and explosion.
WARNING
Ethanol is flammable substance. Please exercise caution while using ethanol around the
instrument in order to prevent fire and explosion.
Removal of Analyzer from Use for Repair or Disposal

To minimize or eliminate the hazards involved in repair, transportation, disposal process,
please observe the following instruction.
WARNING
When the analyzer is not in use, for example, in repair, transportation or disposal process,
please clean and sterilize the parts (sample probe, reagent probe, etc.) or surfaces
that may cause biohazdards and remind the person who handles the device of the related
hazards.
Safety Information
Cleaning and Decontamination
CAUTION
Appropriate decontamination should be carried out in accordance with laboratory safety
regulations if reagent, sample or other liquids are spilled onto the equipment. In case of
large-amount liquid ingression, please contact our customer service department or the
local distributor.
No decontamination or cleaning agents can be used which could cause a HAZARD as a
result of a reaction with parts of the equipment or with material contained in it. Strong
acid or alkaline solutions are forbidden to clean the equipment.
If there is any doubt about the compatibility of the decontamination or cleaning agents
with parts of the equipment or with material contained in it, please contact our
customer service department or the local distributor.
CAUTION
Recommended detergent: water and 75% ethanol.
Prohibited detergent: materials that may corrode metals, for example, 3% hydrogen
peroxide.
The user shall perform regular cleaning to the cover of the analyzer. Use the specified
materials to clean the equipment only. For any damage to the instrument or other
accidents caused by using materials other than specified, Mindray will not provide any
warranty.
Mindray does not claim the validity of the listed chemicals in infection control. For
effective control of infection, please consult the Infection Prevention Department of the
hospital or the epidemic professionals.
Disinfection may damage the system to some extent. It is recommended to perform
disinfection only when necessary according to your laboratory protocol.
Do not use any cleaning agents which could cause a HAZARD as a result of a reaction with
parts of the equipment or with material contained in it.
If you accidentally spill hazardous material (for example, samples and reagents) on the
instrument, clean and disinfect the instrument. Recommended detergents and
disinfectants include water and 75% ethanol. Do not use materials that may corrode
metals (for example, 3% hydrogen peroxide). Wear proper personal protective
equipment (e.g. gloves, lab coat, etc.) and follow safe laboratory procedures when
handling them and the contacted areas in the laboratory.
Software and Cybersecurity
WARNING
Data should be transmitted in a closed network or virtual isolated network environment.
The laboratory is responsible for the security of the virtual isolated network
environment.
Make sure that the network authorization information (such as user information and
password) is secure and not obtained by unauthorized persons.
Please use Microsoft firewall and kill the virus regularly.
Safety Information
Notification of Adverse Events
NOTE
As a health care provider, you may report the occurrence of certain events to SHENZHEN
MINDRAY BIO-MEDICAL ELECTRONICS CO., LTD., and possibly to the competent authority
of the Member state in which the user and / or patient is established.
These events, include device-related death and serious injury or illness. In addition, as
part of our Quality Assurance Program, SHENZHEN MINDRAY BIO-MEDICAL ELECTRONICS
CO., LTD. requests to be notified of device failures or malfunctions. This information is
required to ensure that SHENZHEN MINDRAY BIO-MEDICAL ELECTRONICS CO., LTD.
provides only the highest quality products.
Safety Information
Precautions on Use
Introduction
To use the product safely and efficiently, pay attention to the following operating
precautions.
Intended Use
WARNING
The instrument is an automated chemistry analyzer for in vitro diagnostic use in clinical
laboratories and designed for in vitro quantitative determination of clinical chemistries
in serum, plasma, urine and cerebrospinal fluid samples. Please consult us before you
use the instrument for other purposes.
When drawing a clinical conclusion, please also refer to patients’ clinical symptoms and
other test results.
Environment Precautions
CAUTION
Please install and operate the system in an environment specified by this manual.
Installing and operating the system in other environment may lead to unreliable results
and even equipment damage.
To relocate the system, please contact our Customer Service Department or your local
distributor.
Installation Precautions
NOTE
The safety of any system incorporating the equipment is the responsibility of the
assembler of the system.
Safety Information
Electromagnetic Noise Precautions
CAUTION
Electromagnetic noise may interfere with operations of the system. Do not install
devices generating excessive electromagnetic noise around the system. Do not use such
devices as radio transmitters in the room housing the system. Do not use other display
monitors around the system.
Do not use other medical instruments around the system that may generate
electromagnetic noise to interfere with their operations.
Do not use this device in close proximity to sources of strong electromagnetic radiation
(e.g. unshielded intentional RF sources), as these may interfere with the proper
operation.
The electromagnetic environment should be evaluated prior to operation of the device.
This device has been designed and tested to CISPR 11 Class A, and in a domestic
environment may cause radio interference, in which case, you may need to take
measures to mitigate the interference.
CAUTION
It is the manufacturer's responsibility to provide equipment electromagnetic
compatibility information to the customer or user.
It is the user's responsibility to ensure that a compatible electromagnetic environment
for the equipment can be maintained in order that it will perform as intended.
Safety Information
Operating Precautions
CAUTION
 Take the clinical symptoms or other test results of the patient into considerations
when making a diagnosis based on the measuring results produced by the system.
 Operate the system strictly as instructed by this manual. Inappropriate use of the
system may lead to unreliable test results or even equipment damage or personal
injury.
 When using the system for the first time, first run calibrations, and then QC tests to
make sure the system is in proper state.
 Be sure to run QC tests every time when you use the system, otherwise the result may
be unreliable.
 Do not uncover the reagent carousel when the system is in operation. Keep the
reagent carousel cover closed.
 The RS-232 port on the analyzing unit is used for connection with the operation unit
only. Do not use it for other connections. Use the cables provided by our company or
your local distributor for the connection.
 The operation unit is a personal computer with the operating software installed.
Installing other software or hardware on the computer may interfere with the system
operation. Do not run other software when the system is working.
 Computer virus may destroy the operating software or test data. Do not use the
computer for other purposes or connect it to the Internet. If the computer is infected
by virus, please install anti-virus software to check for and clear virus.
 Do not touch the display, mouse or keyboard with wet hands or hands with chemicals.
 Do not place the MAIN POWER to ON again within 10 seconds since placing it to OFF;
otherwise the system may enter the protection status. If it does so, place the MAIN
POWER to OFF and place it to ON again.
 Any serious incident that has occurred in relation to the device shall be reported to
the manufacturer and the competent authority of the country in which the user
and/or the patient is established.

Safety Information
Maintenance and Servicing Precautions
CAUTION
 Maintain the system strictly as instructed by this manual. Inappropriate maintenance
may lead to unreliable results, equipment damage or personal injury.
 To wipe off dust from the system surface, use a soft, clean and moistened cloth
soaked with soap water rather than organic solvents such as ethanol. After cleaning,
wipe the surface dry with dry cloth.
 Shut down and turn off the system and disconnect the power plugs before cleaning.
Take necessary measures to prevent water ingression, otherwise equipment damage
or personal injury may be caused.
 Replacement of major parts as photometer lamp, sample probe, reagent probes,
mixers, and syringe must be followed by re-calibration.
 Replacement of the photometer lamp should be done when the system power has
been switched off for at least 5 minutes.
 If the system fails and needs servicing, contact our Customer Service Department or
your local distributor. The system may need to be stopped or transported during
servicing, which will probably cause biohazards, electric shock hazards and moving
part hazards. Exercise caution when prepare the system for servicing.
NOTE
Check the safe state of the equipment after repair. Make sure the equipment is safe and
then offer it to the customer.
Chemistry Parameter Configuration Precautions
CAUTION
To define such parameters as sample volume, reagent volume and wavelength, follow
the instructions in this manual and the instructions of reagents.
ISE Module Precautions
CAUTION
To prevent ISE electrodes from being damaged due to water scarcity, if the system, when
equipped with an ISE module, will be powered off for a long time, perform the electrode
storage maintenance.
Safety Information
Sample Precautions
CAUTION
 Use samples that are completely free of insoluble substances like fibrin or suspended
matter; otherwise the sample probe may be clogged.
 Medicines, anticoagulants or preservative in the samples may lead to unreliable
results.
 Hemolysis, icterus or lipemia in the samples may lead to unreliable test results;
running a sample blank, therefore, is recommended.
 Store the samples properly. Improper storage may change the compositions of
samples and lead to unreliable results.
 Sample volatilization may lead to unreliable results. Do not leave the sample open for
a long period.
 The system has a specific requirement on the sample volume. Refer to this manual for
proper sample volume.
 Load samples to correct positions on the sample carousel before the analysis begins;
otherwise reliable results may not be obtained.
Reagent, Calibrator and Control Precautions
CAUTION
 Use proper reagents, calibrators and controls on the system.
 Select appropriate reagents according to the performance characteristics of the
system. Consult the reagent suppliers, our company or our authorized distributor for
details, if you are not sure about your reagent choice.
 Store and use the reagents, calibrators and controls strictly as instructed by the
suppliers; otherwise, reliable results or best performance of the system may not be
obtained. Improper storage of reagents, calibrators and controls may lead to
unreliable results and bad performance of the system even in validity period.
 Perform calibration after changing the reagents, otherwise reliable results may not
be obtained.
 Contamination caused by carryover among reagents may lead to unreliable test
results. Consult the reagent suppliers for details.
Data Archiving Precautions
NOTE
The system automatically stores the data to the built-in hard disk. Data loss, however, is
still possible due to mis-deletion or physical damage of the hard disk. You are
recommended to regularly archive the data to such medium as CDs.
To avoid the data loss caused by unexpected power failure, UPS (uninterrupted power
supply) is recommended.

Safety Information
External Equipment Precautions
WARNING
For operating instructions and precautions of the computer and printer, please refer to
their operation manuals.
External equipment connected to the analogue and digital interfaces must be authorized
and complied with relevant safety and EMC standards (e.g., IEC 60950 Safety of
Information Technology Equipment Standard and CISPR 22 EMC of Information Technology
Equipment Standard (CLASS B)). Any person, who connects additional equipment to the
signal input or output ports and configures an IVD system, is responsible for ensuring that
the system works normally and complies with the safety and EMC requirements. If you
have any questions, consult the technical services department of your local
representative.
External Vacuum Pump Precautions
WARNING
Make sure the vacuum pump tubing is connected properly without any twists or sharp
angles so that it can work normally.
Tubing and cables connected to the vacuum pump must be protected to prevent damage
and breaks due to human or other causes.
Set the vacuum pump on a solid flat platform or ground.
Tube and Liquid Container Precautions
WARNING
When the tube or the part that contain liquid become aged or damaged, please stop its
use immediately and contact our customer service department or your local distributor
to check and replace it.
Safety Information
Labels and Silkscreen

Introduction
The following non-warning and warning labels and silkscreen are used on the product for
system identification and operating instruction.
For the label marked with , please consult the related documentations in order to
find out the nature of the potential HAZARDS and any actions which have to be taken to
avoid them.
Check the labels regularly for cleanliness and integrity. If any of the labels becomes vague
or peels off, contact our Customer Service Department or your local distributor
for replacement.
The general meaning assigned to geometric shapes, safety colors and contrast colors for
safety signs are as follows:
Geometric Meaning Safety color Contrast color Graphical
shape symbol color
Prohibition Red White Black
Mandatory Blue White White
Warning Yellow Black Black
Warning Yellow Black Black
Labels and Silkscreen

Symbol Meaning
Serial Number
Date of Manufacture
Manufacturer
CE marking.
Unique device identifier
Authorized Representative in the European

Community

Safety Information
Symbol Meaning
The following definition of the WEEE label applies to
EU member states only: The use of this symbol
indicates that this product should not be treated as
household waste. By ensuring that this product is
disposed of correctly, you will help prevent bringing
potential negative consequences to the environment
and human health. For more detailed information with
regard to returning and recycling this product, please
consult the distributor from whom you purchased the
product.
In Vitro diagnostic medical device
Biological risks
Caution
Caution: hot surface
Caution: Laser radiation
“ON” (Power)
“OFF” (Power)
“ON” for a part of equipment
“OFF” for a part of equipment
Serial interface
Computer Network
Protective conductor terminal
Alternating current
Safety Information
Warning Labels
Biohazard warning
This label indicating the risk of biohazardous infection is located in the following
positions:
 Sample probe
 Waste outlet
 Waste tank
Moving parts warning

This symbol and text indicating the hazardous moving parts is located in the following
positions:
 Reagent probe and sample probe;
 Mixers
 Wash station
Laser warning
This symbol and text located near the sample bar code reader and the reagent bar code
reader reminds you of not staring into the laser beam.
Photometer lamp warning

This symbol and text located on the lamp housing reminds you of not touching the lamp
before it gets cool.
Probe collision warning

This symbol and text located near the sample carousel, reagent carousel and reaction
carousel reminds you of not opening the cover to prevent from damaging the probes.

Safety Information
Vacuum pump connection warning

This symbol and text located near the vacuum pump reminds you of connecting the inlet
and outlet tubing correctly.
Water supply/drainage/external vacuum module warning

This symbol and text located on the water supply module, drainage module and external
vacuum module reminds you of not pressing or placing heavy goods on these modules.
Upper cover
This symbol and text located on the transparent upper cover reminds you of not wipe the
upper cover with ethanol or other organic solutions.
ISE module
This symbol and text located in the side cover of the ISE module. Please turn off the main
power before opening the side door.
Non-Warning Labels and Silkscreen

Interfaces for fluid connection
This symbol located on the fluid connection interfaces indicates the connection of fluid
tubing.
The fluidic interfaces for standard configuration are shown as follows:
Safety Information
HIGH CONC. WASTE HIGH CONC. WASTE SENSOR
LOW CONC. WASTE SENSOR
LOW CONC. WASTE DEIONIZED WATER
The fluidic interfaces for optional configuration are shown as follows:

Volume I - Contents
Publication Information ........................................................................................................................................................... ii

Intellectual Property Statement ............................................................................................................................................ iii
Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party ....................................................................................................................... iv
Warranty ......................................................................................................................................................................................... v
Exemptions...................................................................................................................................................................... v
Customer service department.................................................................................................................................. v
EC - Representative ...................................................................................................................................................... v
Preface ················································································································· 1
Safety Information ··································································································· 1
Safety Symbols .............................................................................................................................................................................. 2

Summary of Hazards .................................................................................................................................................................. 3
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................................... 3
Electric Shock Hazards ................................................................................................................................................ 3
Moving Parts Hazards .................................................................................................................................................. 3
Photometer Lamp Hazards ....................................................................................................................................... 3
Laser Beam Hazards .................................................................................................................................................... 4
Sample, Calibrator and Control Hazards .............................................................................................................. 4
Reagent and Wash Solution Hazards..................................................................................................................... 4
Waste Hazards ................................................................................................................................................................ 4
System Disposal Hazards ........................................................................................................................................... 4
Fire and Explosion Hazards ...................................................................................................................................... 5
Removal of Analyzer from Use for Repair or Disposal .................................................................................. 5
Cleaning and Decontamination................................................................................................................................ 6
Software and Cybersecurity...................................................................................................................................... 6
Notification of Adverse Events ................................................................................................................................ 7
Precautions on Use ..................................................................................................................................................................... 8
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................................... 8
Intended Use.................................................................................................................................................................... 8
Environment Precautions ......................................................................................................................................... 8
Installation Precautions .............................................................................................................................................. 8
Electromagnetic Noise Precautions ....................................................................................................................... 9
Operating Precautions ............................................................................................................................................. 10
Maintenance and Servicing Precautions .......................................................................................................... 11
I
Volume I - Contents
Chemistry Parameter Configuration Precautions ........................................................................................ 11

ISE Module Precautions ........................................................................................................................................... 11
Sample Precautions ................................................................................................................................................... 12
Reagent, Calibrator and Control Precautions ................................................................................................. 12
Data Archiving Precautions ................................................................................................................................... 12
External Equipment Precautions ........................................................................................................................ 13
External Vacuum Pump Precautions ................................................................................................................. 13
Tube and Liquid Container Precautions ........................................................................................................... 13
Labels and Silkscreen.............................................................................................................................................................. 14
Introduction .................................................................................................................................................................. 14
Labels and Silkscreen ............................................................................................................................................... 14
Warning Labels ........................................................................................................................................................... 16
Non-Warning Labels and Silkscreen .................................................................................................................. 17
Volume I - Contents ··································································································· I
1 System Description ······························································································1-1
1.1 Installation Requirements and Procedure .............................................................................................................. 1-2

1.1.1 Installation Requirements........................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.2 Installation Procedure .................................................................................................................................. 1-6
1.2 Hardware Structure ......................................................................................................................................................... 1-7
1.2.1 System Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 1-7
1.2.2 Sample Handling System.......................................................................................................................... 1-10
1.2.3 Reagent Handling System ....................................................................................................................... 1-14
1.2.4 Reaction System .......................................................................................................................................... 1-17
1.2.5 Cuvette Wash Station ................................................................................................................................. 1-18
1.2.6 Photometric System................................................................................................................................... 1-19
1.2.7 Mixer Assembly ........................................................................................................................................... 1-20
1.2.8 Operation Unit.............................................................................................................................................. 1-21
1.2.9 Output Unit .................................................................................................................................................... 1-21
1.2.10 Accessories and Consumables ............................................................................................................ 1-21
1.3 Optional Modules ........................................................................................................................................................... 1-22
1.3.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................... 1-22
1.3.2 ISE Module ..................................................................................................................................................... 1-22
1.3.3 Built-in Sample Bar Code Reader ........................................................................................................... 1-22
1.3.4 Built-in Reagent Bar Code Reader......................................................................................................... 1-23
1.3.5 Water Supply Module ................................................................................................................................ 1-24
1.3.6 Drainage Module.......................................................................................................................................... 1-25
1.3.7 External Vacuum Pump............................................................................................................................ 1-26
1.3.8 Other Optional Modules............................................................................................................................ 1-27
1.4 Software Description ................................................................................................................................................... 1-28
1.4.1 Main Screen................................................................................................................................................... 1-28
1.4.2 Using a Mouse .............................................................................................................................................. 1-31
1.4.3 Using Online Help ....................................................................................................................................... 1-31
1.5 System Specifications .................................................................................................................................................. 1-35
1.5.1 Technical Parameters ............................................................................................................................... 1-35
II
Volume I - Contents
1.5.2 Main Performance Indices ...................................................................................................................... 1-38

1.5.3 Contraindication.......................................................................................................................................... 1-39
1.5.4 Power supply................................................................................................................................................ 1-40
1.5.5 Environmental Requirements ................................................................................................................ 1-40
1.5.6 Dimensions and Weight ........................................................................................................................... 1-40
1.5.7 Input Device .................................................................................................................................................. 1-40
1.5.8 Output Device ............................................................................................................................................... 1-40
1.5.9 Noise and Fuse............................................................................................................................................. 1-41
1.5.10 Communication Interfaces ................................................................................................................... 1-41
1.5.11 Safety Classification ................................................................................................................................. 1-41
1.5.12 EMC Requirements .................................................................................................................................. 1-41
2 General Operating Procedure ·················································································2-1
2.1 General Operating Procedure ...................................................................................................................................... 2-2

2.2 Check before Powering On........................................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.2.1 Checking Water Supply ............................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.2.2 Checking Power Supply .............................................................................................................................. 2-3
2.2.3 Checking Printing Paper ............................................................................................................................. 2-3
2.2.4 Checking Waste Tanks and Tubing ........................................................................................................ 2-3
2.2.5 Checking Probes and Mixers..................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.2.6 Checking Concentrated and Probe Wash Solution ........................................................................... 2-4
2.3 Powering On....................................................................................................................................................................... 2-5
2.3.1 Turning On Water Supply, Water Supply Module, Drainage Module and External Vacuum
Pump .............................................................................................................................................................................. 2-5
2.3.2 Powering On the System............................................................................................................................. 2-5
2.3.3 Starting the Operating Software ............................................................................................................... 2-6
2.4 Checking System Status ................................................................................................................................................. 2-8
2.4.1 Checking System Status ............................................................................................................................... 2-8
2.4.2 Checking Alarm Status.................................................................................................................................. 2-8
2.4.3 Checking Reagent/Calibration Status .................................................................................................... 2-9
2.4.4 Checking Maintenance Status ................................................................................................................ 2-10
2.4.5 Checking Subsystems................................................................................................................................ 2-11
2.5 Preparing Reagents ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-13
2.5.1 Loading Biochemical Reagents.............................................................................................................. 2-13
2.5.2 Loading Concentrated Wash Solution ................................................................................................ 2-16
2.5.3 Loading Reagent Probe Wash Solution .............................................................................................. 2-17
2.5.4 Loading Sample Probe Wash Solution ................................................................................................ 2-18
2.5.5 Loading Physiological Saline .................................................................................................................. 2-19
2.5.6 Loading Pretreat Reagent ........................................................................................................................ 2-20
2.6 Calibration ....................................................................................................................................................................... 2-22
2.6.1 Requesting Calibrations ........................................................................................................................... 2-22
2.6.2 Loading Calibrators ................................................................................................................................... 2-24
2.6.3 Running Calibrations................................................................................................................................. 2-25
2.7 Quality Control ............................................................................................................................................................... 2-26
2.7.1 Programming Control Samples ............................................................................................................. 2-26
III
Volume I - Contents
2.7.2 Loading Control Samples ......................................................................................................................... 2-27

2.7.3 Running Control Samples ........................................................................................................................ 2-27
2.7.4 Auto quality control ................................................................................................................................... 2-28
2.8 Programming Routine Samples............................................................................................................................... 2-29
2.8.1 Programming Routine Samples ............................................................................................................ 2-29
2.8.2 Loading Routine Samples ........................................................................................................................ 2-34
2.8.3 Running Routine Samples........................................................................................................................ 2-35
2.9 Programming STAT Samples .................................................................................................................................... 2-36
2.9.1 Programming STAT Samples .................................................................................................................. 2-36
2.9.2 Starting Analysis .......................................................................................................................................... 2-39
2.10 Test Status and Test Control ................................................................................................................................... 2-41
2.10.1 Checking Reagent Status ....................................................................................................................... 2-41
2.10.2 Viewing Sample Carousel Status ........................................................................................................ 2-42
2.10.3 Viewing Reagent Carousel Status ...................................................................................................... 2-44
2.10.4 Sample Stop ................................................................................................................................................ 2-45
2.10.5 Reagent Stop .............................................................................................................................................. 2-45
2.10.6 Emergency Stop ........................................................................................................................................ 2-45
2.10.7 Switching Carousels ................................................................................................................................ 2-45
2.11 Daily Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-47
2.12 Powering Off................................................................................................................................................................. 2-48
2.13 Check after Powering Off ........................................................................................................................................ 2-49
3 System Setup ·····································································································3-1
3.1 System Setup Options..................................................................................................................................................... 3-2

3.1.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.1.2 Sample Options and Reagent Alarm Limits ......................................................................................... 3-2
3.1.3 Auto Rerun Setup ........................................................................................................................................... 3-5
3.1.4 Instrument Setup Options .......................................................................................................................... 3-6
3.1.5 Print Setup ........................................................................................................................................................ 3-9
3.1.6 Bar Code Setup ................................................................................................................................................ 3-9
3.1.7 Host Communication Setup ....................................................................................................................... 3-9
3.1.8 User Accounts and Permissions ............................................................................................................... 3-9
3.2 Chemistries Setup ......................................................................................................................................................... 3-10
3.2.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................... 3-10
3.2.2 User-defined Chemistries Setup ............................................................................................................ 3-10
3.2.3 Processing Parameters............................................................................................................................. 3-11
3.2.4 Error Detection Limits .............................................................................................................................. 3-16
3.2.5 Flag Qualitative Result ............................................................................................................................... 3-20
3.2.6 Slope and Offset Adjustment .................................................................................................................. 3-21
3.2.7 Reference/Critical Range Setup ............................................................................................................ 3-22
3.3 Calibration Setup ........................................................................................................................................................... 3-25
3.3.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................... 3-25
3.3.2 Defining a Calibrator ................................................................................................................................. 3-25
3.3.3 Importing a Calibrator .............................................................................................................................. 3-26
3.3.4 Editing a Calibrator .................................................................................................................................... 3-27
IV
Volume I - Contents
3.3.5 Setting up Calibrator Concentrations ................................................................................................. 3-27

3.3.6 Setting up Calibration Rules.................................................................................................................... 3-28
3.3.7 Calibrator Acceptance Limits ................................................................................................................. 3-30
3.3.8 Deleting a Calibrator .................................................................................................................................. 3-31
3.4 QC Setup ............................................................................................................................................................................ 3-32
3.4.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................... 3-32
3.4.2 Defining/Editing a Control...................................................................................................................... 3-32
3.4.3 Selection of Chemistries ........................................................................................................................... 3-33
3.4.4 Setting up Control Concentrations ....................................................................................................... 3-33
3.4.5 Setting up QC Rules..................................................................................................................................... 3-34
3.4.6 Deleting a Control........................................................................................................................................ 3-35
4 Operation Theories ······························································································4-1
4.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................................................. 4-2

4.2 Principles of Measurement .......................................................................................................................................... 4-3
4.2.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................... 4-3
4.3 Endpoint Measurements ............................................................................................................................................... 4-4
4.3.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................... 4-4
4.3.2 Calculation of Reaction Absorbance ....................................................................................................... 4-4
4.3.3 Calculation of Blank Absorbance .............................................................................................................. 4-4
4.3.4 Calculation of K Factor ................................................................................................................................. 4-4
4.3.5 Calculation of Response ............................................................................................................................... 4-5
4.3.6 Sample Blanked Response .......................................................................................................................... 4-5
4.4 Fixed-time Measurements ............................................................................................................................................ 4-6
4.4.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................... 4-6
4.5 Kinetic Measurements ................................................................................................................................................... 4-8
4.5.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................... 4-8
4.5.2 Data Calculation in Kinetic Measurements ........................................................................................... 4-8
4.5.3 Determination of Linearity Range .......................................................................................................... 4-8
4.5.5 Evaluation for Linearity............................................................................................................................ 4-10
4.5.6 Enzyme Linearity Range Extension .................................................................................................... 4-11
4.6 Calibration Math Model and Factors ..................................................................................................................... 4-12
4.6.1 Linear Calibrations..................................................................................................................................... 4-12
4.6.2 Non-Linear Calibrations .......................................................................................................................... 4-13
4.7 Prozone Check................................................................................................................................................................ 4-15
4.7.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................... 4-15
4.7.2 Antigen Addition Method ......................................................................................................................... 4-15
4.7.3 Reaction Rate Method............................................................................................................................... 4-16
5 Reagents ···········································································································5-1
5.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................................................. 5-2

5.1.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................... 5-2
5.1.2 Reagent/Calibration Screen Overview ................................................................................................. 5-2
V
Volume I - Contents
5.2 Customizing Reagent Display...................................................................................................................................... 5-4

5.2.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................... 5-4
5.2.2 Customizing Reagent Display ................................................................................................................... 5-4
5.3 Sort Reagents ..................................................................................................................................................................... 5-5
5.3.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................... 5-5
5.3.2 Sort Reagents ................................................................................................................................................... 5-5
5.4 Reagent Inventory Alarm Limits Setup ................................................................................................................... 5-6
5.4.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................... 5-6
5.4.2 Setting up Reagent Inventory Alarm Limit for Biochemistry Reagent .................................... 5-6
5.5 Reagent Inventory Check.............................................................................................................................................. 5-7
5.5.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................... 5-7
5.5.2 Checking Reagent Inventory ..................................................................................................................... 5-7
5.5.3 Canceling Reagent Inventory Check ...................................................................................................... 5-8
5.5.4 Auto Refreshing Reagent Inventory....................................................................................................... 5-8
5.6 Loading Bar-Coded Reagents ....................................................................................................................................... 5-9
5.6.1 Loading Bar-Coded Reagents .................................................................................................................... 5-9
5.7 On-line Load of Reagents ........................................................................................................................................... 5-10
5.7.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................... 5-10
5.7.2 On-Line Load of Reagents........................................................................................................................ 5-10
5.8 Off-line Load of Reagents ........................................................................................................................................... 5-11
5.8.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................... 5-11
5.8.2 Off-line Load of Reagents ......................................................................................................................... 5-11
5.9 On-Line Replacement of Reagents.......................................................................................................................... 5-12
5.9.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................... 5-12
5.9.2 On-Line Replacement of Reagents ....................................................................................................... 5-12
5.10 Off-Line Replacement of Reagents....................................................................................................................... 5-14
5.10.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 5-14
5.10.2 Off-Line Replacement of Reagents .................................................................................................... 5-14
5.11 Unloading Reagents.................................................................................................................................................... 5-15
5.11.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 5-15
5.11.2 Unloading Biochemical Reagents ....................................................................................................... 5-15
6 Calibration ········································································································6-1
6.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................................................. 6-2

6.2 Calibration Status and Alarm ....................................................................................................................................... 6-3
6.3 Calibrator Dilution Setup .............................................................................................................................................. 6-4
6.3.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................... 6-4
6.3.2 Setting up Calibrator Dilution Factors................................................................................................... 6-4
6.3.3 Editing Calibrator Dilution Factors......................................................................................................... 6-5
6.3.4 Deleting Calibrator Dilution Factors....................................................................................................... 6-5
6.4 Reagent Blank .................................................................................................................................................................... 6-6
6.4.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................... 6-6
6.4.2 Mixed Blank Absorbance and Blank Response .................................................................................. 6-6
6.4.3 Requesting a Reagent Blank ...................................................................................................................... 6-7
6.4.4 Recalling Reagent Blank Results .............................................................................................................. 6-7
VI
Volume I - Contents
6.5 Auto Calibration............................................................................................................................................................. 6-11

6.5.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................... 6-11
6.5.2 Auto Calibration Setup .............................................................................................................................. 6-11
6.5.3 Auto Calibration Reminding ................................................................................................................... 6-12
6.5.4 Removing Auto Calibration .................................................................................................................... 6-12
6.6 Extending Calibration Time...................................................................................................................................... 6-13
6.6.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................... 6-13
6.6.2 Extending Calibration Time ................................................................................................................... 6-13
6.6.3 Removing an Extended Status ................................................................................................................ 6-13
6.7 Calibration Override..................................................................................................................................................... 6-14
6.7.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................... 6-14
6.7.2 Overriding a Calibration .......................................................................................................................... 6-14
6.7.3 Removing Cal Overridden Status ........................................................................................................... 6-14
6.8 Reject ................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-15
6.8.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................... 6-15
6.8.2 Rejecting a Calibration.............................................................................................................................. 6-15
6.8.3 Removing Reject Status ............................................................................................................................ 6-15
6.9 Recalling Calibration Results .................................................................................................................................... 6-16
6.9.1 Recalling Current Calibration Factors ................................................................................................ 6-16
6.9.2 Recalling History Calibration Factors ................................................................................................ 6-16
6.9.3 Calibration Curve ........................................................................................................................................ 6-17
6.9.4 Calibration Reaction Curve ..................................................................................................................... 6-18
6.9.5 Editing Calibration Factors ..................................................................................................................... 6-21
6.9.6 Archiving Calibration Results................................................................................................................. 6-21
6.9.7 Calibration Trends ...................................................................................................................................... 6-22
7 Quality Control ···································································································7-1
7.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................................................. 7-2

7.1.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.1.2 Quality Control Operating Procedure..................................................................................................... 7-2
7.1.3 QC Alarms.......................................................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.1.4 QC Result Flags ................................................................................................................................................ 7-2
7.1.5 Control Status ................................................................................................................................................... 7-3
7.2 QC Evaluation..................................................................................................................................................................... 7-4
7.2.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................... 7-4
7.2.2 Evaluation of Single Controls ..................................................................................................................... 7-4
7.2.3 Two-Control Evaluation............................................................................................................................... 7-5
7.3 Auto Quality Control........................................................................................................................................................ 7-7
7.3.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................... 7-7
7.3.2 Auto QC Setup.................................................................................................................................................. 7-7
7.3.3 Auto Quality Control ..................................................................................................................................... 7-8
7.3.4 Removing Auto QC Status ........................................................................................................................... 7-8
7.4 Recalling Control Results ............................................................................................................................................... 7-9
7.4.1 Control Sample Results................................................................................................................................. 7-9
7.4.2 Recalling L-J Chart ...................................................................................................................................... 7-11
VII
Volume I - Contents
7.4.3 Recalling Twin-Plot Chart........................................................................................................................ 7-13

7.4.4 Recalling QC Data ........................................................................................................................................ 7-14
7.4.5 Recalling QC Summary ............................................................................................................................. 7-18
8 Sample Programming and Processing ········································································8-1
8.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................................................. 8-2

8.2 Sample Programming and Processing..................................................................................................................... 8-3
8.2.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................... 8-3
8.2.2 Adding Samples ............................................................................................................................................... 8-3
8.2.3 Adding/Modifying Chemistries ................................................................................................................ 8-4
8.2.4 Rerunning Samples ....................................................................................................................................... 8-4
8.2.5 Programming Samples with Increased or Decreased Volume ................................................. 8-10
8.2.6 Programming Diluted Samples.............................................................................................................. 8-12
8.2.7 Sample Blank ................................................................................................................................................. 8-14
8.2.8 Whole Blood Test ......................................................................................................................................... 8-15
8.2.9 Sample Management ................................................................................................................................. 8-16
8.3 Serum Index..................................................................................................................................................................... 8-19
8.3.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................... 8-19
8.3.2 Theory of Serum Index ............................................................................................................................. 8-19
8.3.3 Serum Index Setup ...................................................................................................................................... 8-20
8.3.4 Auto Serum Index ....................................................................................................................................... 8-21
8.3.5 Running SI Chemistry ............................................................................................................................... 8-21
8.4 Clear Samples .................................................................................................................................................................. 8-22
8.4.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................... 8-22
8.4.2 Clearing Samples ......................................................................................................................................... 8-22
8.5 Unpositioned Samples ................................................................................................................................................. 8-23
8.5.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................... 8-23
8.5.2 Viewing Unpositioned Samples ............................................................................................................ 8-23
8.5.3 Assigning Positions .................................................................................................................................... 8-23
8.6 Release Sample Position ............................................................................................................................................. 8-25
8.6.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................... 8-25
8.6.2 Releasing Sample Positions ..................................................................................................................... 8-25
8.6.3 Auto Release of Samples ........................................................................................................................... 8-25
8.7 Sample Logs ..................................................................................................................................................................... 8-27
8.7.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................... 8-27
8.7.2 Viewing Sample Logs................................................................................................................................. 8-27
8.8 Customizing Sample Information ........................................................................................................................... 8-28
8.8.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................... 8-28
8.8.2 Customizing Sample Information......................................................................................................... 8-28
8.9 Customizing Patient Demographics ...................................................................................................................... 8-29
8.9.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................... 8-29
8.9.2 Customizing Patient Demographics.................................................................................................... 8-29
8.10 Sample and Chemistry Lists.................................................................................................................................... 8-30
8.10.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 8-30
8.10.2 Sample List .................................................................................................................................................. 8-30
VIII
Volume I - Contents
8.10.3 Chemistry List............................................................................................................................................ 8-31

8.11 Optimizing Result Display ....................................................................................................................................... 8-33
8.11.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 8-33
8.11.2 Optimizing Result Display..................................................................................................................... 8-33
8.12 Results Recall................................................................................................................................................................ 8-35
8.12.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 8-35
8.12.2 Displaying Current Results ................................................................................................................... 8-35
8.12.3 Recalling Current Results ...................................................................................................................... 8-36
8.12.4 Displaying History Results .................................................................................................................... 8-37
8.12.5 Recalling History Results ...................................................................................................................... 8-38
8.12.6 Review Sample Results ........................................................................................................................... 8-38
8.12.7 Viewing/Editing Patient Demographics......................................................................................... 8-39
8.12.8 Reaction Curve .......................................................................................................................................... 8-39
8.12.9 Transmitting Results to LIS Host........................................................................................................ 8-42
8.12.10 Printing Results ...................................................................................................................................... 8-43
8.12.11 Editing Results ........................................................................................................................................ 8-45
8.12.12 Deleting Results ...................................................................................................................................... 8-47
8.12.13 Customizing Result Display ............................................................................................................... 8-48
8.12.14 Recalculating Results ............................................................................................................................ 8-49
8.12.15 Compensating Results.......................................................................................................................... 8-50
8.12.16 Recalling Result Trend ........................................................................................................................ 8-51
8.12.17 Archiving Results ................................................................................................................................... 8-52
8.13 Test Statistics ................................................................................................................................................................ 8-54
8.14 Result Statistics ............................................................................................................................................................ 8-56
9 Result Printouts ··························································································································································9-1

9.1 Data Import and Export ................................................................................................................................................ 9-2
9.1.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................... 9-2
9.1.2 Import/Export Chemistries ...................................................................................................................... 9-2
9.1.3 Data Archive ..................................................................................................................................................... 9-5
9.1.4 Sending sample results and QC results to LIS ..................................................................................... 9-6
9.2 Print Setup .......................................................................................................................................................................... 9-7
9.2.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................... 9-7
9.2.2 General Print Setup Options ...................................................................................................................... 9-7
9.2.3 Set Up Default Template .............................................................................................................................. 9-8
9.2.4 Delete Template .............................................................................................................................................. 9-8
9.2.5 Edit Print Template ....................................................................................................................................... 9-8
9.2.6 Import Print Template ................................................................................................................................. 9-8
9.2.7 Defining Chemistry Print Order ............................................................................................................... 9-9
9.3 Sample Reports............................................................................................................................................................... 9-11
9.3.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................... 9-11
9.3.2 Single Sample Report ................................................................................................................................. 9-11
9.3.3 Multi-Sample Report .................................................................................................................................. 9-12
9.3.4 Print Report Collection ............................................................................................................................. 9-13
IX
Volume I - Contents
9.3.5 Chemistry Summary .................................................................................................................................. 9-14
10 Chemistries ····································································································10-1
10.1 Twin Chemistries........................................................................................................................................................ 10-2

10.1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 10-2
10.1.2 Chemistry Definition............................................................................................................................... 10-2
10.1.3 Removing Twin Relation ....................................................................................................................... 10-3
10.1.4 Reagent Setup ............................................................................................................................................ 10-3
10.1.5 Setting Up and Requesting Calibration............................................................................................ 10-3
10.1.6 Setting Up and Requesting Quality Control.................................................................................... 10-3
10.1.7 Sample Programming and Processing............................................................................................. 10-4
10.2 Special Calculations.................................................................................................................................................... 10-5
10.2.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 10-5
10.2.2 Defining/Editing a Calculation ............................................................................................................ 10-5
10.2.3 Enabling/Disabling Calculations ........................................................................................................ 10-6
10.2.4 Deleting User-Defined Calculations ................................................................................................... 10-7
10.2.5 Running Calculations............................................................................................................................... 10-8
10.3 Panels .............................................................................................................................................................................. 10-9
10.3.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 10-9
10.3.2 Defining/Editing a Panel....................................................................................................................... 10-9
10.3.3 Adjusting Display Order of Panels ................................................................................................... 10-10
10.3.4 Deleting Panels ....................................................................................................................................... 10-10
10.3.5 Running Panels....................................................................................................................................... 10-10
10.4 Off-system Chemistries ......................................................................................................................................... 10-11
10.4.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 10-11
10.4.2 Define/Edit Off-System Chemistries ............................................................................................. 10-11
10.4.3 Running the Off-system Chemistries ............................................................................................ 10-12
10.4.4 Deleting Off-system Chemistries ..................................................................................................... 10-12
10.5 Serum Index ............................................................................................................................................................... 10-13
10.6 Chemistry Configuration ...................................................................................................................................... 10-14
10.6.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 10-14
10.6.2 Enabling Chemistries........................................................................................................................... 10-14
10.6.3 Disabling Chemistries ......................................................................................................................... 10-15
10.6.4 Customizing Chemistry Display Order .......................................................................................... 10-15
10.6.5 Adjusting Test Order of Chemistries .............................................................................................. 10-16
10.7 Carryover Setup ....................................................................................................................................................... 10-18
10.7.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 10-18
10.7.2 Defining/Editing Carryover Pair .................................................................................................... 10-18
10.7.3 Removing a Carryover Pair ............................................................................................................... 10-19
10.8 Default Panel ............................................................................................................................................................. 10-20
10.8.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 10-20
10.8.2 Defining the Default Panel................................................................................................................. 10-20
10.8.3 Running Default Panel for Samples ............................................................................................... 10-20
10.9 Masking/Unmasking Chemistries .................................................................................................................... 10-22
10.9.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 10-22
X
Volume I - Contents
10.9.2 Masking/Unmasking Chemistries .................................................................................................. 10-22

10.10 Reflex.......................................................................................................................................................................... 10-23
10.10.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................................................... 10-23
10.10.2 Setting Reflex Relation ...................................................................................................................... 10-23
10.10.3 Editing Reflex Relation ...................................................................................................................... 10-24
10.10.4 Deleting Reflex Relation .................................................................................................................... 10-24
10.10.5 Measurement and Result Recall ................................................................................................... 10-24
11 System Commands and Setup Options ···································································11-1
11.1 Home ............................................................................................................................................................................... 11-2

11.1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 11-2
11.1.2 Homing System ......................................................................................................................................... 11-2
11.2 Stop Print ....................................................................................................................................................................... 11-3
11.2.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 11-3
11.2.2 Stop Print..................................................................................................................................................... 11-3
11.3 Sleep and Wake Up..................................................................................................................................................... 11-4
11.3.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 11-4
11.3.2 System Hibernation ................................................................................................................................ 11-4
11.3.3 Waking up the System............................................................................................................................ 11-4
11.4 User and Password Setup........................................................................................................................................ 11-5
11.4.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 11-5
11.4.2 Defining a User .......................................................................................................................................... 11-5
11.4.3 Modifying a User....................................................................................................................................... 11-6
11.4.4 Assigning/Modifying Permissions.................................................................................................... 11-6
11.4.5 Deleting a User........................................................................................................................................... 11-7
11.5 Sleep and Awake Setup............................................................................................................................................. 11-8
11.5.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 11-8
11.5.2 Auto Sleep Setup ....................................................................................................................................... 11-8
11.5.3 Auto Startup Setup ................................................................................................................................... 11-9
11.5.4 Auto Awake Setup .................................................................................................................................... 11-9
11.6 Dictionary Setup ...................................................................................................................................................... 11-11
11.6.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 11-11
11.6.2 Defining, Editing and Deleting Data Option ................................................................................ 11-11
11.7 Software Upgrade .................................................................................................................................................... 11-13
11.7.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 11-13
11.7.2 Software Upgrade .................................................................................................................................. 11-13
11.8 Software Version...................................................................................................................................................... 11-14
11.8.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 11-14
11.8.2 Software Version ................................................................................................................................... 11-14
11.9 Voice Tone Setup...................................................................................................................................................... 11-16
11.9.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 11-16
11.9.2 Importing Audio Files .......................................................................................................................... 11-16
11.9.3 Setting Up Voice Tone .......................................................................................................................... 11-16
12 Use of ISE Module ····························································································12-1
XI
Volume I - Contents
12.1 Precautions on Use .................................................................................................................................................... 12-2

12.1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 12-2
12.1.2 Precautions on Use .................................................................................................................................. 12-2
12.2 Principles of Measurement..................................................................................................................................... 12-4
12.3 ISE Chemistry Parameters ...................................................................................................................................... 12-5
12.3.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 12-5
12.3.2 Viewing ISE Chemistry Parameters ................................................................................................. 12-5
12.3.3 Introduction to ISE Chemistry Parameters .................................................................................... 12-5
12.3.4 Flag ISE Qualitative Result .................................................................................................................... 12-6
12.4 Preparing ISE Reagents for Measurement ....................................................................................................... 12-8
12.4.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 12-8
12.4.2 Off-line Load ISE Reagent ..................................................................................................................... 12-8
12.4.3 On-line Load ISE Reagent .................................................................................................................. 12-10
12.4.4 Load ISE Wash Solution ...................................................................................................................... 12-10
12.4.5 Replacing ISE Wash Solution ............................................................................................................ 12-11
12.5 Calibration and Results Recall ............................................................................................................................ 12-12
12.5.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 12-12
12.5.2 Calibration Setup ................................................................................................................................... 12-12
12.5.3 Calibration Status and Alarm ............................................................................................................ 12-13
12.5.4 ISE Calibration........................................................................................................................................ 12-13
12.5.5 Results Recall .......................................................................................................................................... 12-14
12.5.6 Extending ISE Calibration Time ...................................................................................................... 12-17
12.6 Quality Control and Results Recall .................................................................................................................... 12-18
12.6.1 Quality Control and Results Recall.................................................................................................. 12-18
12.7 Sample Programming and Results Recall ...................................................................................................... 12-19
12.8 Reagent Inventory Alarm Limit ......................................................................................................................... 12-20
12.8.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 12-20
12.8.2 Setting up Reagent Inventory Alarm Limit ................................................................................. 12-20
12.9 ISE Prime Cycle ......................................................................................................................................................... 12-21
12.9.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 12-21
12.9.2 Defining/Modifying ISE Prime Times .......................................................................................... 12-21
12.10 Daily Maintenance ............................................................................................................................................... 12-22
12.10.1 Daily Maintenance ............................................................................................................................. 12-22
12.11 Troubleshooting ISE Module ............................................................................................................................. 12-23
12.11.1 Troubleshooting ISE Module .......................................................................................................... 12-23
13 Use of Bar Code ······························································································13-1
13.1 Sample Bar Code Reader .......................................................................................................................................... 13-2

13.1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 13-2
13.1.2 Sample Bar Code Setup ........................................................................................................................... 13-3
13.1.3 Programming Bar-Coded Samples .................................................................................................... 13-4
13.2 Reagent Bar Code Reader ........................................................................................................................................ 13-7
13.2.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 13-7
13.2.2 Reagent Bar Code Setup......................................................................................................................... 13-8
13.2.3 Loading Bar-Coded Reagents ............................................................................................................... 13-9
XII
Volume I - Contents
13.3 Bar Code Reader Maintenance ........................................................................................................................... 13-11

13.3.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 13-11
13.3.2 Cleaning Sample and Reagent Bar Code Scanning Windows ............................................... 13-11
13.4 Troubleshooting Bar Code Reader .................................................................................................................... 13-12
14 LIS and RMS ····································································································14-1
14.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................................................ 14-2

14.2 Host Communication ................................................................................................................................................ 14-3
14.2.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 14-3
14.2.2 Connection between PC and LIS Host.............................................................................................. 14-3
14.2.3 Host Communication Parameters ..................................................................................................... 14-3
14.2.4 Defining Channel Number of Chemistries ..................................................................................... 14-6
14.3 Programming Samples with LIS Host ................................................................................................................ 14-7
14.3.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 14-7
14.3.2 Programming Functions ....................................................................................................................... 14-7
14.4 Result Transmission............................................................................................................................................... 14-10
14.4.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 14-10
14.4.2 Result Transmission Setup ................................................................................................................ 14-10
14.4.3 Manually Sending Results to LIS Host .......................................................................................... 14-10
14.5 Troubleshooting LIS ............................................................................................................................................... 14-11
14.6 Use of RMS.................................................................................................................................................................. 14-12
14.6.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 14-12
14.6.2 Connection between PC and RMS .................................................................................................. 14-12
14.6.3 Troubleshooting RMS .......................................................................................................................... 14-13
15 Diagnostics·····································································································15-1
15.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................................................ 15-2

15.2 Diagnosis of Sample System................................................................................................................................... 15-3
15.2.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 15-3
15.2.2 Sample Probe Clog Detection ............................................................................................................... 15-3
15.2.3 Sample Probe Level Sense Test........................................................................................................... 15-4
15.3 Diagnosis of Reagent System ................................................................................................................................ 15-7
15.3.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 15-7
15.3.2 Probe R1 Level Sense Test ................................................................................................................... 15-7
15.4 Sensor Diagnosis ..................................................................................................................................................... 15-12
15.4.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 15-12
15.4.2 Sensor Diagnosis ................................................................................................................................... 15-12
16 Maintenance···································································································16-1
16.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................................................ 16-2

16.1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 16-2
16.1.2 Spare Parts and Consumables ............................................................................................................. 16-2
16.1.3 Tools to be Prepared by User............................................................................................................... 16-5
16.2 Biochemistry Maintenance .................................................................................................................................... 16-6
XIII
Volume I - Contents
16.2.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 16-6

16.2.2 Biochemistry Maintenance Screen Overview .............................................................................. 16-6
16.3 ISE Maintenance ......................................................................................................................................................... 16-8
16.3.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 16-8
16.3.2 ISE Maintenance Screen Overview ................................................................................................... 16-8
16.4 Scheduled Maintenance Log ................................................................................................................................ 16-10
16.4.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 16-10
16.4.2 Maintenance Schedule ......................................................................................................................... 16-10
16.4.3 Scheduled Maintenance Procedures .............................................................................................. 16-10
16.4.4 Maintenance Log Sheet ...................................................................................................................... 16-12
16.4.5 Scheduled Maintenance Screen Overview .................................................................................. 16-15
16.5 Daily Maintenance .................................................................................................................................................. 16-18
16.5.1 Check Probes/Mixers/Wash Wells ................................................................................................ 16-18
16.5.2 Check Sample/Reagent Syringes .................................................................................................... 16-19
16.5.3 Check Deionized Water Connection.............................................................................................. 16-20
16.5.4 Check Waste ............................................................................................................................................ 16-21
16.5.5 Check Concentrated Wash Solution ............................................................................................... 16-22
16.5.6 Check Sample Probe Wash Solution .............................................................................................. 16-23
16.5.7 Clean Electrode Tubes (For ISE Module) ....................................................................................... 16-23
16.6 Weekly Maintenance.............................................................................................................................................. 16-25
16.6.1 Clean Sample/Reagent Probe Exterior ......................................................................................... 16-25
16.6.2 Clean Mixers ............................................................................................................................................ 16-26
16.6.3 Special Wash ........................................................................................................................................... 16-26
16.6.4 Cuvette Check ......................................................................................................................................... 16-27
16.6.5 Photometer Check ................................................................................................................................ 16-29
16.7 Monthly Maintenance............................................................................................................................................ 16-31
16.7.1 Clean Wash Wells ................................................................................................................................... 16-31
16.7.2 Clean Wash Station and Tubes ......................................................................................................... 16-31
16.7.3 Clean Filter Core .................................................................................................................................... 16-32
16.7.4 Clean Dust Screens of the Analyzer ............................................................................................... 16-34
16.7.5 Clean Sample Injection Port (For ISE Module) ........................................................................... 16-35
16.7.6 Pump Calibration (For ISE Module) ............................................................................................... 16-36
16.7.7 Air Bubble Detector Calibration (For ISE Module)................................................................... 16-37
16.7.8 Clean the Dust Screen of the External Vacuum Pump ........................................................... 16-37
16.8 Three-Month Maintenance ................................................................................................................................. 16-40
16.8.1 Clean DI Water Tank............................................................................................................................. 16-40
16.8.2 Replace Filter Core................................................................................................................................ 16-42
16.9 Six-Month Maintenance ........................................................................................................................................ 16-43
16.9.1 Replace Lamp .......................................................................................................................................... 16-43
16.9.2 Replace Water Inlet Filter .................................................................................................................. 16-44
16.9.3 Replace Reference Electrode(For ISE Module) ........................................................................... 16-45
16.10 As-Needed/As-Required Maintenance ........................................................................................................ 16-47
16.10.1 Clean Analyzer Panels ....................................................................................................................... 16-47
16.10.2 Clean Sample Compartment ........................................................................................................... 16-47
16.10.3 Clean Reagent Compartment ......................................................................................................... 16-48
XIV
Volume I - Contents
16.10.4 Clean Sample Probe Interior .......................................................................................................... 16-49

16.10.5 Clean Reagent Probe Interior ........................................................................................................ 16-51
16.10.6 Replace Sample Probe ....................................................................................................................... 16-52
16.10.7 Replace Reagent Probes................................................................................................................... 16-54
16.10.8 Replace Sample Mixer ....................................................................................................................... 16-55
16.10.9 Replace Reagent Mixer ..................................................................................................................... 16-57
16.10.10 Remove Air Bubbles in Sample Syringe .................................................................................. 16-57
16.10.11 Remove Air Bubbles in Reagent Syringe ................................................................................ 16-59
16.10.12 Replace Cuvette................................................................................................................................. 16-59
16.10.13 Special Wash Probes ...................................................................................................................... 16-61
16.10.14 Bar Code Maintenance ................................................................................................................... 16-62
16.10.15 Clean Probes/Mixers Exterior .................................................................................................... 16-62
16.10.16 Replace ISE Electrode ...................................................................................................................... 16-63
16.10.17 Remove Reagent Pack (For ISE Module) ................................................................................ 16-64
16.10.18 Store Electrodes (For ISE Module) ............................................................................................. 16-65
16.10.19 Two-Point Calibration (For ISE Module) ................................................................................ 16-66
16.10.20 Maintenance (For ISE Module) ................................................................................................... 16-66
16.10.21 Purge A (For ISE Module) ............................................................................................................. 16-67
16.10.22 Purge B (For ISE Module) ............................................................................................................. 16-67
16.10.23 Replace Pump Tube and Calibrator Tube .............................................................................. 16-67
16.10.24 Program Check Instruction (For ISE Module) ...................................................................... 16-68
16.10.25 Read Dallas Chip (For ISE Module) ........................................................................................... 16-68
16.10.26 Write Dallas Chip (For ISE Module) .......................................................................................... 16-68
16.10.27 Replace Sample Syringe ................................................................................................................. 16-68
16.10.28 Replace Reagent Syringes............................................................................................................. 16-69
16.10.29 Clean Rotors ....................................................................................................................................... 16-70
16.10.30 Clean ISE Waste Tube ..................................................................................................................... 16-71
17 Alarms and Troubleshooting ···············································································17-1
17.1 Classification of Logs ................................................................................................................................................. 17-2

17.1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 17-2
17.1.2 Error Logs ................................................................................................................................................... 17-2
17.1.3 Edit Logs ...................................................................................................................................................... 17-5
17.2 Viewing and Handling Logs ................................................................................................................................... 17-6
17.2.1 Description of Error Log Screen ........................................................................................................ 17-6
17.2.2 Description of Edit Log Screen ........................................................................................................... 17-6
17.2.3 Recalling Logs ............................................................................................................................................ 17-7
17.2.4 Refreshing Logs ........................................................................................................................................ 17-8
17.2.5 Clearing Logs .............................................................................................................................................. 17-8
17.2.6 Printing Logs .............................................................................................................................................. 17-8
17.3 Error Troubleshooting.............................................................................................................................................. 17-9
17.3.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 17-9
17.3.2 Error Indications ...................................................................................................................................... 17-9
17.3.3 Identifying Errors .................................................................................................................................. 17-10
17.4 Data Alarm .................................................................................................................................................................. 17-11
XV
Volume I - Contents
17.4.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 17-11

17.4.2 Result Flags .............................................................................................................................................. 17-13
17.5 Error Messages and Corrective Actions ......................................................................................................... 17-28
18 Template Modifying Software ··············································································18-1
18.1 Main Screen .................................................................................................................................................................. 18-2

18.1.1 Main Screen ................................................................................................................................................ 18-2
18.1.2 File (F) ........................................................................................................................................................... 18-2
18.1.3 Edit (E) ......................................................................................................................................................... 18-4
18.1.4 View (V) ....................................................................................................................................................... 18-5
18.1.5 Insert (I)....................................................................................................................................................... 18-6
18.1.6 Format (M) ................................................................................................................................................. 18-7
18.1.7 Set(S) ............................................................................................................................................................. 18-8
18.1.8 Language (L) .............................................................................................................................................. 18-8
18.1.9 Help (H) ........................................................................................................................................................ 18-9
18.2 Common Tools .......................................................................................................................................................... 18-10
18.3 Draw Tools .................................................................................................................................................................. 18-11
18.4 Property Window .................................................................................................................................................... 18-13
18.4.1 Page ............................................................................................................................................................ 18-13
18.4.2 Line ............................................................................................................................................................. 18-13
18.4.3 Rectangle ................................................................................................................................................... 18-14
18.4.4 Label ........................................................................................................................................................... 18-15
18.4.5 Text.............................................................................................................................................................. 18-17
18.4.6 Title ............................................................................................................................................................. 18-18
18.4.7 Image.......................................................................................................................................................... 18-19
18.5 Report Window ........................................................................................................................................................ 18-20
Electronic Interface ································································································· 1
Vocabulary ············································································································· 1
Index ···················································································································· 1
Bibliography ··········································································································· 1
XVI
1 System Description
This chapter describes the system from the installation, hardware, software and
specifications perspectives, including:
 Installation requirements and methods of the instrument
 Hardware components
 Optional modules that can be configured with the instrument
 Introduction and operation of software screens
 Technical specifications
1-1
1.1 Installation Requirements and Procedure

1.1.1 Installation Requirements
CAUTION
Install the instrument in a place meeting the requirements presented in this section;
otherwise, it will not perform as intended.
Installation environment
 The system is for indoor use only.
 The bearing platform (or ground) should be level (with gradient less than 1/200).
 The bearing platform (or ground) should be able to support at least 300Kg weight.
 The installation site should be well ventilated.
 The installation site should be free of dust.
 The installation side should not be in direct sun.
 The installation site should be kept away from a heat or draft source.
 The installation site should be free of corrosive gas and flammable gas.
 The bearing platform (of ground) should be free of vibration.
 The installation site should be kept away from large noise and power supply
interference.
 Keep the system away from brush-type motors and electrical contact device that is
frequently switched on and off.
 Do not use such devices as mobile phones and radio transmitter near the system.
 The system should be installed in a place with altitude height between -400 to 4000
meters. In places with an altitude height between 2000m to 4000m, an external
vacuum pump should be employed.
Power supply
 Connect the system to a power supply meeting the requirements specified in this
manual. For more information, refer to 1.5 System Specifications(page1-35).
 The system is provided with a three-wire power cord, which has good grounding
performance.
 The system should be connected to a properly-grounded power socket.
 Grounding voltage must be configured.
WARNING
Make sure the power socket is grounded correctly. Improper grounding may lead to
electric shock or equipment damage. Check if the power sockets outputs voltage
meeting the specified requirements and has a proper fuse installed.
Temperature and humidity

 Ambient temperature: 15°C-30°C
 Relative humidity: 35%-85%, without condensation.
1-2
CAUTION
Operating the system in an environment other than the specified may lead to
unreliable test results. If the temperature or relative humidity does not meet the
above-mentioned requirements, use air-conditioning equipment.
Water supply and drainage

 The supplied water must meet the requirements of CLSI type II.: Resistance is more
than 1MΩ.CM.; Silicate is lower than 0.1 mg/L,
CAUTION
The supplied water must meet the requirements of CLSI type II; otherwise
insufficiently purified water may result in misleading test results.
 Flow: no less than 42L/H for average flow, and no more than 2L/M for transient peak
flow.
 If you use water supply equipment, make sure that the water supply pressure is
within 100kPa-392kPa and the length of the inlet tubing is no longer than 10m.
 Make sure that the outlet is no less than 50mm wide and no greater than 100mm
high, and the length of the waste tubing does not exceed 5 meters.
BIOHAZARD
Dispose of the waste liquid according to the local regulations.
After installing the instrument, connect it with the fluidic components as instructed in the
figure below.
BIOHAZARD
Wear gloves and lab coat, if necessary, goggles.
CAUTION
When connecting the tubes, exercise caution to avoid folding or pressing them.
1-3
Figure 1.1 Fluidic connection diagram
High Conc.
waste
Sensor
High conc.waste High Conc. WasteTank
Vacuum pump
control
(optional)
Vacuum Pump（ optional（
Vacuum
pump control
(optional)
Low Conc. Drainage

waste module(optional)
sensor
Analyzer
IN1 IN2 OUT
FIL01 Outlet
Low Conc. Waste
Water Supply
Module(optional)
OUT1 OUT2 IN
Water tank
V01
DI water
Water unit
FIL01
Space and accessibility requirements

Install the instrument according to the clearance requirements as shown in the figure
below.
Figure 1.2 System clearances
Wall
Min. 500
Maximum of 3000
Min. 500
Operation Unit
720
Analyzing Unit
Front
1190
Min. 500
Min. 500 Unit: mm
1-4
Recommended computer configuration

Table 1.1 Recommended computer configuration
Item Description
CPU At least 2.8 GHz
Random access memory At least 4 GB
(RAM)
Network adapter The computer is connected to the chemistry analyzer
through a network adapter. If you are going to connect the
computer with the LIS or Internet, you should prepare
another network adapter (Intel gigabit network adapter)
Serial port The computer should provide an RS232 serial port, which
is used to connect it with the chemistry analyzer.
Parallel port or USB Used for connecting the operation unit with a printer or
interface an external stroage device.
Network interface Used for communication between the analyzing unit and
the operation unit, or between the LIS and the operation
unit.
Hard disk defragment At least 500 GB for hard disk. Install the operating system
in the C drive and the operating software of the
instrument in the D drive. Make sure that the C drive is
over 30 GB and the D drive over 100 GB, and the disk file
system is of NTFS format. Deselect the two options at the
bottom of the disk properties window: “Compress drive to
save disk space” and “Allow Indexing Service to index this
disk for fast file searching”.
Operating system The operating system installed on the computer must be
an activated or free version Microsoft Windows 10 (64
bit).
Application software Except for the operating system, other application
software must not be installed or reserved on the
computer. If an anti-virus application has been installed,
then remove the automatic scheduled scanning and add
the operating software and BSLOG to the trust list.
Screen saver and system Turn off the screen saver and BS Special Power Policy
standby power scheme, and then disable the hibernation option.
Screen display Set the screen resolution as 1280*1024 pixels and color
properties quality as Highest (32 bit).
Automatic Disable the Automatically synchronize with an Internet
synchronization with time server option.
Internet time server
Automatic updates Turn off the automatic updates.
Auto awake and If you are going to use the auto awake/shutdown
shutdown setup function, perform necessary settings for BIOS and network
adapters while referring to their operation manuals.
Sound card and speaker The system must be configured with sound card and
speaker.
1-5
Recommended printer configuration

You are suggested to choose one of the following printers for use with the computer:
 Ink jet printer
 Laser printer
 Stylus printer
1.1.2 Installation Procedure
WARNING
The system should be installed only by technicians of or authorized by our company.
The system should be installed by technicians of or authorized by our company. Before

the technicians arrive, prepare a proper site to install the system.
Before installation
When you receive the package, check it carefully. If you find any signs of mishandling or
damage, file a claim immediately with our Customer Service Department or your local
distributor.
After opening the package, check the delivered goods against the packing list, and then
visually check the system appearance. If you find anything missing or damaged, alert our
Customer Service Department or your local distributor immediately.
System relocation
If you want to relocate your system, contact our Customer Service Department or your
local distributor.
1-6
1.2 Hardware Structure

1.2.1 System Overview
The chemistry analyzer consists of the analyzing unit (analyzer), operation unit
(computer), output unit (printer), accessories and consumables.
The analyzing unit, the analyzer, determines various clinical chemistries in samples and
displays the test results. It is composed of the following components:
 Sample handling system
 Reagent handling system
 Reaction system
 Cuvette wash station
 Photometric system
 Mixer assembly
The operation unit, a computer configured with the operating software, controls the
analyzing unit to finish tests and produce test results.
The output unit is a printer used to print out test results and other data.
Accessories and consumables are components that are required for sample processing
and should be replenished regularly.
Figure 1.3 BS-600 Chemistry Analyzer
(1) (2) (3)
1. Analyzing unit 2. Operation unit

3. Output unit
1-7
Figure 1.4 Analyzing unit
(10) (9) (8)
(1)
(2)
(7)
(3) (6)
(4) (5)
1. Probe R1 2. Probe R2
3. Reagent carousel 4. Left front door
5. Right front door 6. Sample Carousel
7. Sample probe 8. Cuvette wash station
9. Reaction carousel 10. Protective shield
Figure 1.5 Top view
(10)
(1)
(2) (9)
(8)
(3) (7)
(6)
(4)
(5)
1. Sample mixer 2. Probe R2

3. Probe R1 4. Reagent carousel
5. Sample carousel 6. Sample loading indicator
7. Reagent mixer 8. Sample probe
9. Cuvette wash station 10. Reaction carousel
1-8
Figure 1.6 Front view
(1)
(2) (9)
(8)
(3) (7)
(4) (5) (6)
1. Reagent syringes 2. Pressure gauge

3. Dust screen 4. Diluted wash solution
5. Concentrated wash solution 6. Deionized water tank
7. Dust screen 8. Sample syringe
9. ISE reagent pack
Figure 1.7 Side view
(1)
(2)
1. Analyzer power switch 2. Main power switch
1-9
Figure 1.8 Rear view
(1) (1)
(5)
(2)
(1)
(1)
(4)
(3) (1)
1. Radiating fans 2. Handle

3. Fluidic interfaces 4. Power jack
5. Network interface and serial port
1.2.2 Sample Handling System

The sample handling system is used to hold samples and provides them for analysis. It
consists of the following assemblies:
 Sample carousel assembly
 Sample bar code reader
 Sample dispenser assembly
 Sample containers
Sample carousel assembly

The sample carousel is a turntable located on right side of the analyzer panel. It holds
sample tubes and carries each of them to the sample aspirate position for aspirating.
1-10
Figure 1.9 Sample carousel
(1)
(5)
(2)
(3)
(4)
1. Sample probe 2. Sample carousel outer ring

3. Sample carousel middle ring 4. Sample carousel inner ring
5. Sample loading indicator
The sample loading indicator tells you when you should load samples and when you must
not. Do not operate on the movement path of sample probe, or collision might happen.
The sample loading indicator has the following states:
 Flash: indicates that the corresponding carousel is rotating or is going to rotate.
 ON: indicates that the corresponding carousel is stopped for sample aspirating or
that the sample probe is aspirating on the reaction carousel during test for the
diluted samples
 OFF: indicates that the corresponding carousel has no sample being aspirated and
will not rotate in the next period.
The sample carousel includes three circles: inner, middle and outer, each of which provides
30 tube positions. 90 positions in total are available on the sample carousel and assigned
as follows:
 Routine samples: 1-60
 Calibrators:S1-S10
 Controls:C1-C7
 STAT samples:E1-E10
Others:
 D1 (No.88) for ISE cleaning solution
 D2 (No.89) for wash solution
 W (No.90): for physiological saline
To remove the sample carousel,
 Loosen the two retaining screws on the sample carousel.
 Grab the handle and pull the sample carousel upward to remove it from the rotor.
To install the sample carousel,
 Align the positioning pins on the sample carousel to the counterparts on base.
 Set the sample carousel and tighten the two retaining screws on the carousel.
1-11
Sample bar code reader

The sample bar code reader is an optional module and used to obtain sample information
through reading a sample bar code. For more information, refer to 1.3.3 Built-in Sample
Bar Code Reader (page 1-22).
Sample dispenser assembly

The sample dispenser assembly located above the sample carousel is composed of the
sample probe, probe arm, probe rotor, syringe, wash well, and related tubing. It aspirates
the specified amount of sample from a sample tube and then dispenses it into a cuvette
for reaction and analysis.
Figure 1.10 Sample dispenser assembly
(5)
(4)
(1)
(2)
(3)
1. Sample probe 2. Sample probe wash well

3. Sample carousel 4. Sample probe rotor
5. Sample probe arm
Sample probe
The system has one sample probe, which aspirates the specified amount of sample for
different type of chemistries:
 Biochemical chemistries: 1.5μl-45μL, with increment of 0.1μL.
 ISE chemistries: plasma/serum: 70μL; diluted urine: 140μL.
The sample probe is capable not only of aspirating sample but also of the following
functions:
 Clog detection: checks the sample probe for blockage. When detecting blockage, the
system produces a warning and prompts you with the next step.
 Horizontal obstruct detection: detects obstacles in the horizontal direction. When the
sample probe collides with an obstacle in the horizontal direction, the auto guard
system is started to prevent the sample probe from being damaged.
 Vertical obstruct detection: detects obstacles in the vertical direction. When the
sample probe collides with an obstacle in the vertical direction, the auto guard
system is started to prevent the sample probe from being damaged.
 Level detection and tracking: detects the sample level and determines the depth of
lowering down into the sample based on the specified aspirate volume.
1-12
WARNING
When the system is in operation, do not place any part of your body or any obstacle in
the route where the sample probe arm moves; otherwise, personal injury or equipment
damage may be caused.
Sample probe washing

The sample probe is cleaned in its wash well with water spraying its interior and exterior
from two opposite directions.
Sample syringe
When the front left door of the analyzer is opened, you will see the sample syringe as
shown below.
Figure 1.11 Sample syringe
(1)
1. Sample syringe
)
Sample containers
Sample containers are used to hold samples. The sample carousel supports different types
of sample containers.
 Microtube: Φ14×25mm, 0.5ml (Beckman); Φ14×25mm, 2ml (Beckman);
Φ12×37mm, 2ml (Hitachi).
 Primary tube or plastic tube: Φ12×68.5mm, Φ12×99mm, Φ12.7×75mm,
Φ12.7×100mm, Φ13×75mm, Φ13×95mm, Φ13×100mm,
Sample tubes varying in specification requires different minimum sample volumes. Each
sample tube must contain the minimum amount of sample; otherwise, correct aspirating
cannot be ensured. The minimum sample volume is the sum of the minimum sample
volume for analysis and the dead volume of the sample container.
The table below shows the dead volume of each type of sample container.
Table 1.2 Specification and dead volume of sample containers
Sample Container Specification Dead Volume
Sample tube Φ14×25mm, 0.5ml 70μl
Φ14×25mm, 2ml 150μl
1-13
Sample Container Specification Dead Volume

Φ12×37mm, 2ml 100μl
Primary tube or Φ12×68.5 mm 8mm more over the unacceptable
plastic tube Φ12×99 mm sample level height
Φ12.7×75 mm
Φ12.7×100 mm
Φ13×75 mm
Φ13×95 mm
Φ13×100 mm
1.2.3 Reagent Handling System

The reagent handling system is used to hold reagents and provides them for reacting with
samples. It consists of the following assemblies:
 Reagent carousel assembly
 Reagent bar code reader
 Reagent dispenser assembly
 Reagent bottle
Reagent carousel assembly

The reagent carousel assembly consists of a reagent carousel (including a cover) and a
refrigeration unit.
The reagent carousel holds reagent bottles and carries the defined reagent bottle to the
aspirate position for aspirating reagent.
The refrigeration unit keeps reagents in a low-temperature environment to keep them
stable and minimize volatilization.
The reagent carousel provides a refrigerating environment which is constant within
2°C-10°C for 24 hours a day. The reagents stored in such environment can be kept stable
with little volatilization.
Reagent positions: There are 80 bottle positions on the reagent carousel. D is for wash
solution and W is for physiological saline.
NOTE
The refrigeration unit has a power supply independent of that of the analyzing unit. The
refrigeration unit is operational once the MAIN POWER is turned to the ON position.
1-14
Figure 1.12 Reagent carousel
(3)
(2)
(1)
1. Reagent carousel 2. Probe R1

3. Probe R2
CAUTION
Every day before analysis, remove the plugs on the reagent carousel in order to prevent
mechanical reset failure and bending the reagent probes. Restore the plugs after
finishing tests of the day.
Ensure that the reagent carousel is closed while the system is analyzing. Opening the
reagent carousel cover during analyzing will abort the analysis and invalidate the tests
that are running.
NOTE
The refrigeration system has its power supply independent of that of the analyzing unit,
and it will be put into service once the MAIN POWER is turned on.
One virtual reagent carousel (80 positions) is allowed. You’ll be reminded to change the
reagent carousel on which all reagent aspiration is finished.
To remove the reagent carousel,
 Loosen the two retaining screws on the reagent carousel.
 Grab the handle and pull the reagent carousel upward to remove it from the rotor.
To install the reagent carousel,
 Align the positioning pins on the reagent carousel to the counterparts on base.
 Set the reagent carousel and tighten the two retaining screws on the carousel.
Reagent bar code reader

The reagent bar code reader is an optional module and used to obtain reagent information
through reading a reagent bar code. For more information, refer to 1.3.4 Built-in Reagent
Bar Code Reader (page 1-23).
1-15
Reagent dispenser assembly

The sample dispenser assembly located on the upper right of the reagent carousel
consists of the reagent probe, probe arm, probe rotor, syringes and related tubing. It
aspirates the specified amount of reagent from a reagent bottle and then dispenses it into
a cuvette for reaction and analysis.
Figure 1.13 Reagent dispenser assembly
(1) (9)
(2) (8)
(3) (7)
(4) (5) (6)
1. Arm of probe R2 2. Rotor of probe R2

3. Probe R2 4. Reagent carousel
5. Wash well of probe R2 6. Wash well of probe R1
7. Probe R1 8. Rotor of probe R1
9. Arm of probe R1
Reagent probe
The system has two reagent probes: probe R1 and probe R2. The former is used to
aspirate/dispense R1 and R3 reagents; and the latter is used to aspirate/dispense R2 and
R4 reagents. The two probes aspirate reagent within the following range:
 R1: 100μl~200μl, with increment of 0.5μl.
 R3: 10μl~200μl, with increment of 0.5μl.
 R2, R4: 10μl~200μl, with increment of 0.5μl.
The reagent probe is capable not only of aspirating reagent but also of the following
functions:
 Horizontal obstruct detection: detects obstacles in the horizontal direction. When the
reagent probe collides with an obstacle in the horizontal direction, the auto guard
system is started to prevent the reagent probe from being damaged.
 Vertical obstruct detection: detects obstacles in the vertical direction. When the
reagent probe collides with an obstacle in the vertical direction, the auto guard
system is started to prevent the reagent probe from being damaged.
 Level detection and tracking: detects the reagent level and determines the depth of
lowering down into the reagent based on the specified aspirate volume.
 Empty aspiration alarm: When the reagent probe cannot aspirate or aspirate
insufficient reagent due to reagent insufficiency or air bubble, the system will give
an alarm.
1-16
WARNING
When the system is in operation, do not place any part of your body or any obstacle in
the route where the reagent probe arm moves; otherwise, personal injury or equipment
damage may be caused.
Reagent probe washing

The reagent probe is cleaned in its wash well with water spraying its interior and exterior
from two opposite directions.
Reagent syringe
When the left door of the analyzer is opened, you will see the reagent syringes as shown
below.
Figure 1.14 Reagent syringe
(1)
1. Reagent syringe
Reagent bottle
The reagent carousel is compatible with the following reagent bottles: Mindray outer ring
reagent bottle 40ml and 20ml; Mindray inner ring reagent bottle 20ml, 40 ml and 62 ml.
Only inner ring 20ml, 40 ml and 62 ml reagent bottles can be placed on the inner ring,
and only outer ring 40ml and 20ml reagent bottle can be placed on the outer ring. When
you place 20ml reagent bottles of BS-800 series on the outer ring, use reagent bottles
adapters.
1.2.4 Reaction System

The reaction carousel assembly consists of a reaction carousel, cuvettes and heater.
The reaction carousel holds the cuvettes, in which the sample reacts with the reagent(s)
and colorimetric readings are taken.
The semi-permanent plastic cuvettes are designed for reaction of sample and reagents,
and also colorimetric measurement.
The heater provides a constant-temperature environment for reaction. Cuvettes on the
reaction carousel are carried to the reagent dispensing position, sample dispensing
position, mixing position and then washing position successively.
1-17
Reaction carousel
The reaction carousel rotates counter-clockwise, carrying the specified cuvette to reagent
dispensing position, sample dispensing position, mixing position and then washing
position successively.
The reaction carousel is circular and can hold 124 semi-permanent plastic cuvettes.
Reaction volume: 100μl-300μl.
The reaction carousel is capable of temperature control and provides a constant
environment at 37±0.3°C with fluctuation of ±0.1°C.
Figure 1.15 Reaction carousel
(4)
(3)
(1) (2)
1. Probe R1 2. Reaction carousel

3. Sample probe 4. Cuvette wash station
Reaction cuvette
The plastic cuvette is provided by the factory The light pathlength of the cuvette is 5mm±
0.03mm, and its inside dimension is 5mm (length)*4mm (depth)*29mm (height).
When finishing a test, the system washes and dries the cuvette automatically for later
use.
1.2.5 Cuvette Wash Station

The system provides an eight-phase auto wash function, through which the cuvettes are
washed via eight wash probes when a test is finished. The cuvette wash station consists of
the wash probes, elevating motor and related tubing. The wash probes driven by the
elevating motor to go up and down during each wash phase dispenses and aspirates wash
solution in the cuvette to finish washing.
1-18
Figure 1.16 Cuvette wash station
(3)
(1) (2)
1. Phase 1~6 wash probes 2. Phase 7~8 wipe blocks

3. Wash tubes
The cuvette wash station cleans the cuvettes with wash solution and Deionized water in
eight phases, which are divided as follows:
 Phase 1 and 2: the cuvette is washed with diluted wash solution
 Phase 3 to 6: the cuvette is rinsed with deionized water
 Phase 7 and 8: the cuvette is dried and wiped
The cuvette is washed and rinsed with preheated diluted wash solution and deionized
water in phase 1 to 6. After the washing, the waste fluid is discharged in two flows:
high-concentration waste and low-concentration waste. The system is capable of
detecting the waste fluid level and produces an alarm when detecting excessive waste.
1.2.6 Photometric System

The photometric system located inside of the analyzing unit measures the absorbance of
the reaction mixture in the cuvette. The photometric system, composed of the
photometer assembly and the signal detection assembly, measures the light transmitted
through the reaction mixture and then converts the light change signal into electrical
signal, which reflects the change of the light intensity.
The photometer assembly, which consists of the light source, colorimetric component and
optical component, provides sufficient monochromatic light and reliable colorimetric
structure.
The signal detection assembly consists of the AD conversion component and the AD
signal collection component. It converts the monochromatic light transmitted through the
reaction mixture into an electrical signal, which is amplified and output as photometric
data and then sent to the corresponding control unit for absorbance calculating.
1-19
The table below shows the main technical parameters of the photometric system.
Table 1.3 Specifications of photometric system
Name Value
Light source Tungsten-halogen lamp, 12V/20W
Colorimetric Reaction cuvette
component
Light transmission Holographic concave flat-field gratings
component
Light transmission Reversed optics
mode
Signal detector Photodiode array
Measuring wavelength 12 wavelengths: 340nm, 380nm, 412nm,
450nm, 505nm, 546nm, 570nm, 605nm,
660nm, 700nm, 740nm and 800nm
Wavelength accuracy ±2nm
Measurement range 0-3.3A
Full width at half <10nm
maximum (FWHM)
1.2.7 Mixer Assembly

The mixer assembly, consisting of the sample mixer assembly and the reagent mixer
assembly, is used to stir the reaction mixture when sample/R3 and R2/R4 are dispensed
into the cuvette. There are two mixers: one is sample mixer, the other reagent probe.
Sample mixer assembly

Sample mixer assembly, located on the upper left side of the reaction carousel, mixes the
sample in cuvette once it is dispensed and after R3 is dispensed.
Figure 1.17 Sample mixer assembly
(4)
(3)
(2)
(1)
1. Wash well of sample mixer 2. Sample mixer

3. Mixer rotor 4. Mixer arm
When stirring is finished, the mixer moves automatically to its wash well for cleaning.
Reagent mixer assembly

Reagent mixer assembly, located on the upper right side of the reaction carousel, mixes
the sample in cuvette after R2 and R4 is dispensed.
1-20
Figure 1.18 Reagent mixer assembly
(4)
(3)
(2)
(1)
1. Wash well of reagent mixer 2. Reagent mixer

3. Mixer rotor 4. Mixer arm
1.2.8 Operation Unit

The operation unit is a computer configured with the operating software. It consists of
the monitor, computer, keyboard and mouse.
1.2.9 Output Unit

The output unit is a printer used to print out test results and other data. The system
supports three types of printer, which include inkjet printer, laser printer and stylus
printer.
1.2.10 Accessories and Consumables

Accessories and consumables are replenishable components required to run tests and
should be checked regularly for refilling and replacement.
CAUTION
Use the accessories, power cords and consumables manufactured or recommended by
our company in order to achieve the promised system performance and safety. If needed,
contact our customer service department or your local distributor.
For more information about accessories and consumables, refer to 16.1.2 Spare Parts
(page 16-2).
1-21
1.3 Optional Modules

1.3.1 Introduction
Optional modules are not provided as standard configuration accompanying the
instrument when it is delivered. They can be configured according to your requirements.
The following modules are supplied:
 ISE module
 Built-in sample bar code reader
 Built-in reagent bar code reader
 Water supply module
 Drainage module
 External vacuum pump
1.3.2 ISE Module

ISE (Ion-Selective Electrode) module consists of pump, tubes and connectors used in
combination with Na+ electrode, K+ electrode, Cl- electrode and reference electrode to
measure the concentration of Na, K and Cl in serum, plasma and diluted urine.
The sample volume for measuring serum and plasma is 70μl; the sample volume for
measuring diluted urine is 140μl. The theory of measurement is direct ion-selective
electrode method.
Figure 1.19 ISE Module
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
1. Spacer electrode 2. Na electrode

3. K electrode 4. Cl electrode
5. Reference electrode 6. Pressing plate
7. Shielding box
1.3.3 Built-in Sample Bar Code Reader

The sample bar code reader is located on the left inside the sample carousel. The outer
ring and middle ring of the sample carousel support bar code scanning. The sample bar
code reader assembly consists of the following components:
 Sample bar code reader
1-22
 Bar code label

 Hardware and software to control bar code scanning
When sample tubes are loaded to the sample carousel, the system scans the bar code label
on the sample tubes to read the sample information and then display it on the screen.
Figure 1.20 Sample bar code scanning window
(1)
(2)
1. Sample bar code scanning window 2. Anti-static brush
WARNING
The light radiated from the sample bar code reader may hurt your eyes. Do not stare into
the laser beam coming from the sample bar code reader.
1.3.4 Built-in Reagent Bar Code Reader

The reagent bar code reader located on the right inside the reagent carousel consists of
the following components:
 Reagent bar code reader
 Bar code label
 Hardware and software to control bar code scanning
When the reagent carousel cover is closed after reagent bottles are loaded, select End
Load F2, the system scans all reagents positions to reader reagent information and then
displays it on the screen.
1-23
Figure 1.21 Reagent bar code scanning window
(1)
1. Reagent bar code scanning window
WARNING
The light emitted by the reagent bar code reader may cause eye injury. Do not stare into
the laser beam coming from the reagent bar code reader.
1.3.5 Water Supply Module

The water supply module provides deionized water for the chemistry analyzer. When
water is required during the measuring process, the water supply module turns on the
internal inlet valve and transmits water while driven by the pneumatic pump; when water
is not needed, the water supply module turns off the internal inlet valve and cuts off the
power supply of the pneumatic pressure pump to stop supplying water.
Figure 1.22 Front view of water supply module
(1) (4)
) )
(2) (3)
1. Air vent 2. Ball valve

3. Inlet ) Outlet)
4.
1-24
Figure 1.23 Connecting instrument with water supply module
Chemistry Analyzer
DI water tank
6 7
4 5
1 2 8——Air vent
DI water inlet 8 9 10 9——Water inlet

Inlet filter
10——Water outlet
Water supply module
Make sure that there is sufficient space between the water supply module and the wall so
that it is convenient to connect or disconnect the power cord. Sufficient deionized water
should be prepared in the water tank when using the water supply module. Make sure the
water supply module is powered on before running. The module should be powered off if
not used for a long time.
If there is something wrong with the water supply module, please consult our customer
service department or your local distributor
1.3.6 Drainage Module

The drainage module increases the pressure of waste liquids, which will be discharged
more easily. When the outlet tubing of the analyzer exceeds 5m or the sewer is higher
than 1.2m, a drainage module is required. Make sure that there is sufficient space
between the drainage module and the wall so that it is convenient to connect or
disconnect the power cord.
The drainage module collects and discharges to the waste buffer the low-concentration
waste liquids from the outlet on rear panel of the analyzer. When the liquid level sensor
detects that specified amount of waste liquids have been collected in the waste buffer, the
waste pump of the drainage module starts running, discharging the waste to the sewer.
If there is something wrong with the drainage module, please consult our customer
service department or your local distributor.
1-25
Figure 1.24 Front view of drainage module
(1) (2) (3)
) ) )
(4)
1. Low-concentration waste 1 2. Low-concentration waste 2

)
3. Low-concentration waste sensor 4. Outlet
1.3.7 External Vacuum Pump

When operated in a place with the altitude above 2,000m, the system may be degraded in
its liquid aspirating performance due to the decreased atmospheric pressure. In this
situation, an external vacuum pump is required to assist the system with liquid
aspiration.
Figure 1.25 Front view of the external vacuum pump
(1)
(2)
1. Pressure gauge 2. Dust screen
1-26
Figure 1.26 Rear view of the external vacuum pump
(1)
(3)
(2)
(4)
(5)
1. Gas connector 2. Control interface

3. Cooling fans 4. Power switch
5. Power jack
Make sure that there is sufficient space between the external vacuum pump and the wall
so that it is convenient to connect or disconnect the power cord. Before using the vacuum
pump, connect the gas connector and control interface with the counterpart connectors
on the rear panel of the analyzer; connect the vacuum pump to the power supply with
the three-wire power cord. The external vacuum pump will be controlled by the analyzer
when powered on and requires no manual operations. When finishing all tests every day,
you are recommended to power off the external vacuum pump. Before starting the tests
every day, please make sure the external vacuum pump is powered on.
The pointer of the pressure gauge is deviated from the 0 point when the vacuum pump
works normally. If the pointer stops at the 0 point while the vacuum pump is running,
there must be something wrong with the external vacuum pump. Consult our customer
The external vacuum pump should be installed and adjusted only by the technicians of or
authorized by our company.
1.3.8 Other Optional Modules

For more information about other optional modules, contact our customer service
department or your local distributor.
1-27
1.4 Software Description

1.4.1 Main Screen
Figure 1.27 Main screen
(5)
(1)
(2) (4)
(3)
1. Status display area 4. Function window

2. Function buttons area 5. Shortcut icons area
3. Prompt message area
Status display area

The status display area shows the status of analysis, LIS connection, printer and system
date/time.
If no especially stated, “none-test status” in this manual refers to Incubation, Standby,
Stopped and Sleep; while “test status” refers to other status.
1-28
Table 1.4 Status display area

Status Indicator Description
Biochemistry/ISE This indicator appears on the left of the status display
area. If Biochemistry/ISE appears intact, the biochemistry
module and ISE module are enabled.
The status of the biochemistry system includes: Initialize,
Incubation, Standby, Running, Sample Load, Reagent
Load, Inventory Check, Stopped, Restoring, Sleep, Wake
Up, Maintenance, Diagnostics, and Shutdown.
The status of the ISE module includes: Initialize, Standby,
Running, Sample Load, Reagent Load, Pause,
Maintenance, Stopped, Restoring, Sleep, Wake Up, and
Shutdown.
Analyzing time left This indicator appears in the middle of the status display
area. The time indicates how many minutes left the
analysis will be finished.
Sample Stop/Reagent This indicator appears on the right of the status display
Stop area. The time indicates how many minutes left the
dispensing of sample or reagent will be stopped.
LIS status
This indicator appears on the left of the status display
area. The following information is indicated:
 If appears in blue, the LIS host is connected and

online.
 If appears in grey, the LIS host is offline.

Printer status
This indicator appears on the left of the status display
area. It indicates the status of the printer: not printing
and printing.
 If the icon appears in grey , the printer is not

printing or unconnected.
 If the icon appears in blue , the printer is printing.

Login user This indicator appears in the middle of the status display
area. It indicates the user who logs in the system.
Date and time This indicator appears on the right of the status display
area. It indicates the system date and time.
Function buttons area

The function buttons area contains the following buttons used to access various function
windows of the system:
 : used to program patient samples and control samples, and view sample
carousel status.
1-29
 : used to recall test results of patient samples and controls and view the result
statistics and test statistics.
 : used to load reagents, define/edit calibrators, request calibrations, recall

calibration results and view reagent carousel status.
 : used to define/edit controls and rules, recall QC results and summary.
 : used to execute instrument commands, set up chemistry and system

parameters, perform system maintenance and diagnostics, and view component
status.
 : used to recall and handle error logs and editing logs.
 : used to exit the system by sleeping, logging off or shutting down.
Prompt message area

The prompt message area contains two lines, the upper line displaying operation
prompts for screen controls and the lower line displaying error messages.
Function window
The function window contains options, buttons and other controls used to perform
various functions of the system.
Shortcut icons area

The shortcut icons area contains the following icons used to quickly access certain
function window or perform an operation:
 : Start icon. Select it to display the Start Conditions window, on which you are
allowed to start new analysis or resume early testing.
 : Sample Stop icon. Select it to stop sample dispensing. And then you are allowed
to load new samples or replenish samples. To resume the test, select .
 : Emergency stop icon. Select it to stop all tests and other actions. To restore the
system into Standby status, execute the Home command.
 : STAT icon. Select it to display the STAT Sample Program window, on which you
are enabled to program emergency samples quickly.
 : Online help icon. Select it to display the online help of the current window,
where you will find description of parameters and operations.
1-30
1.4.2 Using a Mouse

Move
The mouse is presented on the screen in the form of pointer. Place the mouse on a flat
platform, and then move it to the make the pointer lap over the object that you want to
select or edit.
Select
Move the mouse to make the pointer lap over the object that you want to select or edit,
and then press the left mouse button and release it quickly.
Double-click
Move the mouse to make the pointer lap over the object that you want to select or edit,
and then quickly press the left mouse button twice and release it.
Drag
Dragging is used to move the slider on a screen in order to choose a scale. Move the
mouse to make it stop over the slider, press and hold the left mouse button, move the
mouse left and right to adjust the slider to the desired scale.
Using a mouse in conjunction with a keyboard

Some lists on the screen allow you to select more than one object at one time, and you can
achieve this by using a mouse in conjunction with a keyboard. When selected, the objects
will be highlighted for easy identification.
Perform the following operations to select more than one object:
 To select discontinuous objects, press the left mouse button to select the first object,
press and hold the Ctrl key, use the mouse to select other desired objects, and then
release the Ctrl key.
 To select continuous objects, press the left mouse button to select the first object,
press and hold the Shift key, use the mouse to select the last object, and then release
the Shift key.
1.4.3 Using Online Help

The system provides you with help information about the screens. If you want to
understand a parameter or an operation on a screen, you can go to the online help for
relevant information.
Accessing the online help

Access the online help from the following screens:
 Select the icon on the upper right corner to display the help topic related to the
current screen.
1-31
Figure 1.28 Accessing the online help from the main screen
 Select the icon in front of each maintenance instruction or item to display the
relevant operating instructions.
Figure 1.29 Accessing the online help from the Maintenance window
 Select the icon in front of each diagnostic test to display the corresponding
topic.
1-32
Figure 1.30 Accessing the online help from the Diagnostics screen
 Select the icon in front of each error log to display the corresponding topic.
Figure 1.31 Accessing the online help from the Error Log screen
 Select the icon on a warning message window to display the corresponding

descriptions and solutions.
 Select the icon on an error message window to display the corresponding
 Press the shortcut combination key Alt+F1 to display the topics related to the
current screen or window.
1-33
Viewing screen information

The online help document contains descriptions of parameters, operations, maintenance
and troubleshooting of the operating software. To view the information related to the
current screen or window, perform the following steps.
1 Access the online help in the following ways:
 Select the button on the upper right corner of the main screen, or press the
shortcut combination key Alt+F1.
 To perform maintenance operations, select the icon in front of the desired

maintenance procedure.
 To view details of an error log, select the icon in front of the error log.
 To view details of an alarm message, select the icon on a warning or error

message window.
2 Read the help topics. Move the scroll bar on the right side of the help window to view
more information.
3 Select to close the help window.
Viewing other information

To view other information in the online help,
1 Select the icon on the upper right corner of the main screen, or press the
shortcut combination key Alt+F1.
2 Select the following tabs to view relevant information:
 Contents: to navigate through all topics of the online help.
 Index: to view topics related to the input keywords.
 Search: to view topics containing the input keywords.
 Favourites: to view your favorite topics.
3 Read the help topics. Move the scroll bar on the right side of the help window to view
more information.
4 Select to close the help window.
1-34
1.5 System Specifications

1.5.1 Technical Parameters
Throughput and reaction type
Table 1.5 Throughput and reaction type
Parameter Description
Throughput for 600 tests/hour for single-/double-reagent
biochemistries chemistries.
Throughput for ISE Serum/plasma: 255 tests/hour, and urine: 180
chemistries tests/hour (including K, Na, Cl)
Biochemistries and ISE 770 tests/hour
chemistries
Maximum number of tests 84 tests, which include 78 biochemistries, 3 ISE
run simultaneously chemistries and 3 serum index chemistries.
Principles of analysis Colorimetry, turbidity, and ISE method
Reaction types Endpoint, fixed-time, and Kinetic
Reagent mode Supporting
single-/double-/triple-/quadruple-reagent tests
Wavelength Supporting single/double-wavelength mode
Sample handling system

Table 1.6 Specifications of the sample handling system
Sample carousel One carousel, including three rings. Each provides 30
positions, 90 positions in total.
Sample volume for routine 1.5μl-45μl, with increment of 0.1μl
chemistry
Sample volume for ISE Serum/plasma 70μL;diluted urine:140μl
chemistry
Sample probe One sample probe available, featuring level
detection, horizontal/vertical obstruct detection,
clog detection and level tracking.
Sample probe washing The sample probe is cleaned in its wash well with
water spraying its interior and exterior
Emergent samples Emergent samples can be analyzed at any time with
highest priority.
Rerunning mode Supporting auto dilution, standard volume,
increment, decrement, decrement dilution,
increment dilution.
1-35
Reagent handling system

Table 1.7 Specifications of the reagent handling system
Reagent carousel Reagent carousel provides 80 positions of which D is
used for wash solution and W for physiological saline
water.
Reagent volume 10μl~200μl with increment of 0.5μl.
Reagent probe Two reagent probes respectively for R1/R3 and R2/R4,
featuring level detection, horizontal/vertical obstruct
detection, empty aspiration alarm and level tracking.
Reagent probe washing The reagent probe is cleaned in its wash well with
water spraying its interior and exterior.
Mixer assembly
Table 1.8 Specifications of the mixer assembly
Mixer assembly Composed of mixer, probe arm and probe rotor
Mixer Two mixers available, one sample mixer and one
reagent mixer
Reaction system
Table 1.9 Specifications of the reaction system
Reaction carousel 124 positions available
Reaction temperature 37℃
Reaction cuvette Plastic cuvette 5mm×4mm×29mm (length × depth ×
height), light pathlength of 5mm±0.03mm
Reaction mixture volume 100μl-300μl
Photometric system
Table 1.10 Specifications of the photometric system
Light transmission mode Holographic concave flat-field gratings
Light source 12V/20W tungsten-halogen lamp
Measuring wavelength 12 wavelengths: 340nm, 380nm, 412nm, 450nm,
505nm, 546nm, 570nm, 605nm, 660nm, 700nm,
740nm and 800nm
Measuring period 6 seconds
Water consumption
≤28L/H
1-36
Water supply module

Table 1.11 Specifications of water supply module
Power supply 100V-240V~, 50Hz/60Hz
Voltage fluctuation ±10%
Rated input power 50VA
Flux 0.6LPM
Tube length and 4*6mm PU tubes
connecting method Connecting the water tank and the analyzer,<10m
IN and the water tank ,<5m
OUT2 and the waste outlet,<10m
Weight 9.7Kg(±1)
Size(length*width* 321.8mm×303.5mm×241.2mm(±5mm)
height)
Maintenance No need to perform the maintenance procedure
requirement
Drainage module
Table 1.12 Specifications of the drainage module
Power supply 100V-240V~, 50Hz/60Hz
Flux 1LPM
Tube length and connecting 12*18 mm braided tubes
method Connecting the analyzer and IN1/IN2,<5m
OUT and the discharge outlet,<10m
Weight 12.5Kg(±1)
Size(length*width* height) 436.5mm×312.8mm×287.7mm(±5mm)
Maintenance requirement No need to perform the maintenance procedure
External vacuum pump

Table 1.13 Specifications of the external vacuum pump
Power supply 110V:
110V/115V~, 60Hz
220V:
220V-240V~, 50Hz
220V/230V~, 60Hz
Vacuum flux >10SLPM under the atmospheric pressure of -33KPa
Tube PU tube,7*10mm,<3m
1-37
Weight 29.7±1.2kg
Size 478mm×425mm×466mm
Maintenance requirement Clean the dust screen monthly according to this
manual
1.5.2 Main Performance Indices

Stray light
Absorbance shall be no less than 4.6.
Absorbance Linearity Range

The maximum absorbance with relative bias within ±5% should be no less than 3.3.
Absorbance Accuracy
The absorbance accuracy shall meet the requirements in Table 1.14 .
Table 1.14 Absorbance Accuracy

Absorbance Value Absorbance Accuracy
0.5 ±0.025
1. 0 ±0.07
Absorbance Stability
Absorbance change should not be greater than 0.01.
Absorbance Repeatability
Expressed by coefficient of variation (CV value), which should not be greater than 1%.
Sample Carryover
Sample carryover rate of should not be greater than 0.05%
Dispensing Accuracy and Repeatability

The dispensing accuracy and repeatability shall meet the requirements of Table 1.15 ,
where the dispensing repeatability is expressed by coefficient of variation.
Table 1.15 Dispensing accuracy and repeatability

Category Volume Allowable Error Coefficient of
μL Variation
Sample probe 1.5 ±5% ≤2%
5 ±5% ≤2%
45 ±3% ≤1%
Reagent probe 10 ±5% ≤2%
1-38
Category Volume Allowable Error Coefficient of

μL Variation
200 ±2% ≤1%
Carryover Rate of ISE Module
The carryover rate of ISE module should meet the requirements in Table 1.16 .
Stability of ISE Module
The stability of the ISE module should meet the requirements in Table 1.16 .
Accuracy of ISE Module
The accuracy of the ISE module should meet the requirements in Table 1.16 .
Precision of ISE Module
The precision of the ISE module should meet the requirements in Table 1.16 .
Linearity of ISE Module
The linearity of the ISE module should meet the requirements in Table 1.16 .
Table 1.16 Performance Requirements Of ISE Module
Parameter Carryover Stability Accuracy Precision Linearity
(△§) (△D) (B) (CV) (D)
K+ ≤1.5% ≤2.0% ≤3.0% ≤1.5% ≤3.0%
Na+ ≤1.5% ≤2.0% ≤3.0% ≤1.0% ≤3.0%
Cl- ≤1.5% ≤2.0% ≤3.0% ≤1.5% ≤3.0%
Limitations
Table 1.17 Interferences may affect the measurement results
Interferent
Limitations ascorbic acid
hemoglobin
lipemia
bilirubin
1.5.3 Contraindication
None.
1-39
1.5.4 Power supply

Table 1.18 Power supply
Power supply 110V:
110V/115V~, 60Hz
220V:
220V-240V~, 50Hz
220V/230V~, 60Hz
Rated power consumption 1700VA

Frequency fluctuation ±1Hz
1.5.5 Environmental Requirements

Operating environment
 Temperature: 15°C-30°C
 Relative humidity: 35%-85%, without condensation
 Altitude height: -400m-2000m (An external vacuum pump is required for areas with
altitude height between 2000-4000m.)
Storage environment
 Temperature: 0°C-40°C
 Relative humidity: 30%-85%, without condensation
 Altitude height: 50kPa-106kPa
1.5.6 Dimensions and Weight

 Dimension: ≤1190mm(length)×720mm(depth)×1155mm(height)
 Weight: ≤300Kg
1.5.7 Input Device

 Keyboard (prepared by user)
 Mouse (prepared by user)
 Bar code reader
 LIS: HL7 and ASTM1394 (communicating through serial port or net port of the
TCP/IP interface of static IP address)
1.5.8 Output Device

 Printer (prepared by user)
 Display monitor (prepared by user)
 LIS: HL7 and ASTM1394 (communicating through serial port or net port of the
TCP/IP interface of static IP address)
1-40
1.5.9 Noise and Fuse

Table 1.19 Noise and fuse
Noise ≤ 65dBA
Fuse For 110V: 250V 16A
For 220V: 250V 13A
1.5.10 Communication Interfaces

Table 1.20 Communication interfaces
Communication Interfaces Description
RS232 serial port  Used for communication between the analyzing
unit and the operation unit
 Used for communication between the LIS and the
operation unit
 Used for connecting the operation unit with a
printer
Network interface  Used for communication between the analyzing
unit and the operation unit
 Used for communication between the LIS and the
operation unit
Parallel port or USB  Used for connecting the operation unit with a
interface printer
 Used for connecting the operation unit with an
external storage device
VGA or DVI interface  Used for connecting the operation unit with a
display monitor
1.5.11 Safety Classification

Table 1.21 Safety classification
Overvoltage type Class II
Pollution degree 2
Device type Fixed device
Work type Continuous
Degree of IP(Ingress Common device ,IPX0 (no protection against liquids)
Protection)
1.5.12 EMC Requirements

This IVD medical equipment complies with the emission and immunity requirements
described in IEC 61326-1:2012/EN 61326-1:2013 and IEC 61326-2-6:2012/EN
61326-2-6:2013.
1-41
1-42
2 General Operating Procedure
This chapter illustrates the methods of using the instrument and the routine operating
procedure in clinical laboratories. The common steps include:
 Check before powering on
 Powering on
 Checking system status
 Loading reagents
 Calibration
 Quality control
 Programming routine samples
 Programming STAT samples
 Test status and test control
 Daily maintenance
 Powering off
 Check after powering off
2-1
2.1 General Operating Procedure

Table 2.1 General operating procedure
Procedures Description Page
1. Check before powering on Check if the following components are ready for Page 2-3
analysis: water supply, power supply, printing
paper, low-/high-concentration waste
connection, probes/mixers, concentrated wash
solution inventory.
2. Powering on Turn on the water inlet valve, switch on the water Page 2-5
supply module, drainage module, external
vacuum pump, and analyzing unit, and run the
operating software.
3. Checking system status Check the status of the system, alarms, Page 2-8
reagent/calibration, maintenance and
subsystems.
4. Preparing reagents Prepare the biochemical reagents, ISE reagents Page 2-13
and wash solutions.
5. Calibration Request calibrations, prepare calibrators and run Page 2-22
calibration tests.
6. Quality Control Program, prepare and run control samples. Page 2-26
7. Programming routine Program, prepare and run routine samples. Page 2-29
samples
8. Programming STAT Run emergent and STAT samples Page 2-36
samples
9. Test status and analysis View reagent status and reagent carousel status Page 2-41
control as well as the running status of calibrators,
control samples, routine samples and STAT
samples, pause sample and reagent dispensing,
stop the analysis, and switching carousels.
10. Daily maintenance Clean the ISE electrodes, sample and reagent Page 2-47
compartments, analyzer panel, etc.
11. Powering off Switch off the water supply and power supply Page 2-47
12. Check after powering off Restore the reagent carousel cover, take out the Page 2-49
calibrators, controls and samples from the sample
carousel and store them properly, clean the
analyzer panels, and empty the waste tank.
2-2
2.2 Check before Powering On

2.2.1 Checking Water Supply
1 Check the deionized water tank or other water reservoirs, and make sure that water
can be supplied continuously.
2 Check if the connections between the water supply, water supply module and
analyzer are correct and tight.
3 Check if the water tubes are free of twists and leaks.
2.2.2 Checking Power Supply

1 Check if the power supply is available and can provide correct voltage:
2 Check the connections among the analyzing unit, operation unit and printer. Make
sure the connections are correct and secure. Check the power cords of the analyzing
unit, operation unit and printer and make sure they are well connected to the power
sockets.
2.2.3 Checking Printing Paper

Check if sufficient printing paper is prepared in the printer. If not, refill the printing
paper.
2.2.4 Checking Waste Tanks and Tubing

The waste fluid of the system is discharged in two flows: high-concentration waste and
low-concentration waste. The former is drained through the waste tank and then
disposed according to relevant regulations, or drained to the sewer; the latter is directly
drained to the sewer.
BIOHAZARD
While checking the waste tanks and tubing, wear gloves and lab coat, if necessary,
goggles.
1 Check if the high-concentration waste tank has been emptied. If not, empty it.
High-concentration waste output: 2.2L/H (including ISE waste).
2 Check if the low-concentration waste tubing is not bent and the sewer opening is
lower than the waste outlet of the system.
2-3
Figure 2.1 Connecting instrument with waste drainage facilities
Maximum of 1200mm
Chemistry analyzer
High-conc waste sensor
Maximum of 100mm
High-conc waste
6 7
Water unit
4 5
3
Low-conc waste sensor DI water
Drainage module 1 2
(optional) Low-conc waste Inlet filter
IN1 IN2 OU
T
High-conc waste tank
Drain outlet
2.2.5 Checking Probes and Mixers

The sample probe, reagent probe and mixers are easy to be polluted or damaged. Check
them carefully for dirt and bend before powering on the system.
1 Check the sample probe for dirt and bend.
 If it is polluted, clean it.
 If it is bent, replace it.
2 Check the reagent probes for dirt and bend.
 If they are polluted, clean them.
 If they are bent, replace them.
3 Check the sample mixer for dirt and bend.
4 Check the reagent mixer for dirt and bend.
2.2.6 Checking Concentrated and Probe Wash Solution

Insufficient concentrated wash solution or probe wash solution may terminate the
measurements. Check the wash solution according to the following steps:
1 Check the wash solution placed on sample and reagent carousels. If necessary, fill
more or replace the wash solution.
2 Open the front door of the analyzer and check the concentrated wash solution. If
necessary, fill more or replace the wash solution.
2-4
2.3 Powering On
2.3.1 Turning On Water Supply, Water Supply Module, Drainage Module
and External Vacuum Pump
Turn on the water supply and the water supply module. Make sure the water pressure is
within 100kPa-392kPa. If needed, use an external vacuum pump.
If a drainage module has been configured, turn on the power.
2.3.2 Powering On the System

After connecting correctly the system to the power sockets, switch on the power in the
sequence presented below:
1 Turn on the main power switch of the analyzer.
Figure 2.2 Main power switch and analyzer power switch
(1)
(2)
(1) Analyzer power switch (2) Main power switch
 Place the switch to the position to turn it on.
 Place the switch to the position to turn it off.

2 Turn on the analyzing unit power switch (see the above figure).
 Place the switch to the position to turn it on.
 Place the switch to the position to turn it off.

3 Turn on the printer.
4 Turn on the monitor of the operation unit.
2-5
5 Turn on the display monitor of the computer installed with the Data Management
Software of LIS.
6 Turn on the computer of the operation unit.
7 Turn on the computer installed with the Data Management Software of LIS.
2.3.3 Starting the Operating Software
Note
If virtual reagent carousel is used, please make sure that the loaded one is the NO.1
reagent carousel before starting the operating software each time.
1 When the operation unit (computer) is turned on, the operating software will run
automatically.
If the system detects that the hardware and software environments of the computer
do not meet the requirements, a prompt message will appear to ask for your
confirmation to convert the screen resolution. If you cancel the conversion or the
conversion fails, you are allowed to abort the startup or reboot the system.
2 Enter the username and password in the Login window, and then select OK.
NOTE
The default username and password for administrator is Admin. Please note that the
password is case sensitive. You are recommended to change the password when
logging on the system for the first time in order to prevent others from abusing the
privileges of the administrator.
If an operator forgets his password, he may ask the administrator to log on the
system and delete the username and then redefine a username; or he may contact
our customer service department or your local distributor. If the administrator
forgets his password, contact our customer service department or your local
distributor.
3 When the startup check is passed, the main screen shows. The startup procedure is
finished.
The system will display prompt message when detecting unsatisfied environment
during the startup process. Please take actions according to the instructions in the
message box.
2-6
CAUTION
To ensure accurate test results, do not start measurement until the system status
turns to Standby and the system has been turned on for about 20 minutes, so that
the light source and reaction temperature gets steady.
2-7
2.4 Checking System Status

After the startup procedure is finished, check the system status, such as system status,
alarm status, reagent/calibration status, maintenance status and sub system status. If the
status is not satisfied for measurement, troubleshoot and maintain the system as
instructed by 17 Alarms and Troubleshooting (page 17-1) and 16 Maintenance (page
16-1).
2.4.1 Checking System Status

Printer status
Check the printer status indication in the system status area of the main screen:
 If the icon appears in blue, the printer is printing.
 If the icon appears in grey, the printer is not printing.
ISE module status

Check the ISE module status indication in the system status area of the main screen:
 If Standby is displayed, it indicates that an ISE module is steady and ready for
measurement.
 If other statuses are displayed, it indicates that the ISE module is performing a task or
goes wrong, wait until the task is finished or troubleshoot the error, and then take
relevant corrective solutions.
LIS status
Check the LIS status indication in the system status area of the main screen:
 If appears in blue, the LIS host is connected and online.
 If appears in grey, the LIS host is offline.
2.4.2 Checking Alarm Status

1 Check the Alarm button on the left of the main screen.
 If it appears in yellow, it indicates that a warning occurs. Proceed to the next
step.
 If it appears in red, it indicates that an error occurs, or both warning and error
occur. Proceed to the next step.
2 Select the Alarm button. The Error Log screen is displayed.
2-8
Figure 2.3 Error Log screen
3 New alarm messages are indicated by corresponding colors. Select the help button in
front of a new alarm message to view relevant description and solutions.
4 Take actions according to the recommended solutions.
2.4.3 Checking Reagent/Calibration Status

1 Check the Reagent button on the left of the main screen.
 If it appears in yellow, it indicates that a warning occurs. Proceed to the next
step.
 If it appears in red, it indicates that an error occurs, or both warning and error
occur. Proceed to the next step.
2 Select the Reagent button. The Reagent/Calibration screen is displayed.
2-9
Figure 2.4 Reagent/Calibration screen
3 View the reagent status. When a reagent is insufficient or exhausted, the

corresponding chemistry name and chemistries left will be indicated as follows:
 Yellow: indicates that the reagent is insufficient or expired, and the analysis will
continue. Refill or replace the reagent.
 Red: indicates that the reagent is exhausted or at least one reagent type is not
loaded, and the analysis is stopped. Refill or replace the reagent.
4 View the calibration status. When the calibration is succeeded or failed, the Cal
Status column of the chemistry shows the calibration status in corresponding color.
 Yellow: indicates that the calibration factors of the chemistry have been
calculated, or extended, edited or overridden.
 Red: indicates that the calibration of the chemistry fails or expired, or the
chemistry needs to be calibrated.
5 Check the calibration time left.
6 Take actions according to the calibration status.
For more information about calibration, refer to 2.6 Calibration(page 2-22).
2.4.4 Checking Maintenance Status

When the system is started up, it is necessary to check the maintenance status. If a
maintenance procedure is expired, perform it immediately to make sure that the system
will run normally. When a maintenance procedure is expired, the following buttons and
options will be indicated by corresponding color:
 Utility button on the left of the main screen
 Maintenance tab
 Maintenance button
 Scheduled Maintenance tab
 Maintenance frequency tab
2-10
 Maintenance procedure
1 Check the Utility button on the left of the main screen. If it appears in yellow, it
indicates that a maintenance procedure is expired.
2 Select Utility - Maintenance - Maintenance.
3 Check if the Scheduled Maintenance tab and maintenance frequency tabs appear
in yellow. If they do, it indicates that at least one maintenance procedure is expired.
4 Select the maintenance frequency tab appearing in yellow, find the expired
maintenance procedure, and then perform the maintenance.
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 until the maintenance frequency tabs and maintenance
procedures are displayed in normal color.
2.4.5 Checking Subsystems

The subsystem status indicates the current working status of each subsystem and
hardware component, which includes the status summary, cycle count, temperature, fans,
Hydropneumatic subsystem, and control modules.
Checking subsystems
1 Select Utility - Status.
2 Choose a subsystem tab;
3 Check the subsystem status. When abnormity occurs, troubleshoot errors with the
following methods:
 If the cycle count of a component reaches certain limit and an alarm occurs,
replace the component or contact out customer service department or your local
distributor for replacement of the component.
 If a component’s temperature is beyond the valid range or abnormal and an
alarm occurs, exit the operating software and switch off the analyzing unit
power. After that, switch on the analyzing unit power again and run the
operating software. If the error remains, contact out customer service
department or your local distributor for replacement of the component.
 If the status of the fans is abnormal, exit the operating software and switch off
the analyzing unit power. After that, switch on the analyzing unit power again
and run the operating software. If the error remains, contact out customer
service department or your local distributor for replacement of the fan.
 If a Hydropneumatic component is beyond the valid range or abnormal and an
alarm occurs, exit the operating software and switch off the analyzing unit
power. After that, switch on the analyzing unit power again and run the
operating software. If the error remains, contact out customer service
department or your local distributor for replacement of the component.
 If a smart module is abnormal and an alarm occurs, exit the operating software
and switch off the analyzing unit power. After that, switch on the analyzing unit
power again and run the operating software. If the error remains, contact out
customer service department or your local distributor for replacement of the
component.
Description of subsystem status

Status summary
The status summary provides a high-level status summary of the system temperatures,
Hydropneumatic, smart modules, and middle-layer unit.
2-11
Cycle count
The cycle count provides an approximation of a component’s usage, which can be useful
for estimating the maintenance frequencies or anticipating component failure.
Temperatures
The actual temperature and valid range of the deionized water, reagent carousel, reaction
carousel, and wash station are displayed.
Fans
The actual status of the reagent refrigeration fans, lamp housing fan, vacuum pump
cooling fan is displayed.
Hydropneumatic subsystem
Status for the Hydropneumatic subsystem shows: working status of various tanks.
The actual air pressure and valid range for air pressure equipment
Smart modules
Smart module status monitors the working status of each smart module, which includes
probes, mixers, carousels, cuvette wash station, ISE unit, etc.
2-12
2.5 Preparing Reagents

After confirming the system status and performing the daily checks, prepare the reagents
for measurement. Chemistries without reagents loaded can be requested but will not be
included in measurements. Loading reagents is allowed when the system status is Standby
and Incubation. In the case of Running, you must request Reagent stop before you load
the reagents. In the case of Sleep, reagents cannot be loaded until the instrument is woken
up. After assigning reagent positions, print out the reagent list and then manually load
reagents according to it. When all reagents are loaded, the system will check the reagent
inventory during measurement and then display it on the Reagent/Calibration screen.
You are recommended to perform inventory check manually after loading reagents;
otherwise, the tests left will not be displayed on the Reagent/Calibration screen.
WARNING
The probe tip is sharp and may cause puncture wounds. To prevent injury, exercise
caution when working around the probes.
BIOHAZARD
Do not touch the reagent directly with your body; otherwise, skin wound or inflammation
may be caused.
2.5.1 Loading Biochemical Reagents

The system supports manual and auto load of biochemical reagents. Each chemistry can
have more than one bottle of reagent loaded; however the reagent of same chemistry
must be loaded on the same reagent carousel. If your system is not equipped with a
reagent bar code reader, you need to enter the reagent information manually when
loading reagents; if a reagent bar code reader is configured, the system will scan all
reagents automatically and read reagent information from the bar code.
When one or more reagents of a multi-reagent chemistry are not loaded, the “!” sign will
appear near the chemistry’s reagent types that have been loaded.
Reagents can be loaded manually or via bar code scanning. For more information about
loading bar-coded reagents, refer to 13.2.3 Loading Bar-Coded Reagents (page 13-9).
NOTE
Before loading biochemistry reagent, ensure that there are no air bubbles inside the
reagent bottle so as to avoid inaccurate test results.
If a chemistry is set with sample pretreatment, ensure that the chemistry reagent and
the pretreat reagent are loaded to the same reagent carousel; otherwise, the chemistry
cannot be run.
Manual load
When loading reagents manually, you need to enter the reagent information, which is the
only information source of the loaded reagents. You are allowed to input reagent
information before, during or after loading reagents to the reagent carousel. If loaded
reagents are bar-coded, the reagent information cannot be edited; otherwise, all reagent
information except for position, chemistry and reagent type can be edited. Manually
loaded reagents have the letter “M” (Manual) appearing near them.
2-13
Figure 2.5 Flag for manually loaded reagents
(1)
(1) Flag “M” for manually loaded reagents

1 Check the system status and operate accordingly.
 Standby: Proceed to the next step.
 Running: Select Reagent - Reagent/Calibration, or select Reagent - Reagent
Carousel Status. Select Load F1 to stop reagent aspirating and dispensing.
Meanwhile Load F1 becomes No load F1.If you want to abort load, select No
load F1. When the countdown for reagent stop becomes 0 and the system
status is Reagent Load, a message box pops up. Select OK, and then proceed to
the next step.
 Incubation: Proceed to the next step.
 Sleep: Select Utility - Commands - Wake up to wake up the system, and then
proceed to step 2.
2 Select Reagent - Reagent/Calibration, or select Reagent - Reagent Carousel
Status.
3 Select a reagent carousel from the dropdown box of Reagent Carousel.
4 Choose a position to which you want to load a reagent.
5 Select Load F1. The Load Reagent window is displayed.
2-14
Figure 2.6 Load reagent window
6 Enter the following reagent information:

 Bar code (Enter the bar code manually or scan it with a hand-held bar code
reader)
 Chemistry name (required)
 Reagent type (required)
 Lot number
 Serial number
 Bottle type (required)
 Expiration date
7 Select Load F3 to save the input information.
8 Select Prev F1 and Next F2 to load reagents for other chemistries.
9 Select Print F7 to print out the biochemical reagent list.
10 Remove the reagent carousel cover.
CAUTION
If the system is running tests, after requesting reagent stop, do not remove the
reagent carousel cover until the countdown for reagent stop is 0, the system status
is Reagent Load, and the popup message is confirmed; otherwise, probe collision or
other error may occur.
11 Load reagents according to the reagent load list. Place the reagents in position 1-78
on the reagent carousel, and then uncap the reagent bottles.
12 Restore the reagent carousel cover.
13 Select End Load F2.
2-15
Auto load
Auto load is to load bar-coded reagents to the reagent carousel, which are identified by bar
code scanning.
Meanwhile Load F1 becomes No load F1.If you want to abort load, select No
the next step.
 Sleep: Select Utility - Commands - Wake Up to wake up the system, and then
start loading reagents.
CAUTION
is Reagent Load, and the popup message is confirmed; reagent probe collision or
4 Place the reagents in positions 1~78 of the reagent carousel and then uncap the
reagent bottles.
If reagent barcode reader has been configured, the system scans all reagent positions
and read the following reagent information from the bar code:
 Chemistry name
 Reagent type
 Days left
 Lot number
 Serial number and bottle type
2.5.2 Loading Concentrated Wash Solution

Concentrated wash solution, also called "CD80 alkaline concentrated wash solution", is
used to clean reaction cuvettes and can only be loaded manually. The lot number, serial
number, expiration date, volume, reagent alarm limit and other information of the loaded
wash solution must be entered.
A tank of concentrated wash solution is 2L and can be used for analysis for 4 days on
condition that 2000 tests are done every day. Please check and refill the concentrated
wash solution according to the consumption and tank volume. Before loading
concentrated wash solution, ensure that the diluted wash solution is enough for the tests
in progress.
1 Select Reagent - Reagent/Calibration.
2-16
2 Select Conc Wash in the lower reagent list.

4 Open the front door of the analyzer.
5 Load the concentrated wash solution.
Figure 2.7 Positions for concentrated wash solution
(1) (2)
1. Diluted wash solution 2. Concentrated wash solution

6 Close the front door of the analyzer.
7 Enter the following information:
 Volume % (required)
 Serial number
 Expiration date
 Lot number
 Reagent alarm limit
8 Select Load F3.
9 Select Exit F5 to close the window.
2.5.3 Loading Reagent Probe Wash Solution

Reagent probe wash solution, that is CD80 alkaline concentrated wash solution poured
into a reagent bottle, is used to clean the reagent probes, sample mixer, reagent mixer, and
reaction cuvettes in a special wash procedure. It can only be loaded manually. The volume,
lot number, serial number, expiration date, bottle type and other information of the loaded
wash solution must be entered.
You are recommended to check the reagent probe wash solution every day to ensure its
sufficiency.
NOTE
Before loading wash solution, ensure that there are no air bubbles inside the reagent
bottle so as to avoid affecting washing effects.
2-17

Meanwhile Load F1 becomes No load F2. If you want to abort load, select No
the next step. Incubation: Proceed to the next step.
proceed to step 2.
2 Select Reagent - Reagent/Calibration, and select Wash D in the lower reagent list.
3 Or select Reagent - Reagent Carousel Status, and click position D on the reagent
carousel graph.
6 Place the wash in position D (No.79) of the reagent carousel.
 Volume (%)
 Serial number
 Expiration date
 Lot number
9 Select Load F3.
2.5.4 Loading Sample Probe Wash Solution

Sample probe wash solution, that is CD80 alkaline concentrated wash solution poured
into a tube, is used to clean the sample probe, sample mixer, reagent mixer, and reaction
cuvettes in a special wash procedure. It can only be loaded manually. When the sample
probe wash solution is expired or exhausted, fill more sample probe wash solution. You
are recommended to check and replace the sample probe wash solution every day to
ensure its sufficiency.
NOTE
Before loading wash solution, ensure that there are no air bubbles inside the test tube so
as to avoid affecting washing effects.
 Standby, Incubation or Sleep: Proceed to the next step.
 Running: Select the button on the upper-right corner of the main screen to
stop sample aspirating and dispensing. When the countdown for sample stop
becomes 0 and the system status is Sample Load, proceed to the next step.
2 Remove the sample carousel cover.
3 Place sample probe wash in position D2 of the sample carousel.
2-18
4 Restore the sample carousel cover.
2.5.5 Loading Physiological Saline

Physiological saline is used to run sample blanks, reagent blanks and calibrations, and
dilute samples, and it can only be loaded manually. The bottle type and volume of the
loaded saline must be entered. Physiological saline used for running sample blanks and
diluting samples should be loaded to the position W on the reagent carousel; and that for
running reagent blanks and calibrations should be loaded manually to the position W on
the sample carousel.
Loading physiological saline on the sample carousel

 Standby, Incubation or Sleep : Proceed to the next step.
3 Place physiological saline in position W of the sample carousel.
Loading physiological saline on the reagent carousel

the next step.
 Sleep: Select Utility - Commands - Wake Up to wake up the system, and then
proceed to step 2.
2 Select Reagent - Reagent/Calibration, and select Saline W in the lower reagent list.
3 Or select Reagent - Reagent Carousel Status, and click position W on the reagent
carousel graph.
CAUTION
is Reagent Load, and the popup message is confirmed; otherwise, Probe collision or
6 Place the physiological saline for sample blanks and sample dilution in position W
(No.80) of the outer ring of the reagent carousel.
2-19
8 Enter the following information of physiological saline for sample blanks and sample
dilution:
 Volume %
 Bottle type
9 Select Load F3.
2.5.6 Loading Pretreat Reagent

Pretreat reagent is used to pretreat whole blood samples. You can load it manually or
through barcode. If you load it with barcode, use 62ml reagent bottle and make sure the
pretreatment reagent bottle is labelled with barcode from the reagent box. When you load
it manually, the volume, lot number, serial number, expiration date, bottle type and other
information of the loaded pretreat reagent must be entered.
the next step. Incubation: Proceed to the next step.
proceed to step 2.
Status.
4 Choose a position to which you want to load a reagent.
NOTE
Pretreat reagent can be only loaded on one reagent carousel. Make sure that it is on
the same carousel as the chemistry reagent set with sample pretreatment;
otherwise, the chemistry cannot be run.
7 Place the pretreat reagent in the defined position of the reagent carousel.
9 Enter the following information(manual load):
 Volume (%)
 Serial number
 Expiration date
 Lot number
 Reagent type(R0)
2-20

8 Select Load F3.
2-21
2.6 Calibration
Running calibration is to calculate calibration factors for sample result calculation.
Generally, calibration is required when one of the following conditions occurs:
 A new chemistry is configured.
 QC alarms are given while the reagent, calibrator and control sample are within the
expiration date.
 Reagent lot or bottle is changed.
 The calibration factors of a chemistry are expired.
 The ISE electrodes are adjusted or the ISE module is maintained.
 The calibration rules are changed, such as calibration method, replicates,
concentration and calibrator.
 The chemistry parameters are changed, such as primary wavelength, secondary
wavelength, blank time, reaction time, reagent volume (R1/R2/R3/R4), sample
volume, sample dilution parameters, reaction type, reaction direction, sample blank
and result unit.
 The lamp, syringe or sample probe is replaced.
If any of the following chemistry parameters are changed, a calibration is required:
 Primary wavelength
 Secondary wavelength
 Blank time
 Reaction time
 Reagent volume(R1/R2/R3/R4)
 Standard sample volume, diluting sample volume and diluent volume
 Reaction type
 Reaction direction
 Sample blank and result unit
 Twin chemistries
 Pretreatment parameters
For more information about calibration setup, refer to 3.3 Calibration Setup (page 3-25).
2.6.1 Requesting Calibrations

General calibration request
When one of the above-mentioned conditions is happened, request a calibration
according to the steps stated below.
Before requesting a calibration, make sure that the calibrator has been loaded to correct
position.
3 Select the down-arrow button on the right side of the screen to display the
biochemical reagents.
2-22
4 Select chemistries you want to calibrate.

Select the up-/down-arrow buttons to select more chemistries.
5 Select Cal F5.

6 Select Calibration.
7 Select OK.
8 If you want to abort the calibration requests, select No Cal F6.
Calibration tests can be canceled only when they have not been started or are
interrupted.
Reagent lot calibration

After selecting the Manage Reagents by Lot option on the System Setup screen, you
are allowed to calibrate each reagent lot of a chemistry and view all calibration results on
the Biochemistry Calibration screen.
4 Select reagent lots you want to calibrate.
Select the up-/down-arrow buttons to select more chemistries.
5 Select Cal F5.

7 Select OK.
2-23
8 Select the Biochemistry Calibration tab to view calibration results.
Requesting a calibration based on calibration status

When a chemistry has the calibration status of Cal Required, Cal Failed or Cal Time Out,
the system will give an alarm. Perform the following steps to request a calibration based
on the calibration status:
1 Check the Reagent button on the left of the main screen.
 Yellow: indicates that a warning occurs.
 Red: indicates that a serious error occurs.
2 If the Reagent button is highlighted, select Reagent - Reagent/Calibration.
5 Check the biochemical chemistries of which the calibration status is highlighted.
6 Select chemistries that you want to calibrate.
7 Select Cal F5.
9 Select OK.
Auto calibration
The system provides the auto calibration option. When the conditions are satisfied, the
system displays a message indicating calibration required and then stops running the
corresponding chemistry. The conditions for auto calibration include:
 Calibration factors are expired
 Reagent lot is changed
 Reagent bottle is changed
For more information about auto calibration, refer to 6.5 Auto Calibration (page 6-11).
2.6.2 Loading Calibrators
BIOHAZARD
Inappropriate handling of calibrators may lead to biohazardous infection. Do not touch
the calibrators directly with your hands. Wear gloves and lab coat, if necessary, goggles.
In case your skin contacts the calibrators, follow standard laboratory safety procedure
and consult a doctor.
CAUTION
Do not use expired calibrators; otherwise, unreliable test results may be caused.
4 Select Load List F4.
2-24
The calibrator list shows all requested chemistries as well as calibrators, positions,
concentration, lot number and expiration date.
5 Select Print F7.

6 Select Close F8.
7 Load calibrators to the sample carousel according to the calibrator list.
NOTE
Calibrators of a chemistry must be placed and analyzed on the same sample
carousel.
2.6.3 Running Calibrations

After requesting calibrations and load calibrators to the sample carousel, you can start the
calibration test.
1 Select on upper right corner of the main screen. The Start Conditions window
is displayed.
Figure 2.9 Start Conditions window
2 Select a sample carousel to which the calibrators are loaded.

3 Select a reagent carousel to which the reagents are loaded.
4 Select OK to start analysis.
2-25
2.7 Quality Control

QC results are tools used to monitor the system performance. To check if the system is
running normally and steadily, you are recommended to run control samples every day.
The system provides two modes to run control samples, auto and manual. New
chemistries can be added no matter in which status the control samples are. The control
programs can be edited when the control status is Programmed rather than In Progress.
2.7.1 Programming Control Samples

QC runs are requested by programming control samples. You are allowed to choose a
control, control position and sample cup type as well as chemistries and panels for
measurement. At least one chemistry must be selected for control programming. If
Manage reagent by lot is selected on the System setup screen, the system also allows you
to run QC samples by reagent lot. If a chemistry has no QC parameters set up, such as
mean concentration and standard deviation, the chemistry cannot be used to
programming controls.
1 Select Program - Quality Control.
Figure 2.10 Quality Control screen
2 Select a control from the Control pull-down list.

3 Select a position from the Pos pull-down list.
The options include all positions defined for the control. The default is the position on
the first defined sample carousel in ascending numerical order. For more
information about control position assignment, refer to 3.4.2 Defining/Editing a
Control (page 3-32).
4 Choose a sample cup type to be used by the selected control.

The options include Standard and Microtube.
2-26
5 Choose desired chemistries and panels in the chemistry list.
If the chemistries included in a panel are not set up for QC parameters, they will not
be programmed for quality control.
6 If you want to run the QC test by the reagent lot number of the chemistry:
 First select Options F2.
 Then select reagent lot number for the chemistry.
 Select Save.
7 Select Save F8
8 To program other controls, select Prev F4 or Next F5, and then repeat steps 3 and 7.
2.7.2 Loading Control Samples
BIOHAZARD
Inappropriate handling of control samples may lead to biohazardous infection. Do not
touch the control samples directly with your hands. Wear gloves and lab coat, if
necessary, goggles. In case your skin contacts the control samples, follow standard
laboratory safety procedure and consult a doctor.
CAUTION
Do not use expired control samples; otherwise, unreliable test results may be caused.
1 Select Program - Sample.

2 Select List F5.
The sample list shows all programmed patient samples, control samples and
chemistries, including the following information:
 Program date and time
 Sample ID or control name
 Position
 Patient name (of patient samples)
 Chemistry
 Sample status
3 Select Print F7.
Samples and controls are printed out respectively.
4 Select Exit F8.

5 Load control samples to the sample carousel according to the printed list.
2.7.3 Running Control Samples

After programming and load the control samples, you can start the QC test.
is displayed.
2-27
2 Select a sample carousel to which the control samples are loaded.

2.7.4 Auto quality control

Controls can be run automatically based on specified samples and calibration. When auto
QC is enabled, the system will automatically run all chemistries of the selected controls
once the conditions are met.
1 Select Utility - System Setup, and then select Instrument F1.
2 Select 9 QC Evaluation.
3 Select Auto QC on Carousel, and then select controls for auto QC in the control list.
4 Set up the conditions for auto quality control:
 Number of samples
 When calibrated
For more information about auto QC setup, refer to 7.3 Auto Quality Control (page
7-7).
is displayed.
6 Select OK.
When conditions for auto quality control on sample carousel are satisfied, the system
will run controls automatically for relevant chemistries through the sample carousel.
2-28
2.8 Programming Routine Samples

After running quality controls, if the test results indicate that the system is in control, you
can start programming patient samples. This section describes how to program and run
routine samples. For information about bar-coded samples, refer to 13.1.3 Programming
Bar-Coded Samples (page 13-4).
2.8.1 Programming Routine Samples

You are allowed to program samples one by one or in batch. Batch program is not allowed
when the sample status is In Progress, Incomplete, Rerun or Complete. If the sample status
is Programmed, the new program information will overwrite the previous program
information.
Programming a sample
Figure 2.12 Sample screen
2 Enter the sample ID in the ID field.
Sample ID is composed of numbers, or letters and numbers. Up to 10 digits can be

entered. The first sample on each day is numbered as 1. Duplicate sample IDs are not
allowed before the next time the samples are released.
3 Enter the sample position.

A sample position consists of Crsl and Pos. Routine samples can be programmed
with virtual sample carousel. Up to 10 virtual sample carousels are provided, and the
programming on each day starts from position No.1 of sample carousel 1. Occupied
positions must not be used for programming before being released.
4 Select a sample type from the Sample Type pull-down list.
2-29
The options include serum, plasma, urine, CSF and other.
5 Enter sample barcode in Barcode field or scan the barcode with a handheld barcode
reader
6 Enter sample comment or select one in the Comment field.
Up to 20 characters can be entered. You are allowed to define sample comments on

the Dictionary window.
7 Enter patient ID in the Patient ID field.

8 Choose desired chemistries.
Chemistries in various statuses are indicated by symbols and color.
Table 2.2 Description of chemistry statuses
Symbol or Color Chemistry Description
▲ Chemistry for The chemistry will be run with
increment test sample volume increased.
▼ Chemistry for The chemistry will be run with
decrement test sample volume decreased.
Masked chemistry The chemistry is masked. It can be
requested but cannot be run.
Chemistry name Available chemistry The chemistry can be requested for
in black analysis.
Chemistry name Unavailable The chemistry can be requested but
in red chemistry not allowed for analysis due to the
following reasons:
 The reagent is not loaded or
inventory is 0.
 The calibration status of the
chemistry is Cal Required, Cal
Failed or Cal Time Out.
 The chemistry is masked.
 The pretreat reagent is not
loaded or inventory is 0.
Chemistry frame Available chemistry The chemistry can be requested for
active analysis.
Chemistry frame Unavailable The chemistry cannot be requested
inactive and chemistry for analysis due to the following
appearing in grey reasons:
 Serum index is not applicable to
samples other than serum and
plasma.
 Requested chemistries cannot
be chosen again for samples that
are in progress, rerun, complete
or incomplete.
Chemistry frame Unselected chemistry The chemistry is not selected.
in normal color
Chemistry frame Selected chemistry The chemistry is selected.
in blue
2-30
Symbol or Color Chemistry Description

Chemistry frame Auto selected serum The serum index chemistry is
in dark blue index chemistry automatically selected for serum
and plasma samples. When
deselected and requested again,
the chemistry appears in a blue
frame.
9 According to your actual needs, select Options F2 to set up the following
parameters:
 Sample volume
 Sample tube
 Off-line dilution factor
 Number of replicates.
 Predilution factor
Figure 2.13 Options window
10 Enable or disable sample blank for the sample.

Only when the Set Sample Blank Individually checkbox is selected on the Factory
Settings screen, the Sample Blank option will appear. If you need the settings,
11 If you want to run a chemistry with different parameter, enter the values in the
chemistry option area:
 Sample Vol
 Replicates
 Predilution
 Sample blank
 Pretreatment
12 Select OK.
13 Select Save F8.
2-31
Batch programming
For batch-programmed samples, all program information such as sample information,
chemistries and patient demographics other than position, ID and bar code are the same.
2 Enter the sample ID of the first sample.
3 Enter the start position to place the samples.


parameters:
 Sample volume
 Sample tube
 Sample blank
 Sample Vol
 Replicates
 Predilution
 Sample blank
 Pretreatment
2-32
10 Select OK.
11 Select Batch F3.
Figure 2.15 Program Batch window
12 Enter the sample ID of the last sample.

13 Select OK.
Editing patient information
You can enter the patient information at any time. Patient information can be customized
through System setup screen. For more details, please refer to 8.9 Customizing Patient
Demographics. When sample analysis is finished, you can view and edit the sample
information on the Current Results and History Results screens.
2 Enter the sample ID in the ID field.
3 Select Demog F1.
Figure 2.16 Demographics window
4 To change the priority of the sample, select or deselect the STAT checkbox.
5 Enter the relevant patient information.
6 To restore the default patient information, select Restore F3.
7 Select Save F7 to save your input.
8 To edit demographics of other patients, select Prev F4 or Next F5.
2-33
Editing and confirming program information

If the programmed sample is not in progress, you are allowed to edit the program
information and add more chemistries. Samples that are being analyzed, rerun,
incomplete or complete must not be edited. New chemistries can be added to samples of
any status.
2 Enter the sample ID in the Sample ID field, or enter the sample position in the Crsl
and Pos fields.
The program information of the sample is displayed.
3 Edit the following information:

 STAT property
 Sample type
 Comment
 Chemistries
 Panels
 Patient demographics
 Sample options and chemistry options
4 Confirm the program information.
5 Select Save F8.
6 Select Prev F6 or Next F7 to view other samples.
2.8.2 Loading Routine Samples
BIOHAZARD
Inappropriate handling of samples may lead to biohazardous infection. Do not touch the
samples directly with your hands. Wear gloves and lab coat, if necessary, goggles. In case
your skin contacts the samples, follow standard laboratory safety procedure and consult
a doctor.
CAUTION
Do not use expired samples; otherwise, unreliable test results may be caused.
NOTE
Before loading sample, ensure that there are no air bubbles inside the sample cup so as
to avoid inaccurate test results.

2 Select List F5.
The sample list shows all programmed samples, controls and chemistries, including
the following information:
 Sample ID or control name
 Sample bar code or control lot number
2-34
 Position
 Patient name of patient samples
 Chemistry
 Sample status
3 Select Print F7.
Samples and controls are printed out respectively.
4 Select Exit F8.

5 Load samples to the sample carousel according to the printed list.
2.8.3 Running Routine Samples

After programming and loading the samples, you can start the analysis. To view sample
results, refer to 8.12 Results Recall (8-35).
is displayed.
2 Select a sample carousel to which the samples are loaded.

4 Select a patient sample range: All or Partial. When you select Partial, you should
specify a sample position range for analysis.
5 Select OK.
2-35
2.9 Programming STAT Samples

STAT sample program allows emergent samples to be programmed and analyzed with
high priority. The system provides common STAT and quick STAT program. Common
STAT program is used in daytime to run emergent samples with higher priority than
routine samples. Quick STAT program is mainly used in nighttime and at weekends to
program emergent samples quickly with higher priority than routine and common STAT
samples.
2.9.1 Programming STAT Samples

Programming single STAT Sample
2 Enter the sample ID in the Sample ID field.

entered. The first sample on each day is numbered as 1. Duplicate sample IDs are not
allowed before the next time the samples are released.
3 Mark the STAT checkbox.

When the STAT checkbox is marked, the default sample position is the STAT position
available on the sample carousel.
4 If you do not want to use the default position, then enter the sample position.
6 Enter barcode in barcode field or scan the barcode with a handheld barcode reader.


parameters:
 Sample volume
 Sample tube
 Sample blank
 Sample Vol
2-36
 Replicates
 Predilution
 Sample blank
 Pretreatment
12 Select OK.
13 Select Save F8.
Batch programming STAT Samples

For batch-programmed samples, all program information such as sample information,
chemistries and patient demographics other than position, ID and bar code are the same.
2 Enter the sample ID of the first sample.
3 Mark the STAT checkbox.
When the STAT checkbox is marked, the default sample position is the STAT position
available on the sample carousel.


parameters:
 Sample volume
 Sample tube
 Sample blank
 Sample Vol
 Replicates
 Predilution
 Sample blank
 Pretreatment
11 Select OK.
12 Select Batch F3.
2-37
Figure 2.18 Program Batch window
13 Enter the sample ID of the last sample.

14 Select OK.
Quickly programming STAT Samples
1 Select on upper right corner of the main screen. The STAT Sample Program
window is displayed.
Figure 2.19 STAT Sample Program window
2 Enter the sample ID. The first emergent sample on each day is numbered as 9001.

entered. Duplicate sample IDs are not allowed before the next time the samples are
released.
5 Select a sample tube type. The options include micro and standard.
6 Confirm the default chemistries.
7 To select more chemistries, perform the following steps:
 Select Chems F3.
 Choose chemistries and panels to be run for emergent samples.
 Select Save F7.
8 Select Demog F1 to enter patient demographics.
parameters:
 Sample volume
2-38
 Sample blank
 Sample tube
 Sample Vol
 Replicates
 Predilution
 Sample blank
 pretreatment
11 Select OK.
12 Select Save F7;
13 Select Close F8 to close the window.
2.9.2 Starting Analysis
BIOHAZARD
a doctor.
CAUTION
1 Load emergent samples to the sample carousel.
is displayed.

2-39
5 Select a patient sample range:
All or Partial. When you select Partial, you should specify a sample position range for
analysis.
6 Select OK.
2-40
2.10 Test Status and Test Control

During the analysis, you can check reagent inventory on the Reagent/Calibration
screen, and view test status of calibrators, controls, routine and emergent samples on the
Program - Status screen. View the reagent carousel status through Reagent - Status
screen. If needed, you can pause or stop analysis, or change the sample carousel and
reagent carousel, during test.
2.10.1 Checking Reagent Status

The screen displays by default the inventory of ISE reagent and ISE calibration status,
as well as inventory and days left of wash solutions and physiological saline. When
the inventory is less than the alarm limit, the system will give an alarm and mark the
chemistry or wash solution name with different colors.
 Yellow: Warning. The reagent is insufficient or has been expired.
 Red: Serious. The reagent is exhausted.
Figure 2.21 ISE reagent/calibration screen

3 Select the up-/down-arrow buttons to show the biochemistry screen.
2-41
Figure 2.22 Biochemistry reagent/calibration screen
The screen displays the inventory and calibration status of the biochemistry reagents.
When the reagent inventory is less than the alarm limit, the system will give an
alarm and mark the chemistry name and chemistries left with different colors.
 Yellow: Warning. The number of chemistries left is lower than the alarm limit, or
the reagent is expired, or the calibration status of the reagent is Cal Time
Extended, Calculated, Edited or Cal Overridden.
 Red: Serious. The number of chemistries left is 0, or at least one reagent type is
not loaded, or the calibration status of the reagent is Cal Failed, Cal Timed Out, or
Cal Required. The chemistry can still be requested but will not be run. The
ongoing tests containing the chemistry will be invalidated.
2.10.2 Viewing Sample Carousel Status

1 Select Program - Status.
2-42
Figure 2.23 Status screen
2 View the status of calibrators, controls and samples on the sample carousel graph.
 White: The position is not being used for analysis, or occupied by other objects,
or conflicts with another sample.
 Grey: The sample is being programmed or rerun.
 Dark green: The sample is dispensed into a reaction cuvette.
 Red: All chemistries of the sample are run, but one or more of them have no
results.
 Green: All chemistries of the sample are run and have test results.
 Blue: The sample is being analyzed.
 : Indicate invalid sample.
 The sigh appears when duplicate sample bar code occurs, or positions of
controls and calibrators are occupied by patient samples, or invalid bar code
is detected. The conflicting positions of samples rather than controls and
calibrators can be released manually.
 A bar code is deemed invalid if it contains invalid characters or exceeds the
length limit, or is detected in an idle position but has no corresponding
sample information or default panel for analysis.
 Select Log F2 to find the specific causes.
 : The sample does not have programmed chemistries.

3 Choose a sample on the sample carousel graph.
The detailed information of the selected sample is displayed on the right side of the
screen:
 Sample position
 Sample status
2-43

 Sample ID (patient sample)
 Bar code (patient sample)
 Calibrator name and lot number (calibrator)
 Name and lot number (control sample)
4 Choose the following buttons as needed:
 Search F1: used to search for desired calibrator, control or patient sample.
 Log F2: used to recall controls and patient samples which are not complete due
to some reasons within the recent 24 hours.
 Release F3: used to release the specified or all positions on the current sample
carousel.
 Result F4: used to display the Current Results screen, on which you can recall
all controls and patient samples that are programmed and analyzed since the
system is started up.
 Scan F5: used to scan the specified position or all positions on the selected
sample carousel.
2.10.3 Viewing Reagent Carousel Status

1 Select Reagent - Reagent Carousel Status.
The Reagent Carousel screen is displayed. You can view the status of the reagent
carousel, each reagent and configured reagents.
Figure 2.24 Reagent carousel status
2-44
The simulated reagent carousel graph is shown in the middle of the screen. Reagent
carousel status includes vacant, sufficient reagent, insufficient reagent, expired, and
invalid reagent, marked by different colors.
3 Select a position to display its reagent information on the right.

4 Select the following buttons to perform respective operations:
 Load F1: select this button to load the reagent.
 End Load F2: If reagent bar code reader is configured and the reagents have
been loaded, select this button to scan the reagent carousel; if Auto Refresh
Reagent Inventory is selected in system setup, the reagents whose inventory is
0 can be refreshed as available when End Load F2 is selected.
 Inventory F3: select this button to check reagent inventory.
2.10.4 Sample Stop

Sample stop means pausing sample dispensing during test process, so that you can load
and unload samples on the sample carousel. Click to request sample stop. In the
status display area of the screen shows the countdown for sample stop. When the started
tests finish sample dispensing, the system enters the Samp Load status. Then you are
allowed to start loading and unloading samples.
To cancel sample stop and resume the test, select .
2.10.5 Reagent Stop

Reagent stop means pausing reagent dispensing during test process, so that you can load
and unload reagents on the reagent carousel. Biochemistry reagents and ISE reagent can
be stopped respectively and are independent of each other. Click Load F1 to request
reagent stop. In the status display area of the screen shows the countdown for reagent
stop. When the started tests finish reagent dispensing, the system enters the Rgt Load
status. Then you are allowed to start loading and unloading reagents.
To cancel reagent stop and resume the test, select or No Load F1.
2.10.6 Emergency Stop

Emergency stop will terminate all measurements on the instrument, and all tests that are
not finished yet will be invalidated. Do not use emergent stop unless it is really needed,
for example, system failure. Emergency stop can be performed in any system status.
Select the icon on upper right corner of the screen, and then select OK. All
unfinished actions of the system are cancelled, all pumps and valves are turned off, and
the system enters the failure status.
To restore system failure, select Utility - Commands, and then select Home. To resume
the analysis, select the icon.
2.10.7 Switching Carousels

Switching carousels means changing sample carousel and reagent carousel during
measurement, so that the samples and reagents on them can be tested.
2-45
Switching sample carousel

The system supports 10 virtual sample carousels, on all of which samples can be
programmed in order to improve the test efficiency.
After samples on multiple sample carousels are programmed, if those on the current
sample carousel are about to finish sample dispensing during test process, the screen
shows the countdown for sample loading and the Start Conditions window pops up.
Select desired sample carousel, load samples to it, and then select OK to resume the test.
Switching reagent carousel

The system supports 2 virtual reagent carousels, on both of which biochemistry reagents,
wash solution and physiological saline can be loaded. However, reagents of the same
chemistry must be loaded on the same carousel, and only the chemistries on the same
carousel can be tested in every batch of tests.
To run chemistries on the other reagent carousel, click to display the Start
Conditions window. Select the other reagent carousel, load reagents to it, and then select
OK to resume the test.
2-46
2.11 Daily Maintenance

After finishing all tests every day, you are required to perform the daily maintenance
procedures and those maintenance procedures indicated in yellow.
Daily maintenance procedures include:
 Check probes/mixers/wash wells
 Check sample/reagent syringes
 Check deionized water connection
 Check waste tank connection
 Check concentrated wash solution
 Check sample probe wash solution
 Clean electrode tubes
2-47
2.12 Powering Off

1 Make sure that the system is in Standby status.
2 Select Exit - Shut Down on the left of the main screen. The Windows operating
system will quit automatically.
3 Switch off the power in the following order:
 Printer
 Monitor display of the operation unit
 Analyzing unit power switch
 Water supply module (optional)
 Drainage module(optional)
When the analyzing unit power is switched off, the refrigeration system is still
running. If you are going to store the system for over 7 days, switch off the main
power.
2-48
2.13 Check after Powering Off

1 Remove the sample carousel cover, and then remove the calibrators, controls and
patient samples.
2 Check the analyzer panel for stains and wipe them off with clean gauze if any.
3 Check the high-concentration waste tank. Clear it if necessary.
2-49
2-50
3 System Setup
This chapter introduces the basic setup options of the system, which include:
 System options
 Chemistries
 Calibration
 Quality control
3-1
3 System Setup
3.1 System Setup Options

3.1.1 Introduction
This section summarizes the setup options on the System Setup screen as shown in the
figure below.
Figure 3.1 System Setup screen
3.1.2 Sample Options and Reagent Alarm Limits

Set up the following sample and test options.
Default sample type

The system supports a couple of sample types, which include serum, plasma, urine,
cerebrospinal fluid samples (CSF) and other. The default is serum. When the default
sample type is set up, it will be selected by default for programmed samples on the
Sample screen.
Default sample cup type

The system supports the standard sample cup and Microtube. The default is the standard
sample cup. When the default sample cup type is set up, it will be selected by default for
programmed samples on the Sample screen.
Valid period of samples

Valid period of samples refers to the time interval that a patient sample is first loaded to
the sample carousel and then expired. When the valid period of samples is set up, only
samples within this period are allowed for analysis. If the valid period is not set up, the
samples are valid all the time.
The valid period ranges from 1 to 99 in hour or day. The default is day.
3-2
3 System Setup
Valid period is applicable to patient samples rather than calibrators and controls. Once
the collection time is entered, the system will calculate the valid period from the time
when the sample is collected; otherwise, the time when the sample is programmed will be
used for calculating the valid period.
Special wash sample probe

After going through a large number of tests, the sample probe may get clogged. To prevent
this from happening, enable the sample probe special wash function to execute additional
cleaning procedure for the sample probe during measurement in order to avoid clogging.
Enter the number of tests in the Number of Tests field. The input range is 100-10,000,
and the default is 400. When the number of tests is finished, the system will clean the
sample probe with wash solution in an additional cleaning procedure.
Auto serum index

When the auto serum index function is enabled, the SI chemistry on the Sample screen
will be selected by default for programmed serum or plasma samples, and the system will
measure the degree of Hemolysis, icterus and lipemia contained in these samples. If the
Qualitative Analysis checkbox on the Auto Serum Index window is marked, the system
will display qualitative flags of serum index on patient reports.
Serum index is only used to evaluate the integrity of samples rather than making a
diagnosis for patients.
Reaction temperature monitoring

The reaction temperature can be monitored before analysis begins.
 When the Start Analysis When Temperature is Steady checkbox is selected, the
system will check before analysis begins if the reaction temperature is normal. If the
temperature is normal, you are allowed to select to start analysis; otherwise, a
message will appear indicating analysis is forbidden in current condition.
 When the Start Analysis When Temperature is Steady checkbox is not selected,
the system will still check before analysis begins if the reaction temperature is
normal and within 37±2.0°C. If the temperature is normal, you are allowed to select
to start analysis; otherwise, the system will remind you that the results may be
influenced if you continue to start analysis. You may continue or abort the analysis.
Alarm when reagent exhausted

Each chemistry can have more than one bottle of reagent loaded. You can set up alarms for
the case that the reagent is running out.
Select the Alarm when reagent exhausted option. When the reagent is exhausted, the
system will give an alarm. If the option is not selected, the system will not give an alarm.
Manage reagents by lot

This option is used to monitor the calibration status and time of each reagent lot,
supports reagent lot calibration, and displays calibration results of each reagent lot.
When this option is enabled, special attentions should be paid for the following
operations:
 Loading reagents: You are required to input the lot number when loading reagents
manually. The lot number of bar-coded reagents cannot be left blank; otherwise,
reagent load will fail.
3-3
3 System Setup
 Viewing calibration status and requesting calibration: You can view calibration status
and time of each reagent lot, and request calibration accordingly. For more
information of reagent lot calibration, refer to Reagent lot calibration (Page 2-23).
 Recalling calibration results: You can recall calibration results of each reagent lot on
the Biochemistry Calibration screen.
 Auto calibration: Auto calibration by reagent bottle or lot is forbidden. When a
different reagent lot is used, the system will request and run calibration
automatically. Reagent lots with valid calibration factors will not be calibrated again
when used for measurement.
Special wash before test

Select this option to execute a special wash with wash solution for the sample probe,
reagent probes and mixers before a batch of tests. If it is unselected, no special wash will
be performed before a batch of tests.
Result display settings

This option is used to set up flags and color for results less than or greater than the
reference range, as well as color for results less than or greater than the critical range.
Click the relevant color setup button, choose desired color, and then select OK. The system
will display flags in the Flag column of the Current Results and History Results screens
and on patient reports if the test result is less than or greater than the reference range.
The flags can be composed of numbers, letters and symbols for no more than 10 digits.
The default flags for reference range are "^" and "v". If a result is greater than the high
limit, "^" will appear near the result; if a result is less than the low limit, "v" will appear
near the result.
If test results are beyond the critical range, they will appear in the set color.
Reagent alarm limit

Reagent alarm limit is only applicable to ISE reagent. If the inventory alarm limit is set up,
the system will give an alarm and mark the reagent with colors when the reagent
inventory is less than the alarm limit.
For more information about reagent inventory alarm limit, refer to 5.4 Reagent Inventory
Alarm Limits Setup (page 5-6).
Alarm Sound volume

This option is to adjust the volume of alarm tone and beep. Alarm tone is the sound of a
system alarm and beep is given when mis-input or mis-operation occurs. Volume of both
sounds can be adjusted manually according to the practical conditions of the
environment. Drag the slider in the Alarm Volume and Beep Volume fields horizontally.
The scale is ascending from left to right. When the slider is moved to the leftmost position,
the alarm buzzer is silenced.
Since the Windows 10 does not support alarming through buzzer, you should install an
audio card on your computer in order to ensure the alarm and beep sound can be
adjusted and given.
ISE prime cycle

For details of ISE primes setup, refer to 12.9 ISE Prime (page 12-21).
3-4
3 System Setup
3.1.3 Auto Rerun Setup

Select Utility - System Setup, and click the down arrow button to access the auto rerun
setup screen. The system provides a couple of conditions for auto rerun. When selected
conditions are satisfied, chemistries for which auto rerun has been enabled will be rerun
automatically with the specified sample volume type.
Select the checkbox to the left of a condition, and then select a sample volume type from
the pull-down list to the right of the condition. The sample volume type options include:
increased, standard, decreased, and last volume. When the condition is satisfied,
chemistries with auto rerun enabled will be rerun automatically with the selected sample
volume type.
Only users who have the permissions of system setup are allowed to set up auto rerun
conditions.
Above Critical High

Select a rerun mode from the pull-down list box. It means that the system will rerun the
tests with the selected mode when the test result exceeds the critical range high limit.
Unselection means this item will not be checked.
Below Critical Low

tests with the selected mode when the test result is lower than the critical range low limit.
Above Linearity High

tests with the selected mode when the test result exceeds the linearity high limit.
Below Linearity Low

tests with the selected mode when the test result is lower than the linearity low limit.
Above Highest Calib.

Select a rerun mode from the pull-down list box. When selected, it means the analyzer will
rerun the sample with the selected mode automatically if its response is beyond that of
the highest-concentration calibrator.
Below Lowest Calib.

rerun the sample with the selected mode automatically if its response is beyond that of
the lowest-concentration calibrator.
3-5
3 System Setup
Substrate Depletion
rerun the tests with the selected mode automatically if the substrate ran out during
running.
Prozone Check Error

tests with the selected mode when prozone occurs during reaction process.
Nonlinear
Select a rerun mode from the pull-down list box. If the calculated linearity is greater than
the defined linearity limit, the system will rerun the tests with the selected mode.
No Linear Interval
tests with the selected mode when the number of measuring points within substrate limit
is less than or equal to 3. This option applies to Kinetic method only.
No Calculation Interval
Select a rerun mode from the pull-down list box. If the number of measuring points within
linearity range is less than 2 during high-activity enzyme measurement, the linearity
range will be expanded. If the number of measuring points is less than 2 even when the
lag time is included, the system will rerun the tests with the selected mode. This option
applies to Kinetic method only.
3.1.4 Instrument Setup Options

On the Instrument Setup window, you are allowed to perform the following settings.
Sleep and awake setup

The Sleep/Awake setup option is used to set up the auto sleep time interval, and the
auto startup and awake time of the system.
If the auto sleep time interval is set up, the counter will start counting down once the
system enters Standby status and begins to sleep when the countdown is finished.
The system allows you to choose a weekday and specific time that the system will be
started up or woken up automatically. When the time is reached, the system will be
started up or woken up automatically no matter if it is off or sleeping. For more
information, refer to 11.5 Sleep and Awake Setup (page 11-8).
Masking/Unmasking Chemistries
The Masking/Unmasking Chemistries option is used to disable chemistries, which will
still be displayed on the Sample, Quality Control and Reagent/Calibration screens.
Masked chemistries can be requested but will not be run for sample analysis.
3-6
3 System Setup
For details of chemistry masking/unmasking, refer to 10.9 Masking/Unmasking

Chemistries (page 10-22).
Dictionary setup
The Dictionary option is provided for setting up and managing frequent data information,
such as: result unit, sample type, sample comment, QC comment, etc.
For more information, refer to 11.6 Dictionary Setup (page 11-11).
System communication options

The Com Setup option is used to set up the IP address for connections between the PC
and LIS/RMS. For more details, please refer to 14 LIS and RMS.
Select language
The operating software is displayed by default in the same language as the current
operating software. You are allowed to change the language of the operating software.
Select System Setup - Instrument F1 - 5 Language, and then choose a language from
the following options: Chinese, English, Turkish, Russian, French, Portuguese, Italian,
Spanish, and Polish. Select OK to save the settings. The language you select will take effect
only when you reboot the operating software.
Software upgrading
By running the upgrade program, you are allowed to upgrade the operating software,
control software and ISE module software. For more information, refer to 11.7 Software
Upgrade (page 11-13).
Viewing software versions

The Version Info window shows the versions of the operating software, control software,
ISE software and database. For more information, refer to 11.8 Software Version (page
11-14).
Date and time

The Date and Time option allows you to set the current date and time, select the
date/time formats to be displayed on software screens and printed reports, and restore
default date and time formats.
When adjusted, the date and time will influence the time left of reagents and calibration,
shelf life of samples, and run length of two-control evaluation. The date and time cannot
be edited when the system status is Running. Modification of the date and time will not
affect samples on the Current Results screen or QC evaluation and Twin-Plot chart.
Follow this procedure to change system date and time:
1 Select Utility - System Setup.
2 Select Instrument F1.
3 Select 8 Date/Time.
3-7
3 System Setup
Figure 3.2 Date/Time window
4 Select date in the Date area.

5 Set the time in the Time area.
Manually enter the hour, minute and second, or move the cursor to hour, minute and
second, and then click the up/down arrows to adjust the time.
6 Choose a date format from the Order pull-down list.
 yyyy-mm-dd: e.g. 2014-08-27
 dd-mm-yyyy: e.g. 27-08-2014
 mm-dd-yyyy: e.g. 08-27-2014
7 Choose a time format from the Time Format pull-down list.
 24-hour: e.g. 14:33:27
 12-hour: e.g. 02:33:27
8 To restore the date and time defaults, select Restore Defaults.
9 Select OK to save your input information.
10 Select Exit to close the window.
QC run length and auto QC
By choosing the QC Evaluation, you are allowed to set up the QC run length and auto QC
conditions.
For more information, refer to 7 Quality Control (page 7-1).
Auto release of samples

The system allows setting of daily release time of samples. When the set time is reached,
samples that are currently in Complete status will be released automatically.
For more information, refer to 8.6.3 Auto Release of Samples (page 8-25).
Voice tone setup

This option is used to customize the alarm sound and beep sound.
For more information refer to “11.9 Voice Tone Setup” (Page 11-16).
3-8
3 System Setup
Optimizing result display

This option is used to set up display mode of sample results that are beyond the linearity
range.
For more information refer to 8.11 Optimizing Result Display (Page 8-33).
Customizing Sample Information

Customizing sample information allows you to specify sample information to be displayed
on the Sample screen. For more information, refer to 8.8 Customizing Sample
Information (Page 8-28).
Customizing Patient Demographics

You can specify patient demographics to be displayed, its default and its display order on
the Patient Demographics screen. For more information, refer to 8.9 Customizing
Patient Demographics (Page 8-29).
Reagent/Calibration Setup
Via Reagent/Calibration option on instrument setup screen, you can configure whether
to automatically refresh the reagent with 0 inventory as available for test, when reagent
has been loaded and End Load F2 button is selected. For more information, refer to 5.5.4
Auto Refreshing Reagent Inventory (Page 5-8).
Customize reagent display

This option is used to set up reagent information displayed on the biochemistry
reagent/calibration screen.
For more information, refer to 5.2 Customizing Reagent Display(Page5-4).
3.1.5 Print Setup

The Print Setup window allows you to set up paper size and default printer. For more
information, refer to 9.2 Print Setup (page 9-7).
3.1.6 Bar Code Setup

The Bar Code option is used to set up sample and reagent bar code options. You are
allowed to set up the bar code options only when you equip your system with the bar
code module. For more information, refer to 13 Use of Bar Code (page 13-1).
3.1.7 Host Communication Setup

The Host option allows you to set up the host communication options and the
transmission methods of test results. For more information, refer to 14.2 Host
Communication.
3.1.8 User Accounts and Permissions

The User option allows you to define and edit user accounts, passwords and permissions.
For more information, refer to 11.4 User and Password Setup (page 11-5).
3-9
3 System Setup
3.2 Chemistries Setup

3.2.1 Introduction
Up to 200 chemistries can be defined and configured. The Chemistries screen is as
shown below:
Figure 3.3 Chemistries screen
Definition and setup of user-defined chemistries will be described in detail in the

following sections.
3.2.2 User-defined Chemistries Setup

Defining a chemistry
1 Select Utility - Chemistries.
2 Choose a blank frame in the chemistry list.
3 Select Define F1.
4 Enter the processing parameters and error detection limits of the chemistry.
5 Select Next F5 to save your input information and define more chemistries. Or
 Select Discard F6 to restore the default parameter settings.
 Select Save F7 to save your input information.
 Select Print F1 to print out the chemistry parameters.
6 Select Close F8 to exit the window.
Editing user-defined chemistries

You are allowed to edit user-defined chemistries if:
3-10
3 System Setup
 You have sufficient permissions, and

For user permission setup, refer to 11.4 User and Password Setup (page 11-5).
 The system is not running tests.
Editing user-defined chemistries is similar to defining a chemistry. Refer to other sections
in this chapter for details.
Viewing user-defined chemistries

You are allowed to view the following information in any system status:
 Processing parameters
 Error detection limits
 Slope and offset
 Reference/Critical range
 Carryover settings
Perform the following steps to view chemistries you have defined:
2 Choose a chemistry from the chemistry list.
3 Select Define F1 to view the processing parameters, error detection limits and
dilution factors.
4 Select Close F8 to close the Define/Edit Chemistries window.
5 Select Ref Range F4 to view the reference range and critical range.
6 Select Slope/Offset F5 to view the slope and offset values.
7 Select Carryover F8 to view the carryover settings.
Deleting a user-defined chemistry

Make sure that you have sufficient permission to delete a chemistry you have defined. For
user permission setup, refer to 11.4 User and Password Setup (page 11-5). SI and ISE
chemistries are not allowed to be deleted.
1 Remove the reagent from the reagent carousel.
3 Select the chemistry in the chemistry list.
4 Check if the following conditions are satisfied:
 The system is not running tests.
 The selected chemistry is not requested or run for samples, calibrators and
controls.
 The selected chemistry is disabled.
 The corresponding reagent has been unloaded from the reagent carousel.
5 Select Delete F2.
All test results, data and parameters related to the chemistry are cleared.
3.2.3 Processing Parameters

This section introduces the processing parameters for user-defined chemistries. The
processing parameters setup window is as shown below:
3-11
3 System Setup
Figure 3.4 Processing parameters setup window
Chem
Chemistry name is the only identity of a chemistry and must not be duplicate. A chemistry
name can be composed of up to 10 characters.
No.
No. is a unique number for chemistry. It can be left blank but must not be duplicate.
Chemistry number is composed of numbers, and it ranges from 1-400 for open-reagent
chemistries.
Sample type
Sample type refers to the samples to which the chemistry is applicable. The options
include serum, plasma, urine, CSF and other. The options available in the Sample Type
pull-down list are those supported by the chemistry, and the default is the default sample
type.
The system allows definition of chemistry parameters for more than one sample type,
including the processing parameters and error detection limits. During definition of
chemistries, the parameters should be firstly defined for serum sample, and then other
sample types. Such chemistries will be calibrated with serum sample parameters by
default.
Chemistry
Chemistry is the complete form of chemistry name. It can be composed of up to 50
characters. The input is not case sensitive. The Chemistry field can be left blank or
duplicate.
A chemistry is only represented by its print name on patient reports and appears on
other reports in the form of short name.
Print Name
Print name is displayed on patient reports representing a chemistry. It can be composed
of up to 15 characters. The print name can be edited and duplicate. When this field is left
blank, the short form of the chemistry name will appear on reports. A chemistry is
represented by its short name on all reports other than patient reports.
3-12
3 System Setup
Reaction Type
Reaction type is a measurement theory based on which chemistries are run for samples
and then calculated. The system supports three reaction types, which are Endpoint,
Fixed-time and Kinetic.
Table 3.1 Reaction types
Reaction Type Description
Endpoint Qualitative analysis is performed based on the absorption
spectrum and absorbed light intensity of the reactant when the
reaction becomes equilibrious.
Fixed-time For this reaction type, the reaction velocity is directly
proportional to the substrate concentration. As the substrate is
consumed continuously, the reaction velocity is decreasing
gradually, and so is the absorbance change rate. It will take a long
time for such reaction to become equilibrium, and the reaction
can get steady only after a delay.
Kinetic Kinetic, also called continuous monitoring method, is used to
continuously measure the multiple change points of a reactant or
substrate’s concentration which varies with the enzymatic
reaction, thus calculating the initial velocity of the enzymatic
reaction and then the enzyme activity. This reaction type is
mainly used for measurement of enzyme activity.
Reaction Direction
Reaction direction refers to the change trend of absorbance during the reaction process,
and includes two options:
 Positive: indicates increasing absorbance with time.
 Negative: indicates decreasing absorbance with time.
Primary Wavelength
The primary wavelength is chosen based on the light absorption features of the reactant
and used to measure the absorbed light intensity.
Options for primary wavelength include: 340nm, 380nm, 412nm, 450nm, 505nm, 546nm,
570nm, 605nm, 660nm, 700nm, 740nm and 800nm
Secondary Wavelength
The secondary wavelength is used to correct the absorbance measured at the primary
wavelength and eliminate the influence of noise, such as light flash and drift, and
scratches on cuvettes, etc. The two wavelengths cannot be equal.
Options for secondary wavelength include: blank, 340nm, 380nm, 412nm, 450nm, 505nm,
546nm, 570nm, 605nm, 660nm, 700nm, 740nm and 800nm
Unit
Changing the result units of the chemistries are allowed.
Changing the result units of both closed-reagent and open-reagent chemistries are
allowed. After changing the unit, you are required to update under the guidance of a
clinical professional calibrator concentrations, control concentrations and standard
deviations (SDs), reference ranges and offsets. Those test results calculated with the old
unit will remain unchanged.
Run calibration again after changing the result unit.
3-13
3 System Setup
Decimal
Decimal specifies the number of decimal places for test results. The decimal is allowed to
be edited. Up to 3 decimal places can be set up and respectively correspond to 0, 0.1, 0.01
and 0.001.
Blank Time and Reaction Time

Blank time refers to the period between dispensing of the second reactant (reagent or
sample) in reversed order and of the last reactant (reagent or sample).
For endpoint analysis, the reaction time refers to the time span from the start point of the
reaction to the end point; for fixed-time and Kinetic analysis, it refers to the period from
reaction equilibrium to the end of monitoring.
The blank time and reaction time are counted in measuring points.
Suppose the blank time range is N-P and the reaction time range is L-M. The start point is
the first measuring point after dispensing of R1.
Table 3.2 Blank time and reaction time input ranges for endpoint analysis
Endpoint Blank Time Reaction Time
When the blank absorbance is read before the reaction begins,
Single-reagent 2≤N≤P≤3 5≤L≤M≤33
Double-reagent 5≤N≤P≤15 16≤L≤M≤33
Triple-reagent 16≤N≤P≤41 46≤L≤M≤74
Quadruple-reagent 46≤N≤P≤56 57≤L≤M≤74
When the blank absorbance is read after the reaction begins,
Single-reagent 5≤N≤P P<L≤M≤33
Double-reagent 16≤N≤P P<L≤M≤33
Triple-reagent 46≤N≤P P<L≤M≤74
Quadruple-reagent 57≤N≤P P<L≤M≤74
When the blank absorbance is not subtracted,
Single-reagent N=P=0 5≤L≤M≤33
Double-reagent N=P=0 16≤L≤M≤33
Triple-reagent N=P=0 46≤L≤M≤74
Quadruple-reagent N=P=0 57≤L≤M≤74
Table 3.3 Blank time and reaction time input ranges for fixed-time and Kinetic analysis
Fixed-time and Kinetic Blank Time Reaction Time
Single-reagent 2≤N<P≤3 5≤L<M≤33
Double-reagent 5≤N<P≤15 16≤L<M≤33
Triple-reagent 16≤N<P≤41 46≤L<M≤74
Quadruple-reagent 46≤N<P≤56 57≤L<M≤74
Single-reagent N=P=0 5≤L<M≤33
Double-reagent N=P=0 16≤L<M≤33
Triple-reagent N=P=0 46≤L<M≤74
Quadruple-reagent N=P=0 57≤L<M≤74
3-14
3 System Setup
The blank time and reaction time are almost the same for both fixed-time and Kinetic
analysis, except that M-L≥2 is required for Kinetic analysis, that is, the reaction time
should include at least 3 measuring points.
Sample Volume, Standard, Aspirated, Diluent, Increased, and

Decreased
Sample volume is the standard sample amount, which should be dispensed in a normal
test. It ranges from 1.5μl to 45μl with an increment of 0.1μl. The default is 1.5μl. A
maximum of one decimal is allowed.
Aspirated volume refers to the amount of sample used for dilution at the specified ratio. It
ranges from 1.5μl to 45μl with an increment of 0.1μl. The default is blank. A maximum of
one decimal is allowed.
Diluent volume refers to the amount of diluent used for sample dilution. It ranges from
75μl to 200μl with an increment of 0.5μl. The default is blank. A maximum of one decimal
is allowed.
NOTE
If aspirated volume for dilution and diluent volume are defined, ensure the total sum of
them is within 110μl~245μl; otherwise, the settings cannot be saved.
The diluent volume for standard, increased and decreased analysis can be defined in the
same way.
Decreased sample volume indicates the sample amount required for a decrement test. It
Increased sample volume indicates the sample amount required for an increment test. It
NOTE
If aspirated volume for dilution and diluent volume are defined, standard, decreased and
increased analysis will be performed with diluted sampled; otherwise, it will be done
based on standard, decreased or increased sample volume.
Sample Blank
Sample blank is similar to sample analysis except for use of equivalent amount of
physiological saline. Sample blank is used for removal of non-chromogenesis reaction,
such as influence of sample interference (Hemolysis, icterus and lipemia) on absorbance
readings. Sample blank is only effective for single-reagent endpoint chemistries.
Mark the Sample Blank checkbox with a tick. The chemistry will be sample blanked
before the reaction begins, and the Sample Blank checkbox on the Options and Rerun
windows will be selected automatically and cannot be modified.
Auto Rerun
The Auto Rerun option is used to rerun the chemistries when the auto rerun conditions
are satisfied.
Mark the Auto Rerun checkbox means enabling the auto rerun option.
For more information about auto rerun, refer to 8.2.4 Rerunning Samples (page 8-4).
3-15
3 System Setup
Reagent Volume and Diluent

Reagent volume specifies the reagent amount, which should be dispensed for
measurement. The system allows the dispensing of four reagents: R1,R2,R3 and R4.
Reagent Reagent volume Diluent volume Reagent volume+

Diluent volume
Non-concentrated reagent
R1~R4 10μl~200μl, with an N/A 10μl~200μl
increment of 0.5μl
Concentrated reagent
R1 10μl~200μl, with an 10μl~200μl,with an 100μl~200μl
increment of 0.5μl increment of 0.5μl
The second, third and fourth reagents are allowed only when the reagent(s) prior to them
are configured. For example, R2 can be set up with the prerequisite of R1; R3 with R1and
R2; R4 with R1, R2 and R3. If one of R2, R3 and R4 is removed, the remaining reagents
behind it will also be removed and appear in grey.
Diluent volume refers to the amount of diluent used for reagent dilution. The combined
volume of all reagents, reagent diluent and sample must be within 100μl and 300μl. If
your input does not satisfy the requirements of reaction mixture volume, the system will
display an error message. Check the sample volume, reagent diluent and reagent volumes
you have entered, and change them if necessary.
3.2.4 Error Detection Limits

This section introduces the error detection limits for user-defined chemistries. The error
detection limits setup window is as shown below:
3-16
3 System Setup
Figure 3.5 Error detection limits setup window
Linearity Range
The linearity range indicates the measurable range of the system, during which the test
result is linear to the response R. Determine the linearity range according to the reagent
package insert.
 Linearity range(standard): no more than 12 digits. The lower limit less than or equal
to the higher limit. The default is blank.
 Linearity range(increased): no more than 12 digits. The lower limit less than or equal
to the higher limit. The default is blank.
 Linearity range(decreased): no more than 12 digits. The lower limit less than or
equal to the higher limit. The default is blank.
The system compares the calculated sample concentration with the linearity range. When
the high limit is exceeded, the > sign will appear near the result; when the low limit is
exceeded, the < sign will appear.
The default is blank, which means not performing this check.
Linearity Limit
Linearity limit is only applicable to Kinetic analysis, in which the absorbance change is
linear to the reaction time. If the reagent undergoes substrate depletion, or the
photometer fluctuates, or the reaction mixture is not stirred evenly, the test results may
be unreliable. Therefore, the linearity of the measuring period is calculated and then
compared with the set linearity limit.
If the reaction data within the linearity range does not satisfy the linearity limit, the
system will flag the test result with “LIN” on the patient report.
The linearity limit can be any number between 0 and 1 with a maximum of 2 decimals.
The default is blank, which means not performing this check.
3-17
3 System Setup
Substrate Depletion
The Substrate Depletion option is only applicable to Kinetic and fixed-time analysis. It can
be obtained through the following formula:
Substrate depletion limit = Input substrate depletion limit + K(L1-Lb)
Where,
 L1: refers to the absorbance of primary wavelength measured at the first measuring
point when sample is dispensed and stirred in sample analysis.
 Lb: refers to the absorbance of primary wavelength measured at the first measuring
point when sample is dispensed and stirred in a reagent blank test or calibration
with 0-concentration calibrator.
 K: correction factor of liquid volume
Results will not be adjusted when L1-Lb≤0 or the measurement is not a reagent blank or
0-concentration calibration. Substrate depletion is not applicable for calibrations.
We deem that substrate depletion occurs if the primary wavelength absorbance of the
first measuring point is greater than the substrate depletion limit in ascending reactions
or lower than the substrate depletion limit in descending reactions. When substrate
depletion occurs, the system will flag the test result with “BOE” in the patient report.
The substrate depletion limit can be any number within -33,000-33,000. The default is
blank, which means not performing this check.
R1 Blank Absorbance Range

The R1 Blank Abs indicates the allowable range of the maximum absorbance in the
previous period prior to sample dispensing. The input range must be within
-33,000-33,000, and the low limit lower than the high limit.
If the maximum absorbance in the previous period prior to sample dispensing is beyond
the set range, the system will flag the test result with “RBK”.
The default is -33,000-33,000; the field can be left blank.
Mixed Blank Absorbance Range

The Mixed Blank Abs indicates the allowable range of the absorbance measured at the
end point of a zero-concentration calibrator reaction or a reagent blank reaction. The
input range must be within -33,000-33,000, and the low limit lower than the high limit.
If the absorbance measured at the reaction end point is beyond the set range, the system
will flag the test result with “MBK”.
Blank Response
The Blank Response specifies the allowable range of the response in a zero-concentration
calibrator analysis or a reagent blank test. The input range can be any number within
-33,000-33,000, and the low limit lower than the high limit.
If the response is beyond the set range, the system will flag the test result with “BLK”.
On-board Stability
It refers to the number of days that the reagent can be kept valid since uncapped at the
first time.
The input range must be within 1-999 days. The default is blank.
3-18
3 System Setup
Twin Chemistry
Twin Chemistry is associated with the current chemistry, and the two chemistries are run
with the same reagent. Results of two twin chemistries are calculated in the same test.
The chemistry whose result will be firstly calculated should be defined prior to the
associated chemistry. Volume of the shared reagent and sample volume must be the same
for the two chemistries. Only the two chemistries that have had no reagents loaded can be
configured as twins.
For more information about twin chemistries, refer to “10.1 Twin Chemistries” (Page
10-2).
Reagent Alarm Limit

Set up the reagent alarm limit for the chemistry. The input range is 1-100, and the default
is 10. It can be left blank. When the number of chemistries left is lower than the limit, an
alarm will occur; if no alarm limit is defined, the system will not give an alarm.
Only when sample type is Serum can reagent alarm limit be defined.
Enzyme Linear Extension

Linearity limit is only applicable to Kinetic analysis. Select this option to enable enzyme
linear extension function. For more details, please refer to 4.5.6 Enzyme Linearity Range
Extension.
Prozone Check
The Prozone check can be performed in two ways: rate check and antigen addition.
Rate check:
You are required to set up the following six parameters for the rate check method, which
are Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, PC and ABS. The unit is the same as the reaction time and blank time.
Enter the six parameters as follows:
 Single-reagent chemistries: 5≤q1<q2<q3<q4≤33, “5” is the first measuring point
after the sample is dispensed and stirred.
 Double-reagent chemistries: 16≤q1<q2<q3<q4≤33, “16” is the first measuring point
after R2 is dispensed and stirred.
 Triple-reagent chemistries: 46≤q1<q2<q3<q4≤74, “46” is the first measuring point
 Quadruple-reagent chemistries: 57≤q1<q2<q3<q4≤74, “57” is the first measuring
point after R4 is dispensed and stirred.
 PC: a number between -99999999 and 99999999, with four decimals.
 ABS: any integer between -99999999 and 99999999.
Antigen addition:
For the antigen addition method, you need to enter the parameters, which are PCM, Q1,
Q2,Q3 and Q4.
When Q3=Q4=0, abslowlimit can not be entered.
 74≥q2≥46, 44≥q1≥reaction end point.
 If one parameter among PCM,Q1 and Q2 is not entered, the antigen addition method
is not applied.
3-19
3 System Setup
Sample Pretreatment
Enable the sample pretreatment function to pretreat patient samples with pretreatment
reagent for the chemistry. Sample pretreatment includes common pretreatment and blood
cell pretreatment.
Only when the Pretreatment checkbox is selected, common pretreatment, blood cell
pretreatment, pretreatment of calibrator and control can be enabled, and the pretreat
sample volume and pretreatment reagent volume can be set.
Pretreatment chemistries cannot be set with predilution factor. Setting pretreatment
parameters for the twin of a former chemistry is not allowed.
Common Pretreatment
Select this option to pretreat the samples other than whole blood samples. Probe aspirates
the sample from the top of the sample tube and then the sample is pretreated with
pretreatment reagent.
Blood Cell Pretreatment
Select this option to pretreat the whole blood samples. Probe aspirates the sample from
the bottom of the sample tube and then the sample is pretreatment with pretreatment
reagent.
Calibrator Pretreatment
When this option is enabled, the calibrators of the chemistry will be pretreated with the
pretreatment reagent during calibration test according to the set pretreat sample volume
and pretreatment reagent volume.
Control Pretreatment
When this option is enabled, the controls of the chemistry will be pretreated with the
pretreatment reagent during QC test according to the set pretreat sample volume and
pretreatment reagent volume.
Pretreat sample volume
Enter the pretreat sample volume within 1.5 μL - 45 μL, with an increment of 0.1 μL. The
default is 4 μL.
Pretreatment reagent volume
Enter the pretreatment reagent volume within 75 μL - 200 μL, with an increment of 0.5
μL. The default is 200 μL.
The sum of pretreat sample volume and pretreatment reagent volume must be within 110
μL - 245 μL.
3.2.5 Flag Qualitative Result

When the analyzer is in the status of standby, incubation, hibernation or stop, you can flag
the result of the chemistries qualitatively and the results will be represented by a
qualitative flag.
2 Select the desired chemistry.
3 Select Define F1.
4 Select Qualitative F3.
3-20
3 System Setup
Figure 3.6 Qualitative result window
5 Select Use Qualitative Result.

6 Enter the qualitative range and flag.
For instance, type in “10” in the first edit box of the Range field, and then enter “+” in
the Flag field of the same row. If the chemistry result (L1) contained in a sample is
lower than 10, the “+” sign will be added to the result in the patient report. Type in
“20” in the second edit box below the Range icon and “+-” in the second edit box
below the Flag icon. If the chemistry result (L2) is greater than 10 and lower than 20,
the result will be flagged with the “+-” sign. The cycle continues. If the result is
greater than L5, the six flag will appear on the patient report.
7 Select OK to save the setup.
Refer to these steps to flag the qualitative result of ISE chemistries and calculations.
3.2.6 Slope and Offset Adjustment

The slope and offset are calculation factors that are used to compensate the test results of
a chemistry when the QC result of the chemistry is slightly deviating.
When the measurement is finished, the system adjusts the test result with the following
equation:
y=kx+b
Where, x is the test result before adjustment, y is the result after adjustment, k is the
slope, and b is the offset.
Before setting up the calculating factors, make sure that you have sufficient permissions
and the system is not running tests.
2 Select Slope/Offset F5.
3-21
3 System Setup
Figure 3.7 Slope/Offset Adjustment window
3 Choose a chemistry.
4 Double click the Slope field and then input the slope.
Positive, negative and decimal numbers can be entered. The maximum input length
is 8 digits.
5 Double click the Offset field and then input the offset.
Positive, negative and decimal numbers can be entered. The maximum input length
is 12 digits.
6 Repeat step 3 to 5 to set up the slope and offset for other chemistries.
7 Select Save to save your input information.
8 To restore the factory settings of slope and offset, select Restore Defaults.
9 Select Close the exit the window.
3.2.7 Reference/Critical Range Setup

The system allows the setup of reference/critical ranges for each chemistry.
 Reference range indicates the allowable concentration range of a normal sample.
 Critical range is the allowable result range from the perspective of clinical diagnosis.
If a result is greater than the high limit of the reference range, “^” will appear near the
result; if a result is less than the low limit of the reference range, “v” will appear near the
result. If a result is greater than the high limit of the critical range, “^!” will appear near
the result; if a result is less than the low limit of the critical range, “v!” will appear near
the result. You may enable the auto rerun function for a chemistry, which will be rerun
automatically once the test result is beyond the critical range.
Prior to defining the reference/critical range, ensure that you have sufficient permissions
and the system status is not Running.
Defining/Editing reference/critical range

3-22
3 System Setup
2 Select Ref Range F4.

Figure 3.8 Reference/Critical Range Setup window
3 Choose a chemistry from the Chemistry pull-down list.

4 Choose a sample type for the reference and critical range.
5 Choose patient gender for the reference and critical range.
6 Enter the age range in the Age Range field.
 Enter the age low limit in the first edit box.
 Enter the age high limit in the second edit box.
 Choose an age unit from year, month, day and hour.
7 Enter the reference range.
 Enter the reference range low limit in the first edit box.
 Enter the reference range high limit in the second edit box.
 The maximum input length is 12 digits.
8 Enter the critical range.
 Enter the critical range low limit in the first edit box.
 Enter the critical range high limit in the second edit box.
 The maximum input length is 12 digits.
9 To rerun the ISE chemistry when its test result is beyond the critical range, mark the
Auto Rerun checkbox with a tick.
Biochemistries and user-defined calculations cannot be rerun. The Auto Rerun
checkbox will not appear if the current chemistry is a biochemistry or a calculation.
For more information about auto rerun, refer to 8.2.4 Rerunning Samples (page 8-4).
10 Select Save F7. The reference/critical range are displayed in the middle list.
 Select Discard F6 to abort the input information, or
 Select Set Defaults F1 to set the reference/critical range as the default for the
chemistry.
11 Select Prev F4 or Next F5 to set up reference/critical range for more chemistries.
3-23
3 System Setup

Setting up default reference/critical range
You are allowed to select a default reference/critical range for a sample type and gender.
The default range appears in red. Only one default reference/critical range is allowed for
the same sample type and gender of each chemistry.
3 Choose the chemistry name, sample type, gender and age range.
4 Choose a reference/critical range in the middle list.
5 Select Set Defaults F1.
The selected reference/critical range is set as the default of the chemistry. The
system will check the test result, and if necessary, flag and rerun the chemistry. For
details of reference range flags, refer to Result display settings (page 3-4).
Deleting a reference/critical range

3 Choose the chemistry name, sample type, gender and age range.
4 Choose a reference/critical range you want to remove.
5 Select Delete F2.
6 Select OK.
7 To clear all ranges of the chemistry, select Del All F3.
NOTE
The reference/critical range cannot be recovered once deleted. Think twice before
the deletion.
8 Select OK.
3-24
3 System Setup
3.3 Calibration Setup

3.3.1 Introduction
Perform calibration settings in the following order:
 Define a calibrator
 Set up calibrator concentrations
 Set up calibration rules
 Set up calibrator acceptance limits
You are allowed to add, edit and delete calibrators only when the system status is not
Running.
3.3.2 Defining a Calibrator

The system allows the definition of up to 99 calibrators. You are required to input the
name and position for each defined calibrator.
1 Select Reagent - Setup.
2 Select Define F1.
Figure 3.9 Calibrator Definition window
3 Enter the calibrator name with 1-10 characters.

4 Enter the expiration date of the calibrator. The default is the current day in the next
year.
Calibrators beyond the expiration date cannot be used.
5 Enter the lot number.

The input range is 0-18 and accepts numbers and letters. Calibrators with the same
name must not have the same lot number.
6 Assign positions for the calibrator.
You are allowed to assign one position of each sample carousel for the calibrator. The
fourth ring (center) of the sample carousel is used to carry calibrators and controls.
You may also place the calibrator on other idle positions of the sample carousel.
3-25
3 System Setup

8 To define more calibrators, repeat step 3 to 7.
9 Select Close to exit the window.
3.3.3 Importing a Calibrator

Calibrator parameters such as calibrator name, lot number, expiration date, concentration
of each chemistry and dilution parameter can be imported.
2 Select Define F1.
3 Select Import and insert USB drive.

4 Select the path of .cif file.
Only .cif file can be imported; each .cif file stores information for one calibrator and
each time only one calibrator can be imported. When the system reads the calibrator
information, the following window is displayed:
5 Enter Lot No.
3-26
3 System Setup
6 Select OK.
7 Assign positions for the calibrator.
8 Select Save to save your input information
3.3.4 Editing a Calibrator

You are allowed to edit calibrators only when the system is not running any tests. The
default calibrator WATER (physiological saline) is placed in position W (No.90) of the
sample carousel. It is used for reagent blank measurement and cannot be edited or
deleted.
2 Choose a calibrator to edit and select Edit F2.
3 Edit the following calibrator information:

 Calibrator name
 Expiration date
 Lot number
 Position
3.3.5 Setting up Calibrator Concentrations

You are required to set up calibrator concentrations for each chemistry after defining the
calibrator. Only the calibrator with positions assigned and concentrations determined can
be used for programming. You are allowed to change the calibrator concentrations when
the system is not running any tests.
The default calibrator WATER has concentration of 0 for all chemistries. It has no lot
number and expiration date and must not be edited or removed.
3-27
3 System Setup
Figure 3.13 Calibrator concentration setup window
2 Choose a calibrator in the left list.

The chemistries configured for the calibrator are displayed in the right list.
3 Choose chemistries to which the calibrator is applicable, and then select the
corresponding Conc column and type in the calibrator concentration for it.
The concentration must be above 0.
4 Select the Unit from the dropdown box.

5 Select Save F8 to save your input information.
A message box pops up indicating that parameters are changed and calibration is
required.
3.3.6 Setting up Calibration Rules

You should set up the calibration rules after defining a calibrator and determining
concentrations for it. You are allowed to set up or edit the calibration rules, replicates, K
factor and auto calibration only when the system is not running any tests.
2 Select Rules F4.
3-28
3 System Setup
Figure 3.14 Calibration Setup window
3 Choose a chemistry from the Chem pull-down list.

4 Choose a calibration method in the Math Model field.
The options include:
 K factor
 Two-point linear
 Multi-point linear
 Logit-Log 4P
 Logit-Log 5P
 Exponential 5P
 Polynomial 5P
 Parabola
 Spline
5 If you choose K Factor, type in the K factor in the Factor field.
This field is activated only when the one-point linear math model is chosen. When
the K factor is determined, the calibration results will be calculated with the equation
Y=K*X. Where, Y is the calibration result, K is the factor, and X is the response. The K
factor can be used to calculate sample results without running a calibration.
6 Choose the number of replicates.
The input range is 1-5, and the default is 1.
7 If you want to run auto calibration, choose the conditions.

 When reagent bottle is changed;
 When reagent lot is change; or
 When the calibration time is exceeded.
For more information about auto calibration, refer to 6.5 Auto Calibration (page
6-11).
8 Choose calibrators in the right list for the chemistry.
3-29
3 System Setup
Up to 10 calibrators, including WATER, are allowed for each chemistry. The

correspondence between the number of calibrators and calibration math model is
shown in the table below.
Table 3.4 Correspondence between number of calibrators and calibration math model
Calibration Math Model Number of Calibrators
K Factor N=0 or 1
Two-point linear N=2
Multi-point linear 2< N≤10
Logit-Log 4P 4≤N≤10
Logit-Log 5P 5≤N≤10
Exponential 5P 5≤N≤10
Polynomial 5P 5≤N≤10
Parabola 3≤N≤10
Spline 3≤N≤10
10 Select Prev F4 or Next F5 to set up the QC rules for other chemistries.
3.3.7 Calibrator Acceptance Limits

The calibration results are compared with the determined acceptance limits. If the
calibration results exceed the acceptance limits, the system will give an alarm and flag the
results on calibration reports.
2 Select Rules F4.
3 Enter the following acceptance limits in the Acceptance Limits area.
Table 3.5 Calibration acceptance limits
Acceptance Limits Description
Calibration time The validity period indicates the number of days that
the calibration factors can be used. If the validity
period is exceeded, the system will give an alarm.
The input range must be within 1-9999 hours. The
default is blank, which means the calibration factors of
the chemistry can be used all the time.
Slope difference The slope difference is applicable to linear calibration
only. It is the K factor (slope) difference between two
adjacent calibrations. The system will give the flag
“FAC” and an alarm when the slope difference is
exceeded.
Type in the percentage within 0-100. The default is
Standard deviation (SD) The standard deviation is used for multi-point linear
and non-linear calibrations. The system will give the
flag “CSD” and an alarm when the SD value is
exceeded.
The input range must be within 0-999. The default is
3-30
3 System Setup
Acceptance Limits Description

Sensitivity The sensitivity is the absolute response difference
between two calibrators with the maximum and
minimum concentration. The system will give the flag
“SEN” and an alarm when the sensitivity is exceeded.
The input range must be within 0-33,000. The default
is blank, which means not performing this check.
Repeatability The repeatability is the difference of the maximum
and minimum response of each calibrator. If the
calculated calibrator response difference is greater
than the set limit, the system will give the flag “DUP”
and an alarm.
The input range must be within 0-33,000. The default
is blank, which means not performing this check.
Determination The determination coefficient is used for multi-point
coefficient linear and non-linear calibrations. It is the fit degree of
the calibration curve. The system will give the flag
“DET” and an alarm when the calibration fit degree is
exceeded.
The input range must be within 0-1. The default is
3.3.8 Deleting a Calibrator

You are allowed to remove the calibrators other than WATER. When a calibrator is deleted,
all calibration settings and its position are cleared, and it cannot be used for programming.
The stored test results of the calibrator can be recalled according to the chemistry name.
only calibrators that are not requested or run can be deleted.
2 Choose a calibrator you want to remove.
3 Select Delete F6.
4 Select OK. The selected calibrator is deleted.
3-31
3 System Setup
3.4 QC Setup
3.4.1 Introduction
Perform QC settings in the following order:
 Define a control
 Select chemistries
 Set up control concentrations
 Set up QC rules
3.4.2 Defining/Editing a Control

The system allows the definition of up to 99 controls. You are required to enter the control
name and sample type. The combination of control name and lot number must not be
duplicate and should be unique. If a control has no lot number, you are not allowed to
define another control with the same name.
1 Select QC - QC Setup.
2 Select Define F1.
Figure 3.15 Define/Edit Controls window
3 Type in the control name.

4 Enter the control number.
The input range is 1-99.
5 Enter the lot number.
The lot number can be composed of characters or numbers. The combination of

control name and lot number must not be duplicate.

The options include serum, plasma, urine, CSF and other. The default is serum.
3-32
3 System Setup
7 Select expiration date for the control.
When the expiration date is exceeded, the control can still be programmed and
analyzed, while the system flags the test result in the Flag column to remind you of
replacing the expired control.
8 Assign positions for the control.
You are allowed to assign one position of each sample carousel for the control. The
fourth ring (center) of the sample carousel is used to carry calibrators and controls.
You may also place the control on other idle positions of the sample carousel.
10 To define more controls, select New and repeat step 3 to 9.
11 Select Exit to exit the window.
3.4.3 Selection of Chemistries

After defining a control, you need to select chemistries for which the control will be used.
When selecting chemistries, make sure that the system status is Incubation, Standby, Stop
or Sleep, and the control status is not Programmed or Incomplete.
2 Choose a control in the left list.
3 Select Chems F2.
Figure 3.16 Chemistries window
4 Choose chemistries for the control. Use the left and right arrow buttons to display
more chemistries.
5 To choose all chemistries in the list, select Select All.
6 To deselect the chemistries, select Clear.
7 Select OK.
3.4.4 Setting up Control Concentrations

You are required to set up the average concentrations and SDs of a control for each
chemistry after defining the control and choosing chemistries. Only the control with
positions assigned and concentrations determined can be used for programming.
3-33
3 System Setup
To run quality control for special calibrations, you must define the mean value and SD;
otherwise, no control results will be calculated. If the sub chemistries of a special
calculation have no mean value and SD, QC evaluation will not be done and QC plot cannot
be recalled.
Figure 3.17 Setup screen

The chemistries configured for the control are displayed in the right list.
3 Select the Mean column of a chemistry and type in the average concentration for it.
The concentration must be above 0 with no more than 12 digits.

4 Select the SD column of a chemistry and type in the standard deviation for it.
The SD must be above 0 with no more than 12 digits.
5 Select a unit from the dropdown box.
The options include all units set for the chemistry. This field is uneditable for
open-reagent chemistry.
3.4.5 Setting up QC Rules

You should set up the control rules after defining a control and determining
concentrations for it. The controls without QC rule can still be programmed and analyzed
but will not be monitored for error detection. You are allowed to change the QC rules
when the system is not running any tests.
2 Select Rules F3. The QC Rules Setup window is displayed.
3-34
3 System Setup
Figure 3.18 QC Rules Setup window
3 Choose a chemistry from the Chem list.

4 Choose QC rules in the Westgard Rules area.
5 If you assign a couple of controls for the chemistry, you are allowed to enable the
Two-Control Evaluation option.
Those controls not contained in the two-control evaluation will be monitored
according the Westgard rules.
6 Select the first control in the Control(X) field.

7 Select the second control in the Control(Y) field.
9 Repeat step 3 to 8 to set up quality control rules for other chemistries.
3.4.6 Deleting a Control

You are allowed to change the control concentrations when the system is not running any
tests. When a control is deleted, the control information, concentration parameters and QC
results as well as the control position are cleared. If the deleted control is included in the
two-control evaluation, the relevant two-control evaluation will be disabled. Those
controls programmed for analysis cannot be deleted.
3 Select Delete F6.
3-35
3 System Setup
3-36
4 Operation Theories
This chapter gives brief introduction of the operation theories of the instrument, which
include:
 Principles of measurement
 Calibration math model and calculation of factors
 Prozone check
4-1
4.1 Overview
The system is a fully automated computer-controlled clinical chemistry analyzer allowing
the random selection of chemistries. It is capable of running a variety of chemistries based
on the operation theories and measurement principles.
The system performs measurement and generates the test results in the following
procedure:
Figure 4.1 Measurement workflow
AD value
Absorbance
Response
Calibration factors
Sample result QC result
QC conclusion
The system measures the light intensity through photoelectric conversion, linear
amplification and AD conversion, and then calculates the reaction mixture’s absorbance
and the absorbance change rate, that is, the response, based on which the calibration
factors are obtained. The system performance is evaluated according to the test results of
the control samples. If the system is working normally, you may start the analysis of
patient samples and the system will calculate the sample results with the calibration
factors.
4-2
4.2 Principles of Measurement

4.2.1 Introduction
The system performs measurement with the following principles:
 Endpoint
 Fixed-time
 Kinetic
In the description of the following sections, N and P indicate the blank read time range, L
and M indicate the reaction read time range. In double-wavelength measurements,
absorbance A is the absorbance difference between the primary and secondary
wavelengths; in single-wavelength measurements, absorbance A is the absorbance
measured at the primary wavelength.
4-3
4.3 Endpoint Measurements

4.3.1 Introduction
In endpoint measurements, the reaction reaches equilibrium after a period of time. Since
the equilibrium constant is quite high, it can be considered that all substrates (analytes)
have changed into products, and the absorbance of the reactant will not change any more.
The absorbance change is directly proportional to the analytes’ concentration. The
endpoint method, also called equilibrium method, is most ideal for measurements.
The endpoint reaction is insensitive to minor changes in such conditions as the enzyme
volume, pH value and temperature, provided the changes are not significant enough to
affect the reaction time.
4.3.2 Calculation of Reaction Absorbance

Set up the reaction time range by understanding the following instructions:
 If L=M, that is, [M] and [M] are entered for the reaction time range, one measuring
point will be used for absorbance calculation, and the reaction absorbance will be
the absorbance measured at point M, i.e. Ai=AM.
 If L=M-1, that is, [M-1] and [M] are entered for the reaction time range, two
measuring points will be used for absorbance calculation, and the reaction
absorbance will be the average of the absorbance measured at the two points, i.e.
AM  AM 1
Ai= .
2
 If L=M-2, that is, [M-2] and [M] are entered for the reaction time range, three
measuring points will be used for absorbance calculation, and the reaction
absorbance will be the mediate absorbance measured at the three points, while the
maximum and minimum absorbance is removed.
 If M>L+2, the reaction absorbance will be the average of the remaining absorbance
when the maximum and minimum absorbance is removed.
4.3.3 Calculation of Blank Absorbance

The blank absorbance Ab is calculated in the same way as the reaction absorbance Ai.
When N=P=0, the blank absorbance Ab will not be calculated.
4.3.4 Calculation of K Factor

The system provides four K factors for result calculation, which are expressed through the
following equations:
VR1
 k1 
VR1  VS
VR1  VS
 k2 
VR1  VS  VR 2
VR1  VS  VR 2
 k3 
VR1  VS  VR 2  VR 3
4-4
VR1  VS  VR 2  VR 3
 k4 
VR1  VS  VR 2  VR 3  VR 4
Where, VR1, VR2, VR3 and VR4 are the volumes of R1, R2, R3 and R4; Vs is the actual volume
of sample dispensed for reaction.
4.3.5 Calculation of Response

The response in endpoint measurements is calculated as follows:
R  Ai  k  Ab
k is the calculation factor and varies with the chemistry parameters.
Table 4.1 Calculation of response for endpoint measurements
Endpoint Blank Time Reaction Time K Factor
Single-reagent 2≤N≤P≤3 5≤L≤M≤33 K1
Double-reagent 5≤N≤P≤15 16≤L≤M≤33 K2
Triple-reagent 16≤N≤P≤41 46≤L≤M≤74 K3
Quadruple-reagent 46≤N≤P≤56 57≤L≤M≤74 K4
When the blank absorbance is read after the reaction begins,
Single-reagent 5≤N≤P P<L≤M≤33 1
Double-reagent 16≤N≤P P<L≤M≤33 1
Triple-reagent 46≤N≤P P<L≤M≤74 1
Quadruple-reagent 57≤N≤P P<L≤M≤74 1
Single-reagent N=P=0 5≤L≤M≤33 0
Double-reagent N=P=0 16≤L≤M≤33 0
Triple-reagent N=P=0 46≤L≤M≤74 0
Quadruple-reagent N=P=0 57≤L≤M≤74 0
4.3.6 Sample Blanked Response

Sample blank is used for removal of non-chromogenesis reaction, such as influence of
sample interference (Hemolysis, icterus and lipemia) on absorbance readings. The
sample blank reaction curve is almost a straight line with slope of 0 during the reaction
period, and therefore means nothing for fixed-time and Kinetic analysis.
In single-reagent endpoint measurements, the response of the sample blank test is
Rsb  Ai  k  Ab R '  R  RSb
, and the sample blanked response is .
4-5
4.4 Fixed-time Measurements

4.4.1 Introduction
In fixed-time measurements, namely, rate measurements, the reaction velocity (v) is
directly proportional to the substrate concentration [S] within a specific period, that is,
v=k[S]. As the substrate is consumed continuously, the reaction velocity is decreasing
gradually, and so is the absorbance change rate. It takes a long time for the reaction to
reach equilibrium. Theoretically, the absorbance reading can be taken at any time. The
reaction can, however, become steady only after a lag because it is complicated at the
beginning and there are miscellaneous reactions due to complex serum compositions.
For any rate measurements, the substrate concentration [S] at a given point t since the
reaction begins is obtained through the following formula:
S   S 0  e  kt
Where,
 S0: the initial substrate concentration
 e: base of the natural log
 k: velocity constant
The change of substrate concentration Δ[S] over a fixed time interval, t1 to t 2 , is related
to [S0] by the following equation:
 [ S ]
[ S 0]   kt1  kt 2
e e
That is, the change in substrate concentration is directly proportional to its initial
concentration within a fixed time interval. This is the common feature of rate
measurements. Within this interval, the absorbance change is directly proportional to the
analytes concentration. The fixed-time reaction is also called, rate reaction, first-order
Kinetic reaction and two-point Kinetic reaction.
It is available in single-interval and double-interval according to the input mode of
measuring points. In the double-interval reaction, the sample blank, which is the
absorbance change at two points within the incubation time, is subtracted from the
reaction absorbance.
The fixed-time measurements allow the check of substrate depletion at the two measuring
points. When detecting substrate depletion, the system will flag the test result with “BOE”
and give an alarm.

The response in fixed-time measurements is calculated as follows:
AM  AL A  AN
R  60*( k P )
tM  t L tP  t N
Table 4.2 Calculation of response for fixed-time measurements
Fixed-time Blank Time Reaction Time K Factor
4-6
Fixed-time Blank Time Reaction Time K Factor

Single-reagent 2≤N<P≤3 5≤L<M≤33 K1
Double-reagent 5≤N<P≤15 16≤L<M≤33 K2
Triple-reagent 16≤N<P≤41 46≤L<M≤74 K3
Quadruple-reag 46≤N<P≤56 57≤L<M≤74 K4
ent
Single-reagent N=P=0 5≤L<M≤33 0
Double-reagent N=P=0 16≤L<M≤33 0
Triple-reagent N=P=0 46≤L<M≤74 0
Quadruple-reag N=P=0 57≤L<M≤74 0
ent
4-7
4.5 Kinetic Measurements

4.5.1 Introduction
In Kinetic measurements, namely, zero-order Kinetic measurements or
continuous-monitoring measurements, the reaction velocity is not related to substrate
concentration and remains constant during the reaction process. As a result, the analytes
absorbance changes evenly at a given wavelength, and the change rate (A/min) is
directly proportional to the activity or concentration of the analytes. The Kinetic method
is usually used to measure enzyme activity.
In fact, it is impossible for the substrate concentration to be absolutely high, and the
reaction will be no longer a zero-order reaction when the substrate is consumed to
certain degree. Therefore, the reaction type only stands within certain reaction period. In
addition, the reaction can become steady only after a period of time, because the reaction
is complicated at the beginning and there are miscellaneous reactions due to complex
serum compositions.
In Kinetic reaction, the concentration or activity is obtained according to the absorbance
change among specified measuring points.
4.5.2 Data Calculation in Kinetic Measurements

Figure 4.2 Data calculation flow of Kinetic measurements
Determination of linearity
range
Calculate response with the

least square method
Evaluation for linearity
4.5.3 Determination of Linearity Range

The absorbance linearity range is determined based on the substrate depletion limit, and
checked within the reaction time rather than the blank time.
4-8
Figure 4.3 Determination of linearity range for Kinetic measurements
Enter L and M
Enter substrate
depletion limit?
No
Yes
Yes
Substrate depleted Alarm of "NLN"
at L+2
No
Find M′ without substrate depletion

Yes
Substrate depleted at within M and the reaction start
M reading point
No
Linearity range is L-M Linearity range is L-M′
The number (N) of measuring points within the substrate depletion limit is monitored for
different operations:
 If N≥3, the linearity range includes all measuring points from the reaction start point
to the substrate depletion limit;
 If N=2, the system will give the flag “NLN” while using two measuring points for
calculating the response.
 If N=0 or 1, when Enzyme Linear Extension option is selected on the chemistry
parameter screen, enzyme linear extension will be enabled and the system gives the
flag “NLN”; when Enzyme Linear Extension option is not selected on the chemistry
parameter screen, enzyme linear extension will not be enabled and the system gives
the flag “NLN” too.

Absorbance change rate ⊿ALM’ within the reaction time
The response ⊿ALM’ within L-M’ is calculated with the least square method.
M'
 (T  T )  ( A  A)
i i
A LM'  60 * i  L M'
 (T  T )
iL
i
2
Where,
 L: start point of the linearity range
 M’: end point of the linearity range
 Ai: absorbance measured at measuring point i
 A : average absorbance within L-M’
4-9
 Ti: actual measuring time (second) at measuring point i

 T : average measuring time within L-M
If there are less than two measuring points without substrate depletion within the
reaction time, the system will calculate the absorbance change rate by extending the
enzyme linearity range.
Absorbance change rate ⊿ANP within the blank time

The absorbance change rate ⊿ANP within the blank time is calculated with the same
equation as ⊿ALM’.
If N=P=0, the absorbance change rate within the blank time is 0.
Calculation of Response
The response in Kinetic measurements is calculated as follows:
R  A LM'  K  A NP
Table 4.3 Calculation of response for Kinetic measurements
Kinetic Blank Time Reaction Time K
Single-reagent 2≤N<P≤3 5≤L<M≤33 K1
Double-reagent 5≤N<P≤15 16≤L<M≤33 K2
Triple-reagent 16≤N<P≤41 46≤L<M≤74 K3
Quadruple-reagent 46≤N<P≤56 57≤L<M≤74 K4
Single-reagent N=P=0 5≤L<M≤33 0
Double-reagent N=P=0 16≤L<M≤33 0
Triple-reagent N=P=0 46≤L<M≤74 0
Quadruple-reagent N=P=0 57≤L<M≤74 0
Note: M-L≥2 indicates that at least 3 measuring points should be included within the
reaction time.
4.5.5 Evaluation for Linearity

Af  Ab
Linearity= 100  Linearity Limit
Au ,v
Where,  A f , Ab and Au ,v are the absorbance change rates in the front part, back
part and at all measuring points of the reaction. These three values are calculated based
on the number of measuring points within the linearity range.
 When N>8,  A f is the absorbance change rate of the first 6 measuring points,
Ab of the last 6 measuring points, and Au ,v of all measuring points.
 When 4  N  8 ,  A f is the absorbance change rate of the first 3 measuring
points, Ab of the last 3 measuring points, and Au ,v of all measuring points.
4-10
 When N  3, the system will not check the test results for linearity.
A  A b  A u ,v 
 When f
60 or 60 (unit: A/10000/minute), the system will
not check the test results for linearity.
The system will compare the calculated linearity with that defined for the chemistry, and
will flag the test result with “LIN” and given an alarm if the configured linearity is
exceeded.
4.5.6 Enzyme Linearity Range Extension

Figure 4.4 Reaction curve with extended enzyme linearity range
Lag time
Reaction Time
Absorbance
Substrate depletion mark
Substrate depleted
Absorbance read time
In high-activity enzyme measurements, the substrate may be depleted quickly and the
reaction curve will appear obviously nonlinear (as a smooth curve). If the measurement
is performed based on the general procedure, the system will flag the test result with
“NLN” (no linearity interval), reminding the user to rerun the test after diluting the
sample. This will more or less bring troubles to the user.
Extending enzyme linearity range:
Suppose the reaction start time is t1 and the reaction time is tL-tM, then t1-tL is the lag
time.
If the number (N) of valid measuring points within tL-tM is less than 2 and too few to
calculate the response, the sample response can be obtained by extending the enzyme
linearity range.
Calculation of ⊿Amax:
The linearity range t1-tL’ without substrate depletion is found within the lag time t1-tL.
If the number (N) of valid measuring points within tL-tM is less than 2, the system will
not calculate the response but flag the test result with “ENC” (no calculation interval) and
give an alarm;
or the system calculates the reaction rate ⊿A=60*(Ai+1-Ai)/(ti+1-ti), i=1, 2…L’ with the
lag time t1-tL’. The maximum ⊿A is taken as the response of the sample. Therefore, the
enzyme linearity range is extended via the lag time. The results calculated by extending
the enzyme linearity range will be flagged with “EXP” and “NLN”.
4-11
4.6 Calibration Math Model and Factors

The system provides linear and non-linear math models. The former is used for
Colorimetry chemistries and the later for turbidity chemistries.
In this section,
 R: calibrator response
 C: calibrator concentration (or internal converting concentration in non-linear
calibrations)
 K, R0, a, b, c and d: calibration factors
4.6.1 Linear Calibrations

Single-point linear calibration
The single-point linear calibration is also called the K factor method. Calculation formula:
C  K  ( R  R0 )
Where, K is the user-defined K factor, R0 is the reagent blank response of the first
calibrator. If the chemistry is not reagent blanked, R0=0.
Please note that the R and R0 must be divided by 10,000.
Two-point linear calibration

Calculation formula: C  K  ( R  R 0 )
C 2  C1 C1
The formula contains two factors, K and R0, where K  , and R0  R1  .
R2  R1 K
The calibration math model requires two calibrators. C1 and C2 are the concentrations of
calibrator 1 and 2; R1 and R2 are the responses of calibrator 1 and 2.
Multi-point linear calibration

C  K  (R R 0 )
Calculation formula:
The formula contains two factors, K and R0. The calibration math model requires n(n≥3)
calibrators. Ci is the concentration of calibrator i. Ri is the response of calibrator i. K and
R0 can be calculated with the least square method:
n n n
 CiRi  ( Ci )( Ri ) / n
K i 1
n
i 1
n
i 1
 Ri
i 1
2
 ( Ri ) 2 / n
i 1
n
( Ci ) / n
R0  ( Ri ) / n  i 1
i 1 K
4-12
4.6.2 Non-Linear Calibrations

Logit–Log 4P
1
Calculation formula: R  R0  K
1  exp[ (a  b ln C )]
The formula contains four factors, which are R0, K, a and b.
The calibration math model requires at least four calibrators. The four factors can be
calculated with the L-M method.
This calibration type is applied to the chemistries which have a calibration curve with the
response reversely proportional to the concentration.
Logit–Log 5P
1
R  R0  K
Calculation formula: 1  exp[ (a  b ln C  cC )]
The formula contains five factors, which are R0, K, a, b and c. The calibration math model
requires at least five calibrators, and calculates the five factors with the L-M method.
This math model has the same application with the Logit-Log 4P except for a higher
fitting.
Exponential 5P
R  R0  K exp[ a ln C  b(ln C ) 2  c(ln C ) 3 ]
The formula contains five factors, which are R0, K, a, b and c. The calibration math model
requires at least five calibrators, and calculates the five factors with the L-M method.
This calibration type is applied to the chemistries which have a calibration curve with the
response directly proportional to the concentration.
Polynomial 5P
R  R0 R  R0 2 R  R0 3
ln C  a  b( )  c( )  d( )
Calculation formula: 100 100 100
The formula contains five factors, which are R0, a, b, c and d. The calibration math model
requires at least five calibrators. The response (R) of the first calibrator (with internal
converting concentration of 0) is R0, which is given.
R  R0
x
Suppose, y  ln C and 100 .
Then, y  a  bx  cx  dx
2 3
can be calculated with the least square method for
polynomial expressions.
Parabola
R  aC 2  bC  R0
The formula contains three factors, which are a, b and R 0. The calibration math model
requires at least three calibrators. The three factors can be calculated with the least
square method.
4-13
Spline
R  R0i  ai (C  C i )  bi (C  Ci ) 2  ci (C  Ci ) 3
The calibration math model requires 2-9 calibrators. Suppose the number of calibrators
R a b c
is n, then the calculation formula contains 4(n-1) factors, which are 0 i , i , i , and i .
Due to the subsection fitting, this math model has be best fit curves than other math
models.
4-14
4.7 Prozone Check

4.7.1 Introduction
Figure 4.5 Reaction curve of antigen and antibody
Prozone Equivalent Postzone
Response R
(antibody excess) zone (antigen excess)
Concentration C
In the reaction of antigen and antibody, the amount of generated insoluble compound is
closely related to the proportion of antigen and antibody. The maximum amount of
compound will be generated at a proper proportion of antigen and antibody, at this point
least light is passed and the greatest absorbance is obtained. For other proportions, the
amount of insoluble compound will decrease with more light passed and lower
absorbance calculated. Therefore, samples with quite different concentrations may
generate the equivalent amount of insoluble antigen/antibody compound, and can have
the same test results without a Prozone check. The Prozone check, therefore, is
necessary for antigen-antibody reactions.
The Prozone limit is the allowable maximum or minimum PC when antigen excess does
not happen.
The Prozone check factors include:
 PCM (Prozone check limit), q1, q2, q3 and q4.
 Absorbance low limit: ABS
The Prozone check can be performed in two ways: rate check and antigen addition, which
are described in detail in the following sections.
4.7.2 Antigen Addition Method

Antigen excess can be detected by further addition of antigen. When enough antibodies
are provided, the antigen reacts with them in reaction medium and forms into stable
compound particles, thus producing dispersed light, which increases dynamically with
compound amount increased and reaction time extended (antibody excess). If the
antibody keeps excess in specified period, it will continue to react with further added
antigen, and the reaction will increase accordingly. If the antigen is excessive before
further addition, the reaction will decrease. The antigen addition method is applicable to
both single-/double-reagent chemistries.
4-15
Enter the Prozone check factors as follows:

 PCM (Prozone check limit), q1 and q2.
 If the absorbance low limit ABS appears in grey, that is q3=q4=0, it cannot be set up.
 74≥q2≥46, 44≥q1≥Reaction end point.
If one of PCM, q1 and q2 is not input, the system will not check the antigen.
 Sample PC=Aq2-k×Aq1.
 k is the calculation factor.
 For single-reagent chemistries: k=(VR1+VS)/(VR1+2VS).
 For double-reagent chemistries: k=(VR1+VS+VR2)/(VR1+2VS+VR2).
The system will flag the test result with “PRO” (Prozone check abnormal) and give an
alarm if PC<PCM in positive reactions or PC>PCM in negative reactions.
4.7.3 Reaction Rate Method

The rate check is based on the condition that the antibody excess reaction rather than
the antigen excess reaction can reach equilibrium within the same specified period. Enter
the Prozone check factors as follows:
 PCM (Prozone check limit), q1, q2, q3 and q4.
 Absorbance low limit: ABS
Aq 4  Aq 3
q 4  q3
 Sample PC: PC  . If PC>PCM, the system will flag the test result with
Aq 2  Aq1
q 2  q1
“PRO” and give an alarm.
Enter the measuring points as follows:
 Single-reagent chemistries: 5≤q1<q2<q3<q4≤33, “5” is the first measuring point
after the sample is dispensed and stirred.
 Double-reagent chemistries: 16≤q1<q2<q3<q4≤33. “16” is the first measuring point
 Triple-reagent chemistries: 46≤q1<q2<q3<q4≤74. “46” is the first measuring point
 Quadruple-reagent chemistries: 57≤q1<q2<q3<q4≤74. “57” is the first measuring
point after R4 is dispensed and stirred.
If one of PCM, q1, q2, q3 and q4 is not input, the system will not check the reaction rate.
Prozone check will be disabled if:
 (Reaction end point absorbance – Reaction start point absorbance) <ABS
 The sample response is not within the calibrator response range for sample and
control analysis of non-linear chemistries.
4-16
5 Reagents
This chapter provides you with functions and operating instructions associated with
reagent.
5-1
5 Reagents
5.1 Overview
5.1.1 Introduction
This chapter introduces the advanced application of the reagent module. Perform the
following operations according to the practical conditions in your laboratory:
 Customizing reagent display
 Sorting reagents
 Setting up reagent inventory alarm limits
 Checking reagent inventory
 Loading bar-coded reagents
 On-line load of reagents
 Off-line load of reagents
 On-line replacement of reagents
 Off-line replacement of reagents
 Unloading reagents
5.1.2 Reagent/Calibration Screen Overview

Select Reagent in the function button area of the main screen. The Reagent/Calibration
screen is displayed. The screen is composed of the biochemistry reagent/calibration page
and ISE reagent/calibration page. The latter is displayed by default.
Figure 5.1 ISE reagent/calibration screen
The ISE reagent/calibration screen is divided into three areas. The upper list shows the
ISE chemistries, calibration status, calibration date and calibration time left; the lower list
shows the volume, load date, expiration date, lot number and serial number of all wash
solutions and physiological saline; the function buttons at the bottom are used to access
relevant functions.
5-2
5 Reagents
Select the down-arrow button on the right side of the screen to display the biochemical
reagents.
Figure 5.2 Biochemistry reagent/calibration screen
The screen shows all configured biochemistry reagents, including the following
information:
 Position: position of the reagent on the reagent carousel.
 Chemistry: name of the chemistry.
 Chemistries left: It refers to the minimum tests left of R0, R1, R2, R3 and R4. When
the number of chemistries left is 0, the chemistry is still allowed for programming
and measurement.
 Reagent type: reagent type of a multi-reagent chemistry. It includes R0, R1, R2, R3
and R4.
 Tests left: It refers to the remaining tests of each reagent bottle.
 Days left: the difference of reagent expiration date and current date and the on-board
stability time, whichever the less. When a negative value is displayed, it indicates that
the reagent is expired and should be replaced immediately.
 Lot number: lot number of the reagent. It can be input manually during reagent load.
 Calibration status: calibration status of the chemistry, including, Cal Required,
Requested, Calibrated, Cal Failed, Cal Time Out, Cal Time Extended, Calculated, Edited,
Cal Overridden and N/A.
 Time left: the time left when the calibration factors are expired. It will be displayed
only when the calibration status is Calibrated, Cal Time Out or Cal Time Extended.
When the time left is less than 30 minutes, the system displays a message indicating
calibration time out; when the calibration time is exceeded, the calibration factors
can no longer be used, and you are allowed to recalibrate the chemistry or extend the
calibration time.
5-3
5 Reagents
5.2 Customizing Reagent Display

5.2.1 Introduction
The reagent information on the biochemistry reagent/calibration screen can be tailored
and displayed in desired order.
5.2.2 Customizing Reagent Display

3 Select 16 Customize Reagent Display.
Figure 5.3 Customize Reagent Display window
4 Select checkbox of reagent information to display it on the reagent/calibration

screen, deselect checkbox to cancel the display.
5 Select Up and Down to adjust the display order of reagent information.
6 Select Save to save the settings.
5-4
5 Reagents
5.3 Sort Reagents

5.3.1 Introduction
Reagents on the biochemistry reagent/calibration screen can be sorted by name, position,
chemistries left, days left, calibration time left, and calibration status, and a V-type symbol
appears to the right of the sort criteria. Prior to loading reagents or running calibrations,
sort the reagents to display the desired ones in the front.
5.3.2 Sort Reagents

4 Choose a sorting criterion, and then click on the corresponding list head to
rearrange the reagents.
To view or load reagents, choose the following standards:
 Reagent position
 Chemistry name
 Chemistries left
 Tests left
 Days left
To view calibration status or run calibrations, choose the following standard:
 Calibration time left
 Calibration status
5-5
5 Reagents
5.4 Reagent Inventory Alarm Limits Setup

5.4.1 Introduction
When the reagent inventory is lower than the alarm limit during or before the analysis,
the system will give an alarm and display the reagents or wash solution name in yellow on
the Reagent/Calibration screen, and the volume of ISE reagent and wash solutions
become 0.
For Concentrated wash solution, reagent probe wash solution and physiological saline,
please set up the reagent alarm limit on the Load Reagent window. Please refer to 2.5.2
Loading Concentrated Wash Solution, 2.5.3 Loading Reagent Probe Wash Solution2.5.3
and 2.5.5 Loading Physiological Saline for details.
5.4.2 Setting up Reagent Inventory Alarm Limit for Biochemistry Reagent

2 Select the chemistry that you want to set reagent alarm limit.
3 Select Define F1.
4 Select down arrow to get to the second page.
Figure 5.4 Define/Edit Chemistries screen
5 Type in the reagent alarm limit.

Enter an integer between 1 and 100. The default is 10.
6 Select Save F7.

7 Select Close F8.
5-6
5 Reagents
5.5 Reagent Inventory Check

5.5.1 Introduction
The system provides the manual and auto check of inventory of biochemical reagents.
During the test, the system automatically checks the reagent inventory and displays it on
the Reagent/Calibration screen. After the reagents are loaded, it is necessary to perform
the inventory check in order to ensure that sufficient reagents are available for analysis.
Reagent inventory check is allowed only when the biochemistry system status is
Incubation or Standby, and the ISE system is Standby or Stopped or unconfigured. While
the system is checking reagent inventory, loading or unloading reagents on the current
module is not permitted, and the Utility button is disabled.
5.5.2 Checking Reagent Inventory

Status.
2 Select Inventory F3.
Figure 5.5 Check window
3 Choose reagent positions:

 Following position(s): check the reagents on specified positions. Enter reagent
positions and separate them with a comma. Enter single reagent positions like 1,
2, 3, or position range like 2-15, 20-25.
 All positions: check all reagent positions of the reagent carousel.
 All reagents of selected chemistry: check the inventory of all reagent types of the
selected chemistry.
4 Select Check.
 The Inventory F3 button on the Reagent/Calibration screen or on the
Reagent Carousel Status screen changes to No Invent. F3.
 The reagent carousel graph refreshes the reagent status automatically.
 The Reagent/Calibration screen refreshes the Tests Left of the selected
chemistry, Chems Left, and the Volume of the selected wash solution.
5-7
5 Reagents
5.5.3 Canceling Reagent Inventory Check

To cancel reagent inventory check, select Close on the Check window, and then select No
Invent. F3 on the Reagent/Calibration screen, or on the Reagent Carousel Status
screen.
5.5.4 Auto Refreshing Reagent Inventory

Via Reagent/Calibration option on instrument setup screen, you can configure whether
to automatically refresh the reagent with 0 inventory as available for test, when reagent
has been loaded and End Load button is selected.
3 Select 15 Reagent/Calibration Setup.
Figure 5.6 Reagent/calibration window
4 Select or deselect the option Auto Refresh Reagent Inventory, which is unselected
by default.
5 Click Save.
6 Click Exit to close the window.
5-8
5 Reagents
5.6 Loading Bar-Coded Reagents

5.6.1 Loading Bar-Coded Reagents
If your system is equipped with a reagent bar code reader, you may put the bar-coded
reagents on the reagent carousel, and the system will scan all reagent positions
automatically and obtain reagent information from the bar code label.
The bar code scanning is only applied to biochemical reagents. The reagent probe wash
solution and physiological saline can only be loaded manually rather than bar code
scanning.
For details of loading bar-coded reagents, refer to 13.2.3 Loading Bar-Coded Reagents
(page 13-9).
WARNING
BIOHAZARD
may be caused.
5-9
5 Reagents
5.7 On-line Load of Reagents

5.7.1 Introduction
The on-line load of reagents is performed while the system is running tests. Before
starting an on-line load, request for reagent stop, do not load reagents until all started tests
are finished for reagent dispensing. If the system is running calibrations, STAT samples or
diluted samples, you are not allowed to start loading reagents unless all tests finish
reagents dispensing.
WARNING
BIOHAZARD
may be caused.
5.7.2 On-Line Load of Reagents

3 Select Load F1 to request for reagent stop. Meanwhile Load F1 becomes No load F1.
If you want to abort load, select No load F1.
The system status area shows a countdown for reagent stop, and a message box will
be displayed when the countdown is finished.
CAUTION
Do not open the reagent carousel cover before the countdown is finished; otherwise,
probe collision or other error may occur.
4 To load non-bar-coded reagents, select OK and then Load F1, and remove the
reagent carousel cover; to load bar-coded reagents, just remove the reagent carousel
cover.
5 Place the reagents in correct positions:
Place the reagents in positions 1-78 of the reagent carousel.

 For load of non-bar-coded reagents, enter the reagent information on the Load
Reagent window and then select End Load F2.
 For load of bar-coded reagents, the system scans all reagents positions
automatically and read reagent information from the bar code, when End Load
F2 button is selected.
The system will resume the tests or select the icon to start new test.
5-10
5 Reagents
5.8 Off-line Load of Reagents

5.8.1 Introduction
The off-line load of reagents is performed while the system is not running any tests. You
are allowed to directly place the reagents on the reagent carousel, sample carousel or
other positions.
WARNING
BIOHAZARD
may be caused.
5.8.2 Off-line Load of Reagents

2 Place the reagents in correct positions:
Place the reagents in positions 1-78 of the reagent carousel.

Reagent window.
 For load of bar-coded reagents, when the reagents have been loaded and the
reagent carousel cover has been restored, select End Load F2 button, the
system scans all reagent positions automatically and read reagent information
from the bar code.
5-11
5 Reagents
5.9 On-Line Replacement of Reagents

5.9.1 Introduction
When a reagent is insufficient or exhausted or going to be expired while the system is
running tests, you should request for reagent stop and replace the reagent immediately to
ensure that the following measurements will be done smoothly.
5.9.2 On-Line Replacement of Reagents

3 Confirm the reagent to be replaced and select the reagent position.
4 Select Load F1 to request for reagent stop.
The system status area shows a countdown for reagent stop, and a message box will
be displayed when the countdown is finished.
CAUTION
Do not open the reagent carousel cover before the countdown is finished; otherwise,
probe collision or other error may occur.
5 To load non-bar-coded reagents, select OK and then Load F1, and remove the
reagent carousel cover; to load bar-coded reagents, just remove the reagent carousel
cover.
6 Remove the reagent.
7 Place the new reagent.
If Auto Refresh Reagent Inventory is enabled on the System Setup -

Reagent/Calibration window(refer to 5.5.4 Auto Refreshing Reagent Inventory),
please follow the steps below:
 For load of non-bar-coded reagents, select the reagent position and enter the
reagent information on the Load Reagent window and then select End Load
F2.
 For load of bar-coded reagents, select End Load F2 and the system scans all
reagent positions automatically and read reagent information from the bar
code.
If Auto Refresh Reagent Inventory is not enabled on the System Setup -
please follow the steps below:
 For load of non-bar-coded reagents, select the reagent position and select Load
F1 and then select Unload F4.Enter the reagent information again on the Load
Reagent window and then select End Load F2.
 For load of bar-coded reagents, select End Load F2 and the system scans all
reagent positions automatically and read reagent information from the bar
code.
5-12
5 Reagents
The system will resume the tests or select the icon to start new test.
5-13
5 Reagents
5.10 Off-Line Replacement of Reagents

5.10.1 Introduction
When a reagent is insufficient or exhausted or going to be expired while the system is not
running any tests, you should replace the reagent immediately to ensure that the
following measurements will be done smoothly.
5.10.2 Off-Line Replacement of Reagents

2 Remove the reagent.
3 Place the new reagent.
Reagent window.
 For load of bar-coded reagents, when the reagents have been loaded and the
reagent carousel cover has been restored, select End Load F2 button, the
system scans all reagent positions automatically and read reagent information
from the bar code.
If Auto Refresh Reagent Inventory is not enabled on the System Setup -
before running the tests, please use the Inventory Check function to refresh the
reagent inventory of the newly loaded reagent, otherwise they cannot be used. For
more details about inventory check, refer to 5.5 Reagent Inventory Check(Page 5-7).
5-14
5 Reagents
5.11 Unloading Reagents

5.11.1 Introduction
If some chemistries will not be used, you are allowed to clear the chemistry parameters
and unload the relevant reagents. The Unload option is also used to remove reagents that
are going to be exchanged. All reagents other than ISE reagent, sample wash solution,
reagent wash solution, physiological saline and concentrated wash solution can be
removed through the Unload function. When a chemistry is requested for quality control,
sample analysis or calibration, all reagents of the chemistry still can be unloaded.
When a reagent is unloaded, all relevant information and its position are cleared. The
reagents that are being used for analysis cannot be unloaded.
5.11.2 Unloading Biochemical Reagents

The following procedures are only applicable to unloading the reagents without bar code;
for those reagents with barcode, when the reagents are taken away from the reagent
carousel, they are unloaded automatically.
1 Make sure that the reagent to be unloaded is not being used for analysis.
2 Select Reagent - Reagent/Calibration, and select the up and down arrow buttons to
display the biochemical regent/calibration screen.
3 Or select Reagent - Reagent Carousel Status.
4 Select the reagent position to unload reagent.
5 Select Load F1.
6 Select Unload F4.
8 Take out the reagent from the reagent carousel.
5-15
5 Reagents
5-16
6 Calibration
This chapter describes functions and operation instructions associated with calibration,
which include:
 Calibration status and alarm indication
 Calibrator dilution setup
 Reagent blank
 Auto calibration
 Extending calibration time
 Overriding a calibration
 Rejecting a calibration
 Calibration results recall
6-1
6 Calibration
6.1 Overview
In a calibration, the system measures the response of the calibrator with given
concentration, and then calculates the factors in the concentration-response equation. In
this way, a math equation about concentration and response is determined. The
concentration of a patient sample can be calculated based on the math equation and the
measured sample response.
When the calibration status is abnormal, the system will give an alarm and display the
calibration status with specific color. The system allows multiple concentrations of a
calibrator for multi-point calibration. The calibration factors can be adjusted through a
reagent blank test. When you set up the auto calibration conditions, the system will
automatically remind you of calibrating chemistries. Expired calibration factors can be
used again by extending the calibration time. You are allowed to override a failed
calibration and obtain results based on the failed calibration factors. Current calibration
factors can be rejected and the latest valid ones are used to calculate sample results.
6-2
6 Calibration
6.2 Calibration Status and Alarm

On the Reagent/Calibration screen, the chemistries are indicated with various texts and
colors for different calibration status. Chemistries in Cal Required, Cal Failed or Cal Time
Out status can be requested but will not be run.
Check the chemistries’ calibration status frequently and take relevant actions according to
the following table.
Table 6.1 Calibration status
Calibration Description Severity Color
Status
Cal Required Indicates that the chemistry needs to be Serious Red
calibrated.
This status appears when the chemistry is
not calibrated and auto calibration
conditions are satisfied; or calibration
information or chemistry parameters are
modified.
Requested Indicates that the chemistry has been Normal No color
requested for calibration but the test has indication
not begun.
Calibrated Indicates that the chemistry has been Normal No color
calibrated and has not exceeded the indication
calibration period.
Cal Failed Indicates that the test has finished but Serious Red
cannot calculate the final result, or the
calculated result exceeds the acceptance
limits, or calibration is requested but
without results due to test error.
Cal Time Out Appears when the chemistry exceeds the Serious Red
calibration period.
Cal Time Indicates that the calibration period has Warning Yellow
Extended been extended and the current calibration
factors can be used without time limit.
Calculated Indicates that the calibration factors of Warning Yellow
the chemistry have been recalculated.
Edited Indicates that the calibration factors of Warning Yellow
the chemistry have been edited.
Cal Indicates that the test results of the Warning Yellow
Overridden chemistry are based on a failed
calibration, and flagged accordingly.
N/A Indicates the reagent has no calibration Normal No color
status. indication
6-3
6 Calibration
6.3 Calibrator Dilution Setup

6.3.1 Introduction
The system supports calibrator dilution and allows one calibrator to have 9
concentrations for the same chemistry. You are only required to enter the final
concentration of the diluted calibrator and the diluted calibrator volume aspirated by the
sample probe during calibration. The system will automatically calculate the diluent
volume and the sample volume for diluting. When you set up the dilution factors for a
chemistry, its original calibrator concentration will be removed.
Diluted calibrator is only applied to biochemical chemistries rather than ISE chemistries.
You are allowed to edit or delete the calibrator dilution factors when the system is not
running any tests.
6.3.2 Setting up Calibrator Dilution Factors

3 Choose a chemistry in the right list.
4 Select Dilute F5.
Figure 6.1 Calibrator Dilution Setup window
5 Select a unit from the Unit dropdown box for the calibrator.
The options include all units set for the chemistry. This field is uneditable for
open-reagent chemistry.
6 Enter the final concentration of the diluted calibrator in the Conc field.
7 Enter the calibrator volume dispensed by the sample probe during calibration in the
Aspirated Vol field.
The input must be an integer multiple of 0.1 within 1.5μl-45μl. This field is required.
6-4
6 Calibration
8 Enter the calibrator volume used for diluting in the Neat Vol field.
The input must be an integer multiple of 0.1 within 1.5μl-45μl. This field can be left
blank.
9 Enter the diluent volume used for diluting in the Diluent Vol field.
The input must be an integer multiple of 0.5 within 75μl-200μl. This field can be left
blank.
NOTE
If the neat sample volume and diluent volume are defined, ensure that the sum of
the two volumes is within 110μl-245μl.
The two volumes must be defined or left blank simultaneously.
10 Select Save.
11 To define more concentrations for the calibrator, repeat step 5 to 9.
12 To set up dilution factors for other calibrators, repeat step 5 to 10.
6.3.3 Editing Calibrator Dilution Factors

3 Choose the chemistries.
4 Select Dilute F5.
5 Choose a concentration line to edit.
6 Select Edit.
The selected concentration line is editable.
7 Change the concentration, sample volume, neat sample volume and diluent volume.
NOTE
If the neat sample volume and diluent volume are defined, ensure that the sum of
the two volumes is within 110μl-245μl.
The two volumes must be defined or left blank simultaneously.
8 Select Save.
6.3.4 Deleting Calibrator Dilution Factors

3 Choose a chemistry in the concentration list.
4 Select Dilute F5.
5 Choose a concentration line to delete.
6 Select Delete.
6-5
6 Calibration
6.4 Reagent Blank

6.4.1 Introduction
In a reagent blank test, the reagents react with the physiological saline or a calibrator
with concentration of 0, and then the blank absorbance is calculated. When a reagent is
uncapped for a long period, the reagent absorbance may be changed. At this time, you are
allowed to run a reagent blank instead of calibration to calculate the reagent blank
absorbance, which will be used to adjust the calibration factors of the reagent in order to
ensure reliable sample results.
The reagent blank is allowed only in the following calibration status: Calibrated which
means the calibration is successfully performed. Reagent blank is applied to biochemical
chemistries only.
If the reagent blank results, including the mixed blank absorbance and blank response,
are within the acceptance range, the system will update the calibration factors and the
remaining calibration time based on the results. If the results exceed the acceptant limits,
the system will give an alarm and remind you to rerun the reagent blank. The
Biochemistry Calibration screen shows the calculated reagent blank response,
absorbance and run date.
6.4.2 Mixed Blank Absorbance and Blank Response

When defining a chemistry, you need to set up the mixed blank absorbance and blank
response to check the reagent blank results.
The mixed blank absorbance indicates the allowable range of the absorbance measured
at the end point of a zero-concentration calibrator reaction or a reagent blank reaction. If
the absorbance measured at the reaction end point is beyond the set range, the system
will flag the test result.
The blank response specifies the allowable range of the response in a zero-concentration
calibrator analysis or a reagent blank test. If the response is beyond the set range, the
system will flag the test result.
2 Choose a biochemical chemistry, or enter the chemistry name in the Chemistry
Name field.
3 Select Define F1.
4 Select the down-arrow button to show the error detection parameters setup page.
5 Enter the mixed blank absorbance range in the Mixed Blank Abs field.
Both the low and high limits must be an integer within -33,000-33,000. The default
is -33,000-33, 000, and it can be left blank.
6 Enter the blank response range in the Blank Response field.
Both the low and high limits must be an integer within -33,000-33,000.The default is
-33,000-33, 000, and can be left blank.
7 Select Save F7.
6-6
6 Calibration
6.4.3 Requesting a Reagent Blank

Please note that reagent blank can only be run in following conditions:
 Chemistries with all calibration math models rather than two-point linear and K
factor must have the 0-concentration calibrator set up.
 K factor chemistries must have calibrators set up.
The reagent blank is allowed only in Calibrated calibration status.
1 Select Reagent - Reagent/Calibration,
3 Select the up and down arrow buttons to display the biochemical reagent/calibration
screen.
4 Choose the chemistries.
5 Check if the desired chemistries’ calibration status is Calibrated.
6 Select Cal F5.
7 Choose Rgt Blk.
8 Select OK.
9 Select the icon to start the analysis.
6.4.4 Recalling Reagent Blank Results

If the reagent blank results are within the acceptance limit range, they will be used to
update the current calibration parameters. You are allowed to recall the reagent blank
response, absorbance and run date on the Biochemistry Calibration screen. Calibration
curve of reagent blank cannot be recalled.
Recalling reagent blank response

1 Select Reagent - Biochemistry Calibration.
2 Choose a chemistry in the Chem pull-down list.
3 Select Search F1.
The calibration results and reagent blank results of the chemistry are displayed in the
result list.
4 Choose a calibration result.
5 Select Reac Curve F3.
6-7
6 Calibration
Figure 6.2 Reagent blank reaction curve
The response value current displayed is the updated reagent blank response.
6 Select the reaction data table to view the reagent blank reaction data.
Figure 6.3 Reagent blank reaction data

 Prev F4: to view reaction curve and data of the previous calibration test.
 Next F5: to view reaction curve and data of the next calibration test.
 Print F7: to print the current reaction curve or data.
8 Select Close F8.
Recalling reagent blank trends

2 Choose a chemistry in the Chem pull-down list.
6-8
6 Calibration
3 Select Search F1.
The calibration results and reagent blank results of the chemistry are displayed in the
result list.
4 Choose a calibration result.

5 Select Trend F6.
Figure 6.4 Graphic Trend tab page
6 Choose a trend type you want to recall.

 R1 blank absorbance
 Mixed blank absorbance
 Calibrator response
 K factor (for linear calibrations only)
7 Select the calibration time range.
8 Select Search F1.
The graphical trend of the selected chemistry within the specific period is displayed.
9 Select the Tabular Trend tab to view the trend data.
6-9
6 Calibration
Figure 6.5 Tabular Trend tab page

 Prev F4: to view the calibration trends and data of the previous chemistry.
 Next F5: to view the calibration trends and data of the next chemistry.
 Print F7: to print the current graphic trend or data.
6-10
6 Calibration
6.5 Auto Calibration

6.5.1 Introduction
Based on the auto calibration conditions, the system can determine chemistries that need
to be calibrated and remind you through calibration status and color indication. Auto
calibration conditions include:
 Calibration factors’ validity period
 Reagent lot changed
 Reagent bottle changed
For open chemistries, when the lot number or serial number of R1, R2, R3 or R4 is
changed, calibration is required. If no lot number or serial number is set for the reagents,
the chemistries will not be calibrated automatically even though the conditions are met.
When the calibration time is exceeded, the system will remind you of running
calibrations.
For closed chemistries, calibration will be run automatically when reagent lot number is
changed.
6.5.2 Auto Calibration Setup

2 Select Rules F4.
Figure 6.6 Calibration Setup window
4 Choose auto calibration conditions:

 Bottle changed: The system will remind you to run calibration when you use a
different bottle of reagents.
 Lot changed: The system will remind you to run calibration when you use
reagents of a different lot.
6-11
6 Calibration
 Calibration time: The system will remind you in 30 minutes before the
calibration is timed out and display the chemistry’s calibration status with
yellow.
NOTE
If the Manage Reagents by Lot option on the System Setup screen is enabled,
Bottle Changed and Lot Changed will not appear. When a different reagent lot is
used, the system will request and run calibration automatically.
5 Select Save F7.
6 Select Prev F4 or Next F5 to set up the calibration rules for other chemistries.
6.5.3 Auto Calibration Reminding

When the auto calibration conditions are satisfied, the system will remind you through
the calibration status, prompt message and color indication.
 If you choose the Bottle Changed option, the system will display a message
indicating calibration is required when you use a different bottle of reagents.
 If you choose the Lot Changed option, the system will display a message indicating
calibration is required when you use reagents of a different lot.
 If you choose the Cal Time option, the system will remind you in 30 minutes before
the calibration is timed out and display the chemistry name and calibration status
with yellow.
6.5.4 Removing Auto Calibration

To disable the auto calibration, perform the following steps:
2 Select Rules F4.
4 Deselect all auto calibration conditions.
5 Select Save F7.
6-12
6 Calibration
6.6 Extending Calibration Time

6.6.1 Introduction
Calibration factors that exceed the calibration period cannot be used for result calculation.
The calibration status becomes Cal Time Out and the chemistry can no longer be run. The
system will display a warning message in 30 minutes before the calibration is timed out,
and you are allowed to recalibrate the chemistry or extend its calibration time. If you are
certain that the calibration factors are correct and valid, you may prolong their validity
period by using the calibration time extension function. A calibration time can be
extended only if the current calibration of the chemistry is timed out or succeeded. The
results calculated based on extended calibration factors will be flagged with "EXT".
6.6.2 Extending Calibration Time

2 Select a reagent carousel from the dropdown box of Reagent Carousel;
3 Select the up and down arrow buttons to display the biochemical reagent/calibration
screen.
4 Choose a chemistry you want to extend.
5 Select Cal Options F8.
6 Select Extend Calibration Time from the Calibration Options window.
Figure 6.7 Calibration Options window
7 Select OK. The calibration factors of the selected chemistry can be used without time
limit.
6.6.3 Removing an Extended Status

Calibration extension is not absolutely definite. Recalibrate the chemistry to remove the
extended status.
6-13
6 Calibration
6.7 Calibration Override

6.7.1 Introduction
The Calibration Override option allows the system to override a failed calibration and
calculate results based on the failed calibration factors. Calibration override is only
applied to failed calibrations. Results that are obtained based on failed calibration factors
will be flagged with "OVE".
CAUTION
Before overriding a calibration, make sure that the calibration factors are within the
acceptance limits of your laboratory. The magnitude of the error should be totally under
the control of your laboratory. Use of overridden calibration factors may lead to
unreliable results and influence the doctor’s diagnosis. Think twice before overriding a
failed calibration.
6.7.2 Overriding a Calibration

2 Choose a chemistry you want to override.
4 Select Calibration Override from the Calibration Options window.
5 Select OK. The failed calibration factors of the selected chemistry can be used for
result calculation.
6.7.3 Removing Cal Overridden Status

Recalibrate the chemistry to remove its Cal Overridden status.
6-14
6 Calibration
6.8 Reject
6.8.1 Introduction
If the current calibration fails but sample analysis needs to be performed immediately,
you may use the Reject function to reject the current calibration factors, and use the
latest valid ones for calculating sample results, which will be flagged with "CALJ"..
Calibration factors of status other than Requested and Cal Required can be rejected.
Rejected calibration factors cannot be rejected again.
6.8.2 Rejecting a Calibration

2 Choose a chemistry you want to reject.
4 Select Reject from the Calibration Options window.
5 Select OK. Calibration factors of the selected chemistry are rejected.
6.8.3 Removing Reject Status

Recalibrate the chemistry to remove its Reject status.
6-15
6 Calibration
6.9 Recalling Calibration Results

On the Biochemistry Calibration screen you are enabled to recall the current and stored
calibration factors of a chemistry. If the Manage Reagents by Lot option on the System
Setup screen is enabled, you can recall calibration results of each reagent lot. The
Current calibration factors are obtained in the recent calibration and are being used for
result calculation. You are allowed to recall the calibration curve, calibration reaction
curve and calibration trends during the specified period, and edit or recalculate the
calibration factors.
6.9.1 Recalling Current Calibration Factors

The screen shows all the calibrations requested on the day, including the following
information:
 Chemistry name
 Lot number
 Result flag
 Calibration status
 Run date and time
 R0: reagent blank response
 K: K factor
 A, B, C and D: factors a, b, c and d in nonlinear calibration equations
 Unit
3 Select Search F1.
The current calibration factors of the chemistry are displayed in the result list.
4 To print the calibration report, select Print F7.
6.9.2 Recalling History Calibration Factors

2 Choose the History option button.
4 Select the date range in the Cal Date field.
5 Select Search F1.
The calibration factors used within the specified period are displayed on the screen.

 Cal Curve F2
 Reac Curve F3
 Edit F4
 Archive F5
 Trend F6
6-16
6 Calibration
 Print F7
6.9.3 Calibration Curve

A calibration curve reflects the mathematical relation between calibrator concentration
and response. It is drawn based on the obtained response and the multiple values
between the minimum and maximum concentrations of the calibrator. The calibration
curve is a straight line in linear calibrations and a curve in nonlinear calibrations.
K-factor, edited or reagent-blanked calibration factors have no calibration curve to recall.
1 Search for desired calibration results on the Biochemistry Calibration screen.
2 Choose a chemistry in the result list.
3 Select Cal Curve F2. The Calibration Curve window is displayed.
Figure 6.10 Calibration Curve window

 Prev F4: to view the calibration curve of the previous chemistry.
 Next F5: to view the calibration curve of the next chemistry.
 Recalculate F6: to recalculate the calibration factors based on the specified
math model.
 Print F7: to print the current calibration curve.
Recalculating calibration factors

Calibration results in Calibrated, Cal Failed, Cal Time Out, Extended, or Overridden status
can be recalculated based on the existing factors, a new math model and calibrators. The
flag "CALR" indicating that the calibration result is recalculated will appear on the
Biochemistry Calibration screen.
Recalculating calibration factors is not applicable to K factor calibrations. Calibration
factors that have been recalculated cannot be calculated again.
2 Search for desired calibration results to recalculate.
6-17
6 Calibration

4 Select Cal Curve F2.
5 Select Recalculate F6. The Recalculate window shows.
Figure 6.11 Recalculate window
6 Choose a math model from the Math Model pull-down list.

The corresponding calculation formula is displayed in the text box to the right of the
Math Model field.
7 Choose calibrators to recalculate in the left list. Move the scroll bar to view more
calibrators.
Choose the correct number of calibrators corresponding to the math model. For
more information, refer to 3.3.6 Setting up Calibration Rules (page 3-28).
8 Select Save F7.
The system will recalculate the calibration factors with the selected math model and
calibrators.
 If the recalculation is succeeded, the new calibration factors will be displayed on
the Biochemistry Calibration screen with the calibration status shown as
Recalculated, and “CALR” will appear in the corresponding Flag column.
 If the recalculation fails, the system will show a message box indicating the old
calibration factors will remain to be used.
9 To view the reaction curve of the selected calibrator, select Reac Curve F1.
6.9.4 Calibration Reaction Curve

A calibration reaction curve reflects the relationship of the absorbance measured at the
primary wavelength, secondary wavelength and primary-secondary wavelength. It is
drawn based on the absorbance of the calibrator-reagent mixture measured within the
reaction period.
Observing reaction curve:
6-18
6 Calibration

3 Select Reac Curve F3. The Reaction Curve window is displayed.
Figure 6.12 Reaction Curve window
4 Select a point on the curve. Relevant measuring period and absorbance are displayed
on the right of the window.
5 Select a filter condition from the following options:
 None: observe reaction curve and data in the default mode.
 Chemistry: observe reaction curve of the results for the selected test.
 Calibrator: observe reaction curve of the results for the selected calibrator.
6 Choose the Reaction Data tab to view the reaction data.
Figure 6.13 Reaction Data tab page
6-19
6 Calibration
 Reagent F1: to view the calibrators and reagents used in calibration, and
reagents for reagent blank test.
 Sample Blank F2: to view the sample blank reaction curve and reaction data of
the calibrator.
 Adjust F3: to adjust the absorbance display range of current reaction curve.
Refer to 8.12.8 Reaction Curve (Page 8-39) for details.
 Prev F4: to view reaction curve and data of the previous calibration test.
 Next F5: to view reaction curve and data of the next calibration test.
Viewing reagent information:

On the calibration reaction curve window, you are allowed to view the calibrators and
reagents used in calibration, and reagents for reagent blank test.
4 Select Reagent F1.
Figure 6.14 Reagent window
The window shows the calibrators and reagents used in calibration, and reagents for
reagent blank test.
6-20
6 Calibration
6.9.5 Editing Calibration Factors

If the calibration factors of linear calibration are higher or lower than the expected values
or than those obtained on other instruments, you are allowed to edit them to keep them
consistent with the expected ones or those on other instruments. The flag "CALE" will
appear for results calculated based on edited calibration factors, and the calibration curve
and reaction curve of edited calibration factors cannot be recalled.
Prior to editing calibration factors, ensure that you have sufficient permissions and the
system status is not Running.
2 Search for desired calibration results to edit.
3 Choose a desired chemistry.
4 Select Edit F4. The Edit window shows.
Figure 6.15 Edit window
5 Type in slope K and offset R0.

6 Select Save.
The system will refresh the calibration results and curves with the input slope and
offset, and take the edited calibration factors as the defaults.
6.9.6 Archiving Calibration Results

The system allows you to archive all searched calibration results to a storage device, such
as U disk. Archived calibration results are displayed in the same format as on the software
screen. The archived content includes: chemistry name, flag, calibration status, R0, K
factor, calibration coefficients A/B/C/D, and calibration time. The archiving file is of .csv
format and named by date and time.
2 Search for desired calibration results.
3 Select Archive F5.
4 Confirm the archiving path and file name.
5 Select OK.
6-21
6 Calibration
6.9.7 Calibration Trends

Calibration graphical trends summarize a chemistry’s calibrations during a period of time
and reflect the trends of the calibrations. The calibration graphical trends show the
chemistry’s R1 blank absorbance, mixed blank absorbance and calibrator response.
R1 blank absorbance and mixed blank absorbance are available only for chemistries with
0-concentration calibrators. The K factor trends can be recalled for linear chemistries.
Follow this procedure to observe calibration trends:
3 Select Trend F6. The Calibration Trends window is displayed.
Figure 6.16 Calibration Trends window
4 Choose a trend type you want to recall.

 R1 blank absorbance
 Mixed blank absorbance
 Calibrator response
 K factor (for linear calibrations only)
5 Select the date range in the Cal Date field.
6 Select Search F1.
The trend within the specified period is displayed on the screen.
7 Choose the Tabular Trend tab to view the trend data.
6-22
6 Calibration
Figure 6.17 Tabular Trend window

 Reac Curve F3: to view the reaction curve and data of the selected calibrator.
 Prev F4: to view the calibration trends and data of the previous chemistry
among the selected results.
 Next F5: to view the calibration trends and data of the next chemistry among
the selected results.
 Print F7: to print the current graphic trend or data.
6-23
6 Calibration
6-24
7 Quality Control
This chapter describes applications of quality control, which include:

 Daily and monthly QC procedure
 QC alarm indications
 QC result flags
 Control status
 QC evaluation
 Auto QC
 Control results recall
7-1
7 Quality Control
7.1 Overview
7.1.1 Introduction
QC test is performed on samples provided with known concentration range of various
analytes by authority divisions or reagent suppliers. By comparing with the given range,
the test results obtained on this instrument can be used to judge if the instrument is in
normal status and the sample results are reliable.
To ensure the system performance, run control samples every time after you perform a
calibration, or change the reagent lot, or maintain and troubleshoot the instrument.
7.1.2 Quality Control Operating Procedure

After you define a chemistry, control, and QC rules, there is no need to edit them
frequently, and you are only required to run control samples every day to make sure that
the system works well. Run control samples according to the following procedure:
Figure 7.1 Quality control operating procedure
Define Set up two- Print monthly

Set up QC Choose QC Enable auto
Monthly control
parameters rules
control
QC QC plot and
operations samples evaluation QC summary
Program Running
Load control Recall QC Print real-time
control control
Daily operations samples results QC results
samples samples
7.1.3 QC Alarms
The system provides the real-time monitoring of quality controls, and check if the QC
results are under control when a QC run is finished. If the results exceed the reference
range, the system will give an audible alarm and shows an alarm message indicating the
chemistry name, control name and control rules. For instance, “Chemistry ALT control C1
1-3s out of control!”. In this situation, you should stop the analysis and find the causes of
the failure, and resume the analysis after solving the problem.
For QC alarms and corrective actions, refer to 17.5 Error Messages and Corrective Actions
(page 17-28).
7.1.4 QC Result Flags

When a QC result fails, the system will give an audible alarm and show alarm message to
remind you of the failure. Moreover, the following flags will appear for failed results in the
Flag column of the QC reports.
 1-3s
 2-2s
 R-4s
 2-2s
 4-1s
 10-x
7-2
7 Quality Control
The system checks the failed QC results for system error or random error and then flag
them accordingly. A “#” sign indicates a systematic error, and an asterisk “*” indicates a
random error. For more information about QC result flags, refer to 17.4 Data Alarm(page
17-11).
7.1.5 Control Status

When you choose a control on the Quality Control screen, the current status of the
control is displayed in the Sample Status field. It is necessary to understand the control
statuses. The table below shows the various statuses of control samples.
Table 7.1 Descriptions of control status
Control Status Description
N/A Indicates that the control is not programmed for analysis.
Requested Indicates that the control sample has been programmed but not
analyzed yet.
In Progress Indicates that the control sample is being analyzed.
Incomplete Indicates that all chemistries of the control sample have been
finished but one or more of them have no results.
Complete Indicates that all chemistries of the control sample have been
finished with results.
7-3
7 Quality Control
7.2 QC Evaluation
7.2.1 Introduction
The system provides the Westgard rules for evaluating QC results of the chemistries, and
give alarms and flags when the obtained QC results are beyond the reference range. Since
every chemistry may have one or more control samples, the QC results can be evaluated
with different rules accordingly. Those controls that are not included in any lots will be
evaluated as single controls.
7.2.2 Evaluation of Single Controls

The Westgard rules for evaluation of single controls are listed in the table below:
Table 7.2 Westgard rules for single controls
Rules Description Flag Error Type
1-2s One result is between ±2 and ±3 N/A N/A
standard deviations from the
assigned mean concentration.
1-3s One result is greater than ±3 1-3s *(1)
standard deviations from the
assigned mean concentration.
2-2s Two continuous results are greater 2-2s #(2)
than +2 or -2 standard deviations
from the assigned mean
concentration, e.g. (Xn, Xn-1)
4-1s Four continuous results are greater 4-1s #
than +1 or -1 standard deviation
from the assigned mean
concentration, e.g. (Xn, Xn-1, Xn-2,
Xn-3)
10-x Ten results being compared are on 10-x #
the same side, e.g. (Xn, Xn-1, Xn-2,
Xn-3..Xn-9)
(1) An asterisk “*” indicates a random error, which requires no special action but must
not be ignored.
(2) A “#” symbol indicates a systematic error, which requires special consideration.
7-4
7 Quality Control
The evaluation procedure of single controls is shown in the figure below:

Figure 7.2 Evaluation procedure of single controls
Control data
No
>2S In-control
Yes No
Yes
12S Warning
No
No No No
13S 22S 41S 10X
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Out of control
7.2.3 Two-Control Evaluation

What is a run
A QC run is based on two control samples: C1 and C2, and at most one QC run is
performed for each chemistry. The system allows the definition of QC run interval on the
System Setup screen. The maximum QC run interval is 24 hours.
3 Choose 9 QC Evaluation.
4 Type in the QC run length in the Run Length field.
5 Select OK.
Two-control evaluation rules

In every QC run, two results are obtained: Xn and Yn, which are used to define a point on
the Twin-plot chart. In this way, a complete twin-plot chart is drawn based on all the QC
results and used for detecting systematic errors and random errors.
The Westgard rules for two-control evaluation are listed in the table below:
Table 7.3 Two-control evaluation rules
1-2s One result is between ±2 and ±3 standard N/A N/A
deviations from the assigned mean
concentration.
1-3s One result is greater than ±3 standard 1-3s *(1)
deviations from the assigned mean
concentration.
2-2SA Two results (Xn, Yn) of a run are 2-2s #(2)
simultaneously greater than +2 or -2
standard deviations from the assigned
mean.
7-5
7 Quality Control

R-4s One result of a run is greater than +2 R-4s *
standard deviations from the assigned
mean and the other greater than -2SDs.
2-2SW Two continuous results of a control are 2-2s #
greater than +2 or -2 standard deviations
from the assigned mean concentration,
e.g. (Xn, Xn-1), (Yn, Yn-1).
4-1SA Results of two continuous runs are 4-1s #
greater than +1 or -1 standard deviation
from the assigned mean, e.g. (Xn, Yn,
Xn-1, Yn-1).
4-1SW Four continuous results of a control are 4-1s #
greater than +1 or -1 standard deviations
from the assigned mean concentration,
e.g. (Xn, Xn-1, Xn-2, Xn-3), (Yn, Yn-1,
Yn-2, Yn-3).
10-XA Results of five continuous runs (10 10-x #
results) compared are on the same side,
e.g. (Xn, Yn, Xn-1, Yn-1, Xn-2, Yn-2,
Xn-3, Yn-3, Xn-4, Yn-4).
10-XW Ten continuous results (10 results) of a 10-x #
control are on the same side, e.g. (Xn,
Xn-1, Xn-2, Xn-3..Xn-9), (Yn, Yn-1, Yn-2,
Yn-3..Yn-9).
(1) An asterisk “*” indicates a random error, which requires no special action but must
not be ignored.
(2) A “#” symbol indicates a systematic error, which requires special consideration.
The random errors in two-control evaluation correspond to those in single-control
evaluation as follows:
 22SA\22SW corresponding to 22s.
 41SA\41SW corresponding to 41s.
 10XA\10XW corresponding to 10x.
The procedure of two-control evaluation is shown in the figure below:
Figure 7.3 Two-control evaluation workflow
Measured values of X
and Y controls
No
12S In control
Yes
No
No No No No No No No
13S 22SA R4S 22SW 41SA 41SW 10XA 10XW
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Out of control (occurrence of alarm)
7-6
7 Quality Control
7.3 Auto Quality Control

7.3.1 Introduction
The system provides the auto quality control function. When the conditions for a QC run
are satisfied, the system will request and run the specified controls automatically. The
control samples automatically run can be selected on the QC Parameters window.
The conditions for auto quality control include:
 Number of samples: indicates the number of patient samples. After the given
number of samples is finished, the system will run the selected control(s)
automatically.
 When calibrated: The system will automatically run the chemistry for the selected
control(s) every time when the chemistry is calibrated. Auto QC is not applicable to
non-measurement calibrations, such as recalculation and editing.
When the control samples automatically run are selected, all chemistries configured for
the control samples will be run.
7.3.2 Auto QC Setup

3 Choose 9 QC Evaluation.
Figure 7.4 QC Parameters window
4 Select Auto QC on carousel.

5 Set up the conditions for auto quality control:
 Number of Samples: enter the number of samples for auto QC run. The input
range is 10-500, 0 means auto QC is disabled.
7-7
7 Quality Control
 When Calibrated: select the checkbox to allow the system to run controls when
a chemistry is calibrated.
6 Choose controls to be run automatically.
One or more controls can be selected.
7 Select OK.
7.3.3 Auto Quality Control

After setting up auto QC conditions and selecting the Auto QC checkbox on the Start
Conditions window, the system will insert QC runs automatically once the conditions are
met.
1 After setting up auto QC, place controls on the sample carousel.
is displayed.
3 Select OK. The system will insert a QC run in the current test queue.
7.3.4 Removing Auto QC Status

To remove an auto QC status, clear the auto QC settings on the QC Parameters window.
7-8
7 Quality Control
7.4 Recalling Control Results

The Recalling Control Results option allows you to view control sample results, L-J chart,
twin-plot chart, analysis data and data summary.
7.4.1 Control Sample Results

1 Select Result - Current Results or History Results.
 The Current Results screen displays all incomplete patient samples and control
samples, as well as those programmed on the current day.
 The History Results screen displays all patient samples and control samples
programmed before the current day.
2 Choose a result recall mode:
 By sample
 By chemistry
3 When recalling results by sample, choose a control in the left list. The right list
displays all results of the control. When recalling results by chemistry, choose a
chemistry in the left list. The right list displays all results of the chemistry.
 Search F1: to recall control results.
 Options F2: to delet or archive control samples.
 Reac Curve F4: to view reaction curve of the selected QC test.
 Print F7: to print control results.
 Host F8: to transmit the selected control results to the LIS host.
Viewing control reaction curve

1 Search for desired control results on the Current Results or History Results screen.
7-9
7 Quality Control
Figure 7.5 Reaction Curve screen

Figure 7.6 Reaction Data screen

the selected control.
 Prev F4: to view the reaction curve and data of the previous test.
 Next F5: to view the reaction curve and data of the next test.
7-10
7 Quality Control
Printing control results

You are allowed to print the selected or all control results on the Current Results or
History Results screen.
1 Search for desired control results on the Current Results or History Results screen.
2 To print the selected controls, select them in the sample list.
3 Select Print F7.
4 Select Print Sample Report.
5 Choose the print range:
 Selected Sample(s)
 All Sample(s)
6 If you print all samples, you are allowed to skip those that are already printed out.
Mark the Bypass Printed Sample(s) checkbox.
7 Select OK.
7.4.2 Recalling L-J Chart

A Levey-Jennings (L-J) chart, drawn based on the QC date (X) and test results (Y), shows
the QC result trend of a chemistry during the specified period. The graphical trends of up
to 3 controls can be displayed on one L-J chart and distinguished with different colors.
Each page can display 31 QC points. The query date must not be longer than 1 year.
Recalling L-J chart

1 Select QC - Levey-Jennings.
2 Choose a chemistry to recall in the Chem pull-down list box, or select Chems F2 and
then choose a chemistry.
3 Select the date range in the QC Date field.
4 Choose controls you desire to view. Up to 3 controls can be selected.
5 Select Search F1. The L-J chart area shows the QC result trends of the selected
chemistry during the specified period.
7-11
7 Quality Control
Figure 7.7 Levey-Jennings screen

 Prev F4: to view the L-J chart of the previous chemistry.
 Next F5: to view the L-J chart of the next chemistry.
 Delete F6: to delete the selected point on the L-J chart. If you want to display
the removed points on the L-J chart, mark the Show Deleted checkbox.
 Print F7: to print the current L-J chart.
 Comment F8: to add, modify and delete comments of a QC point.
Adding/Modifying comments
2 Select a chemistry, QC date and controls, and then select Search F1 to query the
corresponding L-J chart.
3 Choose a QC point on the chart.
4 Select Comment F8, and then input comments for the QC point.
5 Select OK.
Select the QC point on the chart. The comments of this QC point are displayed in the
Comment area at the upper-right corner of the screen.
To delete the comments of a QC point, select the QC point on the chart, clear the
comments, and then select OK.
Selecting chart option

The L-J chart can be drawn by QC date or QC time. Either of the two options can be
selected to display the L-J chart. The default standard is QC time.
7-12
7 Quality Control
2 Select Chart F3.

Figure 7.8 Chart Options window
3 Choose an option to draw the L-J chart:

 QC Time: The X coordinate of the L-J chart is displayed in the format of
“YYMMDDHHMMSS”.
 QC Date: The X coordinate of the L-J chart is displayed in the format of “MMDD”.
4 Select OK. The L-J chart is refreshed automatically and displayed in the selected
format.
7.4.3 Recalling Twin-Plot Chart

A twin-plot chart, drawn based on the results of control X and control Y in the same run, is
used to detect systematic errors and random errors. It shows the recent 10 QC results of a
chemistry and excludes those that have been deleted.
1 Select QC - Twin-Plot.
2 Choose a chemistry to recall in the Chem pull-down list box, or select Chems F2 and
then choose a chemistry.
3 Select Search F1. The twin-plot chart area displays the recent 10 results of control X
and control Y for the chemistry.
Figure 7.9 Twin-Plot screen
7-13
7 Quality Control

 Prev F4: to view the twin-plot chart of the previous chemistry.
 Next F5: to view the twin-plot chart of the next chemistry.
 Print F7: to print the current twin-plot chart.
7.4.4 Recalling QC Data

QC data includes QC results, and the set mean and standard deviation, and can be recalled
based on control name, chemistry name and run date.
1 Select QC - Results.
2 Select Chems F2.
3 Choose a chemistry to recall, and then select OK.
5 Choose a control in the Control pull-down list.
6 Select Search F1.
The result list shows all results of the control for the chemistry during the specified
period, as well as the set means and standard deviations.
Figure 7.10 Results screen

 Sort F3: to sequence the QC results by control or chemistry.
 Reac Curve F4: to view the reaction curve and data of the selected QC result.
 Comment F5: to add comments to the selected QC result.
 Archive F6: to archive the currently displayed QC results to an external storage
device.
 Print F7: to print the QC results currently displayed in the result list.
7-14
7 Quality Control
Sort QC results
The searched QC results can be rearranged by control or chemistry.
1 Search for desired QC results on the Results screen.
2 Select Sort F3.
Figure 7.11 Sort window
3 Select a sorting criterion.

 Control: control number + chemistry + run date/time
 Chemistry: chemistry order + control + run date/time
4 Select OK.
The QC results on the Results screen are rearranged ascending based on the
selected criterion.
Viewing control reaction curve

2 Choose a QC result to recall.
Figure 7.12 Control reaction curve
7-15
7 Quality Control

 Control: observe reaction curve of the results for the selected control.
6 Select the Reaction Data tab to view the reaction data.
Figure 7.13 Control reaction data

 Reagent F1: to view the reagents used for quality control, calibrators and
reagents used in calibration, and reagents for reagent blank test. Refer to 8.12.8
Reaction Curve (Page 8-39) for details.
the selected control.
Refer to 8.12.8 Reaction Curve (Page 8-39) for details.
 Prev F5: to view the reaction curve and data of the previous QC test.
 Next F6: to view the reaction curve and data of the next QC test.
Add QC comments
Comments can be added to specific QC result for special notice.
2 Choose a QC result in the result list.
3 Select Comment F5.
7-16
7 Quality Control
Figure 7.14 Comment window
4 Type in comments for the selected QC result.

Up to 100 characters can be entered.
5 Select OK.
Archive QC data
The system allows archiving of QC results to a storage device. The file format is CSV and
the default file name is QCData.csv. which cannot be edited. QC results must not be
archived to the hard disk.
The archived QC results and data include the following information:
Table 7.4 Archived QC data types
ID Control Result Information
1 Chemistry type
2 Chemistry number
3 Chemistry name
4 Control number
5 Control name
6 Lot number
7 Control concentration
8 Standard deviation
9 Measured results
10 Flag
11 Run date
12 Reagent lot number
Perform the following steps to archive QC results and data:

7-17
7 Quality Control
Figure 7.15 Archive window
3 Select OK.
7.4.5 Recalling QC Summary

The QC summary reports the measurements of a control for the selected chemistry during
the specified period. It presents you the means, standard deviations and coefficients of
variation in this period, and compares them with the set mean and SD, enabling you to
check if the system is working normally.
1 Select QC - Summary.
2 Select Chems F2.
3 Choose a chemistry to recall, and then select OK.
5 Choose a control in the Control pull-down list.
6 Select Search F1.
The result summary of the control for the chemistry is displayed on the screen.
Figure 7.16 Summary screen
7 To print the QC summary report, select Print F7.
7-18
8 Sample Programming and Processing
This chapter provides description of functions and operating instructions about sample
analysis, which include:
 Modifying/Adding samples and chemistries
 Rerunning samples
 Programming samples with increased or decreased volume
 Programming diluted samples
 Sample blank
 Loading/Unloading samples
 Viewing unpositioned samples and assign positions for them
 Releasing finished samples
 Viewing sample logs
 Customizing sample information
 Customizing patient demographics
 Viewing sample and chemistry lists
 Optimizing result display
 Sample results recall
 Test statistics and result statistics
8-1
8.1 Overview
Sample programming can be performed in manual and auto modes, in batch or by single,
by rerunning or adding chemistry and samples, in common or quick STAT mode, and via
virtual sample carousels. Chemistries selected for samples include biochemical
chemistries, ISE chemistries, serum index, calculations, off-system chemistries and panels.
If a chemistry will not be used in your laboratory, you are allowed to mask it and remove
it from the chemistry list. Samples can be programmed and analyzed based on the
running options. Patient demographics should be entered before or during the
measurements. You may view the sample analyzing status through the Status screen. The
system allows the deletion of programmed and complete samples.
These functions and operations will be described in detail in the following sections.
8-2
8.2 Sample Programming and Processing

8.2.1 Introduction
Except for analysis of routine samples, you often need to add samples or chemistries to
the programming or rerun an abnormal sample. Samples can be diluted manually or
prediluted automatically before being analyzed.
8.2.2 Adding Samples
BIOHAZARD
a doctor.
CAUTION
1 Add samples to the existing programming according to 2.8.1 Programming Routine
Samples (page 2-29).
2 Confirm the program information.
3 Select the icon on the upper-right corner of the main screen to request for
sample stop.
4 Check the sample stop countdown in the system status area and wait until it comes
to 0.
5 Check the sample carousel indicators, and proceed to the next step when the
indicators are extinguished.
 Flash: indicates that the corresponding carousel is rotating or is going to rotate.
 ON: indicates that the corresponding carousel is stopped for sample aspirating
or that the sample probe is aspirating on the reaction carousel during test for
the diluted samples.
 OFF: indicates that the corresponding carousel has no sample being aspirated
and will not rotate in the next period.
6 Place the added samples on the assigned positions of the sample carousel, and then
select to start the analysis.

 If the sample is on the current sample carousel, it is analyzed automatically.
 Otherwise, you should specify the sample carousel and position to start the
analysis.
8-3
8.2.3 Adding/Modifying Chemistries

No matter in which status a sample is, new chemistries can be added, and dilution factors
and replicates can be defined for them. For samples that are programmed but not
analyzed yet, editing the sample information (except for STAT feature), patient
demographics and chemistries is allowed; for samples in the status of In Progress, Rerun,
Incomplete or Complete, the sample information and chemistries must not be edited,
while patient demographics can be edited and new chemistries can be added.
2 Type in the sample ID and press Enter.
The programming information of the sample is displayed on the screen.
3 Deselect chemistries you won’t run, and then select chemistries you desire to run.
4 Deselect panels you won’t run, and then select panels you desire to run.
5 Choose chemistries and panels to add to the sample.
6 Select Save F8.
 If the system is running tests, it will analyze the added chemistries and panels
automatically.
 If the system is in Standby status, select the icon on the upper-right corner
of the main screen.
8.2.4 Rerunning Samples

Finished samples can be rerun in manual or auto mode. Only chemistries that have been
finished can be rerun. If a chemistry is run for more than one replicate, it cannot be rerun
only when all replicates are finished. Manual rerun is performed on the List screen,
Current Results screen and History Results screen; auto rerun is performed when a
result is beyond the set range .
Manual rerun on List screen

The Rerun window of the List screen allows you to manually rerun single or multiple
samples that are in Complete, Incomplete, Rerun or In Progress status. When rerunning
samples, you are allowed to edit the sample cup type, sample position, STAT feature and
chemistries. If a chemistry is finished, it can be rerun with edited sample volume,
replicates and predilution factor. Sample ID, bar code, sample type and collection time of
rerunning samples must not be edited. If certain chemistries of a sample are not finished
yet before the sample is rerun, the chemistries for rerunning cannot be modified.
Rerunning single sample:
A single sample can be rerun by specifying the bar code or sample ID.
2 Select List F5.
3 Select Rerun F4.
8-4
Figure 8.1 Rerun window
4 Type in the ID or bar code of the sample you desire to rerun or enter the barcode of
the sample.
5 Click Select.
Figure 8.2 Rerun Samples window
6 Edit the following information:

 Position: change the carousel number and position of the sample.
 STAT: select or deselect the STAT checkbox.
 Comment: choose or enter a sample comment.
 Chemistry and panel: change chemistries and panels.
 Options: edit the number of replicates and predilution factors for the sample or
for a chemistry, and then modify the sample cup type.
7 Select Save F8.
8 Select Exit F7.
9 After confirming all rerun information, load samples to the assigned positions, and

analysis.
8-5
Rerunning batch samples:

Batch samples can be rerun by specifying the sample ID range and with same
chemistries.
2 Select List F5.
3 Select Rerun F4.
4 Type in the sample ID or range you desire to rerun.
Separate single samples with comma, e.g. 5, 7, 9; and connect multiple continuous
samples with a dash, e.g. 1-3.
5 Select Batch.
Figure 8.4 Rerun Batch window
6 Choose chemistries for rerunning the samples.
The list includes all chemistries that have been enabled and configured. The selected
chemistries will be requested for rerunning the samples.
7 Select OK.
8 After confirming all rerun information, load samples to the assigned positions, and

 If the samples are on the current sample carousel, they are analyzed
automatically.
analysis.
8-6
Manual rerun on Current Results or History Results screen

2 Choose the By Sample option.
3 Search for desired sample results.
4 Check the Flag column for flags indicating abnormities.
5 Choose results you desire to rerun.
6 Select Rerun F5.
7 Change the carousel number and position of the sample.

8 Select a sample volume type to rerun the sample.
The sample volume is the same as that defined for the chemistry. If increased and
decreased volumes are defined for the chemistry, Increased and Decreased are
available here for selection.

10 Choose a sample tube type. The options include micro and standard.
11 Enter the off-line dilution factor.
The input range is 2-9999, and the default is blank.
12 Enter the predilution factor.

13 If you want to run a chemistry with different sample volume, replicates and
predilution factor, enter the values in the chemistry option area:
8-7
 Sample Vol: sample volume required to run the chemistry. The sample volume
is the same as that defined for the chemistry. If increased and decreased
volumes are defined for the chemistry, Increased and Decreased are available
here for selection.
 Predilution: ratio at which samples containing the chemistry will be prediluted
before being analyzed. When standard, increased and decreased sample volume
parameters are defined, the product between the sample dilution factor and the
predilution factor must not be greater than 134.
 Sample blank: set up sample blank for chemistries.
 Pretreatment: pretreat the sample.
14 Select Save.
15 Load samples to the assigned positions, and select to start the analysis.
analysis.
Batch rerun on Current Results or History Results screen

When recalling results by chemistry on the Current Results or History Results screen,
you are allowed to rerun multiple samples of a chemistry that are Complete or Incomplete.
2 Choose the By Chemistry option.
4 Choose a chemistry and samples you desire to rerun.
5 Select Rerun F5.
The window shows the selected chemistry and samples, as well as sample ID, bar
code, sample volume in previous test, predilution factor, sample blank and off-line
dilution factor.

7 Modify the sample volume, predilution factor, and off-line dilution factor.
8-8
 Predilution factor: The input range is 3-134, and the default is blank.
 Off-line dilution factor: The input range is 2-9999, and the default is blank.
 Sample blank: set up sample blank for chemistries.
 Pretreatment:pretreat the sample.
8 Select OK.
9 Load samples to the original positions, and select to start the analysis.
Auto rerun of ISE chemistry based on critical range

The auto rerun function can be enabled on the Reference/Critical Range window. Once
the auto rerun is enabled, the system will check if the ISE result is beyond the critical
range, and if it is, will rerun the sample.
4 Set up the reference range and critical range.
5 Mark the Auto Rerun checkbox with a tick.
The system will rerun the sample if the chemistry result is beyond the critical range.
6 Select Save F7 to save the settings.

Rerun biochemistries when meeting auto rerun conditions

The auto rerun function can be also enabled on the Define/Edit Chemistries window.
Once the auto rerun is enabled, the system will check if the rerun conditions are met, and
if they are, will rerun the sample.
For more information about auto rerun setup, refer to 3.1.3 Auto Rerun Setup. (Page 3-5).
3 Select Define F1.
4 Select the down-arrow button to show the error detection parameters setup page.
5 Mark the Auto Rerun checkbox with a tick.
7 Set up auto rerun conditions.
The system will rerun the sample if the rerun conditions are met.

Recalling rerun results

The rerun results of a sample are presented on the Recall Rerun Results window,
through which you are allowed to recall all rerun results. Users with sufficient
permissions are allowed to delete the rerun results of a sample.
8-9
3 Choose a sample and then a chemistry you desire to recall.

5 Select Recall Rerun Results. The Recall Rerun Results window is displayed.
The screen shows the sample information and all reruns results of the chemistry.
Figure 8.7 Recall Rerun Results window
6 The latest rerun result is the default one. To change the default result, choose a result,
and then select Set Defaults.
The Default column of the result shows Y, which stands for Yes.
8.2.5 Programming Samples with Increased or Decreased Volume

In common tests, chemistries are run with standard sample volume. Owing to the
specificity of certain sample, the result may be high or low. To ensure accurate results, the
system allows the processing of samples with increased or decreased volume. When a
sample is analyzed with standard volume and a result is beyond the reference range or
deemed abnormal, you are allowed to rerun the corresponding chemistry manually with
the increased or decreased sample volume.
3 Select Define F1.
8-10
Figure 8.8 Define/Edit Chemistries window
4 Type in the decreased and increased sample volume.

5 Type in the aspirated volume and diluent volume for decreased sample volume
analysis.
6 Type in the aspirated volume and diluent volume for increased sample volume
analysis.
7 Select Save F7.
8 Select Close F8.
 ID
 Sample position
 STAT status
 Sample type
 Comment
 Chemistries and panels
11 Set the chemistry options:
 Select Options F2.
 Choose a sample volume type and sample cup type.
 Enter the replicates, off-line dilution factor and predilution factor for the sample.
 Choose a sample volume for the chemistry.
 Enter the replicates and predilution factor for the chemistry.
 Set up sample blank.
 Select OK.
12 Select OK F8.
8-11
8.2.6 Programming Diluted Samples

Due to patient specificity, certain results of a sample may be relatively high. In this
condition, you are allowed to rerun the corresponding chemistries by manually or
automatically diluting the sample at certain ratio for part or all of the chemistries. When a
sample is analyzed and a result is beyond the reference range or deemed abnormal, you
are allowed to rerun the corresponding chemistry manually with the sample diluted.
You are allowed to set the sample dilution factors when defining a chemistry or
requesting the chemistry for sample analysis.
If the sample volume, replicates and predilution factor are set for both the sample and the
chemistry, the chemistry will be run based on its own settings instead of those of the
sample.
Perform the following steps to run diluted samples.
3 Select Define F1.
4 Type in the aspirated sample volume and diluent volume for standard sample volume
analysis.
5 Type in the aspirated sample volume and diluent volume for decreased and
increased sample volume analysis.
6 Select Save.
7 Select Close.
 ID
 Sample position
 STAT status
 Sample type
 Comment
10 Select OK F8.
11 Select Options F2.
8-12
12 Select a sample volume type to run the sample.

 Standard
 Increased
 Decreased
14 Select a sample tube type from the Sample Cup pull-down list.
 Microtube
 Standard
15 Enter the off-line dilution factor.
16 Enter the number of replicates.


19 Select a sample volume type in the Sample Vol column for the chemistry.
20 Enter the number of replicates.
When standard, increased and decreased sample volume parameters are defined, the
product between the sample dilution factor and the predilution factor must not be
greater than 134.
22 Move the scroll bar to view more chemistries.
8-13
23 Select Save.
8.2.7 Sample Blank

readings. Sample blank is only effective for single-reagent endpoint chemistries.
Running a sample blank

3 Select Define F1.
4 Mark the Sample Blank checkbox with a tick.
5 Select Save F7.
6 Select Close F8.
The system will run a sample blank when running calibrators, controls and samples
for the chemistry.
Recalling sample blank results

3 Choose a sample and then a chemistry you desire to recall.
4 Select Reac Curve F4.
5 Select Sample Blank F2.
Figure 8.10 Sample blank reaction curve
8-14
Figure 8.11 Sample blank reaction data
7 To print the reaction curve or reaction data, select Print F7.

8.2.8 Whole Blood Test

The system supports whole blood test by pretreating patient sample, control and
calibrator before test. Chemistries run with whole blood are similar with other routine
biochemistries in parameter setup, calibration setup and reagent loading, except that
pretreatment reagent should be set and loaded.
 For pretreatment setup, see 3.2.4 Error Detection Limitson page 3-16
 For instructions of 2.5.6 Loading Pretreat Reagentee reagent on page 2-20.
For the test of whole blood(centrifuged)sample, the parameters can be set up on the
chemistry parameter screen or on the chemistry options window and rerun window. On
the chemistry parameter screen, once sample pretreatment is selected, all the tests of this
chemistry will perform pretreatment. You can enable or disable pretreatment on the
chemistry options window or rerun window so that manually pretreated sample can be
tested.
Preparing sample
Put the centrifuged whole blood sample(2000rpm,5min) into the sample positions.
NOTE
For the tests with blood cell pretreatment, please prepare the centrifuged whole blood
sample. For the centrifuged whole blood sample,onlyΦ12×68.5 mm, Φ12×99 mm,
Φ12.7×75 mm, Φ12.7×100 mm, Φ13×75 mm, Φ13×95 mm, Φ13×100 mm anticoagulation
tubes can be used. The sample height in the tube should be no higher than 55mm and the
blood cell level should be no lower than 10mm. Microcups are not allowed. To ensure the
clinical performance and avoid the system alarm, EDTA anticoagulation tubes are
recommended.
If manual pretreatment is required due to abnormal test results, please deselect the
pretreatment option on the chemistry options window and the rerun window.
8-15
Follow the steps below to perform whole blood sample tests:

1 Select Utility > Chemistries.
2 Select a chemistry.
3 Select Define F1.
4 Select Sample pretreatment and common pretreatment or blood cell treatment.
5 Enter Pretreat sample Vol and Pretreat reagent vol.
6 Select Save F7.
7 Select Exit F8.
Check if the reagent and pretreatment reagent have been loaded and the reagent has
been calibrated.
8 Select Program > Sample.

9 Enter the following sample information:
 ID
 Position
 STAT
 Sample type(Other)
 Comment
 Chemistry and panel
10 Select chemistry options:
 Sample volume
 Sample cup
 Replicates
 Off-line dilution
 Predilution
 Sample blank
 Pretreatment
11 Select Save F8.
12 Click .
8.2.9 Sample Management

Before programming samples, it is necessary to understand the sample cups, and sample
volume of the system, as well as how to load and unload samples.
CAUTION
Prepare the sample according to the procedure recommended by the tube manufacturer.
For collection and preparation of samples, please see the reagent Instructions for Use.
Use clean tubes, microcups and other disposable materials specified by the manufacturer.
Do not reuse disposables.
When using vacuum collection tube for sample collection, make sure that the cap of the
vacuum collection tube is clean.
8-16
Sample cup types

The sample carousel supports blood collecting tube, centrifugal tube, plastic tube and
Microtube, which are available in the following specifications:
 Microtube: Φ14×25mm, 0.5ml (Beckman); Φ14×25mm, 2ml (Beckman);
Φ12×37mm, 2ml (Hitachi).
 Blood collecting tube or plastic tube: Φ12×68.5 mm, Φ12×99 mm, Φ12.7×75 mm,
Φ12.7×100 mm, Φ13×75 mm, Φ13×95 mm, Φ13×100 mm.
Sample volume
The amount of sample required for a common measurement is 1.5-45μl, with an
increment of 0.1μl. Analysis with insufficient samples may lead to inaccurate results.
If a sample is exhausted during the analysis, the system will automatically invalidate all
incomplete chemistry of the sample. Before running samples, make sure that they are
sufficient in volume for analysis.
Loading samples
BIOHAZARD
1 Check if the sample inside the sample tube is sufficient for analysis and the bar code
label is applied correctly.
2 Check the system status.
 If the system status is Running, select to request for sample stop.

 If the system status is Standby, Inculation or Sleep, proceed to the next step.
3 Check if the sample carousel and the sample probe have stopped moving.
4 To load samples, remove the sample carousel cover.
5 Insert the sample tube into the tube holder until the tube bottom contacts the groove
of the tube rack.
6 Repeat step 5 to load more samples.
7 Restore the sample carousel.
Unloading samples
BIOHAZARD
Caution
When unloading Φ16.5×92mm sample cups, remove the sample carousel, or press the
sample carousel with one hand and take out the sample cups with the other hand.
1 Check if the sample carousel and the sample probe have stopped moving.
2 If the system status is Running, select to request for sample stop.

4 Grab the sample tube and pull it upward to remove it from the tube holder.
8-17
5 Repeat step 4 to unload more samples.

6 Restore the sample carousel.
8-18
8.3 Serum Index

8.3.1 Introduction
Serum index is the degree of hemolysis, icterus and lipemia contained in serum sample.
They are usually seen in serums and can influence the test results in physical or chemical
way.
The serum index function is used to analyze the interferents in samples, helping clinical
professionals to evaluate the test results.
8.3.2 Theory of Serum Index

Figure 8.12 Absorption spectrum of interferents in serum samples
(1)
(2)
(3)
The figure above shows the absorption spectrum of interferents in serum samples. (1)
refers to lipemia, (2) refers to hemolysis, and (3) refers to icterus.
The three interferents are selective to wavelength and have complex absorption
spectrums. They cannot be removed completely by means of double-wavelength
measurements. The serum index option can be used to analyze the interferents contained
in samples, helping clinical professionals to evaluate the test results, determining if the
sample is usable or if a sample blank test is needed.
Serum index test is single-reagent endpoint measurement, in which serum sample of 6μl
and physiological saline of 120μl are used. Six wavelengths are chosen to determine the
serum index. The equations of serum index are as follows:
 Lipemia: primary wavelength of 660, secondary wavelength of 700.
AL  A660  A700 , lipemia index: L  1 / C  AL
 Hemolysis: primary wavelength of 570, secondary wavelength of 605.
AH  A570  A605 , hemolysis index: H  1 / A  ( AH  B  AL )
 Icterus: primary wavelength of 450, secondary wavelength of 505.
AI  A450  A505 , icterus index: I  1 / D  [ AI  E  ( AH  B  AL )  F  AL ]
Where,
 B and F: determined by the absorption spectrum of lipemia and not adjustable.
8-19
 E: determined by the absorption spectrum of hemolysis and not adjustable.

 C: determined by single lipemia, and can be user-defined.
 A: determined by single hemolysis, and can be user-defined.
 D: determined by single icterus, and can be user-defined.
8.3.3 Serum Index Setup

The serum index includes lipemia (L), hemolysis (H) and icterus (I), and has the common
name of SI. The chemistry name, sample volume and reagent volume of SI are defined by
the manufacturer and cannot be modified by users. The SI chemistry cannot be deleted.
You are allowed to define the print names and qualitative result flags for the chemistry.
Defining print name

2 Choose the SI chemistry.
3 Select Define F1.
Figure 8.13 Serum Index window
4 Type in the print name of lipemia in the Print Name of the Lipemia area. Up to 15
characters can be entered.
The lipemia index will appear as the print name on patient reports and as “SI” on
other reports.
5 Repeat step 4 to define print names for hemolysis and icterus.

6 Select Save F7.
7 Select Close F8.
8-20
Defining qualitative result flags

The Qualitative Analysis option, when enabled, analyzes every sample for the detection of
lipemia, hemolysis and icterus and calculates the numeric values of the index. If the
volume of the interferents contained in a sample is beyond the set range, a flag will be
added to the patient report.
The system allows 6 ranges and flags for each interferent.
2 Choose the SI chemistry.
3 Select Define F1.
4 Mark the Use Qualitative Result checkbox in the Lipemia area.
The Range and Flag fields below are activated for editing.
5 Type in the detection range in the first edit box of the Range field, and then enter a
flag in the first edit box of the Flag field.
For instance, type in “10” in the first edit box of the Range field in the Lipemia area,
and then enter “+” in the Flag field of the same row. If the lipemia volume (L1)
contained in a sample is lower than 10, the “+” sign will be added to the result in the
patient report. Type in “20” in the second edit box below the Range icon and “+-” in
the second edit box below the Flag icon. If the lipemia volume (L2) is greater than
10 and lower than 20, the result will be flagged with the “+-” sign. The cycle
continues. If the result is greater than L5, the six flag will appear on the patient
report.
6 Repeat step 4-5 to define ranges and flags for hemolysis and icterus.
7 Select Save F7.
8 Select Print F1 to print qualitative result flag settings and slope/offset parameters of
the SI chemistry.
9 Select Close F8.
8.3.4 Auto Serum Index

When the Auto Serum Index function is enabled, the system will select the SI chemistry
automatically for serum or plasma samples. The SI chemistry will also be requested
automatically when you program routine samples manually or by using the LIS host, or
program STAT samples, or program routine samples with the default panels.
When programming samples with auto serum index, you are required to select at least
one chemistry other than SI.
2 Mark the Auto Serum Index checkbox with a tick.
3 Select Save F8.
8.3.5 Running SI Chemistry

The SI chemistry is only applicable to serum and plasma samples (routine and STAT)
rather than controls and calibrators.
To run the SI chemistry, choose the SI chemistry while programming samples. It will be
analyzed along with other chemistries.
8-21
8.4 Clear Samples

8.4.1 Introduction
The Clear Samples function is used to delete programmed samples that have not been
analyzed. One or more samples can be cleared at one time. When samples are cleared, the
sample information will be removed completely; the sample ID, position and bar code can
be used for programming other samples. The action of clearing samples will be recorded
in the edit logs.
8.4.2 Clearing Samples

2 Select Clear F4. The Clear Samples window appears.
Figure 8.14 Clear Samples window
3 Select samples you desire to clear.

 Current sample: type in the sample ID on the Sample screen.
 Sample(s) with following ID(s): type in the sample ID range in the Sample ID
field. Single sample ID and sample range are acceptable.
4 Select OK.
The selected samples are cleared along with their programming information.
8-22
8.5 Unpositioned Samples

8.5.1 Introduction
Unpositioned samples are those:
 downloaded from the LIS host and not positioned yet. Such samples cannot be
programmed for analysis until they have positions assigned. If your system is
equipped with a sample bar code reader, the samples can be analyzed immediately
without assigning positions for them.
 that are in Incomplete status when their positions are used for programming new
samples.
 that are incomplete when their positions are released.
Once positioned, the samples will be removed from the unpositioned samples list.
8.5.2 Viewing Unpositioned Samples

2 Select List F5.
3 Select Unpositioned F2.
Figure 8.15 Unpositioned Samples window
4 Move the scroll bar to view more samples.

8.5.3 Assigning Positions

2 Select List F5.
4 Select Assign.
8-23
Figure 8.16 Assign positions
5 Select the program date of sample(s) to assign position.

6 Type in the sample ID or range in the ID field.
7 Choose a sample carousel on which you will place the sample.
8 Enter the positions in the Pos field.
 To assign position for single sample, input the position number in the first edit
box.
 To assign positions for multiple samples, enter the start position number in the
first edit box, and then the end position number in the second edit box. The
system will assign positions for the samples ascending according to the sample
ID.
9 Select OK.
10 To run the samples, select the icon on the upper-right corner of the main
screen.
8-24
8.6 Release Sample Position

8.6.1 Introduction
When a sample is analyzed, the position cannot be used for programming new sample
until it is released. The Status screen provides the Release Sample Position function,
which allows you to release the selected position or all positions on the current sample
carousel that are not running any tests.
Sample positions can be released automatically at specified time every day. When a
sample is released, its results and programming information can be still recalled.
8.6.2 Releasing Sample Positions

Only patient samples rather than controls, calibrators, ISE wash solution and
physiological saline can be released.
2 Choose a sample carousel to release samples.
3 Select Release F3.
Figure 8.17 Release Positions window
4 Choose the sample range:

 Following position(s): type in single sample position or position range in the edit
box.
 All positions: to release all positions of the selected sample carousel.
5 Select OK.
8.6.3 Auto Release of Samples

3 Select 10 Auto Release Sample.
4 Select the auto release time of patient samples in the Auto Release Time field.
Select an integer between 00 and 23. The default is 00.
5 Select OK.
8-25
When the time is reached, the system will release automatically all sample positions
in the status of Complete.
8-26
8.7 Sample Logs

8.7.1 Introduction
The Sample Logs screen provides the controls and patient samples that are not complete
within the recent 24 hours due to certain reasons. You are to rerun the samples or take
other actions for the controls and samples. The sample logs refresh automatically as the
analysis is performed, and can be printed out for archiving.
8.7.2 Viewing Sample Logs

2 Select Log F2.
Figure 8.18 Sample Logs window
3 The screen shows the controls and patient samples that are not complete within the
recent 24 hours due to certain reasons.
4 To print the sample logs, select Print F7.
8-27
8.8 Customizing Sample Information

8.8.1 Introduction
The system provides the Cust. Sample Info. option for specifying sample information to be
displayed on the Sample screen.
8.8.2 Customizing Sample Information

3 Select 13 Cust. Sample Info.
Figure 8.19 “Customize Sample Information” window
4 Find desired sample information and mark the corresponding Customize checkbox.
Click the checkbox again to deselect it.
5 Select Save.
8-28
8.9 Customizing Patient Demographics

8.9.1 Introduction
You can specify patient demographics to be displayed, its default and its display order on
the Patient Demographics screen.
8.9.2 Customizing Patient Demographics

3 Select 14 Patient Demographics
Figure 8.20 Patient Demographics
4 Select the desired information and the default value and then click Add.
5 Select the desired information and click Delete to delete it from the demographics
list.
6 Select Up, Down, Home and End button to adjust the displayed order of patient
demographics.
7 Select OK to save the settings or select Cancel to restore the previous settings.
8-29
8.10 Sample and Chemistry Lists

8.10.1 Introduction
The List option allows you to view, inquire and print all unfinished samples, and assign
positions for unpositioned samples. You are also allowed to view the requested
chemistries’ calibration status, reagent status, tests left, and number of requests.
8.10.2 Sample List

Viewing programmed samples
The sample list shows all samples that have been programmed but not analyzed yet.
Samples can be inquired by program date, sample status, ID, or bar code.
2 Select List F5.
Figure 8.21 Sample List tab page
3 Move the scroll bar to view more samples.

4 To print the sample list, select Print F7.
Inquiring samples by program date, sample status or ID

1 Select Search F1 on the Sample List tab page.
8-30
Figure 8.22 Search window
2 Enter the conditions:

 Select the program date of samples you desire to inquire; and/or
 Select a sample status, which is available in All, Programmed, In Progress,
Incomplete, Complete, and Rerun; and/or
 Type in the single sample ID or ID range in the Sample ID field.
3 Select OK. All samples that satisfy the conditions are displayed on the screen.
Inquiring a bar-coded sample

1 Select Search F1 on the Sample List tab page.
2 Type in the sample bar code you desire to inquire.
3 Select OK. The corresponding sample is displayed on the screen.
8.10.3 Chemistry List

To view the summary of chemistries that are requested on the current day or requested
before but not finished yet, perform the following steps:
2 Select List F5.
3 Select the Chemistry List tab.
8-31
Figure 8.23 Chemistry List tab page
The screen shows all requested chemistries, including the name, calibration status,
number of requests, and tests left.
4 Move the scroll bar to view more chemistries.

5 To print the chemistry list, select Print F7.
8-32
8.11 Optimizing Result Display

8.11.1 Introduction
Due to low sensitivity of certain reagents, samples with low concentration may have 0 or
negative results, or cannot be represented accurately by results out of linearity range. To
express sample concentration accurately, the system provides the Optimize Result Display
option to customize such results. When less than the low limit of linearity range, results
will show as “< Low limit of linearity range”; when greater than the high limit of linearity
range, they will show as “> High limit of linearity range”; when less than both the low
limit of linearity range and concentration of the lowest-concentration calibrator, they will
show as “< Maximum of the two values”; when greater than the high limit of linearity
range and concentration of the highest-concentration calibrator, they will show as “>
Minimum of the two values”.
Result optimizing will not affect storage, transmission and archiving of results. Only users
who have the permissions of system setup are allowed to optimize result display.
8.11.2 Optimizing Result Display

3 Select 12 Optimize Result Display.
Figure 8.24 “Optimize Result Display” window
4 Find desired chemistry, and mark the corresponding Low and High checkboxes.
8-33
Click the checkboxes again to deselect them.

 Select Low. When a result is less than the low limit of linearity range or
concentration of the lowest-concentration calibrator, it will show as “< Low limit
of linearity range”, “< Concentration of the lowest-concentration calibrator”, or “<
Maximum of the two values”.
 Select High. When a result is greater than the high limit of linearity range or
concentration of the highest-concentration calibrator, it will show as “> High
limit of linearity range”, “> Concentration of the highest-concentration
calibrator”, or “> Minimum of the two values”.
5 Select Save.
6 Select Cancel to close the window.
8-34
8.12 Results Recall

8.12.1 Introduction
The Results Recall option allows routine samples, STAT samples and controls to be recalled
and handled on the Current Results or History Results screen. The Current Results
include those that are programmed and analyzed on the current day; the History Results
are those programmed and analyzed before the current day. All results can be recalled by
sample or by chemistry.
8.12.2 Displaying Current Results

1 Select Result - Current Results.
The screen shows all samples and controls that are programmed and analyzed on
the current day. When certain test of a control sample or patient sample triggers a
data alarm, the sample will appear in yellow.
Figure 8.25 Current Results screen
The sample type includes R, E and C. R stands for routine sample, E for STAT sample,
and C for control.
The Host column indicates the transmission status of the sample. Y means that the
sample has been sent to the LIS host, and N means the opposite.
The Print column indicates the print status of the sample. Y means that the sample
has been printed, and N means the opposite.

 By sample
 By chemistry
8-35
Samples displayed in the sample list can be sorted by the sample category, sample ID,
status, position, completion time, program date/time, host, print, and review
columns.
3 When recalling results by sample, choose a sample in the left list. The right list
displays all results of the sample. When recalling results by chemistry, choose a
 Search F1: to inquire sample results.
 Options F2: to delete, edit and print samples, recall rerun results, customize
result display options, recalculate results, compensate results, archive results,
and observe result trend.
 Demog F3: to view patient demographics of the sample.
 Reac Curve F4: to view the reaction curve and data of the selected test.
 Rerun F5: to rerun a finished sample.
 Review F6 to review the sample result.
 Print F7: to print sample results.
 Host F8: to transmit the selected sample results to the LIS host.
8.12.3 Recalling Current Results

Current results can be inquired by sample type, patient name, patient ID, sample ID or
sample bar code, etc., along with the current date. Whichever status the system is, only
one condition is required for inquiring desired results.
2 Select Search F1.
3 Enter one or more search conditions.
Figure 8.26 Recall results window
4 Select OK. The samples matching the condition are displayed on the screen.
5 Select a function button to perform relevant operations.
8-36
8.12.4 Displaying History Results

1 Select Result - History Results.
The screen shows all samples and controls that are programmed and analyzed
before the current day.
Figure 8.27 History Results screen
The sample type includes R, E and C. R stands for routine sample, E for STAT sample,
and C for control.
The Host column indicates the transmission status of the sample. Y means that the
sample has been sent to the LIS host, and N means the opposite.
The Print column indicates the print status of the sample. Y means that the sample
has been printed, and N means the opposite.

 By sample
 By chemistry
3 Select Search F1 to search for desired results.
4 When recalling results by sample, choose a sample in the left list. The right list
displays all results of the sample. When recalling results by chemistry, choose a
 Options F2: to delete, edit and print samples, recall rerun results, customize
result display options, compensate results, archive results, and observe result
trend.
 Demog F3: to view patient demographics of the sample.
 Reac Curve F4: to view the reaction curve and data of the selected test.
8-37
 Rerun F5: to rerun a finished sample.

 Review F6 to review the sample results.
 Print F7: to print sample results.
 Host F8: to transmit the selected sample results to the LIS host.
8.12.5 Recalling History Results

Stored results can be inquired by sample type, patient name, patient ID, sample ID or
sample bar code, along with the program date. Whichever status the system is, only one
condition is required for inquiring desired results, while the Program Date field can be
left blank. To quickly search for desired results from the tremendous amount of data, you
are recommended to enter both the program date and any of the conditions.
1 Select Result - History Results.
2 Select Search F1.
3 Select the program date range you want to recall. Select the start date in the first box
and the end date in the second box.
4 Enter one or more search conditions.
Figure 8.28 Recall Results window
5 Select OK. The samples matching the condition are displayed on the screen.
6 Select a function button to perform relevant operations.
8.12.6 Review Sample Results

Only when the sample status is complete, can the sample results be reviewed.
3 Choose a sample or more samples in the sample list.
4 Select Review F6.
The review status in the sample list turns from N to Y.
5 Select No Review to cancel the review operation.
8-38
8.12.7 Viewing/Editing Patient Demographics

Patient demographics can be viewed or edited in any system status.
3 Choose a sample in the sample list. Move the scroll bar to view more samples.
4 Select Demog F3.
Figure 8.29 Demographics window
Patient demographics can be customized. For more information, please refer to 8.9
Customizing Patient Demographics.
5 Edit the related patient information:

6 Select Save F7 to save your input.
7 Select Prev F4 or Next F5 to view demographics of the previous or next sample.
8.12.8 Reaction Curve

A reaction curve reflects the relationship of the absorbance measured at the primary
wavelength, secondary wavelength and primary-secondary wavelength. It is drawn based
on the absorbance of the sample-reagent mixture measured within the reaction period.
Observing reaction curve and data is not applicable to ISE chemistry, SI chemistry,
off-system chemistry, and special calculation.
Observing reaction curve:
1 Search for desired samples on the Current Results or History Results screen.
 By sample
 By chemistry
3 Choose desired result in the result list.
8-39
Figure 8.30 Sample reaction curve
 Sample: observe reaction curve of the results for the selected sample.
Figure 8.31 Sample reaction data
8-40

 Reagent F1: to view the reagents used for sample analysis, calibrators and
reagents used in calibration, and reagents for reagent blank test.
the selected sample.
Refer to the following page for details.
 Prev F4: to view the reaction curve and data of the previous test.
 Next F5: to view the reaction curve and data of the next test.
Viewing reagent information:
On the reaction curve window, you are allowed to view the reagents in sample
measurement, the calibrators and reagents used in calibration, and reagents for reagent
blank test.
 By sample
 By chemistry
3 Choose a chemistry or sample in the result list.
5 Select Reagent F1.
Figure 8.32 Reagent window
The window shows the calibration date and time; sample measurement date and
time; calibrators, reagents for reagent blank test; and reagents for sample analysis.
8-41

Adjusting display range:
The maximum absorbance display range of reaction curve can be adjusted automatically
or manually. The adjustment is only applicable to the currently-displayed curve, which
will restore the default display when opened next time.
 By sample
 By chemistry
3 Choose a chemistry or sample in the result list.
5 Select Adjust F3.
Figure 8.33 Adjust window
6 Choose an adjustment mode:

 Auto: The system automatically determines the display range of X axis
(measuring period) and Y axis (absorbance) according to the reaction data.
 Manual: The system displays the reaction curve according to the specified
absorbance range. Input the absorbance range (-40000~40000).
7 Select OK. The current reaction curve is refreshed accordingly.
8.12.9 Transmitting Results to LIS Host

Sample results and QC results can be sent to the LIS host in any system status if the LIS
host is connected correctly. The Host option allows the transmission of single or multiple
samples, or all samples to the LIS host.
The results to be transmitted include:
 Patient demographics
 Sample results
 QC results
3 To transmit single or multiple samples, select them in the sample list.
4 Select Host F8.
8-42
Figure 8.34 Transmit Results window
5 Select the sample range you want to transmit:

 Selected sample(s)
 All samples
6 If you transmit all samples, you are allowed to skip those results that are already
transmitted to the LIS host. Mark the Bypass Transmitted Results checkbox.
7 Select OK.
8.12.10 Printing Results

Samples can be printed manually on the Current Results and History Results screens.
The system allows multiple samples to be printed on one report or one sample on one
report. Before printing the recalled results, you should select a report template on the
System Setup screen.
The Print option allows single or multiple samples, or all samples to be printed out.
Print by Sample
Print by sample option allows you to print the test results of one or more samples when
they are recalled by sample.
3 To print single or multiple samples, select them in the sample list.
4 Select Print F7.
8-43
Figure 8.35 Print window

 Selected Sample(s)
 All Sample(s)
7 If you print all samples, you are allowed to skip those that are already printed out.
Mark the Bypass Printed Sample(s) checkbox.
8 Select OK.
Print by Chemistry
Print by chemistry option allows you to print the test results of one or more chemistries
when they are recalled by chemistries.
Laboratory Version:
3 To print single chemistry in the chemistry list, select it; to print all chemistries, there
is no need to select them.
4 Select Print F7.
8-44

 Selected chemistry
 All chemistries
6 Select OK.
Only the sample results that have been reviewed can be printed out.
8.12.11 Editing Results

The Edit Results option allows editing of results that slightly exceed the reference range
or the linearity range but will not lead to mis-diagnosis of patients, or of results that are
all on the high side or low side. This option is used for sample results only, exclusive of
control results. Results of special calculations cannot be edited while results of off-system
chemistry can be edited. Edited results will be flagged for distinguishing from others.
Only the samples that have been analyzed and have results can be edited. For those tests
that are run for over one time, result of each run can be edited. For rerun tests, only the
default result can be edited.
CAUTION
Edit Results function gives doctors with freedom to modify the results, and therefore,
must be used with cautions. Only users that have sufficient permissions are allowed to
edit results.
 By sample
 By chemistry
4 Choose a sample or chemistry in the sample list which includes the off-system
chemistries as well.
6 Select Edit Results.
The screen shows the samples or chemistry and all measured results.
8-45
Figure 8.37 Edit Results window – By sample (Current results)
Figure 8.38 Edit Results window – By sample(History results)
Figure 8.39 Edit Results window – By chemistry
8-46
7 Choose a chemistry to edit, and then input result in the Final Result column.
 On the Edit Results window- By sample (Current results), select Prev or Next to
locate the results that require editing.
 For normal runs, only Complete chemistries can be edited.
 For reruns, only the default result can be edited.
 For off-system chemistries, the results can be edited at any time.
8 Repeat step 7 to edit other results.
9 Select Save to save your editing.
8.12.12 Deleting Results

The system has a limited storage capacity, and when it is exceeded, the results with the
earliest date will be overridden. The system allows deleting of routine samples, emergent
samples and controls, while they are sent to the LIS host or printed out. When the system
status is Running, samples in the status of Running cannot be deleted; when the system
status is but Running, samples in any status can be removed. Deleted results cannot be
restored. Make sure that you have archived them by sending them to the LIS host or
printed out or in other ways.
Before deleting a result, check if you have sufficient permissions. Only users that have
sufficient permissions are allowed to delete results. The deleting operation will be
automatically recorded in event logs.
 By sample
 By chemistry
4 When recalling results by sample, choose samples in the sample list. When recalling
results by chemistry, choose a chemistry in the left list.
All results of the selected sample or chemistry are displayed on the screen.

6 Select Delete Results.
All results of the samples are displayed on the screen.
Figure 8.40 Delete Results window
7 Choose the sample range:
8-47
 Selected result(s): to delete the results of the selected samples or chemistries.

 All results: to delete all results on the screen.
8 Select OK.
8.12.13 Customizing Result Display

The Customize Result Display option allows tailoring of sample and result display options
on the Current Results and History Results screens. When recalling results by sample,
the sample list and result list can be customized. When recalling results by chemistry, only
the result list can be tailored.
 By sample
 By chemistry
4 Select Customize Result Display.
Figure 8.41 Customize Result Display window – By sample
8-48
Figure 8.42 Customize Result Display window – By chemistry
5 If recalling results by sample,

 Choose desired header names in the Sample List Setup area and screens where
they are going to be displayed. Use the Up and Down buttons to adjust the
display order of the header names.
To forbid display of a header name in the sample list, deselect the corresponding
checkbox.
 Choose desired header names in the Result List Setup area. Use the Up and
Down buttons to adjust the display order of the header names.
To forbid display of a header name in the result list, deselect the corresponding
checkbox.
6 If recalling results by chemistry,

Choose desired header names in the Result List Setup area. Use the Up and Down
buttons to adjust the display order of the header names.
To forbid display of a header name in the result list, deselect the corresponding
checkbox.
7 Select Save to save the settings and close the window.
8.12.14 Recalculating Results

The Recalculate Results option is used to recalculate current sample results with the latest
valid calibration factors of relevant chemistry. This option is often used when test result
cannot be calculated due to incomplete or failed calibration.
Recalculate Results is only applicable to biochemistries. Result of samples in In Progress
status cannot be recalculated. The recalculation will be automatically recorded in event
logs.
8-49
3 Select Recalculate.
Figure 8.43 Recalculate window

5 Select Calculate.
Results of the selected chemistry for the specified samples are recalculated
automatically with the latest calibration factors and then displayed in the list at the
bottom.
8.12.15 Compensating Results

The Compensate Results option is used to recalculate multiple results of certain
biochemistry through the linear formula Y=K*X+B with specified slope K and offset B.
Compensate Results is invalid for ISE chemistry, special calculations and off-system
chemistries. A calculation will be recalculated automatically once its constituent
chemistries are compensated. Only users that have sufficient permissions are allowed to
compensate results. The compensation will be automatically recorded in event logs.
1 Select Result - Current or History.
3 Choose the chemistry that you want to compensate in the left list.
5 Select Compensate Results.
All results of the chemistry are displayed in the list at the bottom.
8-50
Figure 8.44 “Compensate” window
6 Input the slope K and offset B.

7 Select Save.
The system recalculates all results of the chemistry with the specified slope and
offset. The final results are displayed in the list of the window.
8.12.16 Recalling Result Trend

Result trend allows you to observe the result trend of the selected chemistry.
2 Choose the result recall mode – By chemistry.
4 Choose a chemistry in the left list.
6 Select Recall Result Trend.
8-51
Figure 8.45 “Result Trend” window
The result trend curve of the selected chemistry is displayed on the window.
7 Move the cursor to certain point on the graphic trend. The actual result, final result,
completion time, reagent lot number, serial number, and calibration time are
displayed on the right of the window.
8 To show all results of repeated analysis or rerun tests, select the Include Replicate
Results checkbox.
9 To observe result trend of other sample tests, select Prev F1 or Next F2.
8.12.17 Archiving Results

The system allows archiving of sample results to a storage device. The file format is CSV
and the default file name is SampleResultYYYYMMDD.csv. which cannot be edited.
The archived sample results include the following information:
Table 8.1 Archived sample result types
ID Sample Result Information
1 Sample type (routine, STAT, control)
2 Sample ID
3 Sample bar code
4 Sample type (serum, plasma, etc)
5 Ordering date
6 Chemistry
7 Result
8 Response
9 Number of replicates
10 Unit
11 Result flag
8-52
ID Sample Result Information

12 Reference range
13 Run date and time
14 Module
Perform the following steps to archive sample results and data:

1 Search for desired sample results on the Current Results or History Results screen.
NOTE
It may take a long time to archive a large amount of results. You are recommended
not to archive results over one week each time.
3 Select Archive.
4 Select OK.
8-53
8.13 Test Statistics

On the Tests screen, you can view test requests and reagent application for each
chemistry during a period, and you can sample requests and the quantity of its chemistries
as well. Calibration test and QC test are not included in the statistics.
1 Select Result - Statistics - Tests.
2 Select By Sample or By Test.
Figure 8.46 Tests screen - By sample
8-54
Figure 8.47 Tests screen - By test
 By Sample: To view all requested samples and the quantity of its requested
chemistries.
 By Test: To view test requisitions and reagent volume for the chemistries.
3 Select or enter the start date and end date in the Date field. the start date cannot be
later than the end date.
4 Select Search F1.
All samples or tests requested during the period are displayed in the middle list of the
Tests screen.
5 Select Print to print out the currently-displayed statistic information of

measurements.
8-55
8.14 Result Statistics

Result statistics option can summarize the total chemistries and the distribution trend of
its results and provide the test data and graph. Calibration and control tests are not
included in the statistics.
1 Select Result - Statistics.
2 Select the Results.
3 Select Statistic Graph or Statistic Data.
Figure 8.48 Result statistics screen -statistic graph
8-56
Figure 8.49 Result statistics screen -statistic data
4 Click Search F1 and Recall results box pops up.
5 Input one or more search conditions such as:

 Date
 Chemistry
 Sample type
 Gender
 Age
 Medical Record
 Patient ID
 Sample ID
8-57
 Bar code
6 Click OK.
The chemistry, number of tests, mean, standard deviation, maximum value, minimum
value are displayed in the statistic results column. The statistic data include test time,
result, sample ID, bar code, patient ID, medical number, sample type, reference range,
sex and age.
7 Select Print F7 to print out the statistic graph and statistic data.
8-58
BS-600
Chemistry Analyzer
Operator’s Manual
Volume II
Volume II - Contents
Publication Information ........................................................................................................................................................... ii

Intellectual Property Statement ............................................................................................................................................ iii
Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party ....................................................................................................................... iv
Warranty ......................................................................................................................................................................................... v
Exemptions...................................................................................................................................................................... v
Customer service department.................................................................................................................................. v
EC - Representative ...................................................................................................................................................... v
Preface ················································································································· 1
Safety Information ··································································································· 1
Safety Symbols .............................................................................................................................................................................. 2

Summary of Hazards .................................................................................................................................................................. 3
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................................... 3
Electric Shock Hazards ................................................................................................................................................ 3
Moving Parts Hazards .................................................................................................................................................. 3
Photometer Lamp Hazards ....................................................................................................................................... 3
Laser Beam Hazards .................................................................................................................................................... 4
Sample, Calibrator and Control Hazards .............................................................................................................. 4
Reagent and Wash Solution Hazards..................................................................................................................... 4
Waste Hazards ................................................................................................................................................................ 4
System Disposal Hazards ........................................................................................................................................... 4
Fire and Explosion Hazards ...................................................................................................................................... 5
Removal of Analyzer from Use for Repair or Disposal .................................................................................. 5
Cleaning and Decontamination................................................................................................................................ 6
Software and Cybersecurity...................................................................................................................................... 6
Notification of Adverse Events ................................................................................................................................ 7
Precautions on Use ..................................................................................................................................................................... 8
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................................... 8
Intended Use.................................................................................................................................................................... 8
Environment Precautions ......................................................................................................................................... 8
Installation Precautions .............................................................................................................................................. 8
Electromagnetic Noise Precautions ....................................................................................................................... 9
Operating Precautions ............................................................................................................................................. 10
Maintenance and Servicing Precautions .......................................................................................................... 11
I
Chemistry Parameter Configuration Precautions ........................................................................................ 11

ISE Module Precautions ........................................................................................................................................... 11
Sample Precautions ................................................................................................................................................... 12
Reagent, Calibrator and Control Precautions ................................................................................................. 12
Data Archiving Precautions ................................................................................................................................... 12
External Equipment Precautions ........................................................................................................................ 13
External Vacuum Pump Precautions ................................................................................................................. 13
Tube and Liquid Container Precautions........................................................................................................... 13
Labels and Silkscreen.............................................................................................................................................................. 14
Introduction .................................................................................................................................................................. 14
Labels and Silkscreen ............................................................................................................................................... 14
Warning Labels ........................................................................................................................................................... 16
Non-Warning Labels and Silkscreen .................................................................................................................. 17
Volume I - Contents ··································································································· I
1 System Description ······························································································1-1
1.1 Installation Requirements and Procedure .............................................................................................................. 1-2

1.1.1 Installation Requirements........................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.2 Installation Procedure .................................................................................................................................. 1-6
1.2 Hardware Structure ......................................................................................................................................................... 1-7
1.2.1 System Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 1-7
1.2.2 Sample Handling System.......................................................................................................................... 1-10
1.2.3 Reagent Handling System ....................................................................................................................... 1-14
1.2.4 Reaction System .......................................................................................................................................... 1-17
1.2.5 Cuvette Wash Station ................................................................................................................................. 1-18
1.2.6 Photometric System................................................................................................................................... 1-19
1.2.7 Mixer Assembly ........................................................................................................................................... 1-20
1.2.8 Operation Unit.............................................................................................................................................. 1-21
1.2.9 Output Unit .................................................................................................................................................... 1-21
1.2.10 Accessories and Consumables ............................................................................................................ 1-21
1.3 Optional Modules ........................................................................................................................................................... 1-22
1.3.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................... 1-22
1.3.2 ISE Module ..................................................................................................................................................... 1-22
1.3.3 Built-in Sample Bar Code Reader ........................................................................................................... 1-22
1.3.4 Built-in Reagent Bar Code Reader......................................................................................................... 1-23
1.3.5 Water Supply Module ................................................................................................................................ 1-24
1.3.6 Drainage Module.......................................................................................................................................... 1-25
1.3.7 External Vacuum Pump............................................................................................................................ 1-26
1.3.8 Other Optional Modules............................................................................................................................ 1-27
1.4 Software Description ................................................................................................................................................... 1-28
1.4.1 Main Screen................................................................................................................................................... 1-28
1.4.2 Using a Mouse .............................................................................................................................................. 1-31
1.4.3 Using Online Help ....................................................................................................................................... 1-31
1.5 System Specifications .................................................................................................................................................. 1-35
1.5.1 Technical Parameters ............................................................................................................................... 1-35
II
1.5.2 Main Performance Indices ...................................................................................................................... 1-38

1.5.3 Contraindication.......................................................................................................................................... 1-39
1.5.4 Power supply................................................................................................................................................ 1-40
1.5.5 Environmental Requirements ................................................................................................................ 1-40
1.5.6 Dimensions and Weight ........................................................................................................................... 1-40
1.5.7 Input Device .................................................................................................................................................. 1-40
1.5.8 Output Device ............................................................................................................................................... 1-40
1.5.9 Noise and Fuse............................................................................................................................................. 1-41
1.5.10 Communication Interfaces ................................................................................................................... 1-41
1.5.11 Safety Classification ................................................................................................................................. 1-41
1.5.12 EMC Requirements .................................................................................................................................. 1-41
2 General Operating Procedure ·················································································2-1
2.1 General Operating Procedure ...................................................................................................................................... 2-2

2.2 Check before Powering On........................................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.2.1 Checking Water Supply ............................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.2.2 Checking Power Supply .............................................................................................................................. 2-3
2.2.3 Checking Printing Paper ............................................................................................................................. 2-3
2.2.4 Checking Waste Tanks and Tubing ........................................................................................................ 2-3
2.2.5 Checking Probes and Mixers..................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.2.6 Checking Concentrated and Probe Wash Solution ........................................................................... 2-4
2.3 Powering On....................................................................................................................................................................... 2-5
2.3.1 Turning On Water Supply, Water Supply Module, Drainage Module and External Vacuum
Pump .............................................................................................................................................................................. 2-5
2.3.2 Powering On the System............................................................................................................................. 2-5
2.3.3 Starting the Operating Software ............................................................................................................... 2-6
2.4 Checking System Status ................................................................................................................................................. 2-8
2.4.1 Checking System Status ............................................................................................................................... 2-8
2.4.2 Checking Alarm Status.................................................................................................................................. 2-8
2.4.3 Checking Reagent/Calibration Status .................................................................................................... 2-9
2.4.4 Checking Maintenance Status ................................................................................................................ 2-10
2.4.5 Checking Subsystems................................................................................................................................ 2-11
2.5 Preparing Reagents ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-13
2.5.1 Loading Biochemical Reagents.............................................................................................................. 2-13
2.5.2 Loading Concentrated Wash Solution ................................................................................................ 2-16
2.5.3 Loading Reagent Probe Wash Solution .............................................................................................. 2-17
2.5.4 Loading Sample Probe Wash Solution ................................................................................................ 2-18
2.5.5 Loading Physiological Saline .................................................................................................................. 2-19
2.5.6 Loading Pretreat Reagent ........................................................................................................................ 2-20
2.6 Calibration ....................................................................................................................................................................... 2-22
2.6.1 Requesting Calibrations ........................................................................................................................... 2-22
2.6.2 Loading Calibrators ................................................................................................................................... 2-24
2.6.3 Running Calibrations................................................................................................................................. 2-25
2.7 Quality Control ............................................................................................................................................................... 2-26
2.7.1 Programming Control Samples ............................................................................................................. 2-26
III
2.7.2 Loading Control Samples ......................................................................................................................... 2-27

2.7.3 Running Control Samples ........................................................................................................................ 2-27
2.7.4 Auto quality control ................................................................................................................................... 2-28
2.8 Programming Routine Samples............................................................................................................................... 2-29
2.8.1 Programming Routine Samples ............................................................................................................ 2-29
2.8.2 Loading Routine Samples ........................................................................................................................ 2-34
2.8.3 Running Routine Samples........................................................................................................................ 2-35
2.9 Programming STAT Samples .................................................................................................................................... 2-36
2.9.1 Programming STAT Samples .................................................................................................................. 2-36
2.9.2 Starting Analysis .......................................................................................................................................... 2-39
2.10 Test Status and Test Control ................................................................................................................................... 2-41
2.10.1 Checking Reagent Status ....................................................................................................................... 2-41
2.10.2 Viewing Sample Carousel Status ........................................................................................................ 2-42
2.10.3 Viewing Reagent Carousel Status ...................................................................................................... 2-44
2.10.4 Sample Stop ................................................................................................................................................ 2-45
2.10.5 Reagent Stop .............................................................................................................................................. 2-45
2.10.6 Emergency Stop ........................................................................................................................................ 2-45
2.10.7 Switching Carousels ................................................................................................................................ 2-45
2.11 Daily Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-47
2.12 Powering Off................................................................................................................................................................. 2-48
2.13 Check after Powering Off ........................................................................................................................................ 2-49
3 System Setup ·····································································································3-1
3.1 System Setup Options..................................................................................................................................................... 3-2

3.1.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.1.2 Sample Options and Reagent Alarm Limits ......................................................................................... 3-2
3.1.3 Auto Rerun Setup ........................................................................................................................................... 3-5
3.1.4 Instrument Setup Options .......................................................................................................................... 3-6
3.1.5 Print Setup ........................................................................................................................................................ 3-9
3.1.6 Bar Code Setup ................................................................................................................................................ 3-9
3.1.7 Host Communication Setup ....................................................................................................................... 3-9
3.1.8 User Accounts and Permissions ............................................................................................................... 3-9
3.2 Chemistries Setup ......................................................................................................................................................... 3-10
3.2.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................... 3-10
3.2.2 User-defined Chemistries Setup ............................................................................................................ 3-10
3.2.3 Processing Parameters............................................................................................................................. 3-11
3.2.4 Error Detection Limits .............................................................................................................................. 3-16
3.2.5 Flag Qualitative Result ............................................................................................................................... 3-20
3.2.6 Slope and Offset Adjustment .................................................................................................................. 3-21
3.2.7 Reference/Critical Range Setup ............................................................................................................ 3-22
3.3 Calibration Setup ........................................................................................................................................................... 3-25
3.3.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................... 3-25
3.3.2 Defining a Calibrator ................................................................................................................................. 3-25
3.3.3 Importing a Calibrator .............................................................................................................................. 3-26
3.3.4 Editing a Calibrator .................................................................................................................................... 3-27
IV
3.3.5 Setting up Calibrator Concentrations ................................................................................................. 3-27

3.3.6 Setting up Calibration Rules.................................................................................................................... 3-28
3.3.7 Calibrator Acceptance Limits ................................................................................................................. 3-30
3.3.8 Deleting a Calibrator .................................................................................................................................. 3-31
3.4 QC Setup ............................................................................................................................................................................ 3-32
3.4.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................... 3-32
3.4.2 Defining/Editing a Control...................................................................................................................... 3-32
3.4.3 Selection of Chemistries ........................................................................................................................... 3-33
3.4.4 Setting up Control Concentrations ....................................................................................................... 3-33
3.4.5 Setting up QC Rules..................................................................................................................................... 3-34
3.4.6 Deleting a Control........................................................................................................................................ 3-35
4 Operation Theories ······························································································4-1
4.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................................................. 4-2

4.2 Principles of Measurement .......................................................................................................................................... 4-3
4.2.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................... 4-3
4.3 Endpoint Measurements ............................................................................................................................................... 4-4
4.3.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................... 4-4
4.3.2 Calculation of Reaction Absorbance ....................................................................................................... 4-4
4.3.3 Calculation of Blank Absorbance .............................................................................................................. 4-4
4.3.4 Calculation of K Factor ................................................................................................................................. 4-4
4.3.6 Sample Blanked Response .......................................................................................................................... 4-5
4.4 Fixed-time Measurements ............................................................................................................................................ 4-6
4.4.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................... 4-6
4.5 Kinetic Measurements ................................................................................................................................................... 4-8
4.5.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................... 4-8
4.5.2 Data Calculation in Kinetic Measurements ........................................................................................... 4-8
4.5.3 Determination of Linearity Range .......................................................................................................... 4-8
4.5.5 Evaluation for Linearity............................................................................................................................ 4-10
4.5.6 Enzyme Linearity Range Extension .................................................................................................... 4-11
4.6 Calibration Math Model and Factors ..................................................................................................................... 4-12
4.6.1 Linear Calibrations..................................................................................................................................... 4-12
4.6.2 Non-Linear Calibrations .......................................................................................................................... 4-13
4.7 Prozone Check................................................................................................................................................................ 4-15
4.7.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................... 4-15
4.7.2 Antigen Addition Method ......................................................................................................................... 4-15
4.7.3 Reaction Rate Method............................................................................................................................... 4-16
5 Reagents ···········································································································5-1
5.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................................................. 5-2

5.1.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................... 5-2
5.1.2 Reagent/Calibration Screen Overview ................................................................................................. 5-2
V
5.2 Customizing Reagent Display...................................................................................................................................... 5-4

5.2.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................... 5-4
5.2.2 Customizing Reagent Display ................................................................................................................... 5-4
5.3 Sort Reagents ..................................................................................................................................................................... 5-5
5.3.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................... 5-5
5.3.2 Sort Reagents ................................................................................................................................................... 5-5
5.4 Reagent Inventory Alarm Limits Setup ................................................................................................................... 5-6
5.4.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................... 5-6
5.4.2 Setting up Reagent Inventory Alarm Limit for Biochemistry Reagent .................................... 5-6
5.5 Reagent Inventory Check.............................................................................................................................................. 5-7
5.5.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................... 5-7
5.5.2 Checking Reagent Inventory ..................................................................................................................... 5-7
5.5.3 Canceling Reagent Inventory Check ...................................................................................................... 5-8
5.5.4 Auto Refreshing Reagent Inventory....................................................................................................... 5-8
5.6 Loading Bar-Coded Reagents ....................................................................................................................................... 5-9
5.6.1 Loading Bar-Coded Reagents .................................................................................................................... 5-9
5.7 On-line Load of Reagents ........................................................................................................................................... 5-10
5.7.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................... 5-10
5.7.2 On-Line Load of Reagents........................................................................................................................ 5-10
5.8 Off-line Load of Reagents ........................................................................................................................................... 5-11
5.8.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................... 5-11
5.8.2 Off-line Load of Reagents ......................................................................................................................... 5-11
5.9 On-Line Replacement of Reagents.......................................................................................................................... 5-12
5.9.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................... 5-12
5.9.2 On-Line Replacement of Reagents ....................................................................................................... 5-12
5.10 Off-Line Replacement of Reagents....................................................................................................................... 5-14
5.10.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 5-14
5.10.2 Off-Line Replacement of Reagents .................................................................................................... 5-14
5.11 Unloading Reagents.................................................................................................................................................... 5-15
5.11.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 5-15
5.11.2 Unloading Biochemical Reagents ....................................................................................................... 5-15
6 Calibration ········································································································6-1
6.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................................................. 6-2

6.2 Calibration Status and Alarm ....................................................................................................................................... 6-3
6.3 Calibrator Dilution Setup .............................................................................................................................................. 6-4
6.3.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................... 6-4
6.3.2 Setting up Calibrator Dilution Factors ................................................................................................... 6-4
6.3.3 Editing Calibrator Dilution Factors......................................................................................................... 6-5
6.3.4 Deleting Calibrator Dilution Factors....................................................................................................... 6-5
6.4 Reagent Blank .................................................................................................................................................................... 6-6
6.4.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................... 6-6
6.4.2 Mixed Blank Absorbance and Blank Response .................................................................................. 6-6
6.4.3 Requesting a Reagent Blank ...................................................................................................................... 6-7
6.4.4 Recalling Reagent Blank Results .............................................................................................................. 6-7
VI
6.5 Auto Calibration............................................................................................................................................................. 6-11

6.5.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................... 6-11
6.5.2 Auto Calibration Setup .............................................................................................................................. 6-11
6.5.3 Auto Calibration Reminding ................................................................................................................... 6-12
6.5.4 Removing Auto Calibration .................................................................................................................... 6-12
6.6 Extending Calibration Time...................................................................................................................................... 6-13
6.6.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................... 6-13
6.6.2 Extending Calibration Time ................................................................................................................... 6-13
6.6.3 Removing an Extended Status ................................................................................................................ 6-13
6.7 Calibration Override..................................................................................................................................................... 6-14
6.7.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................... 6-14
6.7.2 Overriding a Calibration .......................................................................................................................... 6-14
6.7.3 Removing Cal Overridden Status ........................................................................................................... 6-14
6.8 Reject ................................................................................................................................................................................. 6-15
6.8.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................... 6-15
6.8.2 Rejecting a Calibration.............................................................................................................................. 6-15
6.8.3 Removing Reject Status ............................................................................................................................ 6-15
6.9 Recalling Calibration Results .................................................................................................................................... 6-16
6.9.1 Recalling Current Calibration Factors ................................................................................................ 6-16
6.9.2 Recalling History Calibration Factors ................................................................................................ 6-16
6.9.3 Calibration Curve ........................................................................................................................................ 6-17
6.9.4 Calibration Reaction Curve ..................................................................................................................... 6-18
6.9.5 Editing Calibration Factors ..................................................................................................................... 6-21
6.9.6 Archiving Calibration Results................................................................................................................. 6-21
6.9.7 Calibration Trends ...................................................................................................................................... 6-22
7 Quality Control ···································································································7-1
7.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................................................. 7-2

7.1.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.1.2 Quality Control Operating Procedure..................................................................................................... 7-2
7.1.3 QC Alarms.......................................................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.1.4 QC Result Flags ................................................................................................................................................ 7-2
7.1.5 Control Status ................................................................................................................................................... 7-3
7.2 QC Evaluation..................................................................................................................................................................... 7-4
7.2.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................... 7-4
7.2.2 Evaluation of Single Controls ..................................................................................................................... 7-4
7.2.3 Two-Control Evaluation............................................................................................................................... 7-5
7.3 Auto Quality Control........................................................................................................................................................ 7-7
7.3.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................... 7-7
7.3.2 Auto QC Setup.................................................................................................................................................. 7-7
7.3.3 Auto Quality Control ..................................................................................................................................... 7-8
7.3.4 Removing Auto QC Status ........................................................................................................................... 7-8
7.4 Recalling Control Results ............................................................................................................................................... 7-9
7.4.1 Control Sample Results................................................................................................................................. 7-9
7.4.2 Recalling L-J Chart ...................................................................................................................................... 7-11
VII
7.4.3 Recalling Twin-Plot Chart........................................................................................................................ 7-13

7.4.4 Recalling QC Data ........................................................................................................................................ 7-14
7.4.5 Recalling QC Summary ............................................................................................................................. 7-18
8 Sample Programming and Processing ········································································8-1
8.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................................................. 8-2

8.2 Sample Programming and Processing..................................................................................................................... 8-3
8.2.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................... 8-3
8.2.2 Adding Samples ............................................................................................................................................... 8-3
8.2.3 Adding/Modifying Chemistries ................................................................................................................ 8-4
8.2.4 Rerunning Samples ....................................................................................................................................... 8-4
8.2.5 Programming Samples with Increased or Decreased Volume ................................................. 8-10
8.2.6 Programming Diluted Samples.............................................................................................................. 8-12
8.2.7 Sample Blank ................................................................................................................................................. 8-14
8.2.8 Whole Blood Test ......................................................................................................................................... 8-15
8.2.9 Sample Management ................................................................................................................................. 8-16
8.3 Serum Index..................................................................................................................................................................... 8-19
8.3.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................... 8-19
8.3.2 Theory of Serum Index ............................................................................................................................. 8-19
8.3.3 Serum Index Setup ...................................................................................................................................... 8-20
8.3.4 Auto Serum Index ....................................................................................................................................... 8-21
8.3.5 Running SI Chemistry ............................................................................................................................... 8-21
8.4 Clear Samples .................................................................................................................................................................. 8-22
8.4.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................... 8-22
8.4.2 Clearing Samples ......................................................................................................................................... 8-22
8.5 Unpositioned Samples ................................................................................................................................................. 8-23
8.5.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................... 8-23
8.5.2 Viewing Unpositioned Samples ............................................................................................................ 8-23
8.5.3 Assigning Positions .................................................................................................................................... 8-23
8.6 Release Sample Position ............................................................................................................................................. 8-25
8.6.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................... 8-25
8.6.2 Releasing Sample Positions ..................................................................................................................... 8-25
8.6.3 Auto Release of Samples ........................................................................................................................... 8-25
8.7 Sample Logs ..................................................................................................................................................................... 8-27
8.7.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................... 8-27
8.7.2 Viewing Sample Logs................................................................................................................................. 8-27
8.8 Customizing Sample Information ........................................................................................................................... 8-28
8.8.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................... 8-28
8.8.2 Customizing Sample Information......................................................................................................... 8-28
8.9 Customizing Patient Demographics ...................................................................................................................... 8-29
8.9.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................... 8-29
8.9.2 Customizing Patient Demographics.................................................................................................... 8-29
8.10 Sample and Chemistry Lists.................................................................................................................................... 8-30
8.10.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 8-30
8.10.2 Sample List .................................................................................................................................................. 8-30
VIII
8.10.3 Chemistry List............................................................................................................................................ 8-31

8.11 Optimizing Result Display ....................................................................................................................................... 8-33
8.11.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 8-33
8.11.2 Optimizing Result Display..................................................................................................................... 8-33
8.12 Results Recall................................................................................................................................................................ 8-35
8.12.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 8-35
8.12.2 Displaying Current Results ................................................................................................................... 8-35
8.12.3 Recalling Current Results ...................................................................................................................... 8-36
8.12.4 Displaying History Results .................................................................................................................... 8-37
8.12.5 Recalling History Results ...................................................................................................................... 8-38
8.12.6 Review Sample Results ........................................................................................................................... 8-38
8.12.7 Viewing/Editing Patient Demographics......................................................................................... 8-39
8.12.8 Reaction Curve .......................................................................................................................................... 8-39
8.12.9 Transmitting Results to LIS Host........................................................................................................ 8-42
8.12.10 Printing Results ...................................................................................................................................... 8-43
8.12.11 Editing Results ........................................................................................................................................ 8-45
8.12.12 Deleting Results ...................................................................................................................................... 8-47
8.12.13 Customizing Result Display ............................................................................................................... 8-48
8.12.14 Recalculating Results ............................................................................................................................ 8-49
8.12.15 Compensating Results.......................................................................................................................... 8-50
8.12.16 Recalling Result Trend ........................................................................................................................ 8-51
8.12.17 Archiving Results ................................................................................................................................... 8-52
8.13 Test Statistics ................................................................................................................................................................ 8-54
8.14 Result Statistics ............................................................................................................................................................ 8-56
9 Result Printouts ·························································································································································9-1

9.1 Data Import and Export ................................................................................................................................................ 9-2
9.1.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................... 9-2
9.1.2 Import/Export Chemistries ...................................................................................................................... 9-2
9.1.3 Data Archive ..................................................................................................................................................... 9-5
9.1.4 Sending sample results and QC results to LIS ..................................................................................... 9-6
9.2 Print Setup .......................................................................................................................................................................... 9-7
9.2.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................... 9-7
9.2.2 General Print Setup Options ...................................................................................................................... 9-7
9.2.3 Set Up Default Template .............................................................................................................................. 9-8
9.2.4 Delete Template .............................................................................................................................................. 9-8
9.2.5 Edit Print Template ....................................................................................................................................... 9-8
9.2.6 Import Print Template ................................................................................................................................. 9-8
9.2.7 Defining Chemistry Print Order ............................................................................................................... 9-9
9.3 Sample Reports............................................................................................................................................................... 9-11
9.3.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................... 9-11
9.3.2 Single Sample Report ................................................................................................................................. 9-11
9.3.3 Multi-Sample Report .................................................................................................................................. 9-12
9.3.4 Print Report Collection ............................................................................................................................. 9-13
IX
9.3.5 Chemistry Summary .................................................................................................................................. 9-14
10 Chemistries ····································································································10-1
10.1 Twin Chemistries........................................................................................................................................................ 10-2

10.1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 10-2
10.1.2 Chemistry Definition............................................................................................................................... 10-2
10.1.3 Removing Twin Relation ....................................................................................................................... 10-3
10.1.4 Reagent Setup ............................................................................................................................................ 10-3
10.1.5 Setting Up and Requesting Calibration............................................................................................ 10-3
10.1.6 Setting Up and Requesting Quality Control.................................................................................... 10-3
10.1.7 Sample Programming and Processing............................................................................................. 10-4
10.2 Special Calculations.................................................................................................................................................... 10-5
10.2.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 10-5
10.2.2 Defining/Editing a Calculation ............................................................................................................ 10-5
10.2.3 Enabling/Disabling Calculations ........................................................................................................ 10-6
10.2.4 Deleting User-Defined Calculations ................................................................................................... 10-7
10.2.5 Running Calculations............................................................................................................................... 10-8
10.3 Panels .............................................................................................................................................................................. 10-9
10.3.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 10-9
10.3.2 Defining/Editing a Panel....................................................................................................................... 10-9
10.3.3 Adjusting Display Order of Panels ................................................................................................... 10-10
10.3.4 Deleting Panels ....................................................................................................................................... 10-10
10.3.5 Running Panels....................................................................................................................................... 10-10
10.4 Off-system Chemistries ......................................................................................................................................... 10-11
10.4.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 10-11
10.4.2 Define/Edit Off-System Chemistries ............................................................................................. 10-11
10.4.3 Running the Off-system Chemistries ............................................................................................ 10-12
10.4.4 Deleting Off-system Chemistries ..................................................................................................... 10-12
10.5 Serum Index ............................................................................................................................................................... 10-13
10.6 Chemistry Configuration ...................................................................................................................................... 10-14
10.6.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 10-14
10.6.2 Enabling Chemistries........................................................................................................................... 10-14
10.6.3 Disabling Chemistries ......................................................................................................................... 10-15
10.6.4 Customizing Chemistry Display Order .......................................................................................... 10-15
10.6.5 Adjusting Test Order of Chemistries .............................................................................................. 10-16
10.7 Carryover Setup ....................................................................................................................................................... 10-18
10.7.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 10-18
10.7.2 Defining/Editing Carryover Pair .................................................................................................... 10-18
10.7.3 Removing a Carryover Pair ............................................................................................................... 10-19
10.8 Default Panel ............................................................................................................................................................. 10-20
10.8.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 10-20
10.8.2 Defining the Default Panel................................................................................................................. 10-20
10.8.3 Running Default Panel for Samples ............................................................................................... 10-20
10.9 Masking/Unmasking Chemistries .................................................................................................................... 10-22
10.9.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 10-22
X
10.9.2 Masking/Unmasking Chemistries .................................................................................................. 10-22

10.10 Reflex.......................................................................................................................................................................... 10-23
10.10.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................................................... 10-23
10.10.2 Setting Reflex Relation ...................................................................................................................... 10-23
10.10.3 Editing Reflex Relation ...................................................................................................................... 10-24
10.10.4 Deleting Reflex Relation .................................................................................................................... 10-24
10.10.5 Measurement and Result Recall ................................................................................................... 10-24
11 System Commands and Setup Options ···································································11-1
11.1 Home ............................................................................................................................................................................... 11-2

11.1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 11-2
11.1.2 Homing System ......................................................................................................................................... 11-2
11.2 Stop Print ....................................................................................................................................................................... 11-3
11.2.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 11-3
11.2.2 Stop Print..................................................................................................................................................... 11-3
11.3 Sleep and Wake Up..................................................................................................................................................... 11-4
11.3.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 11-4
11.3.2 System Hibernation ................................................................................................................................ 11-4
11.3.3 Waking up the System............................................................................................................................ 11-4
11.4 User and Password Setup........................................................................................................................................ 11-5
11.4.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 11-5
11.4.2 Defining a User .......................................................................................................................................... 11-5
11.4.3 Modifying a User....................................................................................................................................... 11-6
11.4.4 Assigning/Modifying Permissions.................................................................................................... 11-6
11.4.5 Deleting a User........................................................................................................................................... 11-7
11.5 Sleep and Awake Setup............................................................................................................................................. 11-8
11.5.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 11-8
11.5.2 Auto Sleep Setup ....................................................................................................................................... 11-8
11.5.3 Auto Startup Setup ................................................................................................................................... 11-9
11.5.4 Auto Awake Setup .................................................................................................................................... 11-9
11.6 Dictionary Setup ...................................................................................................................................................... 11-11
11.6.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 11-11
11.6.2 Defining, Editing and Deleting Data Option ................................................................................ 11-11
11.7 Software Upgrade .................................................................................................................................................... 11-13
11.7.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 11-13
11.7.2 Software Upgrade .................................................................................................................................. 11-13
11.8 Software Version...................................................................................................................................................... 11-14
11.8.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 11-14
11.8.2 Software Version ................................................................................................................................... 11-14
11.9 Voice Tone Setup...................................................................................................................................................... 11-16
11.9.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 11-16
11.9.2 Importing Audio Files .......................................................................................................................... 11-16
11.9.3 Setting Up Voice Tone .......................................................................................................................... 11-16
12 Use of ISE Module ····························································································12-1
XI
12.1 Precautions on Use .................................................................................................................................................... 12-2

12.1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 12-2
12.1.2 Precautions on Use .................................................................................................................................. 12-2
12.2 Principles of Measurement..................................................................................................................................... 12-4
12.3 ISE Chemistry Parameters ...................................................................................................................................... 12-5
12.3.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 12-5
12.3.2 Viewing ISE Chemistry Parameters ................................................................................................. 12-5
12.3.3 Introduction to ISE Chemistry Parameters .................................................................................... 12-5
12.3.4 Flag ISE Qualitative Result .................................................................................................................... 12-6
12.4 Preparing ISE Reagents for Measurement ....................................................................................................... 12-8
12.4.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 12-8
12.4.2 Off-line Load ISE Reagent ..................................................................................................................... 12-8
12.4.3 On-line Load ISE Reagent .................................................................................................................. 12-10
12.4.4 Load ISE Wash Solution ...................................................................................................................... 12-10
12.4.5 Replacing ISE Wash Solution ............................................................................................................ 12-11
12.5 Calibration and Results Recall ............................................................................................................................ 12-12
12.5.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 12-12
12.5.2 Calibration Setup ................................................................................................................................... 12-12
12.5.3 Calibration Status and Alarm ............................................................................................................ 12-13
12.5.4 ISE Calibration........................................................................................................................................ 12-13
12.5.5 Results Recall .......................................................................................................................................... 12-14
12.5.6 Extending ISE Calibration Time ...................................................................................................... 12-17
12.6 Quality Control and Results Recall .................................................................................................................... 12-18
12.6.1 Quality Control and Results Recall.................................................................................................. 12-18
12.7 Sample Programming and Results Recall ...................................................................................................... 12-19
12.8 Reagent Inventory Alarm Limit ......................................................................................................................... 12-20
12.8.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 12-20
12.8.2 Setting up Reagent Inventory Alarm Limit ................................................................................. 12-20
12.9 ISE Prime Cycle ......................................................................................................................................................... 12-21
12.9.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 12-21
12.9.2 Defining/Modifying ISE Prime Times .......................................................................................... 12-21
12.10 Daily Maintenance ............................................................................................................................................... 12-22
12.10.1 Daily Maintenance ............................................................................................................................. 12-22
12.11 Troubleshooting ISE Module ............................................................................................................................. 12-23
12.11.1 Troubleshooting ISE Module .......................................................................................................... 12-23
13 Use of Bar Code ······························································································13-1
13.1 Sample Bar Code Reader .......................................................................................................................................... 13-2

13.1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 13-2
13.1.2 Sample Bar Code Setup ........................................................................................................................... 13-3
13.1.3 Programming Bar-Coded Samples .................................................................................................... 13-4
13.2 Reagent Bar Code Reader ........................................................................................................................................ 13-7
13.2.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 13-7
13.2.2 Reagent Bar Code Setup......................................................................................................................... 13-8
13.2.3 Loading Bar-Coded Reagents ............................................................................................................... 13-9
XII
13.3 Bar Code Reader Maintenance ........................................................................................................................... 13-11

13.3.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 13-11
13.3.2 Cleaning Sample and Reagent Bar Code Scanning Windows ............................................... 13-11
13.4 Troubleshooting Bar Code Reader .................................................................................................................... 13-12
14 LIS and RMS ····································································································14-1
14.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................................................ 14-2

14.2 Host Communication ................................................................................................................................................ 14-3
14.2.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 14-3
14.2.2 Connection between PC and LIS Host.............................................................................................. 14-3
14.2.3 Host Communication Parameters ..................................................................................................... 14-3
14.2.4 Defining Channel Number of Chemistries ..................................................................................... 14-6
14.3 Programming Samples with LIS Host ................................................................................................................ 14-7
14.3.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 14-7
14.3.2 Programming Functions ....................................................................................................................... 14-7
14.4 Result Transmission............................................................................................................................................... 14-10
14.4.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 14-10
14.4.2 Result Transmission Setup ................................................................................................................ 14-10
14.4.3 Manually Sending Results to LIS Host .......................................................................................... 14-10
14.5 Troubleshooting LIS ............................................................................................................................................... 14-11
14.6 Use of RMS.................................................................................................................................................................. 14-12
14.6.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 14-12
14.6.2 Connection between PC and RMS .................................................................................................. 14-12
14.6.3 Troubleshooting RMS .......................................................................................................................... 14-13
15 Diagnostics·····································································································15-1
15.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................................................ 15-2

15.2 Diagnosis of Sample System................................................................................................................................... 15-3
15.2.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 15-3
15.2.2 Sample Probe Clog Detection ............................................................................................................... 15-3
15.2.3 Sample Probe Level Sense Test........................................................................................................... 15-4
15.3 Diagnosis of Reagent System ................................................................................................................................ 15-7
15.3.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 15-7
15.4 Sensor Diagnosis ..................................................................................................................................................... 15-12
15.4.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 15-12
15.4.2 Sensor Diagnosis ................................................................................................................................... 15-12
16 Maintenance···································································································16-1
16.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................................................ 16-2

16.1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 16-2
16.1.2 Spare Parts and Consumables ............................................................................................................. 16-2
16.1.3 Tools to be Prepared by User............................................................................................................... 16-5
16.2 Biochemistry Maintenance .................................................................................................................................... 16-6
XIII
16.2.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 16-6

16.2.2 Biochemistry Maintenance Screen Overview .............................................................................. 16-6
16.3 ISE Maintenance ......................................................................................................................................................... 16-8
16.3.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 16-8
16.3.2 ISE Maintenance Screen Overview ................................................................................................... 16-8
16.4 Scheduled Maintenance Log ................................................................................................................................ 16-10
16.4.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 16-10
16.4.2 Maintenance Schedule ......................................................................................................................... 16-10
16.4.3 Scheduled Maintenance Procedures .............................................................................................. 16-10
16.4.4 Maintenance Log Sheet ...................................................................................................................... 16-12
16.4.5 Scheduled Maintenance Screen Overview .................................................................................. 16-15
16.5 Daily Maintenance .................................................................................................................................................. 16-18
16.5.1 Check Probes/Mixers/Wash Wells ................................................................................................ 16-18
16.5.2 Check Sample/Reagent Syringes .................................................................................................... 16-19
16.5.3 Check Deionized Water Connection.............................................................................................. 16-20
16.5.4 Check Waste ............................................................................................................................................ 16-21
16.5.5 Check Concentrated Wash Solution ............................................................................................... 16-22
16.5.6 Check Sample Probe Wash Solution .............................................................................................. 16-23
16.5.7 Clean Electrode Tubes (For ISE Module) ....................................................................................... 16-23
16.6 Weekly Maintenance.............................................................................................................................................. 16-25
16.6.1 Clean Sample/Reagent Probe Exterior ......................................................................................... 16-25
16.6.2 Clean Mixers ............................................................................................................................................ 16-26
16.6.3 Special Wash ........................................................................................................................................... 16-26
16.6.4 Cuvette Check ......................................................................................................................................... 16-27
16.6.5 Photometer Check ................................................................................................................................ 16-29
16.7 Monthly Maintenance............................................................................................................................................ 16-31
16.7.1 Clean Wash Wells ................................................................................................................................... 16-31
16.7.2 Clean Wash Station and Tubes ......................................................................................................... 16-31
16.7.3 Clean Filter Core .................................................................................................................................... 16-32
16.7.4 Clean Dust Screens of the Analyzer ............................................................................................... 16-34
16.7.5 Clean Sample Injection Port (For ISE Module) ........................................................................... 16-35
16.7.6 Pump Calibration (For ISE Module) ............................................................................................... 16-36
16.7.7 Air Bubble Detector Calibration (For ISE Module)................................................................... 16-37
16.7.8 Clean the Dust Screen of the External Vacuum Pump ........................................................... 16-37
16.8 Three-Month Maintenance ................................................................................................................................. 16-40
16.8.1 Clean DI Water Tank............................................................................................................................. 16-40
16.8.2 Replace Filter Core................................................................................................................................ 16-42
16.9 Six-Month Maintenance ........................................................................................................................................ 16-43
16.9.1 Replace Lamp .......................................................................................................................................... 16-43
16.9.2 Replace Water Inlet Filter .................................................................................................................. 16-44
16.9.3 Replace Reference Electrode(For ISE Module) ........................................................................... 16-45
16.10 As-Needed/As-Required Maintenance ........................................................................................................ 16-47
16.10.1 Clean Analyzer Panels ....................................................................................................................... 16-47
16.10.2 Clean Sample Compartment ........................................................................................................... 16-47
16.10.3 Clean Reagent Compartment ......................................................................................................... 16-48
XIV
16.10.4 Clean Sample Probe Interior .......................................................................................................... 16-49

16.10.5 Clean Reagent Probe Interior ........................................................................................................ 16-51
16.10.6 Replace Sample Probe ....................................................................................................................... 16-52
16.10.7 Replace Reagent Probes................................................................................................................... 16-54
16.10.8 Replace Sample Mixer ....................................................................................................................... 16-55
16.10.9 Replace Reagent Mixer ..................................................................................................................... 16-57
16.10.10 Remove Air Bubbles in Sample Syringe .................................................................................. 16-57
16.10.11 Remove Air Bubbles in Reagent Syringe ................................................................................ 16-59
16.10.12 Replace Cuvette................................................................................................................................. 16-59
16.10.13 Special Wash Probes ...................................................................................................................... 16-61
16.10.14 Bar Code Maintenance ................................................................................................................... 16-62
16.10.15 Clean Probes/Mixers Exterior .................................................................................................... 16-62
16.10.16 Replace ISE Electrode ...................................................................................................................... 16-63
16.10.17 Remove Reagent Pack (For ISE Module) ................................................................................ 16-64
16.10.18 Store Electrodes (For ISE Module) ............................................................................................. 16-65
16.10.19 Two-Point Calibration (For ISE Module) ................................................................................ 16-66
16.10.20 Maintenance (For ISE Module) ................................................................................................... 16-66
16.10.21 Purge A (For ISE Module) ............................................................................................................. 16-67
16.10.22 Purge B (For ISE Module) ............................................................................................................. 16-67
16.10.23 Replace Pump Tube and Calibrator Tube .............................................................................. 16-67
16.10.24 Program Check Instruction (For ISE Module) ...................................................................... 16-68
16.10.25 Read Dallas Chip (For ISE Module) ........................................................................................... 16-68
16.10.26 Write Dallas Chip (For ISE Module) .......................................................................................... 16-68
16.10.27 Replace Sample Syringe ................................................................................................................. 16-68
16.10.28 Replace Reagent Syringes............................................................................................................. 16-69
16.10.29 Clean Rotors ....................................................................................................................................... 16-70
16.10.30 Clean ISE Waste Tube ..................................................................................................................... 16-71
17 Alarms and Troubleshooting ···············································································17-1
17.1 Classification of Logs ................................................................................................................................................. 17-2

17.1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 17-2
17.1.2 Error Logs ................................................................................................................................................... 17-2
17.1.3 Edit Logs ...................................................................................................................................................... 17-5
17.2 Viewing and Handling Logs ................................................................................................................................... 17-6
17.2.1 Description of Error Log Screen ........................................................................................................ 17-6
17.2.2 Description of Edit Log Screen ........................................................................................................... 17-6
17.2.3 Recalling Logs ............................................................................................................................................ 17-7
17.2.4 Refreshing Logs ........................................................................................................................................ 17-8
17.2.5 Clearing Logs .............................................................................................................................................. 17-8
17.2.6 Printing Logs .............................................................................................................................................. 17-8
17.3 Error Troubleshooting.............................................................................................................................................. 17-9
17.3.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................ 17-9
17.3.2 Error Indications ...................................................................................................................................... 17-9
17.3.3 Identifying Errors .................................................................................................................................. 17-10
17.4 Data Alarm .................................................................................................................................................................. 17-11
XV
17.4.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 17-11

17.4.2 Result Flags .............................................................................................................................................. 17-13
17.5 Error Messages and Corrective Actions ......................................................................................................... 17-28
18 Template Modifying Software ··············································································18-1
18.1 Main Screen .................................................................................................................................................................. 18-2

18.1.1 Main Screen ................................................................................................................................................ 18-2
18.1.2 File (F) ........................................................................................................................................................... 18-2
18.1.3 Edit (E) ......................................................................................................................................................... 18-4
18.1.4 View (V) ....................................................................................................................................................... 18-5
18.1.5 Insert (I)....................................................................................................................................................... 18-6
18.1.6 Format (M) ................................................................................................................................................. 18-7
18.1.7 Set(S) ............................................................................................................................................................. 18-8
18.1.8 Language (L) .............................................................................................................................................. 18-8
18.1.9 Help (H) ........................................................................................................................................................ 18-9
18.2 Common Tools .......................................................................................................................................................... 18-10
18.3 Draw Tools .................................................................................................................................................................. 18-11
18.4 Property Window .................................................................................................................................................... 18-13
18.4.1 Page ............................................................................................................................................................ 18-13
18.4.2 Line ............................................................................................................................................................. 18-13
18.4.3 Rectangle ................................................................................................................................................... 18-14
18.4.4 Label ........................................................................................................................................................... 18-15
18.4.5 Text.............................................................................................................................................................. 18-17
18.4.6 Title ............................................................................................................................................................. 18-18
18.4.7 Image.......................................................................................................................................................... 18-19
18.5 Report Window ........................................................................................................................................................ 18-20
Electronic Interface ································································································· 1
Vocabulary ············································································································· 1
Index ···················································································································· 1
Bibliography ··········································································································· 1
XVI
9 Result Printouts
This chapter describes data archiving, print setup, auto print and manual print methods,
and result printouts.
9-1
9 Result Printouts
9.1 Data Import and Export

9.1.1 Introduction
The Data Import and Export function allows various data to be imported from or
exported to an external storage device. Exporting data is allowed only when the system
status is Standby, Incubation and Failure.
The following data can be imported:
 Open-/Closed-reagent chemistries, including biochemistries, Off-system chemistries,
ISE chemistries, SI and calculations
The following data can be exported:
 Sample results (including results of all replicates): transmitted to LIS host
 Control results: transmitted to LIS host
 QC data: archived to external storage device
 Calibration results: archived to external storage device
 Open-reagent chemistries: exported to a .text file
9.1.2 Import/Export Chemistries

The system supports specified and default chemistries to be imported from an external
file, and open-reagent chemistries to bo exported to an external storage device.
A maximum of 300 open-/closed-reagent chemistries can be imported, and the number
of newly-imported chemistries must not exceed 200. When chemistries are imported,
they are enabled by default if set up correctly. If the number of open-reagent chemistries
imported exceeds the maximum limit, the excessive open-reagent chemistries will be
disabled.
Only users with sufficient permission are allowed to import or export chemistries.
Importing and exporting chemistries can be performed only when the system status is
Standby, Incubation, Stop and Sleep.
CAUTION
While importing chemistries, do not switch off the analyzing unit main power or exit the
operating software.
If an imported closed-reagent chemistry is no longer needed, it can be deleted with the

Delete F2 button on the Chemistries screen.
Import default chemistry list

Closed-reagent chemistries can be imported from an .item file. They include
biochemistries, ISE chemistries, SI and special calculations, as well as carryover pairs,
reagent type, biochemistry calibration settings, ISE calibration settings, unit conversion
rules, processing parameters, error detection limits, carryover settings and slope and
offset.
Those chemistries imported from the default parameter form can be run only based on
reagents manufactured by our company. Only the full name, print name, result unit,
decimal places, and error detection limits, while the others can only be browsed.
9-2
9 Result Printouts
2 Select Config F3.

3 Select Options.
4 Select Import.
Figure 9.1 Import window
5 Select Load Default.
All chemistries contained in the default parameter form are displayed in the
Available Chemistries list.
6 Use the following buttons to import desired chemistries:

 Add All>>: add all chemistries in the Available Chemistries list to the
Imported Chemistries list.
 Add ->: add the selected chemistries in the Available Chemistries list to the
 <-Remove: remove the selected chemistries from the Imported Chemistries
list.
 <<Remove All: remove all chemistries from the Imported Chemistries list.
7 Select Import.
All imported chemistries are enabled by default and can be used for measurement. If
the result unit is changed, the corresponding chemistry must be recalibrated.
8 Select Exit.
Import specified chemistry list

Open-reagent chemistries can be imported from a .csv file. The open-reagent chemistries
include biochemistries, as well as the processing parameters, error detection limits, slope
and offset, dilution factors, and sample type.
2 Select Config F3.
3 Select Options.
9-3
9 Result Printouts
4 Select Import.
5 Select Load.
6 Locate the path of the parameter form, and then select a .csv file.
7 Select Open.
All chemistries contained in the parameter form are displayed in the Available
Chemistries list.
8 Use the following buttons to import desired chemistries:

 <-Remove: remove the selected chemistries from the Imported Chemistries
list.
 <<Remove All: remove all chemistries from the Imported Chemistries list.
9 Select Import.
All imported chemistries with correct parameters are enabled by default and can be
used for measurement. If you change any of the following parameters of an
imported chemistry, recalibrate the chemistry:
 Reaction type
 Primary wavelength
 Secondary wavelength
 Reaction direction
 Reaction time
 Blank time
 Result unit
 Standard sample volume, diluting sample volume and diluent volume
 Reagent volume (R1, R2, R3 and R4)
 Sample blank
 Twin chemistries
 Pretreatment parameters
10 Select Exit.
Export chemistries
Open-reagent chemistries, as well as the processing parameters, error detection limits
and slope and offset, can be exported to a storage device.
2 Select Config F3.
3 Select Options.
4 Select Export.
9-4
9 Result Printouts
Figure 9.2 Export window
5 Use the following buttons to export desired chemistries:

Exported Chemistries list.
Exported Chemistries list.
 <-Remove: remove the selected chemistries from the Exported Chemistries
list.
 <<Remove All: remove all chemistries from the Exported Chemistries list.
6 Select Export.
7 Select the path to export and input the file name.
The default file name is composed of the current date and time, such as
20140827_0951. The file format is .csv.
8 Select Save.
9 Select Exit.
9.1.3 Data Archive

You are recommended to regularly archive the ISE and biochemistry calibration results
and QC data to an external storage device, such as U disk and floppy disk.
Archiving biochemistry calibration results

When archived, the biochemistry calibration results are displayed in the same format as
those on software screens. The archived content includes: chemistry name, flag,
calibration status, R0, K factor, calibration coefficients A/B/C/D, unit, and run date/time.
The archiving file is of .csv format and named by date and time the results are archived.
For more information of archiving biochemistry calibration results, refer to 6.9.6
Archiving Calibration Results (page 6-21).
9-5
9 Result Printouts
Archiving ISE calibration results

Both the current and early calibration factors of ISE chemistries can be archived. The
archiving file is of .csv format and named by date and time the results are archived.
For more information of archiving ISE calibration results, refer to Archiving ISE
calibration results (page 12-16).
Archiving QC data
The QC results and data can be archived to a storage device with the file name of
QCData.csv, which cannot be edited.
For more information of archiving QC data, refer to Archive QC data (page 7-17).
9.1.4 Sending sample results and QC results to LIS

Sample results and QC results can be sent manually or in real-time mode to the LIS host
for reviewing and storage. When a sample is analyzed with its all tests finished, the
system can automatically send the test results to the LIS host; also you are allowed to
search for desired results and then manually send them to LIS.
For more information about sending sample/QC results to LIS, refer to 14.4 Result
Transmission (page 14-10).
9-6
9 Result Printouts
9.2 Print Setup

9.2.1 Introduction
Results and data can be printed out with the specified template through the printer. You
are allowed not only to set up the printer type, default printer and printed hospital name,
import print report but also define the print order of chemistries, edit print template and
preview print template.
9.2.2 General Print Setup Options

2 Select Print F3.
Figure 9.3 Print setup screen
3 Select a report type from the report list on the left of the window.
4 Select a template from the template list.
 The template list includes all the report templates of the selected report type.
 The template list has four columns. Only one template can be selected at the
same time.
5 Select one option from the check box:
 Auto print patient report
 Print after reviewal
 Auto print QC report.
 Auto print calibration report
6 Choose a printer type.
The system supports three types of printer, which include laser printer, inkjet printer
and stylus printer.
9-7
9 Result Printouts
7 Choose a default printer to print reports.

8 Choose a print mode between Paginal and Serial.
9 Select OK.
9.2.3 Set Up Default Template

2 Select Print F3.
3 Select a report type from the Report list on the left of the window.
5 Click Set Defaults to set the selected template in the template list as the default one.
9.2.4 Delete Template

2 Select Print F3.
5 Click Delete to delete the selected template.
If it is the default one or it has the print duty, it cannot be deleted.
9.2.5 Edit Print Template

2 Select Print F3.
5 Click Edit to open the template modifying software
You can edit the report templates as needed. Refer to 18 Template Modifying
Software for details.
9.2.6 Import Print Template

2 Select Print F3.
3 Click Import to import the print template.
9-8
9 Result Printouts
Figure 9.4 Import print template window
4 Select a report type from the factory template dropdown box.

5 Select one or more templates in the template list to be imported.
6 Click Import.
The selected template(s) can be imported
7 Click Customize to import the template you edited from a tmplt file.
The legal directory should be a portable storage device. The templates can be
imported in batch.
8 Click Import
The imported templates will be displayed in the template list.
9 Click Exit to exit the window.
9.2.7 Defining Chemistry Print Order

2 Select Print F3.
3 Select Print Order.
9-9
9 Result Printouts
Figure 9.5 Print Order window
4 Use the following buttons to adjust the chemistry print order:

 Home: to move the chemistry to the first position.
 Up: to move the chemistry to the previous position.
 Down: to move the chemistry to the next position.
 End: to move the chemistry to the last position.
5 Set up result print mode.
 To print results on patient report, select the corresponding Print checkbox.
 To forbid printing results on patient report, deselect the corresponding Print
checkbox or leave it unselected.
6 Select OK to save your settings.
7 To restore the factory settings, select Restore Defaults.
9-10
9 Result Printouts
9.3 Sample Reports

9.3.1 Introduction
Sample reports are used to print sample results, sample list, reaction curve and data, as
well as sample blank reaction curve and data.
The result reports include:
 Single sample report
 Multi-sample report
 Report collection
 Chemistry summary
The list reports include:
 Sample list report
 Control list report
 Chemistry list report
The above-mentioned reports and printing methods are described in detail in the
following sections.
9.3.2 Single Sample Report

A single sample report contains all results of a sample, including emergent sample, routine
sample and control sample. It can be printed out on:
 Current Results screen
 History Results screen
Print a single sample report by performing the following steps:
3 Search for desired results to print.
4 Choose a sample.
5 Select Print F7.
9-11
9 Result Printouts
Figure 9.6 Print sample results window

7 Select the Selected Sample(s) option button.
8 Select OK.
Figure 9.7 Single sample report example
9.3.3 Multi-Sample Report

A multi-sample report can print two or more samples of a patient on a report. If the
patient demographics of the samples are not consistent, the demographics of the first will
be printed by default. A multi-sample report can be printed out on:
 Current Results screen
 History Results screen
Print a multi-sample report by performing the following steps:
9-12
9 Result Printouts

4 Choose results to print.
6 Select Print Multi-Sample Report.
Figure 9.8 Multi-sample report example
9.3.4 Print Report Collection

Report collection contains the test results of all samples and QC samples for the purpose
of archiving and internal audit of the clinical laboratories.
4 Select Print F7.
9-13
9 Result Printouts
5 Select Print Report Collection.

6 Select OK.
All inquired sample results and the results of the QC samples will be printed out.
Figure 9.10 Sample summary report
9.3.5 Chemistry Summary

Chemistry summary report contains the summary of a chemistry or all chemistries.
4 To print single chemistry in the chemistry list, select it; to print all chemistries, there
is no need to select them.
5 Select Print F7.
9-14
9 Result Printouts

 Selected chemistry
 All chemistries
7 Select OK.
9-15
9 Result Printouts
9-16
10 Chemistries
This chapter introduces applications of chemistries, including:

 Definition and application of twin chemistries
 Definition and application of calculations
 Definition and application of panels
 Definition and application of off-system chemistries
 Configuration and application of serum index
 Masking and unmasking of chemistries
 Chemistry configuration
 Definition and application of default panels
 Carryover setup
 Reflex
10-1
10 Chemistries
10.1 Twin Chemistries

10.1.1 Introduction
Twin chemistries are run and calculated based on the same reagent. Results of the two
twin chemistries are calculated through the same test. Take the reagent HBA1C as an
example. It can be used for running two chemistries in the same test. The chemistry HB is
measured during the former reaction period, while the chemistry HbA1c measured
during the latter one. Finally, HbA1C (%) can be calculated based on results of the two
chemistries.
Similar to normal chemistries, twin chemistries can be run only when the following
settings are finished:
 defining chemistries
 assigning reagent position
 setting up calibrator and calibration rule
 setting up control and QC rule
10.1.2 Chemistry Definition

Twin chemistries can be defined in the same way as normal chemistries. The following
parameters, however, must be set up differently for two twin chemistries:
 Sample type
 Normal sample volume, increased sample volume, and decreased sample volume
 Volume of the same reagent type
 Prozone check
A chemistry that has been set as the twin of another chemistry must not have another
twin. When twin chemistries are defined, both chemistries must be calibrated.
Figure 10.1 Chemistry definition window
10-2
10 Chemistries
For defining methods of chemistries, refer to “3.2 Chemistries Setup” (Page 3-10).
10.1.3 Removing Twin Relation

To remove the twin relation between two chemistries, cancel the selection of a twin
chemistry. Only when reagents of the two chemistries are unloaded can the twin relation
between them be removed.
10.1.4 Reagent Setup

Twin chemistries are run with the same reagent in the same position. The reagent can be
loaded manually or through bar code scanning.
Manual load:
You are only required to manually set up reagents for one of the twin chemistries. The
reagent of the same type for the other twin chemistry will be automatically set up with
the same position.
Automatic load:
Place the bar-coded reagents of twin chemistries on the reagent carousel, the system will
scan the reagent bar code and automatically assign the same position for the same
reagent of the twin chemistries.
If reagent loading fails for either of the twin chemistries, both chemistries cannot be run.
For details of reagent loading, refer to “2.5.1 Loading Biochemical Reagents” (Page 2-13).
10.1.5 Setting Up and Requesting Calibration

Calibration setup
The calibrator, number of replicates and auto calibration conditions must be the same for
two twin chemistries.
For calibration settings, refer to “3.3 Calibration Setup” (Page 3-25).
Requesting calibration
Twin chemistries can be requested for calibration in the same way as normal chemistries.
When either of the twin chemistries is requested, the other twin will be requested
automatically, and finally both chemistries will be calibrated. You are allowed to recall the
calibration results, calibration curves and reaction curves of the two chemistries.
10.1.6 Setting Up and Requesting Quality Control

QC setup
Twin chemistries must be defined with the same control, and the QC setup of twin
chemistries is the same as that of normal chemistries. Refer to “3.4 QC Setup” (Page 3-32)
for details.
Programming controls
Twin chemistries can be requested for quality control in the same way as normal
chemistries. When either of the twin chemistries is requested, the other twin will be
requested automatically, and finally both chemistries will be run for quality control. You
are allowed to recall the QC results and QC reaction curves of the two chemistries.
10-3
10 Chemistries
10.1.7 Sample Programming and Processing

Twin chemistries can be requested for sample analysis in the same way as normal
chemistries. When either of the twin chemistries is requested, the other twin will be
requested automatically, and finally both chemistries will be run for sample analysis. You
are allowed to recall the sample results and sample reaction curves of the two chemistries.
10-4
10 Chemistries
10.2 Special Calculations

10.2.1 Introduction
Calculation of certain chemistries can derive new chemistries of clinical purposes, such as
A/G (ALB/ (TP-ALB)), I-BIL (T-Bil - D-Bil), etc.
A calculation is composed of chemistries, calculation operators and algorithm. Only users
with sufficient permissions are allowed to define, modify and delete calculations.
For the print order of calculations, refer to 9.2.7 Defining Chemistry Print Order (Page
9-9).
10.2.2 Defining/Editing a Calculation

Importing and defining calculations is supported. For importing methods of closed
calculations, see Import default chemistry list (Page 9-2). The system allows a maximum
of 50 calculations to be defined.
2 Select Calculations F6.
3 Select Define F1.
Figure 10.2 Special Calculations window
4 Type in the calculation’s short name in the Chem field.

5 If you are going to use the calculation for analysis, mark the Enable checkbox. Select
Flag to flag the calculations.
6 Choose a sample type to which the calculation will be applied.
 Serum
 Plasma
10-5
10 Chemistries
 Urine
 CSF
 Other
7 Type in the calculation’s full name in the Chemistry field.
8 Type in the print name of the calculation to appear on patient reports.
9 Choose a result unit from the Unit pull-down list.
10 Choose a result precision, that is, the number of decimal places.
 0
 0.1
 0.01
 0.001
11 Edit the calculation formula:
 Choose chemistries in the Chemistries list. The chemistries are then displayed
in the Formula field.
 Choose numbers and operators in the Mathematical Symbols area to
constitute the calculation formula along with the chemistries.
 To remove a chemistry, number or operator, move the cursor behind them and
select BS.
 To clear the entire formula, select AC.
12 Select Flag qualitative results if you want to flag the qualitative results.
For more information, please refer to 3.2.5 Flag Qualitative Result
13 Select OK to save the settings.

10.2.3 Enabling/Disabling Calculations

When a special calculation is defined, it is enabled by default and will be calculated for
sample analysis. If a calculation is disabled, it will not be calculated for sample
measurements. Before enabling or disabling a calculation, make sure that the system
status is not Running.
Perform the following steps to enable or disable calculations:
 The calculation list shows all calculations and formulas.
 When the Enable checkbox is marked, it indicates that the calculation will be
included for result calculating.
 When the Enable checkbox is not marked, it indicates that the calculation will
not be included for result calculating.
10-6
10 Chemistries
3 To activate a calculation, mark the Enable checkbox.

4 To inactivate a calculation, deselect the Enable checkbox.
10.2.4 Deleting User-Defined Calculations

Calculations can be deleted by users with sufficient permissions while the system status is
not Running. Only user-defined calculations rather than closed calculations can be deleted.
3 Choose calculations to delete.

4 Select Delete F2.
10-7
10 Chemistries
10.2.5 Running Calculations

Calculations will not be run for calibration, but for quality control and sample analysis
along with other chemistries.
If a chemistry contained in a calculation is run for more than one replicates, the final
result of the chemistry will be used to calculate the result of the special calculation.
10-8
10 Chemistries
10.3 Panels
10.3.1 Introduction
A couple of chemistries combined together for certain clinical purposes can constitute a
panel, such as liver function, kidney function, etc. Panels can help fast programming of
samples.
Panels can be composed of biochemistries and ISE chemistries. The system allows a
maximum of 100 panels to be defined. Only users with sufficient permissions are allowed
to define, modify and delete panels.
10.3.2 Defining/Editing a Panel

2 Select Panels F7.
3 Select Define F1.
Figure 10.5 Define/Edit Panels window
4 Type in the panel number.

5 Type in the panel name.
6 Choose panel types.
 Sample: indicates that the panel can be used for sample analysis.
 QC: indicates that the panel can be used for quality control.
At least one panel type must be selected. A panel can be applied to both sample and
control analysis.
7 Choose chemistries for the panel.
At least one biochemistry should be selected. The three ISE chemistries (Na, K and Cl)
can be selected alone.
8 To remove a chemistry, click it again.

9 Select Save F7.
10-9
10 Chemistries
10.3.3 Adjusting Display Order of Panels

Display order of panels on the Sample and Quality Control screens can be adjusted
manually for convenient test requisition.
2 Select Panels F7.
3 Select Up F3 to move the current panel to the previous position, or select Down F4
to move it to the next position.
10.3.4 Deleting Panels

Panels can be deleted by users with sufficient permissions while the system status is not
Running. When a panel is removed, the chemistries contained in it will still remain and
can constitute panels with other chemistries.
2 Select Panels F7.
3 Choose panels to delete.
4 Select Delete F2.
10.3.5 Running Panels

Panels will not be run for calibration, but for sample and control analysis along with other
chemistries.
10-10
10 Chemistries
10.4 Off-system Chemistries

10.4.1 Introduction
All the chemistries that are not run by the analyzer are referred to as the off-system
chemistries. You can manually enter the off-system chemistry results into the system to
print out them in the patient report.
There are two types of off-system test: qualitative and quantitative.
 Qualitative chemistries: No numeric results are obtained but the flags you defined on
the system. Reference value can be set for the qualitative chemistries
 Quantitative chemistries: Numeric results and defined flags are displayed and printed.
Reference range can be set for the quantitative chemistries
10.4.2 Define/Edit Off-System Chemistries

2 Select a blank chemistry box.
3 Select Define F1.
Figure 10.6 Chemistry type
4 Select Off-system.
5 Select OK
Figure 10.7 Define/Edit chemistries
10-11
10 Chemistries
6 Enter the chemistry parameters

7 Select Use Qualitative Result to flag the result of a quantitative off-system
chemistry.
8 Enter Range and Flag.
9 Select OK.
10.4.3 Running the Off-system Chemistries

Off-system chemistries can participate in the panel setup and quantitative off-system
chemistries can join the special calculations setup. You can program the off-system
chemistries on the Program - Sample screen and the STAT Sample Program screen. The
off-system chemistry can be added singly or in batch to the sample which needs rerun on
the Rerun Sample window and Rerun Batch window. For details, please refer to 8.2.4
Rerunning Samples. After the off-system chemistries are programmed, you can edit their
results on the Result screen. The results of the off-system chemistries can be edited in
any status of the sample.
1 Program the off-system chemistries on the Program - Sample screen. Refer to 2.8.1
Programming Routine Samples
2 Select Result - Current Results/History Results.
 By sample
 By chemistry
5 Select the sample or chemistry whose results you want to edit.
6 Select Option F2.
7 Select Edit Results.
8 Edit the results.
9 Click Save.
10.4.4 Deleting Off-system Chemistries

When the system status is not running, the off-system chemistries can be deleted.
2 Select the off-system chemistry you want to delete.
3 Select Delete F2.
10-12
10 Chemistries
10.5 Serum Index

Serum index is the degree of lipemia, hemolysis and icterus contained in samples, and
used to check if these interferents will influence the sample results.
For more information about serum index, refer to 8.3 Serum Index (page 8-19).
10-13
10 Chemistries
10.6 Chemistry Configuration

10.6.1 Introduction
The Chemistry Configuration function is used to enable/disable chemistries that have
been defined correctly and customize their display order on the Sample, STAT Sample
Program and Quality Control screens. When disabled, chemistries will no longer appear
on the Sample, Reagent/Calibration, Quality Control, Define/Edit Panels, Special
Calculations, Current Results and History Results screens. Only the enabled
chemistries can be requested for measurements and recalled on results screens.
The system allows up to 200 chemistries to be enabled. The number of open-reagent
chemistries can be adjusted according to the practical situations in your laboratory.
10.6.2 Enabling Chemistries

All chemistries other than ISE chemistries and SI can be enabled or disabled. The
closed-reagent chemistries are enabled by default after being imported from a chemistry
file; while the open-reagent chemistries will be enabled only if the parameters are set up
correctly. The SI is always enabled and cannot be disabled. If an ISE module is configured,
the ISE chemistries will always be enabled.
To enable chemistries, perform the following steps:
2 Select Config F3.
Figure 10.8 Chemistry Configuration screen
3 Choose one or more chemistries in the Available Chemistries list.

4 Select Add->.
The selected chemistries are enabled and appear in the Configured Chemistries
list.
5 To enable all available chemistries, select Add All>>.
10-14
10 Chemistries
All chemistries in the Available Chemistries list are enabled and displayed in the
Configured Chemistries list.
6 Select OK.
10.6.3 Disabling Chemistries

Some chemistries that will not be used for the moment can be disabled, and will no
longer appear on request screens. ISE chemistries and SI are always available and cannot
be disabled. Results of disabled chemistries cannot be recalled until the chemistries are
enabled again.
A chemistry can be disabled only if:
 It is not an ISE chemistry.
 It is not SI.
 It has no reagent position.
 It has no calibrator position and has not been requested for calibration.
 It has no control position.
 It is not contained in samples and controls that are in Programmed, Incomplete or
Rerun status.
Perform the following procedure to disable chemistries:
2 Select Config F3.
3 Choose a chemistry in the Configured Chemistries list.
4 Select <-Remove.
The selected chemistry is disabled and removed from the Configured Chemistries
list.
5 To disable all chemistries, select <<Remove All.

All chemistries in the Configured Chemistries list that meet the requirements are
disabled. The disabled open-reagent chemistries are indicated in red.
If one of the chemistries does not satisfy the requirements, the operation will be
aborted and all the chemistries cannot be disabled.
6 Select OK.
10.6.4 Customizing Chemistry Display Order

Chemistries can be customized to match the test order of your laboratory and will be
refreshed on the request screens. Chemistries on the Chemistry Configuration window
are displayed alphabetically. In case an ISE module is configured, Na, K and Cl will appear
on the first three positions after SI in the Configured Chemistries list. In the Available
Chemistries and Configured Chemistries lists, click the Chemistry or Module header
line to sort the chemistries by name or by module.
To adjust chemistry display order, perform the following steps:
2 Select Config F3.
4 Use the following buttons to adjust the chemistry’s display order:
10-15
10 Chemistries

5 Select OK.
The chemistry list on the request screens are refreshed automatically.
10.6.5 Adjusting Test Order of Chemistries

Test order of configured biochemistries can be adjusted manually. During sample analysis,
the chemistries are run in the order of ISE chemistries, SI, and then biochemistries. If
multiple biochemistries are requested, they will be run in the default order. If the test
order is adjusted manually, the biochemistries will be run in the updated order.
Only users with corresponding permission are allowed to adjust the test order of
biochemistries.
2 Select Config F3.
3 Select Options.
4 Select Test Order.
Figure 10.9 Test Order window

6 Use the following buttons to adjust the chemistry’s test order:
10-16
10 Chemistries

7 Select OK.
8 To restore the default test order, select Restore Defaults.
10-17
10 Chemistries
10.7 Carryover Setup

10.7.1 Introduction
The Carryover Setup option is used to set up the carryover relations between
open-reagent chemistries and between cuvettes. The system will insert a cleaning to
reagent probe and cuvettes based on the carryover settings. The closed-reagent
chemistries have been set up by the manufacturer and cannot be viewed or edited, while
the open-reagent chemistries need to be set up on the Carryover window.
When carryover settings are performed for a twin chemistry, the other twin will update
synchronously.
Carryover setup can only be performed by users with sufficient permissions when the
system status is not Running.
10.7.2 Defining/Editing Carryover Pair

2 Select Carryover F8.
Figure 10.10 Carryover window
3 Mark the Reagent checkbox of the contaminated, if the contaminator may cause
reagent cross-contamination with the contaminated. If the contaminator may cause
cuvette cross-contamination, mark the Cuvette checkbox of the contaminated.
4 Choose one or all contaminator chemistries that may contaminate other chemistries.
"ALL" means all chemistries may contaminate others.
5 Choose one or all contaminated chemistries in the Contaminated list.
"ALL" means all chemistries may be contaminated. All (the entire contaminator) to
All (the contaminated) is not permitted to set up.
10-18
10 Chemistries
6 Choose a wash type.

The options include special wash and routine wash.
7 Define the wash cycle.
Only when either of the contaminator or contaminated is ALL, you are enabled to
define wash cycle (1-5).
8 Select Save F7.

The defined carryover pair appears in the Carryover Pairs list. To abort the
carryover settings, select Discard F6.
9 Select Define F1 and follow the above steps to set up other carryover pairs.
10.7.3 Removing a Carryover Pair

2 Select Carryover F8.
3 Choose desired carryover pair.
4 Select Delete F5.
5 Select OK to confirm the deletion.
10-19
10 Chemistries
10.8 Default Panel

10.8.1 Introduction
The system allows a maximum of one default panel to be defined. When a bar-coded
sample has no relevant programming information on the LIS host or has not been
programmed manually, it can be analyzed with the default panel. The default panel is only
applicable to routine and emergent samples, and often used for a tremendous amount of
samples that are analyzed with the same chemistries.
Only a sample panel rather than control panel can be set as the default.
10.8.2 Defining the Default Panel

2 Select Panels F7.
3 Select Define F1.
4 Type in the number of the panel.
5 Type in the panel name.
6 Choose panel types.
 Sample: indicates that the panel can be used for sample analysis.
 QC: indicates that the panel can be used for quality control.
At least one panel type must be selected. A panel can be applied to both sample and
control analysis.
7 Choose chemistries for the panel.

At least one biochemistry should be selected. The three ISE chemistries (Na, K and Cl)
can be selected alone.
8 Select Save F7.

9 Select Close F8.
10 Select the defined panel in the panel list.
11 Mark the Default checkbox in the same row as the selected panel.
10.8.3 Running Default Panel for Samples
BIOHAZARD
a doctor.
CAUTION
1 Load bar-coded samples to the sample carousel.
10-20
10 Chemistries
2 Select the icon on the upper-right corner of the main screen.

4 Select OK.
10-21
10 Chemistries
10.9 Masking/Unmasking Chemistries

10.9.1 Introduction
The chemistry masking function is used when a chemistry needs to be disabled
temporarily due to abnormal result or reagent exhaustion. Masked chemistries can be
requested but cannot be run until they are unmasked.
In any system status chemistries can be masked or unmasked. Any users are allowed to
mask or unmask chemistries.
If a sample contains masked chemistries, it will enter the Incomplete status when finished;
if chemistries are unmasked while the sample status is Programmed, the they will be run
along with other chemistries; if chemistries are unmasked while the sample is being
analyzed, they will be added automatically to the analysis; if chemistries are unmasked
after the sample is analyzed, they will be run automatically when analysis begins next
time.
10.9.2 Masking/Unmasking Chemistries

3 Select 2 Mask/Unmask Chem.
Figure 10.11 Mask/Unmask Chemistries window
4 Choose chemistries to mask, select OK.
The marked chemistry will have a symbol appearing on its upper-left corner,
and will still be displayed on the Sample, Quality Control and
Reagent/Calibration screens.
5 To unmask chemistries, select them and then select OK.

10-22
10 Chemistries
10.10 Reflex
10.10.1 Introduction
The Reflex option allows related chemistries to be requested and run automatically when
the deciding biochemistry’s result is within specified range. Each biochemistry may
embrace multiple reflex conditions, and each condition may contain a maximum of 20
related chemistries.
Reflex conditions and related chemistries are open for observation, but only users with
corresponding permission are allowed to set, modify or delete reflex relation.
10.10.2 Setting Reflex Relation

Before using the reflex function, it must be enabled with reflex conditions and related
chemistries configured. Please note that the chemistries in a reflex condition must have
existed. When the system status is running, the reflex function cannot be set up.
2 Choose a chemistry for which you desire to configure reflex settings.
3 Select Define F1.
4 Select Reflex F2.
Figure 10.12 Reflex window
5 Mark the Enable Reflex Function checkbox to activate this option.

6 Set up reflex conditions.
Two conditions are available: “or” and “and”:
 or: When the test result (concentration) is greater than certain value OR less
than certain value, the related chemistries will be requested and run
automatically.
10-23
10 Chemistries
 and: When the test result (concentration) is greater than certain value AND less
than certain value, the related chemistries will be requested and run
automatically.
Select an option and input the concentration range (0~9999.999).
7 Choose related chemistries in the chemistry list.

The options include all configured biochemistries.
8 Select OK.
The defined reflex relation is shown in the left list.
9 To define more relations for the current chemistry, repeat steps 6~8.
11 To define reflex relations for other chemistries, repeat steps 1~10.
10.10.3 Editing Reflex Relation

Only users with corresponding permission are allowed to edit reflex relation.
2 Choose a chemistry for which you desire to edit reflex settings.
3 Select Define F1.
4 Select Reflex F2.
5 Select a reflex relation in the left list.
6 Modify the condition and related chemistries.
7 Select OK.
10.10.4 Deleting Reflex Relation

Only users with corresponding permission are allowed to delete reflex relation. If a
chemistry is deleted, the corresponding reflex relation to which it is related will be
removed automatically.
2 Choose a chemistry for which you desire to delete reflex settings.
3 Select Define F1.
4 Select Reflex F2.
5 Select a reflex relation in the left list.
6 Select Delete.
7 Select OK.
10.10.5 Measurement and Result Recall

Chemistries with reflex settings are run in the same way as routine biochemistries. When
the test result meets the set condition, the related chemistries will be requested and run
automatically while those that have been requested for the sample will be excluded. To
view the results, select Result - Current Results or History Results.
10-24
11 System Commands and Setup Options
This chapter provides descriptions of system commands and advanced setup options.
The system commands include:
 Home
 Stop print
 Wake up
The advanced setup options include:
 User and password setup
 System timers for auto sleep, auto startup and auto awake
 Dictionary setup
 Software version upgrading
 Software version
 Voice tone setup
11-1
11.1 Home
11.1.1 Introduction
The Home command is used to initialize the biochemistry system and the ISE module,
and to recover them from failures, making all components return to the home positions.
When the Home command is executed, the system status becomes Standby.
11.1.2 Homing System

1 Select Utility - Commands.
2 Select Home.
11-2
11.2 Stop Print

11.2.1 Introduction
The Stop Print command will stop all print requests in the print queue and prevent them
from being sent to the printer. This feature is used for stopping print requests of many
pages, such as error logs, QC reports, multi-sample reports, etc. The print tasks that are
Printing, Deleted, Canceling or Canceled in the print task window will not be deleted.
11.2.2 Stop Print

2 Select Stop Print. All print requests in the print queue will be removed.
11-3
11.3 Sleep and Wake Up

11.3.1 Introduction
When hibernating manually through the sleep option, the system can be activated by the
Wake Up command. Except for Wake Up, the system can also be activated based on the
set auto awake time.
For more information about auto sleep and wake up, refer to 11.5 Sleep and Awake Setup
(page 11-8).
11.3.2 System Hibernation

1 Select Exit.
2 Select Sleep.
The system starts hibernating and the system status changes into Sleep.
11.3.3 Waking up the System

2 Select Wake Up.
3 The system is waking up, and the system status becomes Standby.
11-4
11.4 User and Password Setup

11.4.1 Introduction
Users can be defined, deleted or modified on the User and Password window. The system
allows up to 100 users to be defined and belonged to two user groups: administrator and
operator. Administrators are allowed to assign permissions for operators.
NOTE
The default username and password for administrator is Admin. Please note that the
password is case sensitive. You are recommended to change the password when logging
on the system for the first time in order to prevent others from abusing the privileges of
the administrator.
If an operator forgets his password, he may ask the administrator to log on the system
and delete the username and then redefine a username; or he may contact our customer
service department or your local distributor. If the administrator forgets his password,
11.4.2 Defining a User

Only administrators are allowed to define users. Up to 100 users are allowed, including
administrators. You should enter the username, password, confirm password and user
group when defining a user.
2 Select User F6.
Figure 11.1 User and Password window
3 Enter the username.

4 Enter the password.
A maximum of 20 characters can be entered.
5 Enter the password again in the Confirm field.
11-5
6 Choose a user group in the User Group pull-down list.

 Administrator
 Operator
7 Select a doctor from Associated Doctor dropdown box.
When the user and the associated doctor have been set up, the default tester in the
patient demographics is the associated doctor of the current login user.
8 Select New. The defined user appears in the user list.

11.4.3 Modifying a User

Only administrators are allowed to edit the user group of themselves and other users.
Username and password can only be modified by the user himself rather than anyone
else.
2 Select User F6.
3 Choose a user to edit in the user list.
4 Enter the new username.
5 Enter the new password.
6 Enter the new password again in the Confirm Password field.
7 Choose a user group in the User Group pull-down list.
 Administrator
 Operator
8 Select Modify.
11.4.4 Assigning/Modifying Permissions

Permissions are assigned to user groups, which include administrator and operator.
Administrators are allowed to use, assign and modify all permissions that are assigned
for operators; while operators are only allowed to use common functions, such as
assigning reagent position; programming samples, controls and calibrators; recalling
sample/QC/calibration results; and those assigned by the administrators.
2 Select User F6.
3 Choose a user you desire to setup permissions in the user list, and then select
Permission.
11-6
Figure 11.2 Permission assignment
4 Assign permissions for the selected user.

 To assign new permissions, select the box in front of the relevant operation. The
select button changes to Yes.
 To cancel permissions, deselect the box in front of the relevant operation. The
select button changes to No.
11.4.5 Deleting a User

The username that has been used to log on the system currently cannot be deleted. Only
the administrators are allowed to delete users.
2 Select User F6.
3 Choose a username in the user list.
4 Select Delete.
5 Select OK.
11-7
11.5 Sleep and Awake Setup

11.5.1 Introduction
The Sleep/Awake feature includes the Auto Sleep Setup, Auto Startup Setup and Auto
Awake Setup options.
The Auto Sleep Setup option is used to set up the time interval of auto sleep time of the
system. After the sleep time interval is set up, a countdown will begin from the moment
that the system status becomes Standby. When the time interval is elapsed, the system
will begin sleeping. Except for the auto sleep setting, the system can be woken up by
means of the wake up command.
The Auto Startup Setup and Auto Awake Setup options allow you to define date and time
of starting up or waking up the system. When the time is reached, the system will be
started up or woken automatically no matter if it is off or sleeping.
11.5.2 Auto Sleep Setup

3 Select 1 Sleep/Awake.
4 Select 1 Auto Sleep Setup.
Figure 11.3 Auto Sleep Setup window
5 Type in the time interval for auto sleep.
The options include N/A, 30, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180,210,240,270 and 300 and the
default is 60 minutes. N/A means the auto sleep timer is disabled
NOTE
If auto sleep is not enabled, some components, such as lamp, may get aged quickly
and degraded in performance. You are recommended to enable this option.
6 Select Save.
11-8
When the interval is elapsed, the system will starts to sleep and the system status
becomes Sleep.
7 Select Exit.
11.5.3 Auto Startup Setup
NOTE
After setting up the auto startup time, ensure that the operation unit and the analyzer
are connected to power supply; otherwise, they cannot be started up automatically.
4 Select 2 Auto Startup Setup.
Figure 11.4 Auto Startup Setup
5 Choose the weekday for auto startup, and then set up the specific time.
Any time within a week(from Monday to Sunday) can be defined for the system to
start up automatically.
6 Select Save.
When the date and time is reached, the system will be started up automatically if it is
off.
7 Select Close.
11.5.4 Auto Awake Setup
NOTE
After setting up the auto awake time, ensure that the operation unit and the analyzing
unit are connected to power supply; otherwise, they cannot be woken up automatically.
11-9

4 Select 2 Auto Awake Setup.
Figure 11.5 Auto Awake Setup
5 Choose the weekday for auto startup, and then set up the specific time.
Any time within a week (from Monday to Sunday) can be defined for the system to
wake up automatically.
6 Select Save.
When the date and time is reached, the system will be woken up automatically if it is
sleeping.
7 Select Exit.
11-10
11.6 Dictionary Setup

11.6.1 Introduction
The Dictionary option is provided for setting up and managing frequent data information,
such as: result unit, sample type, sample comment, and QC comment. Sample comment
can be entered manually or selected from the Comment pull-down list on the Sample
screen, Levey-Jennings screen, and (QC) Results screen.
Data options can be defined, edited or deleted in any system status. The default data
options cannot be deleted or edited.
11.6.2 Defining, Editing and Deleting Data Option

3 Select 3 Dictionary.
Figure 11.6 Dictionary window
4 Choose desired dictionary in the Data list.

To add a data option:
 Select New.
 Input the data description in the Data field.
 Select Save.
To modify a data option:
 Select desired data option in the data list.
 Modify the data description in the Data field.
11-11
 Select Save.
To delete a data option:
 Select desired data option in the data list.
 Select Delete.
5 Select Close.
11-12
11.7 Software Upgrade

11.7.1 Introduction
Software Upgrade is used to upgrade the operating software and ISE module software.
When software versions is upgraded, the original data, including those in the database and
saved in files, will not be destroyed and can be compatible with the new versions.
11.7.2 Software Upgrade

3 Select 6 Version Upgrade.
4 Insert the U disk containing the software into the USB interface of the computer.
5 Select OK, and then operate according to the screen prompts.
11-13
11.8 Software Version

11.8.1 Introduction
You are allowed to view the version number of the operating software and control
software in any system status.
11.8.2 Software Version

3 Select 7 Version Info.
Figure 11.7 Software Version window
4 View the version number of the operating software, control software, database, and
ISE module software.
If a new version is released, upgrade the operating software while referring to 11.7
Software Upgrade (page 11-13). If no ISE module is configured, the ISE Software
Version area will be blank.
5 To view the version numbers of the smart module software, select Details.
11-14
Figure 11.8 Smart module software version window
6 Move the scroll bar to view more versions.

7 Select OK.
11-15
11.9 Voice Tone Setup

11.9.1 Introduction
The Voice Tone Setup option provides voice tone choices for system failures or user’s
mis-input or mis-operation. You are allowed to import audio files from an external
storage device and set them as voice tone.
11.9.2 Importing Audio Files

3 Select 11 Voice Tone Setup.
4 Select Import.
5 Select the path and one or more favorite audio files.
6 Select Open.
The imported audio files are displayed in the Alarm and Message Tip pull-down lists.
11.9.3 Setting Up Voice Tone

3 Select 11 Voice Tone Setup.
Figure 11.9 Voice Tone Setup window
4 Choose a voice tone from the pull-down list box, and then select the corresponding
Test button to test the voice effect until the proper one is found.
11-16
12 Use of ISE Module
This chapter introduces the ISE module in the following aspects:

 Precautions on use
 Principles of measurement
 Chemistry parameters setup
 Preparing reagents for analysis
 Running ISE chemistries
 Results recall
 ISE primes and calibration factor expiration date
 Daily maintenance
 Troubleshooting
12-1
12.1 Precautions on Use

12.1.1 Introduction
Read the following precautions thoroughly prior to using the ISE module.
12.1.2 Precautions on Use

Operator Precautions
Warning
The ISE module must be operated by skilled/trained doctors, nurses or clinical
professionals.
Driver parts precautions
Warning
Exercise caution while using the ISE module. Prevent your hair, legs or other parts of your
body from being hurt by the driver parts.
Serum sample biohazards
BIOHAZARD
The serum samples remaining in the electrodes may contain a great number of viruses.
Wear gloves to prevent infection while operating around the electrodes.
Calibration precautions
CAUTION
Calibrate the ISE chemistries for serum and urine before starting the measurement. If
the result of a chemistry is based on the calibration factors of another chemistry, it may
not be accurate enough.
After changing electrodes or other consumables, perform a calibration. You are
recommended to perform calibration at least once every day to ensure accurate results.
Calibrator biohazards
BIOHAZARD
The calibrators contain preservatives. In case your skin contacts calibrators, wash them
off with soap and water. In case the calibrators spill into your eyes, rinse them with
water and consult an oculist. If you swallow them by mistake, see a doctor.
12-2
CAUTION
Use the calibrators specified by our company. Use of other reagents or calibrators may
result in unreliable results, or damage the Hydropneumatic system, or even shorten the
electrodes life span.
Prior to using the calibrators, check if they are within the expiration date.
Place them correctly; otherwise, it may cause unreliable results, or leak, or module
damage.
ISE wash solution biohazards
BIOHAZARD
The ISE wash solution is sodium hypochlorite. Use the ISE wash solution carefully to
prevent it from contacting your skins or eyes. If your skins or eyes contact the ISE wash
solution, rinse them off with fresh water and consult a doctor.
12-3
12.2 Principles of Measurement

The ISE unit measures the concentration of Na+, K+ and Cl- ions contained in serum and
urine samples with the ion-selective electrode method. The relation between the
electromotive force of ion-selective electrodes and the ion concentration is expressed in a
Nernst formula. Serum is tested without dilution while urine should be diluted manually
before test with buffer solution at the ratio of 1:9.
A single measurement of the ISE unit is conducted in the following order:
 Drainage: The calibrator in the ISE pipe is drained
 Sample analysis: The sample probe dispenses the sample (70μL for serum
sample,140μL for diluted urine) into the sample injection port of the ISE module and
then the sample is absorbed into the flow cell for measurement. When the
measurement is finished, the waste is drained from it.
 Cleaning pipework: 100μL calibrator A is dispensed into the ISE module for cleaning
the ISE flow cell
 Single point calibration: 80μL calibrator is dispensed into the ISE module to perform
single point calibration.
The table below lists the measurement range of the ISE module:
Table 12.1 Measurement range of ISE module
Chemistry Serum Urine
Na+ 100～200mmol/L 10～500mmol/L
K+ 1～8mmol/L 5～200mmol/L
Cl- 50～150mmol/L 15～400mmol/L
12-4
12.3 ISE Chemistry Parameters

12.3.1 Introduction
The ISE module measures the concentration of K+, Na+ and Cl- ions contained in human
body fluid by means of electrodes, helping diagnosis of electrolyte disturbance, body fluid
equilibrium, and other relevant diseases.
The ISE chemistries are applicable to serum and urine, and the default sample type is
serum. If the sample is of a type other than serum and urine, it will be analyzed with the
chemistry parameters for serum.
ISE chemistry parameters can be viewed but cannot be modified and reconfigured. ISE
test results can be expressed by qualifative flags.
Figure 12.1 Define/Edit ISE Chemistries window
12.3.2 Viewing ISE Chemistry Parameters

The ISE chemistry parameters are opened to all users for viewing in any system status.
2 Choose the ISE box.
3 Select Define F1.
4 View the parameters.
12.3.3 Introduction to ISE Chemistry Parameters

ISE chemistry parameters and measurement range are displayed on the Define/Edit ISE
chemistries screen. ISE chemistry has two test mode: serum and urine. For urine, it has to
be diluted manually before test.
In the following table, U stands for urine and S for serum.
12-5
Table 12.2 ISE chemistry parameters(cannot be edited)

Parameter/Chemistry K+ Na+ Cl-
Unit (S) mmol/L mmol/L mmol/L
Unit (U) mmol/L mmol/L mmol/L
Decimal (S) 0.01 0.1 0.1
Decimal (U) 0 0 0
Measurement Range (S) 1.00–8.00 100.0–200.0 50.0–150.0
Measurement Range 5–200 10–500 15–400
(U)
Unit
The unit of K, Na and Cl is mmol/L which can be viewed but cannot be edited.
Decimal
The decimal of the result can be viewed but cannot be edited.
Measurement Range
The measurement range can be viewed but cannot be edited.
12.3.4 Flag ISE Qualitative Result

2 Choose the ISE box.
3 Select Define F1.
4 Click the Down button.
Figure 12.2 Define/Edit ISE Chemistries window
5 Select Use Qualitative Result under Na.

6 Enter Range and Flag.
12-6
7 Repeat 5-6 to flag the qualitative result for Na and Cl.

8 Click OK to save the setup.
12-7
12.4 Preparing ISE Reagents for Measurement

12.4.1 Introduction
Reagent pack and wash solution are used in ISE measurement. The former is placed in
the front cabinet of the analyzer, to the right of the sample syringe; the latter is placed on
the sample carousel. When you cancel the configuration of the ISE module, the loaded
reagents are deleted.
Please follow the steps below to load the ISE reagent and wash solution.
12.4.2 Off-line Load ISE Reagent

Off-line load ISE reagent is performed when ISE is not running its tests.
1 Make sure the ISE module is not running its tests.
2 Select Reagent - Reagent/Calibration - ISE Reagent.
3 Select Load F1.
If it is the first time to load the ISE reagent, please enter Step 7; if not, unload the
reagent first.
Figure 12.3 Unload Reagent
4 Select Unload to unload the reagent pack.

5 Disconnect the wand from the top of the Reagent Pack by pushing down the yellow
button in the wand, which disconnects the wand from and Reagent Pack. Set the
wand on the table surface, which should not leak. Carefully remove the used Reagent
Pack from the Chemistry Analyzer and dispose of it properly.
6 Click OK to load the reagent pack.
12-8
7 Remove the red caps from Reagent Pack first and push the wand just above the top
of Reagent Pack. Make sure that the three pipe adapters at the bottom of the wand
are opposite to those on the top of Reagent Package, then push down the wand to
Reagent Package. The wand will only fit one way. Once the wand is connected to the
reagent pack, place the reagent pack on the sliding tray
Figure 12.4 Installing Reagent Pack 1
Figure 12.5 Installing Reagent Pack 2
NOTE
When installing ISE reagent pack, do not twist, press and squeeze the pipes of the
ISE Module otherwise the ISE pipes may be clogged.
Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles.
12-9
Figure 12.6 Load Reagent
8 Enter the number in Purge A/B field which can be any integer within 1-50 and the
default is 30.
9 Click Prime.
10 Select OK to calibrate ISE chemistry when Purge A/B is complete.
12.4.3 On-line Load ISE Reagent

On-line loading ISE reagent is performed when ISE module is running its tests.
1 Select Reagent - Reagent/Calibration - ISE Reagent.
2 Select Load F1 to stop reagent aspirating and dispensing. Meanwhile Load F1
becomes No load F1.
3 If you want to cancel the reagent stop, select No Load F1.
4 Click OK and then select Load F1. Here, the load steps are the same as off-system
load ISE reagent.
12.4.4 Load ISE Wash Solution

ISE wash solution is used to wash the electrodes and can only be loaded manually.
 Standby, Incubation or Sleep: Proceed to the next step.
2 Remove the sample carousel cover;
3 Place ISE wash solution in position D1 (No.88) of the sample carousel.
4 Restore the sample carousel cover;
5 Select the icon to resume the test or start new test.
12-10
12.4.5 Replacing ISE Wash Solution

Replacing the wash solution can be performed when the ISE module status is Standby or
Running. If the system status is Standby, you are allowed to directly replace the wash
solution in the same way as it is loaded; if the system status is Running, the wash solution
can only be replaced after the current tests are finished; if the ISE module is running a
calibration, you are not allowed to replace the wash solution until all tests of the
calibration are finished.
 Standby, Incubation or Sleep : proceed to the next step.
3 Remove the ISE wash solution from position D1 (No.88) of the sample carousel.
4 Place the new wash solution.
6 Select the icon to resume the test or start new test.
12-11
12.5 Calibration and Results Recall

12.5.1 Introduction
Current calibration factors and all intermediate data are provided on the ISE Calibration
screen. Calibration results can be printed out or archived to an external storage device.
The Trend option is provided to enable you to view the calibration trends of ISE
chemistries during a period of time. When the calibration factors are expired, the Extend
Calibration Time can help prolonging their validity period for measurement.
12.5.2 Calibration Setup

Set up ISE calibrators and the calibration time. When a calibrator is expired, it will be
indicated in yellow and cannot be used for calibration.
Setting up ISE calibration time

2 Select Rules F4.
Figure 12.7 ISE calibration setup window
4 Enter the calibration time in the Cal Time field.
The input range is 1-9999, and the default is 8 hours. If the field is left blank, it
indicates that the calibration factors can be always used.
5 Select Auto Calibration if you want to set up ISE auto calibration.

6 Enter the auto calibration time.
The range is 1-24 hour; the default is blank.
7 Select Save F7 to save the setup.

12-12
12.5.3 Calibration Status and Alarm

On the Reagent/Calibration screen, the chemistries are indicated with various texts and
colors for different calibration status. Chemistries in Cal Required, Cal Failed or Cal Time
Out status can be requested but will not be run.
Check the chemistries’ calibration status frequently and take relevant actions according to
the following table.
Table 12.3 ISE calibration status
Calibration Description Severity Color
Status
Cal Required Indicates that the chemistry needs Serious Red
to be calibrated.
This status appears when the
chemistry is not calibrated or the
ISE reagent/electrode is replaced.
Requested Indicates that the chemistry has Normal No color
been requested for calibration but indication
not finished yet.
Calibrated Indicates that the chemistry has Normal No color
been calibrated successfully and indication
has not exceeded the calibration
time.
Cal Failed Indicates that the chemistry has Serious Red
calibration factors calculated but
they exceed the acceptance limits,
or has no calibration factors
calculated.
Cal Time Out Appears when the chemistry Serious Red
exceeds the calibration period or
the reagent of different serial
number and lot number is used.
Appears when the chemistry
exceeds the calibration time.
Cal Time Indicates that the calibration Warning Yellow
Extended period has been extended and the
current calibration factors can be
used without time limit.
N/A Indicates that the reagent is not Normal No color
loaded. indication
12.5.4 ISE Calibration

ISE chemistries, which include Na, K and Cl, are calibrated without being divided into ISE
serum and ISE urine
12-13
2 Choose ISE Chemistry.

3 Select Calibrate F5.
4 Select OK to start calibration.
12.5.5 Results Recall

The calibration data and trends of ISE chemistries are provided on the ISE Calibration
screen. The system allows you to recall the current ISE calibration factors and results of
recent 540 calibrations. If a calibration result is abnormal, a flag will be added on patient
reports and on the ISE Calibration screen.
For more information about result flags, refer to 17.4.2 Result Flags (page 17-13).
Recalling calibration results

1 Select Reagent - ISE Calibration.
12-14
Figure 12.9 ISE Calibration screen
The screen shows the calibration factors that are being used for calculating results.
2 Select the History option button, and then select date range that the chemistry is
calibrated.
3 Select Search F1.
The calibration results of the chemistry are displayed in the result list.
4 To print the calibration report, select Print F7.
Recalling calibration trends

1 Search for desired calibration results on the ISE Calibration screen.
2 Select Trend F6. The Calibration Trends window is displayed.
3 Choose desired trend type and calibration date range, and then select Search F1.
The trend of the chemistry within the specified time period is displayed on the
screen. The trend type options will not include Reference Electrode when trends of
ISE Urine are being recalled.
12-15
Figure 12.10 Calibration Trends window
4 Choose the Tabular Trend tab to view the trend data.

Figure 12.11 Tabular Trend window
5 To print the current graphic trend or data, select Print F7.

Archiving ISE calibration results

Both the current and early calibration factors of ISE chemistries can be archived. The
archiving file is of .csv format and named by the date and time the results are archived.
1 Select Reagent - ISE Calibration.
2 Search for desired calibration results.
12-16

4 Confirm the archiving path and file name.
5 Select OK.
12.5.6 Extending ISE Calibration Time

When ISE calibration factors exceed the validity period, they cannot be used for
measurement, and the calibration status changes to Cal Time Out. If you are certain that
the calibration factors are correct and valid, you may prolong their validity period by
using the calibration time extension function. A calibration time can be extended only if
the current calibration of the chemistry is timed out or succeeded. The results calculated
based on extended calibration factors will be flagged.
2 Choose the ISE chemistry.
4 Select Extend Calibration Time from the Calibration Options window.
5 Select OK. The calibration factors of the ISE chemistry can be used without time
limit.
6 To remove the extended status, recalibrate the ISE chemistry.
12-17
12.6 Quality Control and Results Recall

12.6.1 Quality Control and Results Recall
Control samples can be defined, run and recalled for the ISE chemistries in the same way
as for biochemistries. The ISE chemistries include Na, K and Cl.
Observing QC reaction curve and data is not applicable to ISE chemistry.
For the operating procedure of quality control, refer to 2.7 Quality Control (page 2-26).
For details of QC evaluation and results recall, refer to 7 Quality Control (page 7-1).
12-18
12.7 Sample Programming and Results Recall

The ISE chemistries, like biochemistries, can be also used for analyzing routine samples,
emergent samples, added samples and reruns, and requested along with the
biochemistries. They are requested in the form of Na, K and Cl, and applicable to serum,
plasma, urine, CSF and other sample types. The four sample types other than urine are
programmed with the serum parameters, while urine sample is with the urine
parameters.
Nevertheless, the ISE chemistries are slightly different from biochemistries for that they
do not support the measurement with increased or decreased or prediluted samples, and
have no reaction curve and data.
For the operating procedure of sample analysis, refer to 2.8 Programming Routine
Samples (page 2-29).
ISE test results have no reaction curves and can be recalled in the same way as other
chemistries. Refer to 8 Sample Programming and Processing (page 8-1) for details.
12-19
12.8 Reagent Inventory Alarm Limit

12.8.1 Introduction
When the reagent inventory is lower than the alarm limit during or before the analysis,
the system will give an alarm and display the volume of ISE reagent and wash solution as
<x on the Reagent/Calibration screen and the ISE reagent is marked by yellow ;(“x”
stands for the defined alarm limit) When the ISE reagent inventory is 0, it is marked by
red.
12.8.2 Setting up Reagent Inventory Alarm Limit

Figure 12.12 System Setup screen
2 Type in the inventory alarm limit of ISE reagent.

3 Select Save F8.
12-20
12.9 ISE Prime Cycle

12.9.1 Introduction
While the analyzer is started up and new reagent pack is identified, the ISE module will
prime automatically to replace the reagents inside of it with fresh reagents. The number
of primes can be defined on the System Setup screen.
Only administrators are allowed to define or modify the startup prime times.
12.9.2 Defining/Modifying ISE Prime Times

2 Type in the number of primes in the ISE Prime Cycle field.
3 Select Save F8.
12-21

12.10.1 Daily Maintenance
To ensure the ISE module’s life span and measurement performance, maintain it regularly
as instructed in this manual. The system provides scheduled maintenance and
maintenance instructions, in which the latter contains all of the scheduled maintenance
procedures and some maintenance instructions that can be performed independently.
The table below is a summary of the scheduled maintenance procedures and maintenance
instructions for the ISE module.
Table 12.4 Scheduled maintenance and instructions for ISE module
Schedule Maintenance Procedures
Daily Clean ISE electrode tubes
Monthly Clean sample injection port
Pump calibration
Air bubble Detector calibration
Six month Replace reference electrode
Other Replace ISE electrode
Store electrodes
Remove reagent pack
Two-point calibration
Clean waste tube of ISE module
Maintenance Clean electrode tubes
Instructions Maintenance
A purge
B purge
Pump calibration
Air bubble Detector calibration
Replace electrode
Remove reagent pack
Program check instruction
Air bubble Detector calibration result
Pump calibration result
Reading and writing Dallas
For more information about ISE module maintenance, refer to 16 Maintenance (page
16-1).
12-22
12.11 Troubleshooting ISE Module

12.11.1 Troubleshooting ISE Module
The failures occurring on the ISE module may be related to the sample probe unit, sample
carousel unit, Hydropneumatic unit, ISE module, reagent inventory, reference electrode
and communication.
For troubleshooting of the ISE module, refer to 17 Alarms and Troubleshooting (page
17-1).
12-23
12-24
13 Use of Bar Code
The setup and operation instructions of the sample bar code reader and the reagent bar
code reader are depicted in this chapter. The sample bar code reader is used to identify
samples and obtain sample information by scanning the bar code label applied on sample
tubes. The reagent bar code reader scans the bar code labels automatically when the
reagents are loaded.
13-1
13 Use of Bar Code
13.1 Sample Bar Code Reader

13.1.1 Introduction
The sample bar code reader obtains sample information from the bar code label. When
bar-coded samples are loaded to the sample carousel, the system will make a full scan and
locate samples through the bar code.
Sample bar code specifications

The sample bar code reader is in compliance with the Clinical and Laboratory Standards
Institute (CLSI) and compatible with various application environments.
Table 13.1 Sample bar code specifications
Name Description
Symbology Codabar, ITF, Code128, Code39, UPC/EAN, and Code93
Minimum bar code 0.19mm~0.5mm
density
Length 3-27 digits
Format and content User-defined
Maximum width 55mm
Minimum height 10mm
Maximum inclination ±5º
angle
Print quality No less than Class C according to the ANSI MH10.8M Print
Quality Specification.
Width and narrowness 2.5-3.0:1
Print paper Coated paper or matte paper. Printing bar code on
common paper may result in vague bar code or degraded
bar code label. You are not suggested to print bar code on
common print paper.
Characters Meaningful characters, such as numbers (0~9) and
upper-case letters (A~Z). You are recommended to print
the check digit in order to check that a bar code is read
accurately.
Information contained in a sample bar code

The system will obtain the following information from the LIS host based on sample bar
code:
 Sample category
 Test date/time
 Sample ID
 Sample type
 Panel No.
13-2
13 Use of Bar Code
13.1.2 Sample Bar Code Setup

Before performing the setup procedure, check if your system is equipped with a sample
bar code reader. If needed, contact our customer service department or your local
distributor.
Perform the following steps to set up sample bar code:
2 Select Bar Code F4.
3 Choose Sample Bar Code.
4 Choose a bar code symbology and set up the check digit status.
The following symbologies are provided:
 Codabar
 Interleaved 2 of 5
 Code128
 Code39
 UPC/EAN
 Code93
Code 128, Code 93 and UPC/EAN requires a check digit by default, and other
symbologies are not compulsive. The Code 128 is selected by default and cannot be
modified.
CAUTION
You are recommended to enable the check function for all symbologies in order to
prevent misreading of bar code.
5 Set up sample bar code applications according to actual demands.

The following three options are available:
 Enable/Disable sample carousel bar code
When this option is selected, the system scans the entire sample carousel to locate
samples at the beginning of test.
 Enable or disable auto numbering of bar-coded samples
 When this option is enabled, the system will automatically number the
bar-coded samples during bar code scanning. The start number will be the
next available one since the last sample is programmed. The default start
number for every day is 1. Sample barcode
 Extract sample information:
 When this option is selected, the system will automatically extract the
sample information according to the barcode.
 Only when LIS communication mode is unidirectional, can the option be
enabled.
 Define STAT sample positions on sample carousel
13-3
13 Use of Bar Code
Input the start and end positions within the range of 1~115. The set positions will
be indicated by E (Emergent) on the sample carousel status screen. Samples placed
in the specified STAT positions will be taken automatically as emergent samples.
The Sample Crsl Bar Code and Auto Number Scanned Samples options are
selected by default.

7 Select Format
8 Define the bar code digits.
The system can scan a sample bar code of fixed length or within 3-27 digits. The
Interleaved 2 of 5 only supports bar code of even number length and the digits of the
barcode must be defined.
 To use a fixed-length bar code,
 Mark the Fixed Digits checkbox of relevant symbology.
 Type in the number of digits in the edit box to the right of the Fixed Digits
field.
 To use a sample bar code within 3-27 digits, you have no need to define the fixed
digits.
13.1.3 Programming Bar-Coded Samples

Program bar-coded samples by choosing an operating procedure according to the
facilities in your laboratory.
BIOHAZARD
a doctor.
CAUTION
NOTE
When manually entering sample program information in bar code mode, ensure that the
input program information is consistent with the samples loaded to the sample carousel.
After the manually programmed samples are analyzed, they must be released manually
to leave space for other samples.
When a LIS is provided

Method 1:
1 Place the bar-coded samples in idle positions of the sample carousel.

3 Select a sample carousel to which the samples are loaded, and mark the Sample Crsl
Bar Code checkbox.
13-4
13 Use of Bar Code
5 Select OK.
The system starts scanning the samples on the sample carousel and then analyzes
them according to the program information downloaded from the LIS host.
Method 2:
1 Place bar-coded samples on the sample carousel.
3 Select Scan F5. The Scan window is displayed.
Figure 13.1 Scan window
Prior to selecting the Scan F5 button, ensure the following conditions have been
satisfied:
 A sample bar code reader has been configured.
 Sample bar code scanning is activated on the Sample Bar Code window.
 The system status is Standby or Sample Stop.
4 Choose the scanning range.
 All positions: to scan all positions on the sample carousel.
 Specified positions: to scan the specified positions on the sample carousel. Input
the start and end scanning positions.
5 Select OK.
If a default panel has been defined, the scanned samples will be programmed with
the default panel; otherwise, chemistries should be requested for the samples.

7 Enter the sample programming information.

11 Select OK.
13-5
13 Use of Bar Code
When no LIS is provided

If your system is not equipped with a LIS host, you are allowed to program bar-coded
samples with the default panel or to program them manually one by one or by batch. For
more information, refer to 10.8 Default Panel (page 10-20).
Method 1:
1 Program samples according to "2.8.1 Programming Routine Samples" and "2.8.2
Loading Routine Samples".
2 Place the bar-coded samples sequentially on the sample carousel.

4 Select a sample carousel to which the samples are loaded, and mark the Sample Crsl
Bar Code checkbox.
6 Select OK.
The system scans the samples on the sample carousel to match the program
information, and then starts analysis.
Method 2:
1 Place bar-coded samples sequentially on the sample carousel.
If the auto numbering feature is enabled, the system will automatically number the
samples according to the order in which they have been placed. The start number
will be the next available one since the last sample is programmed.

3 Select Scan F5. The Scan window is displayed.
4 Choose the scanning range.
 All positions: to scan all positions on the sample carousel.
 Specified positions: to scan the specified positions on the sample carousel. Input
the start and end scanning positions.
5 Select OK.
If a default panel has been defined, the scanned samples will be programmed with
the default panel; otherwise, chemistries should be requested for the samples.
6 To change the program information, select Program - Sample.

7 Enter the sample programming information.

11 Select OK.
13-6
13 Use of Bar Code
13.2 Reagent Bar Code Reader

13.2.1 Introduction
The reagent bar code reader obtains reagent information from the bar code label. When
bar-coded reagents are loaded to the reagent carousel, the system will make a full scan
and obtain reagent information from the bar code labels.
Reagent bar code specifications

The reagent bar code reader is compatible with various application environments. The
code128 is selected by default with total bar code length of 13 digits. Users are allowed to
set up the symbology and bar code compositions for open reagents. Open reagents are
identified based on the symbology and bar code compositions defined by the user; while
closed reagents are identified based on those defined by the manufacturer.
Table 13.2 Reagent bar code specifications
Name Description
Symbology Codabar, ITF, Code128, Code39, UPC/EAN, and
Code93
Minimum bar code density 0.25mm-0.5mm
Length 13-30 digits
Format and content User-defined
Maximum width 44mm
Minimum height 12mm
Maximum inclination angle Less than 5°
Print quality No less than Class C according to the ANSI MH10.8M
Print Quality Specification.
Width and narrowness 2.5:1
Print paper Coated paper or matte paper. Printing bar code on
common paper may result in vague bar code or
degraded bar code label. You are not suggested to
print bar code on common print paper.
Characters Meaningful characters, such as numbers (0~9) and
upper-case letters (A~Z). You are recommended to
print the check digit in order to check that a bar code
is read accurately.
Information contained in a reagent bar code

The system will obtain the following information from a reagent bar code:
 Chemistry number
 Chemistry name
 Reagent type
 Bottle type
 Lot number
 Serial number
 Expiration date (YYMM)
13-7
13 Use of Bar Code
The reagent information obtained from a bar code label cannot be modified.
13.2.2 Reagent Bar Code Setup

It is necessary to set up the reagent bar code symbologies, check digit and bar code
information before scanning open reagents. Only open-reagent bar code needs to be set
up.
2 Select Bar Code F4.
3 Choose Reagent Bar Code.
4 Select or deselect Analyze barcode of open reagent.
 If Reagent barcode system is configured, the option Analyze barcode of open
reagent is not selected by default
 When Analyze barcode of open reagent is selected, once the barcode of the
open reagent is identified, its information is analyzed according to its setup.
 While loading the reagent manually, you can enter the barcode of the open
reagent on the condition that Analyze barcode of open reagent is not
selected.
5 Choose a bar code symbology and set up the check digit status.
The following symbologies are provided:

 Codabar
 Interleaved 2 of 5
 Code128
 Code39
 UPC/EAN
 Code93
Code 128, Code 93 and UPC/EAN requires a check digit by default, and other
symbologies are not compulsive. The Code 128 is selected by default and cannot be
modified.
CAUTION
You are recommended to enable the check function for all symbologies in order to
prevent misreading of bar code.
6 Define the total length of reagent bar code.
 Type in the total length of the reagent bar code in the T field. The input range is
13-30 digits. The Interleaved 2 of 5 only supports bar code of even number
length.
 Type in the start digit of the reagent bar code in the S field.
 Type in the end digit of the reagent bar code in the E field.
7 Determine reagent bar code compositions.
 Type in the number of digits for reagent information in the Digits field.
 Type in the start digit of the reagent information in the S field.
 Type in the end digit of the reagent information in the E field.
13-8
13 Use of Bar Code
Table 13.3 Reagent bar code compositions

Reagent Information Number of Digits
Chemistry number 0-4 digits
Chemistry name 1-10 digits
Reagent type 1 digit (“1” stands for R1, “2” for R2, “3” for R3,
and “4” for R4)
Serial number 0-5 digits
Bottle type 1-3 digits(one digit is recommended; “1” stands
for Mindray 20ml outer ring reagent bottle; “2”
for 40ml outer ring bottle; “3” for 40ml inner
ring bottle; “4” for 62ml inner ring bottle.)
Lot number 0-18 digits
Expiration date 0, 4, 6 or 8 digits (4digits:yymm;
6digits:yyyymm; 8digits:yyyymmdd)
8 Select OK.
13.2.3 Loading Bar-Coded Reagents

Both open reagents and closed reagents can be loaded through bar code scanning.
You may put the bar-coded reagents on the reagent carousel, and the system will scan all
reagent positions automatically and obtain reagent information from the bar code label.
The information obtained from a reagent bar code can be only viewed and cannot be
edited.
The bar code scanning is only applied to biochemical reagents. The sample probe wash
solution, reagent probe wash solution, physiological saline ISE wash solution can only be
loaded manually rather than bar code scanning.
Warning
caution when working around the probe.
BIOHAZARD
may be caused.
Perform the following steps to load bar-coded reagents:

 Standby, Incubation or Sleep: proceed to the next step.
 Running: Select Reagent - Reagent/Calibration. Select Load F1 to stop reagent
aspirating and dispensing. Meanwhile Load F1 becomes No load F1.If you want
to abort load, select No load F1. When the countdown for reagent stop becomes
0 and the system status is Reagent Load, a message box pops up. Select OK, and
then proceed to the next step.
13-9
13 Use of Bar Code
CAUTION
If the system is running tests, after requesting reagent stop do not remove the
reagent carousel cover until the countdown for reagent stop is 0; otherwise, the
tests currently run will be invalidated.
4 Place the bar-coded reagents in idle positions and then uncap the reagent bottles.
The system scans all reagent positions automatically and read reagent information
from the bar code.
13-10
13 Use of Bar Code
13.3 Bar Code Reader Maintenance

13.3.1 Introduction
The sample and reagent bar code readers are located inside the analyzing unit and need
not to be maintained. You are only required to regularly check the bar code scanning
window, and clean them if dust or other stains, such as sample and reagent, accumulate.
13.3.2 Cleaning Sample and Reagent Bar Code Scanning Windows

For details about cleaning the sample and reagent bar code scanning windows, refer to
16.10.14 Bar Code Maintenance (Page 16-62).
13-11
13 Use of Bar Code
13.4 Troubleshooting Bar Code Reader

For troubleshooting methods of the bar code reader, refer to 17 Alarms and
Troubleshooting (page 17-1).
13-12
14 LIS and RMS
This chapter contains communication parameter setup of LIS and RMS, as well as sample
analysis and result transmission when an LIS is connected.
14-1
14 LIS and RMS
14.1 Overview
The chapter provides detailed description of the LIS and RMS.
Laboratory Information System (LIS) is an external host computer connected with the
chemistry analyzer through a fixed interface. The LIS is used to download sample
program information to the analyzer and receives results sent from the analyzer.
Check that your analyzer is equipped with a LIS. If needed, contact our customer service
You should set up the communication parameters and results transmission methods prior
to using the LIS host.
Remote Management System (RMS) provides a platform of remote diagnosis and
maintenance based on the internet. The RMS allows transfer of data and files with the
chemistry analyzers in hospitals, and helps the service engineers to find, collect, analyze,
locate and solve the failures happening at the user end.
14-2
14 LIS and RMS
14.2 Host Communication

14.2.1 Introduction
The host communication parameters, such as transmission mode, IP address and port,
should be set up prior to use of the LIS host. To download sample program information
from or sent results to the host, you need to set up the chemistry code used for
identification of chemistries on both the LIS host and the analyzer, which, otherwise,
cannot identify the chemistries simultaneously.
14.2.2 Connection between PC and LIS Host

Follow the procedure below to set up the connection between the operation unit PC with
the LIS host.
3 Select 4 Com Setup. The System Communication window is displayed.
Figure 14.1 System communication setup
4 Select PC and LIS (selected by default).

5 Choose a network connection in the Network Adaptor area.
6 Set up the connection between operation unit and LIS.
 Auto Obtain IP Address(selected by default)
 Or set using Following IP Address: type in the IP Address, Subnet Mask and
Default Gateway for connecting the operation unit PC with the LIS host.
7 Select Apply.
A dialog box pops up: Check the network cable connection prior to applying new
settings. Please check the connection of the network cable and then click OK to save
the settings.
14.2.3 Host Communication Parameters

14-3
14 LIS and RMS
2 Select Host F5. The Host Communication Parameters window shows.

Figure 14.2 Host communication Parameters window
3 Set up the following parameters:

Table 14.1 Host communication parameters
Transport Choose a transport mode from the Transport Mode
pull-down list. The options include Serial and TCP/IP.
The default is Serial.
IP address Enter the IP address of the LIS host. The connection
between the analyzer and the LIS host is based on the
network, i.e. TCP/IP protocol.
Port Enter the interface number of the LIS host.
Serial If you choose Serial as the transport mode, set up the
communication following parameters:
parameters  Serial port: The default is COM1.
 Data bits: 7 or 8. The default is 8.
 Stop bits: 1 or 2. The default is 1.
 Parity: None, Odd, or Even. The default is None.
 Baud rate: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200. The
default is 9600.
Protocol Choose a protocol for connection between the analyzer
and the LIS host from the Protocol pull-down list. The
options include HL7 and ASTM 1394.
14-4
14 LIS and RMS
Mode Choose a data transmission mode for the analyzer and LIS
host. The available options are Unidirectional and
Bidirectional.
 Unidirectional: You are only allowed to send results
and patient demographics to the host rather than
downloading sample programs from it.
 Bidirectional: You are allowed to send results and
patient demographics to the host and downloading
sample programs from it.
Timeout Enter the time out limit for querying the LIS host. The
input range is 30s-60s, and the default is 30s.
If the time out limit is exceeded when you attempt to
download sample programs from, or send results to, or
connect the analyzer with the LIS host, the system will
give an alarm indicating communication timed out.
Auto Connect to LIS When the checkbox is selected, the system will connect
to the LIS host automatically when started up.
Retry after When the checkbox is selected, the system will try to
Disconnection reconnect the LIS host for every set interval once the
connection is interrupted.
Interval Input the time interval for which the system will try to
reconnect the LIS host for every set interval once the
connection is interrupted. The default is 30 seconds.
Send Complete When the checkbox is selected, the system will
Samples automatically send results to the LIS host after a sample
changes from In Progress to Complete. This function is
only applicable to samples analyzed on the current day
rather than those analyzed before.
Send Incomplete When the checkbox is selected, the system will
Samples automatically send results to the LIS host after a sample
changes from In Progress to Incomplete. This function is
only applicable to samples analyzed on the current day
rather than those analyzed before.
14-5
14 LIS and RMS
Advanced options Select Advanced. The Advanced window appears,
providing the following options:
 Send Programmed Samples: When the checkbox is
selected, the system will automatically send the
program information to the LIS host once a single or
batch routine and STAT samples are programmed.
 Rerun Finished Chemistries When Downloaded:
When the checkbox is selected, chemistries that have
been finished will be rerun if downloaded again. If
this option is not selected, they will be neglected.
 Send Actual Results and Rerun Results: When the
checkbox is selected, all actual results and rerun
results of each chemistry will be sent to the LIS. If this
option is not selected, only the default result will be
sent.
 Bypass Results Beyond Linearity Range: When the
checkbox is selected, those results that are beyond
the linearity range will not be sent to the LIS. If this
option is not selected, they will be sent.
 Ignore Alarms for Unknown Chemistries: When the
checkbox is selected, the system will not give an
alarm if the samples downloaded from the LIS host
contain unknown chemistries without identification
code. If this option is not selected, an alarm will be
given indicating sample programming failure.

5 Select Connect to connect the analyzer with the LIS host.
14.2.4 Defining Channel Number of Chemistries

Chemistries are identified by channel number on the analyzer and LIS host. Make sure
that the channel numbers assigned to chemistries on the analyzer are consistent with
those on the LIS host; otherwise, correct information transfer cannot be done.
3 View the chemistry channel number list on the right of the window.
The screen shows the chemistries and code in two columns. The left column provides
all chemistries that have been defined and set up correctly; the right column shows
the code for identifying a chemistry on the LIS host.
4 Click on the Channel No. column of a chemistry, and then type in a code for it.
5 Repeat step 4 to define a code for other chemistries.
6 Select Save.
14-6
14 LIS and RMS
14.3 Programming Samples with LIS Host

14.3.1 Introduction
Sample programming information can be sent by or downloaded from the LIS host, and
then the measured results are sent to it manually or in real-time mode.
Both bar-coded and non-bar-coded samples can be programmed with the LIS host. When
a sample bar code module is configured, the system will automatically identify samples
and match them with the programming information downloaded from the host. If there is
no sample bar code module, you should manually assign positions for the downloaded
samples.
14.3.2 Programming Functions

Samples can be downloaded manually or automatically from the LIS host. If the system
status is Standby, you are allowed to download samples manually from LIS.
Sample programs downloaded from the LIS host can be edited. When programs are
downloaded for samples that are in Programmed status, the requested chemistries in the
programs will be used to overwrite the original chemistries; if the samples are in a status
other than Programmed, the requested chemistries will be added to the original ones.
Sending sample programs from LIS

Sending bar-coded samples:
1 When samples are sent from the LIS host to the analyzer, select Program - Sample.
2 Select List F5 to view the received samples.
3 On the Sample screen, type in the sample bar code, and then confirm the program
information.
4 Select Save F8.
5 Load the samples to idle positions of the sample carousel.

Sending non-bar-coded samples:
1 After program samples on the LIS host, send them to the analyzer, and then select
Program - Sample on the analyzer.
2 Select List F5 to view the received samples.
4 Select Assign.
5 Select the date the desired samples are programmed.
6 Type in the single sample ID or ID range in the ID field.
The options include all available positions of the selected sample carousel.
box.
14-7
14 LIS and RMS
ID.
9 Select OK.
10 Enter the sample ID on the Sample screen and edit the following information:
 Position
 STAT status
 Sample type
 Comment
 Sample options and chemistry options
11 Select Save F8.
12 Load the samples to the assigned positions on the sample carousel.
13 Select the icon on the upper-right corner of the main screen, set the test
conditions, and then select OK to start analysis .
Obtaining samples automatically

When the system status is Standby or Sample Stop, load the samples to the sample
carousel, and then select . The system will automatically scan the samples and then
query the LIS host to download relevant program information. After matching the
downloaded program information with the samples, the system will start the analysis.
The obtained sample program information includes:
 Patient demographics: patient name, gender, date of birth, etc.
 Requested chemistries: sample bar code, sample ID, sample type and chemistry code.
Downloading samples manually

Downloading bar-coded samples:
2 Select Download F7.
3 Choose one of the following options:
 All programmed samples: to download all samples programmed on the current
day.
 Latest samples: to download samples that are programmed on the current day
but have not been downloaded.
 Samples with the following IDs: to download samples with the specified program
date and ID. Enter the sample IDs or ID range to download.
 Sample with the following bar code: to download the sample with the specified
bar code. Enter the bar code of the desired sample.
4 Select OK.
5 Confirm the sample information and selected chemistries/panels on the Sample List
screen.
6 Load the samples to idle positions of the sample carousel.
14-8
14 LIS and RMS

Downloading non-bar-coded samples:

2 Select Download F7.
3 Choose one of the following options:
 All programmed samples: to download all samples programmed on the current
day.
 Latest samples: to download samples that are programmed on the current day
but have not been downloaded.
 Sample with the following IDs: to download samples with the specified program
date and ID. Enter the sample IDs or ID range to download.
4 Select OK.
5 Select List F5 to view downloaded samples.
7 Select Assign.
8 Select the date the desired samples are programmed.
9 Type in the single sample ID or ID range in the ID field.
The options include all available positions of the selected sample carousel.
box.
ID.
12 Select OK.
13 Load the samples to the assigned positions on the sample carousel.
14-9
14 LIS and RMS
14.4 Result Transmission

14.4.1 Introduction
Sample results and QC results can be sent manually or in real-time mode to the LIS host
for reviewing and storage. When a sample is analyzed with its all tests finished, the
system can automatically send the test results to the LIS host; also you are allowed to
search for desired results and then manually send them to LIS.
Patient demographics, sample results and QC results can be sent to the LIS host.
14.4.2 Result Transmission Setup

When all tests of a sample are finished and at least one of them has calculated a result, the
result can be sent to the LIS host automatically. For rerun results, only the default result
(that is currently displayed on the Current Results screen) is sent to the LIS host. The
results of all replicates of a sample or chemistry will sent to the LIS host.
3 Mark the Send Complete Samples or Send Incomplete Samples checkbox with a
tick.
A sample will be sent to the LIS host automatically when it changes from In Progress
to Complete or Incomplete.
If you won’t send results, deselect the checkbox.
4 Select Save.
14.4.3 Manually Sending Results to LIS Host

2 Search for control results or sample results to transmit.
3 Select desired samples in the sample list.
4 Select Host F8.
5 Select the sample range you want to transmit:
 Selected sample(s)
 All samples
6 If you transmit all results, you are allowed to skip those that are already transmitted
to the LIS host. Mark the Bypass Transmitted Results checkbox.
7 Select OK.
14-10
14 LIS and RMS
14.5 Troubleshooting LIS

For troubleshooting methods of the LIS host, refer to 17 Alarms and Troubleshooting
(page 17-1).
14-11
14 LIS and RMS
14.6 Use of RMS

14.6.1 Introduction
The RMS provides a platform of remote diagnosis and maintenance based on the internet.
The RMS allows transfer of data and files with the chemistry analyzers in hospitals, and
helps the service engineers to find, collect, analyze, locate and solve the failures
happening at the user end. Before connecting the analyzer with the RMS, you should set
up the IP address of the operation unit PC.
14.6.2 Connection between PC and RMS

Follow the procedure below to set up the IP address for connecting the operation unit PC
with the RMS.
3 Select 4 Com Setup. The System Communication window is displayed.
Figure 14.3 System communication setup
4 Select PC and RMS.

5 Choose a network connection in the Network Adaptor area.
6 Set up the connection between operation unit and RMS.
 Auto Obtain IP Address(selected by default)
 Or set using Following IP Address: type in the IP Address, Subnet Mask and
Default Gateway for connecting the operation unit PC with the RMS.
7 Select Apply.
A dialog box pops up: Check the network cable connection prior to applying new
settings. Please check the connection of the network cable and then click OK to save
the settings.
14-12
14 LIS and RMS
14.6.3 Troubleshooting RMS

For troubleshooting methods of the RMS, refer to 17 Alarms and Troubleshooting (page
17-1).
14-13
14 LIS and RMS
14-14
15 Diagnostics
This chapter provides test descriptions, test procedures, test results and corrective
actions for diagnosis in Sample and Reagent systems.
15-1
15 Diagnostics
15.1 Overview
Diagnostics consist of a series of tests and actions, which are used for troubleshooting
errors. These tests and actions are made to detect failures, but cannot be used to confirm
one specific failure. Users should make a judgment by integrating the information of
diagnosis and warnings with the failure characteristics. Diagnostic tests available in two
function modules are described in the table below.
Table 15.1 Categories of diagnostics
Function Module Description
Sample System Diagnostic tests here are used to detect failures of
components in Sample system.
Reagent System Diagnostic tests here are used to detect failures of
components in Reagent system.
Sensor Diagnosis Diagnostic tests here are used to detect failures of the
sensors.
15-2
15 Diagnostics
15.2 Diagnosis of Sample System

15.2.1 Introduction
The Sample System is responsible for delivering samples to the system for analysis. Tests
include:
 Sample Probe Clog Detection
 Sample Probe Level Sense Test
15.2.2 Sample Probe Clog Detection

Test description
This test can help you find if the Sample Probe Clog Detection function works normally.
Related data or text will be displayed after testing, which can be used to confirm the
results.
Use this test when one of the following alarms is given:
 Clog detection board communication error.
 The sample probe is clogged while the sample is deemed OK.
 The sample probe is clogged during cleaning.
 Clog detection board working mode setting error.
Test procedure
1 Select Utility - Maintenance - Diagnostics.
2 Select Sample System tab.
3 Select Sample Probe Clog Detection.
4 Load one cuvette of water onto Position 1 on sample carousel, and click Next to
open the Sample Probe Clog Detection Diagnosis window.
Figure 15.1 Sample Probe Clog Detection Diagnosis window
15-3
15 Diagnostics
5 Click Start.
The system starts to run each test for sample probe clog detection. Tests include:
 Basic Check
 Wash Check
 Clog Check
 Sample Aspiration Check (1.5μL)
 Sample Aspiration Check (45μL)
6 When tests are complete, the tested voltage and the level sense test data are displayed
on the screen.
Test results
The testing result of each subitem is displayed on the screen. Judge if the result meets the
requirements by comparing with the corresponding reference value. “PASS” in the
PASS/FAIL column indicates the test is normal, while “FAIL” indicates the test fails and it
should be corrected based on the suggestions provided.
Corrective action
Table 15.2 Sample system obstruction detection reference range and corrective action
Test Type Test Item Reference Range Corrective Action
Basic Check Version of Clog / Contact our customer
Detection Board service department or
12V 10.8V-13.2V your local distributor.
5V 4.5V-5.5.V
Pressure of Clog 9psia-17psia
Detection Board
Clog Signal OK/Error/”/”
Wash Check Wash Pressure 30psia-45psia
Clog Check Final Result OK/Error/”/”
Sample P0p <9psi
Aspiration Check Final Result OK/Error/”/”
(1.5μL)
Sample P0p <9psi
Aspiration Check Final Result OK/Error/”/”
(45μL)
15.2.3 Sample Probe Level Sense Test

Test description
The Level Sense Test is used to diagnose the level detection performance of the sample
system and gives related data that helps you locate the causes of an error.
Use this test when one of the following conditions happens:
 An alarm message appears indicating that the sample probe contacts no liquid in the
aspiration positions (include sample carousel, reaction carousel and concentrated
wash position) and the analysis is stopped.
15-4
15 Diagnostics
 An alarm message appears indicating that the sample probe aspirates nothing in the
aspiration positions and the analysis is stopped, and has confirmed that the failure is
not caused by probe clog.
 An alarm message appears indicating that the sample probe contacts no liquid during
dispensing samples into reaction carousel and the analysis is stopped, and has
confirmed that the failure is not caused by neither reagent bubbles nor reagent
probe level sensing.
 An alarm message appears indicating that problems related with level sensing occur
during dispensing samples in ISE module, and has confirmed it is not the problems of
ISE module itself.
 An alarm message appears indicating that the sample probe contacts no liquid during
liquid dispensing (also called water testing), and the analysis is stopped.
 An alarm message appears indicating that the sample probe contacts no liquid in the
wash well and the analysis is stopped, and has confirmed that it is not a
hydropneumatic failure.
Test procedure
2 Select Sample System tab.
3 Select Sample Probe Level Sense Test.
4 Place a tube with its 2/3 full of water in test position, and click Next to open the
Sample Probe Level Sense Test Results window.
Figure 15.2 Sample Probe Level Sense Test Results window
The default test position is position 1 on the sample carousel. To change the test
position, click Change Pos and enter a new number within the range from 1 to 90,
and then click Next.
5 Click Start.
The system will start to check the level sense board voltage of the sample probe, and
continuously detect level in the test position for 20 times.
6 When tests complete, the tested voltage and the level sense test data will be displayed
on the screen.
15-5
15 Diagnostics
Test results
The results shown are described below:
Level Sense Board Voltage Check Results
If the Actual value falls in the Reference range, the result is PASS, indicating the voltage of
the level detection board is normal; otherwise, the result is FAIL, indicating the voltage is
abnormal. You should correct it based on the suggestions provided.
Level Sense Test Data
The system will continuously check the lowering height of the sample probe for 20 times,
to judge if the lowering position is the vertical extreme position. If it is, abnormity exists.
If the extreme difference of 20 lowering heights is greater than 1mm, then the result
should be considered as abnormal, indicating that there are problems with connections of
sample probe and Printed Circuit Board Assembly (PCBA), PCBA power, output voltage
for level sense detection, or connections of level sense board and probe/mixer conversion
board, and vice versa. You should correct it based on the suggestions provided.
Corrective action
If the operating voltage of the level detection board is beyond the reference range of
2.8V-4.8V, contact our customer service department or your local distributor.
If the result of the level detection performance is abnormal, contact our customer service
15-6
15 Diagnostics
15.3 Diagnosis of Reagent System

15.3.1 Introduction
The Reagent System is responsible for delivering reagents to the system for analysis. Test
includes:
 Probe R1 Level Sense Test
 Probe R2 Level Sense Test
15.3.2 Probe R1 Level Sense Test

Test description
The Level Sense Test is used to diagnose the level detection performance of the probe R1
and gives related data that helps you locate the causes of an error.
 An alarm message appears indicating that the probe R1 contacts no liquid on the
reagent carousel, and the analysis is stopped.
 An alarm message appears indicating that probe R1 aspirates nothing in the
aspiration position and the analysis is stopped.
 An alarm message appears indicating that the probe R1 contacts no liquid during
dispensing reagents and the analysis is stopped, and has confirmed that it is not
caused by reagent bubbles.
 An alarm message appears indicating that the probe R1 contacts no liquid in the
Test procedure
2 Select Reagent System tab.
3 Select Probe R1 Level Sense Test.
4 Place a bottle with its 2/3 full of water in position 1 of the reagent carousel, and click
Next to open Reagent Probe Level Sense Test Results window.
15-7
15 Diagnostics
Figure 15.3 Reagent Probe Level Sense Test Results window
The default test position is position 1 on reagent carousel. To change the test
5 Click Start.
The system starts to check the level sense board voltage for probe R1, and
continuously detects level in the test position for 20 times.
6 When tests complete, the tested voltage and the level sense test data are displayed on
the screen.
Test results
15-8
15 Diagnostics

The system will continuously check the lowering height of probe R1 for 20 times, to judge
if the lowering position is the vertical extreme position. If it is, abnormity exists. If the
difference of 20 lowering heights is greater than 1mm, then the result should be
considered as abnormal, indicating that there are problems with connections of probe R1
and PCBA, PCBA power, output voltage for level sense detection, or connections of level
sense board and probe/mixer conversion board, and vice versa. You should correct it
based on the suggestions provided.
Corrective action
15.3.3 Probe R2 Level Sense Test

Test description
The Level Sense Test is used to diagnose the level detection performance of the probe R2
and gives related data that helps you locate the causes of an error.
 An alarm message appears indicating that the probe R2 contacts no liquid on the
reagent carousel, and the analysis is stopped.
 An alarm message appears indicating that probe R2 aspirates nothing in the
aspiration position and the analysis is stopped.
 An alarm message appears indicating that the probe R2 contacts no liquid during
dispensing reagents and the analysis is stopped, and has confirmed that it is not
caused by reagent bubbles.
 An alarm message appears indicating that the probe R2 contacts no liquid in the
Test procedure
2 Select Reagent System tab.
3 Select Probe R2 Level Sense Test.
4 Place a bottle with its 2/3 full of water in position 1 of reagent carousel, and click
Next to open Reagent Probe Level Sense Test Results window.
15-9
15 Diagnostics
Figure 15.4 Reagent Probe Level Sense Test Results window
The default test position is position 1 on reagent carousel. To change the test
5 Click Start.
The system starts to check the level sense board voltage for probe R2, and
continuously detects level in the test position for 20 times.
6 When tests complete, the tested voltage and the level sense test data are displayed on
the screen.
Test results
15-10
15 Diagnostics

The system will continuously check the lowering height of probe R2 for 20 times, to judge
if the lowering position is the vertical extreme position. If it is, abnormity exists. If the
difference of 20 lowering heights is greater than 1mm, then the result should be
considered as abnormal, indicating that there are problems with connections of probe R2
and PCBA, PCBA power, output voltage for level sense detection, or connections of level
sense board and probe/mixer conversion board, and vice versa. You should correct it
based on the suggestions provided.
Corrective action
15-11
15 Diagnostics
15.4 Sensor Diagnosis

15.4.1 Introduction
Sensor diagnosis provides diagnosis results of the sensors of the analyzer to help locate
the failure cause of the related parts.
15.4.2 Sensor Diagnosis

 Reaction carousel loses steps or positioning failed.
 Wash station loses steps or fails to find the mechanical zero position.
 Sample carousel loses steps or positioning failed.
 Sample probe loses steps in horizontal or vertical movement or fails to find the
mechanical zero position.
 Sample syringe loses steps or fails to find the mechanical zero position.
 Reagent carousel loses steps or positioning failed.
 Reagent probe loses steps in horizontal or vertical movement or fails to find the
mechanical zero position.
 Reagent syringe loses steps or fails to find the mechanical zero position.
 Sample mixer, reagent mixer fails to find the mechanical zero position.
 Interior wash syringe fails to find the mechanical zero position.
 Phase 1-2 wash syringe fails to find the mechanical zero position.
Test procedure
2 Select Sensor Diagnosis tab.
Figure 15.5 Sensor diagnosis window
15-12
15 Diagnostics
3 Select the optical couplers to be diagnosed.

Click Select All or Cancel All to select the sensors.
4 Select Start to inquire the status of the sensors.

To stop the test, select Stop.
Test result
Sensor high level signal is indicated by “unblocked “while low level signal is indicated by
“blocked”.
Corrective action
Perform the operations: block or unblock the sensors and perform the diagnosis test.
Observe if the sensor signal is changed accordingly with your operations. If the displayed
status is changed accordingly, it means the sensor works normally; If the displayed status
is not changed with your operations, it means the sensor is abnormal and please contact
our customer service department.
15-13
15 Diagnostics
15-14
16 Maintenance
This chapter provides you with maintenance of the instrument, including frequently-used
maintenance commands and scheduled maintenance procedures. The purpose, time,
system status, precautions and steps of each maintenance procedure are described here.
16-1
16 Maintenance
16.1 Overview
16.1.1 Introduction
Maintenance of the system should be performed regularly by trained personnel to ensure
reliable performance and reduce unnecessary service calls. Even you are only an operator,
it is important for you to read this chapter. Your thorough understanding will help you
obtain the best performance of the system.
The Biochemistry Maintenance, ISE Maintenance and Scheduled Maintenance are
provided. The Biochemistry Maintenance and ISE Maintenance features provide a list of
the maintenance procedures that can be performed to optimize the system performance.
The Scheduled Maintenance Log feature allows you to understand what maintenance is
needed, when it is performed and who performed the procedure. It is capable of
reminding you of the maintenance that is due and keeping track of what is happened
during a maintenance procedure.
In the case of maintenance that is beyond your capability or not covered in this chapter,
The maintenance frequencies stated in this manual are based on working for 5 hours a
day, that is 5*600=3,000 tests/day, and 5*600*25=75,000 tests/month.
Warning
Do not perform any maintenance procedures that are not described in this chapter;
otherwise, equipment damage or personal injury may be caused.
Do not touch the components other than those specified in this chapter.
Performing unauthorized maintenance procedures can damage the instrument and cause
personal injury, or invalidate the applicable warranty provisions in the service contract.
After performing maintenance, make verification to ensure that the system runs
normally.
Do not spill water or reagent on mechanical or electrical components of the system.
If the system is to be stored for a long time (over 1 week) or transported, contact our
customer service department or your local distributor to perform necessary maintenance
in order to ensure the system’s optimal performance in following use.
BIOHAZARD
Wear gloves and lab coat, and if necessary, goggles during the maintenance process.
16.1.2 Spare Parts and Consumables

Please use the spare parts and consumables manufactured or recommended by our
company in order to achieve the promised system performance. If needed, contact our
customer service department or your local distributor.
Table 16.1 Spare parts and consumables
Name Code Location Remark
Water supply module BA40-30-61743 Whole unit Optional module
Drainage module BA40-30-61866 Whole unit Optional module
16-2
16 Maintenance

External vacuum pump 115-013345-00 Whole unit Optional module
module (220V)
External vacuum pump 115-013344-00 Whole unit Optional module
module (110V)
CD80 wash solution (2 105-000106-00 Water tank Consumable
bottles) bracket
CD80 wash solution (6 105-000107-00 Water tank Consumable
bottles) bracket
Reference electrode BA34-10-63640 ISE module Consumable
(optional)
K electrode BA34-10-63641 ISE module Consumable
(optional)
Na electrode BA34-10-63642 ISE module Consumable
(optional)
Spacer BA34-10-63643 ISE module Consumable
(optional)
ISE wash solution BA34-10-63645 ISE module Consumable
(optional)
Cl electrode 040-000101-00 ISE module Consumable
(optional)
ISE reagent pack 5420 BA34-30-63810 ISE module Consumable
(optional)
ISE reagent pack 5425 105-000141-00 ISE module Consumable
(optional)
Urine diluent (125mL) BA34-10-63646 ISE module Consumable
(optional)
Urine diluent BA34-10-63646 ISE module Consumable
(optional)
Medica control BA34-10-63669 ISE module Consumable
(optional)
Plastic reaction cuvette (140 115-031036-00 Reaction Consumable
pieces) carousel
20W lamp 081-000099-00 Light source Contained in maintenance kit.
assembly Regularly-replaced part. Replace
it when it serves for over 2000
hours or the system shows a
prompt message indicating light
intensity too weak.
Stainless steel filter 082-000371-00 Inlet filter Contained in maintenance kit.
Replace it in every 3 months.
Inlet filter assembly 115-021998-00 Water supply Contained in maintenance kit.
Optional spare part
Filter 043-000422-00 Inlet filter Contained in maintenance kit.
assembly Replace it in every 6 months.
16-3
16 Maintenance

Valve 0040-10-32307 Probe nut Contained in maintenance kit.
Washer,10-32,18011Telfon Regularly-replaced part. Replace
washer it when,
 the probe is reinstalled for 2
to 3 times; or
 the probe is replaced with a
new one.
Kleohn 14271 Teflonwasher 0040-10-32303 Probe nut Contained in maintenance kit.
Regularly-replaced part. Replace
it when,
 the probe is reinstalled for 2
to 3 times; or
 the probe is replaced with a
new one.
250μl syringe assembly 3101-10-69301 Sample Contained in maintenance kit.
syringe Replace it when:
 it works for 100,000 tests; or
 it is obviously damaged.
1ml syringe 082-000328-00 Reagent Contained in maintenance kit.
syringe Replace it when:
 it works for 300,000 tests; or
 it is obviously damaged.
Sample probe assembly 115-022012-00 Sample Contained in maintenance kit.
probe arm Replace it when it is damaged or
bent.
Mixer (with lock nut) 115-031787-00 Mixer arm Contained in maintenance kit.
Replace it when it is damaged or
bent.
Unclogging device for probe 115-003181-00 Probe R1 Contained in maintenance kit.
R1 Use it to unclog the reagent
probe.
Unclogging device for sample 115-022522-00 Sample Contained in maintenance kit.
probe and probe R2 probe and Use it to unclog the sample
probe R2 probe.
Round-head needle, 0000-10-10916 Sample Contained in maintenance kit.
0.25+/-0.01mm*125mm probe and Use it to unclog the probes.
probes
R1/R2
Plastic reaction cuvette 115-020201-00 Reaction Used for reaction and analysis
carousel
20ml reagent bottle (brown) 043-000641-00 Reagent Holding reagent
carousel
carousel
40ml short reagent bottle 043-000640-00 Reagent Holding reagent
(brown) carousel
16-4
16 Maintenance

40ml long reagent bottle 043-000639-00 Reagent Holding reagent
(brown) carousel
carousel
Rubber plug 049-000955-00 Reagent Blocking the holes on the reagent
carousel carousel cover
cover
16.1.3 Tools to be Prepared by User

The following tools will be used for maintenance of the system and should be prepared by
the user.
Table 16.2 Tools to be prepared by user
Item Applicable Maintenance
Tube brush, ultrasound cleaner Cleaning the filter core
Clean gauze Cleaning the syringes, rotors, probes/mixers
Cotton swabs Cleaning the wash well, sample
compartment, etc.
Suction cleaner Cleaning the fans and dust screens
Hair brush Cleaning the dust screen
Tweezers Removing/Installing probes and syringe
washers
Thread syringe Unclogging the sample probe and reagent
probe
Tube brush or ultrasound cleaner Cleaning the filter core
Beaker Cleaning the needle and unclogging device
Ethanol Cleaning the photometer lens, probes, mixers
and wash station
NaClO (0.5% sodium hypochlorite Cleaning the wash wells
solution)
Fiber-free gloves Cleaning and replacing reaction cuvettes etc.
Large water container Cleaning the deionized water tank
Screen and keyboard wash solution Cleaning the screen and keyboard
16-5
16 Maintenance
16.2 Biochemistry Maintenance

16.2.1 Introduction
The Biochemistry Maintenance feature provides maintenance instructions for the
biochemistry system. The following three types of maintenance are available.
Photometric system:
 Cuvette check
 Photometer check
 Replace lamp
 Replace cuvette
Hydropneumatics:
 Clean probes/mixers exterior
 Clean probes interior
 Prime wash station
 Replace auto clean tubing
 Clean filter and DI water tank
 Circulate wash cuvettes
Sample/Reagent handling system and mixer assembly:
 Home
 Clean probes/mixers/wash wells
 Special wash
 Special wash probes
The biochemistry maintenance is described in detail in the following pages.
16.2.2 Biochemistry Maintenance Screen Overview

Select Utility - Maintenance - Maintenance - Biochemistry Maintenance. The screen
shows the biochemistry maintenance commands that are frequently used.
16-6
16 Maintenance
Figure 16.1 Biochemistry Maintenance screen
Maintenance procedures
Provides frequently-used maintenance commands of the biochemistry system. Select a
maintenance command button to start the maintenance procedure.
Online help
Online help information is provided for each biochemistry maintenance command. Select
the icon to the left of a maintenance command to show relevant instructions.
Exit
Select this button to close the Maintenance window.
16-7
16 Maintenance
16.3 ISE Maintenance

16.3.1 Introduction
The ISE Maintenance feature provides maintenance commands for the ISE module. The
following maintenance procedures are included:
 Two-point calibration
 Pump calibration
 Maintenance
 Air bubble detector calibration
 Purge A
 Purge B
 Replace electrode
 Remove reagent pack
 Program check instruction
 Air bubble detector calibration result
 Pump calibration result
 Read Dallas chip
 Write Dallas chip
 Store electrodes
 Clean sample injection port
 Replace tubes of pump and calibrator
The ISE maintenance is described in detail in the following pages.
16.3.2 ISE Maintenance Screen Overview

Select Utility - Maintenance - Maintenance - ISE Maintenance. The screen shows the
ISE maintenance commands that are frequently used. Operate according to the screen
prompts.
16-8
16 Maintenance
Figure 16.2 ISE Maintenance screen
Provides frequently-used maintenance commands of the ISE module. Select a
maintenance command button to start the maintenance procedure.
Online help
Online help information is provided for each ISE maintenance command. Select the
icon to the left of a maintenance command to show relevant instructions.
Exit
16-9
16 Maintenance
16.4 Scheduled Maintenance Log

16.4.1 Introduction
Scheduled maintenance procedures are determined by use of the components and
frequency of performance, and should be performed regularly by trained personnel to
ensure reliable performance and reduce unnecessary service calls. Read this section
carefully prior to doing the maintenance.
The Customize feature allows definition of maintenance procedures and configuration of
manufacturer-/user-defined maintenance procedures for each maintenance frequency.
The Electronic Maintenance Log is provided enabling you to record comments and other
important information of maintenance.
Most of the scheduled maintenance procedures are performed by executing maintenance
instructions, while the remaining part by manual operations. Perform the maintenance
strictly as instructed in this manual.
16.4.2 Maintenance Schedule

The scheduled maintenance procedures are divided into the following periods:
 Daily: 1 day
 Weekly: 8 days
 Two-week: 15 days（No maintenance item for this model）
 Monthly: 31 days
 Three-month: 91 days
 Six-month: 181 days
 Other (As-needed/As-required)
The maintenance frequency is counted down from the date of performing. When the
countdown becomes 0, the corresponding maintenance procedure is highlighted in
yellow. To determine that a due maintenance procedure is due, check if the following
items are displayed in yellow background:
 Utility button on the main screen
 Maintenance tab
 Maintenance button
 Scheduled Maintenance tab
 Maintenance frequency tab
 Maintenance procedure
The maintenance information will not be lost when the operating software version is
upgraded. When new version software is installed to remove the system failure or fix the
system, the maintenance counter returns to 0 and restarts a countdown.
16.4.3 Scheduled Maintenance Procedures

Maintenance procedures vary from different maintenance frequencies. The maintenance
procedures described in this chapter are based on a complete configuration of the system.
If some modules are not equipped on your system, you have no need to perform relevant
maintenance.
16-10
16 Maintenance
Daily maintenance:
 Check probes/mixers/wash wells
 Check sample/reagent syringes
 Check deionized water connection
 Check waste tube connection
 Check concentrated wash solution
 Check sample probe wash solution
Weekly maintenance:
 Clean sample/reagent probe exterior/ mixers
 Special wash
 Clean mixers
 Cuvette check
 Photometer check
Monthly maintenance:
 Clean wash wells
 Clean cuvette wash station and tubes
 Clean filter core
 Clean dust screens
 Clean sample injection port
 Pump calibration
 Air bubble detector calibration
Three-month maintenance:
 Clean DI water tank
 Replace filter core
Six-month maintenance:
 Replace lamp
 Replace water inlet filter
 Replace reference electrode
Other (As-needed/As-required):
 Clean analyzer panels
 Bar code maintenance
 Clean sample compartment
 Clean reagent compartment
 Clean sample probe interior
 Clean reagent probe interior
 Replace sample probe
 Replace probe R1
 Replace probe R2
 Replace sample mixer
 Replace reagent mixer
16-11
16 Maintenance
 Remove air bubbles in sample syringe

 Remove air bubbles in reagent syringe
 Special wash probes
 Replace cuvettes
 Replace ISE electrode
 Store electrodes
 Remove reagent pack
 Replace sample syringe
 Replace R1 syringe
 Replace R2 syringe
 Clean rotors
Perform the scheduled maintenance according to the instruction in this chapter. Run
calibration or quality control after performing the maintenance.
16.4.4 Maintenance Log Sheet

Refer to the following table for scheduled maintenance procedures you are supposed to
perform. Please copy it every month and place a check mark in relevant day column every
time after you performing maintenance.
16-12
16 Maintenance
Table 16.3 Maintenance Log Sheet

Maintenance Log Sheet
Year Month
Daily Maintenance 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
1 Check Probes/Mixers/Wash Wells
2 Check Sample/Reagent Syringes
3 Check Deionized Water Connection
4 Check Waste Tube Connection
5 Check Concentrated Wash Solution
6 Check Sample Probe Wash Solution
7 Clean ISE Electrodes
Weekly Maintenance 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Clean Sample/Reagent probe
1
Exterior
2 Clean Mixers
3 Special Wash
4 Cuvette Check
5 Photometer Check
Monthly Maintenance 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
1 Clean Wash Wells
Clean Cuvette Wash Station and
2
Tubes
3 Clean Filter Core
4 Clean Dust Screens
5 Clean Sample Injection Port
6 Pump Calibration
7 Air Bubble Detector Calibration
Clean the Dust Screen of the
8
External Vacuum Pump
Three-Month Maintenance 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
1 Clean DI Water Tank
2 Replace Filter Core
Six-Month Maintenance 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
1 Replace Lamp
2 Replace Water Supply Filter
16-13
16 Maintenance
Maintenance Log Sheet

Year Month
3 Replace Reference Electrode
As-Required/As-Needed Maintenance 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
1 Clean Analyzer Panels
2 Bar Code Maintenance
3 Clean Sample Compartment
4 Clean Reagent Compartment
5 Clean Sample Probe Interior
6 Clean Reagent Probe Interior
7 Replace Sample Probe
8 Replace Probe R1
9 Replace Probe R2
10 Replace sample mixer
11 Replace reagent mixer
Remove Air Bubbles In Sample
12
Syringe
Remove Air Bubbles In Reagent
13
Syringe
14 Special Wash Probes
15 Replace Cuvettes
16 Replace ISE Electrodes
17 Store Electrodes
18 Remove Reagent Pack
19 Replace sample syringe
20 Replace R1 syringe
21 Replace R2 syringe
22 Clean rotors
23 Clean waste tube of ISE module
16-14
16 Maintenance
16.4.5 Scheduled Maintenance Screen Overview

The Scheduled Maintenance screen contains maintenance frequency tabs, maintenance
procedures, scroll bar, and function buttons. Select a tab to view the maintenance
procedures to be performed in the period. Choose a maintenance procedure, and then
select function buttons to access windows to execute an operation.
Figure 16.3 Scheduled Maintenance screen
Fields and buttons on the screen are introduced as follows.

Shows the preset and user-defined maintenance procedures for the current maintenance
frequency.
Select field
Choose a maintenance procedure and click on the corresponding Select checkbox. A tick
appears in the middle of the checkbox, which indicates the maintenance procedure is
chosen. Select the function buttons at the bottom of the screen to access a window or
execute an operation. To deselect a maintenance procedure, click on the Select checkbox
again. The tick inside the checkbox disappears, which indicates the maintenance
procedure is deselected.
Property field
Shows how the maintenance procedure is defined. The Property includes two options:
System and User. System indicates that the maintenance procedure is defined by the
manufacturer and cannot be configured; User indicates that the maintenance is defined
by user and can be configured for each maintenance frequency.
Operator field
Shows who performs the maintenance procedure, that is, the user ID currently logging on
the system.
16-15
16 Maintenance
Date Performed field

Shows the date confirmed by the operator on which the maintenance was performed.
After performing a maintenance procedure, mark the Select checkbox and select OK. The
date is refreshed and displayed as the current date. The system will restart the
countdown of the maintenance frequency from the current date.
Scroll bar
If all maintenance procedures of a period are not shown on the current screen, move the
scroll bar view more maintenance procedures.
Select All button
This function allows selection of all maintenance procedures currently available on the
screen. When the Select All button is selected, a tick appears in all Select checkboxes to
the right of the maintenance procedures. Choose the following buttons as needed:
 OK: allows the reviewal of the selected maintenance procedure and entering of the
date performed.
 Log: allows recording of comments and other important information of maintenance.
 History: provides a stored history record of maintenance performance with date
and operator for the procedure selected.
OK button
This function allows the reviewal of the selected maintenance procedure and entering of
the date performed. When the approving a maintenance procedure, the date of
performance will be displayed as the current date.
Log button
The electronic maintenance log function allows the recording of comments and other
important information of maintenance. Choose one or more maintenance procedures,
and then select the Log button. The Maintenance Log window shows. Input logs for the
procedure selected, and then select OK. Your input information will be applied to the
selected maintenance procedure.
History button
This feature provides a stored history record of maintenance performance with date and
operator for the procedure selected. You are allowed to edit or delete a maintenance
record. Please note that only one maintenance procedure can be recalled for history
performance at one time.
1 Choose a maintenance procedure on the Scheduled Maintenance screen.
2 Select History. The Maintenance Log window is displayed.
3 View all performance records of the selected maintenance procedure.
4 To edit a maintenance record:
 Mark the checkbox of the desired maintenance record.
 Select Edit.
 Modify the maintenance record.
 Select OK.
Only one maintenance record can be edited at one time.
5 To delete maintenance records:

 Mark the checkbox of one or more desired maintenance records.
 Select Delete.
16-16
16 Maintenance
 Select OK. The selected maintenance records are removed.

6 To print maintenance log:
 Mark the checkbox of one or more desired maintenance records.
 Select Print.
Customize button
The Customize function allows definition of new maintenance procedures and
configuration of manufactured-/user-defined maintenance procedures. User-defined
maintenance procedures can be deleted.
Select Customize on the Scheduled Maintenance screen. The Customize
Maintenance Procedure window is displayed.
To define a maintenance procedure:
 Select New.
 Enter the name of the new maintenance procedure.
 Select OK. The maintenance procedure is displayed in the Available Procedures list.
 Use >> and << to configure or cancel user-defined maintenance procedures. The
property of a user-defined maintenance procedure is User.
 Select OK to save the configuration, or select Cancel to abort it.
To configure a maintenance procedure:
 Choose a maintenance frequency in the Frequency pull-down list.
 Choose a maintenance procedure in the Available Procedures list. Move the
vertical scroll bar to view more maintenance procedures.
 Select >>. The selected maintenance procedure appears in the Enabled Procedures
list, and the relevant maintenance schedule screen will be refreshed automatically.
To remove a maintenance procedure:
 Choose a maintenance procedure in the Enabled Procedures list.
 Select <<. The selected maintenance procedure is removed from the Enabled
Procedures list and appears in the Available Procedures list. The relevant
maintenance schedule screen will be refreshed automatically.
 Select OK to save the configuration, or select Cancel to abort it.
Delete button
The system allows deleting of maintenance procedures that will no longer be used. Only
user-defined rather than manufacturer-defined maintenance procedures can be deleted.
1 Choose a maintenance procedure on the Scheduled Maintenance screen.
2 Select Delete.
3 Select OK. The selected maintenance procedure is deleted. The Available
Procedures list on the Customize Maintenance Procedure window is refreshed
automatically.
Close
16-17
16 Maintenance

16.5.1 Check Probes/Mixers/Wash Wells
Abnormal sample probe, reagent probe, wash wells or mixers may influence the
measurement performance and result in inaccurate results. Prior to measurements every
day, check the sample probe and reagent probe for stains and crystals, and check if the
mixers cannot rotate normally or are lifted and the water flow in the wash wells is
abnormal. If the above-mentioned abnormities exist, clean or adjust the probes and
mixers immediately.
Purpose
To check the sample probe and reagent probe for water dripping, stains and liquid flow
abnormities, and check if the mixers can rotate normally and the water flow in the wash
wells is abnormal.
When to do
You are recommended to do this maintenance procedure every day before starting the
analysis.
System status
Make sure that the system status is Standby.
Precautions
Warning
The probes and mixers are sharp and vulnerable. To prevent injury and equipment
damage, exercise caution when working around the probes and mixers. Keep away from
the probes and mixers to avoid collision with them.
BIOHAZARD
Wear gloves and lab coat, and if necessary, goggles.
How to do
1 Open the protective shield of the analyzer.
2 Select Utility - Maintenance - Maintenance - Biochemistry Maintenance.
3 Select Clean Probes/Mixers/Wash Wells.
4 Check the exterior of the probes/mixers for stains. If stains exist, perform the Clean
Sample/Reagent Probe Exterior or Clean Mixers procedure.
5 Select Continue to clean the reagent probe and sample probe interiors.
6 Check the liquid flow of the sample probe and reagent probe. If the liquid flow is
sprayed out or does not come out vertically, the probe may be clogged. Perform the
Special Wash Probes procedure,, and then check them again. If the abnormity
remains, perform the Clean Sample Probe Interior or Clean Reagent Probe Interior
procedure. If the abnormity still remains, perform the Replace Sample Probe or
Replace Reagent Probes procedure, or contact a service engineer.
16-18
16 Maintenance
Figure 16.4 Normal and abnormal liquid flows of sample probe and reagent probe
OK Error
7 Select Second Wash. The probe interior wash can be performed again.
8 Select Continue.
9 Observe the water flow of the probe/mixer wash wells, and check if the water
reaches to about 5mm of the probe/mixer from the tip. If it does, proceed to the next
step; otherwise, contact a service engineer.
10 Select Continue.
11 Select Done.
12 Select Scheduled Maintenance - Daily.
13 Mark the Select checkbox to the right of Check Probes/Mixers/Wash Wells.
14 Select OK to refresh the current date as the performance date.
15 Select Log, and then record comments and other important information for the
procedure.
17 Restore the protective shield.
16.5.2 Check Sample/Reagent Syringes

The sample syringe and reagent syringes are precise devices used to aspirate/dispense
small amount of sample and reagent. If the syringes leak with the lower retaining screws
loosened, they cannot aspirate/dispense the correct amount of sample or reagent, and
may even be damaged. Prior to measurements every day, check the sample/reagent
syringes for leak.
Purpose
To check the sample/reagent syringes for leak and air bubbles.
When to do
analysis.
Materials required
Clean gauze
16-19
16 Maintenance
System status
Make sure that the system status is Incubation or Standby.
Precautions
BIOHAZARD
How to do
1 Open the front door of the analyzer. You will see three syringes on the two side of the
water tank.
2 Check the T piece for leak.
3 Use dry gauze to wipe the T piece, and then check if the gauze is moistened.
 If it is not, proceed to the next step.
 If it is, tighten the T piece.
 Check the T piece and plunger guide cap again. If the leak remains, check if the
washer inside the syringe connector is intact.
 If the washer is damaged, replace it with a new one; otherwise, replace the
syringe.
4 Check the syringe interior for air bubbles. If yes, remove the air bubbles.
5 Check the plunger guide cap at the bottom of the syringe for leak.
6 Use dry gauze to wipe the plunger guide cap, and then check if the gauze is
moistened.
 If it is, tighten the plunger guide cap.
 Check the plunger guide cap again. If the leak remains, replace the syringe.
7 Check if the retaining screws at the bottom of the syringe are tightened.
 If not, tighten them and proceed to the next step.
 If yes, proceed to the next step.
9 Select Utility - Maintenance - Maintenance, and then select Scheduled
Maintenance - Daily.
10 Mark the Select checkbox to the right of Check Sample/Reagent Syringes.
procedure.
16.5.3 Check Deionized Water Connection

If the deionized water tubes are not connected properly, deionized water cannot be
supplied normally or leak may be caused, influencing the measurements.
Purpose
To check the DI water connection to ensure normal supply of DI water.
16-20
16 Maintenance
When to do
analysis.
System status
Make sure that the system is powered off, or the system status is Incubation or Standby.
How to do
1 Check that the water tank or other water containers have sufficient deionized water.
2 Check that the tubes are not bent or folded or leaking.
3 Check that the water supply module is powered on.
5 Mark the Select checkbox to the right of Check DI Water Connection.
procedure.
16.5.4 Check Waste

If the waste tube is not connected properly or the high-concentration waste tank is full,
overflow may be caused, resulted in environmental contamination or cross contamination,
or even damaging the equipment. It is necessary to regularly check the waste tube
connection and the high-concentration waste tank.
Purpose
To check the waste tube connection and the high-concentration waste tank to prevent
overflow.
When to do
analysis.
System status
Precautions
BIOHAZARD
Dispose of the waste in accordance with your local or national guidelines for biohazard
waste disposal.
How to do
1 Check if the waste drainage system works well, and make sure that the waste tube is
not bent or folded and the high-/low-concentration waste is drained properly.
2 Check if the high-concentration waste tank has been emptied. If not, empty it.
High-concentration waste output: 2.2L/H, low-concentration waste output: no more

than 22.6L/H, and water consumption: no more than 28L/H.
16-21
16 Maintenance
3 If leak remains after performing the above-stated steps, contact our customer
5 Mark the Select checkbox to the right of Check Waste Tank Connection.
procedure.
16.5.5 Check Concentrated Wash Solution

Insufficient concentrated wash solution may terminate the measurements. Prior to
measurements every day, check the concentrated wash solution volume, and fill more, if
necessary.
A tank of concentrated wash solution is 2L and can be used for 4 days for plastic cuvettes
on condition that 2000 tests are done every day. Please check and refill the concentrated
wash solution according to the consumption and tank volume.
Purpose
To check the concentrated wash solution volume to prevent measurements from being
terminated.
When to do
You are recommended to do this maintenance procedure everyday before starting the
analysis.
System status
Precautions
Warning
Concentrated wash solution is corrosive to human skins. Wear gloves and goggles while
checking the concentrated wash solution. In case your hand or clothes contact the wash
solution, wash them off with soap and water. If the wash solution spills into your eyes,
rinse them with water and consult an oculist.
CAUTION
When the system is Initializing, it may be diluting the concentrated wash solution. Do not
try to fill concentrated wash solution until the system status becomes Standby.
How to do
1 Open the front door of the analyzer and check the concentration wash solution. If
necessary, fill more or replace the wash solution.
4 Mark the Select checkbox in the same row as Check Concentrated Wash
Solution.
16-22
16 Maintenance

procedure.
16.5.6 Check Sample Probe Wash Solution

Insufficient sample probe wash solution (CD80 alkaline concentrated wash solution) may
cause probe clogging and cross contamination. You are recommended to check and
replace the sample probe wash solution every day to ensure its sufficiency.
Three special washes will be conducted for the sample probe when every batch of tests is
finished, and about 88μl wash solution is consumed for each wash. The amount of
concentrated wash solution for weekly cleaning of reaction cuvettes is 2ml.
Purpose
To check the sample probe wash solution volume to prevent measurements from being
terminated.
When to do
analysis.
System status
Precautions
CAUTION
You are recommended to replace the sample probe wash solution every day in order to
prevent probe clogging and cross contamination.
While the system is running tests, do not try to fill sample probe wash solution until the
system status becomes Standby.
How to do
1 Check the volume of the sample probe wash solution on the sample carousel position
D2.
2 If necessary, fill more or replace the wash solution.
4 Mark the Select checkbox in the same row as Check Sample Probe Wash
Solution.
procedure.
16.5.7 Clean Electrode Tubes (For ISE Module)

When the ISE module finishes a great number of measurements, the proteins and lipid
contained in samples may remain on surfaces of the electrodes, influencing their
measurement performance. You should clean the electrodes regularly to ensure system
performance. It will take about 2 minutes to perform this procedure.
16-23
16 Maintenance
Purpose
To remove the proteins and lipid remaining on the electrode surfaces.
When to do
You are recommended to perform this procedure after finishing all ISE tests of the day, or
before shutting down the system, or 50 samples are analyzed.
Materials required
ISE wash solution, 2ml sample tube
System status
Make sure that the status of both the biochemistry system and ISE module is Standby.
Precautions
BIOHAZARD
The wash solution may hurt your eyes and skins. Exercise caution while using the wash
solution. If your eyes contact the wash solution, rinse them off with fresh water and
consult a doctor.
CAUTION
Please use consumables recommended by our company. Use of other consumables may
degrade the system performance.
NOTE
After performing this procedure, recalibrate the ISE electrodes prior to starting analysis.
How to do
1 Select Utility - Maintenance - Maintenance - ISE Maintenance.
2 Choose Clean Electrode Tubes. The maintenance guide window shows.
3 Open the upper protective shield of the analyzer.
4 Fill a 2ml sample tube with at least 300μl ISE wash solution, and then load it to
position D1 on the sample carousel.
5 Select Continue. The system starts cleaning the ISE electrode tubes.
6 Select Done.
7 Select Scheduled Maintenance - Daily.
8 Mark the Select checkbox in the same row as Clean Electrode Tubes.
procedure.
16-24
16 Maintenance
16.6 Weekly Maintenance

16.6.1 Clean Sample/Reagent Probe Exterior
The sample probe and reagent probe are often dirty on their surfaces, causing carryover
between samples or reagents and resulting in inaccurate results. You are recommended to
perform this procedure every week.
Purpose
To clean the exterior of the sample probe and reagent probe to prevent cross
contamination.
When to do
This procedure should be performed on weekly basis.
Materials required
2 pieces of clean gauze, ethanol, deionized water, tweezers
System status
Make sure that the system status is not Running.
Precautions
Warning
caution when working around the probes. If the probe is bent or damaged, replace it
immediately; otherwise, unreliable results may be obtained.
BIOHAZARD
How to do
1 Switch off the analyzing unit power.
2 Rotate the probe arm to move the probe to a position convenient for cleaning, and
then use gauze soaked with ethanol to gently wipe the probe exterior. Clean the
probe tip until it becomes clear without stain.
Do not pull the probe horizontally to prevent probe damage.
3 Use gauze moistened with deionized water to clear the ethanol on the probe.
4 After finishing the cleaning, turn on the analyzing unit power switch.
5 Select Utility - Commands - Home to reset the probe.
Maintenance - Weekly.
7 Mark the Select checkbox to the right of Clean Sample/Reagent Probe Exterior.
procedure.
16-25
16 Maintenance
16.6.2 Clean Mixers

The mixers are often dirty on their surfaces, causing carryover between samples or
reagents and resulting in inaccurate results. You are recommended to perform this
procedure every week.
Purpose
To clean the sample mixer and reagent mixer to prevent cross contamination.
When to do
This procedure should be performed on weekly bases.
Materials required
2 pieces of clean gauze, ethanol, deionized water, tweezers
System status
Precautions
Warning
Exercise caution while working around the mixer. If it is bent or damaged, replace it
immediately; otherwise, unreliable results may be obtained.
BIOHAZARD
How to do
2 Rotate the mixer arm to move the mixer to a position convenient for cleaning, and
then use gauze soaked with ethanol to gently wipe the mixer exterior until it
becomes clear without stain.
Do not pull the mixer horizontally to prevent damage.
3 Use gauze moistened with deionized water to clear the ethanol on the mixer.
5 Select Utility - Commands - Home to reset the mixer.
Maintenance - Weekly.
7 Mark the Select checkbox in the same row as Clean Mixers.
procedure.
16.6.3 Special Wash

Special wash is to clean the sample probe, reagent probe, mixers, reaction cuvettes and
wash station by using the concentrated wash solution, with the aim of eliminating
carryover and preventing waste from leaving in the waste tubes. It will take about 35
minutes to perform this procedure.
16-26
16 Maintenance
Purpose
To eliminate cross contamination among the sample probe, reagent probe, mixers,
cuvettes and wash station, and prevent waste from leaving in the waste tubes.
When to do
You are recommended to perform this procedure on weekly basis or when the equipment
is to be stored for a long time.
Materials required
Concentrated wash solution manufactured by our company
System status
How to do
2 Place more than 50ml concentrated wash solution in position D of the reagent
carousel, and place more than 5ml concentrated wash solution in position D2 on the
sample carousel.
4 Choose Special Wash.
5 Confirm if cuvette check is needed after the special wash. If it is, mark the checkbox
in front of Perform Cuvette Check.
6 Select Continue to continue, or select Exit to abort the special wash.
7 The system starts cleaning the sample probe, reagent probe, mixers, cuvettes and
wash station. To terminate the clean process, select Stop.
8 Perform the cuvette check procedure. Refer to 16.6.4 Cuvette Check (page 16-27) for
details.
9 Select Done.
10 Restore the upper protective shield of the analyzer.
11 Select Scheduled Maintenance - Weekly.
12 Mark the Select checkbox in the same row as Special Wash.
procedure.
16.6.4 Cuvette Check

After being used for a long time, the reaction cuvettes may have proteins or other stains
left inside of them that are difficult to remove and will influence the light transmittance of
the cuvettes. If the cuvettes are polluted or scratched or damaged, the light transmittance
will be affected, threatening the accuracy and stability of the results. Check the reaction
cuvettes regularly to avoid unwanted results. It will take about 20 minutes to perform this
procedure.
Purpose
To check if the reaction cuvettes are polluted and the light transmittance is decreased in
order to prevent unreliable test results.
16-27
16 Maintenance
When to do
You are recommended to perform this procedure on weekly basis or after performing
special wash or after replacing the reaction cuvettes.
System status
Prior to performing the maintenance, make sure that the system has been power on for
over 10 minutes and the system status is Standby. Check if the reaction carousel has a
cuvette for each position. If not, load cuvettes.
Precautions
NOTE
When a cuvette is deemed dirty, clean or replace it immediately, and then perform the
cuvette check again.
Stains inside cuvettes will influence the photometric measurement. You are
recommended to perform the Cuvette Check after finishing the Special Wash procedure.
How to do
2 Choose Cuvette Check.
3 Make sure that the lamp has been turned on for over 10 minutes. Select Continue
and then select Start. When finishing the check, the system refreshes the cuvette
status based on the check results. Record the cuvettes highlighted in yellow and
please replace the cuvettes highlighted in yellow. To abort the cuvette check, select
Stop.
The screen shows all cuvettes and highlights the dirty cuvettes with special color:
 No color indication: normal cuvette
 Yellow: dirty cuvette
4 Select Result. The Cuvette Check Results window appears and shows the latest
check result of the 124 cuvettes at all wavelengths.
5 Choose a cuvette in the result list. The Cuvette Status window pops up.
Choose the following buttons as needed:
 |<: to view the first cuvette.
 <: to view the previous cuvette.
 >: to view the next cuvette.
 >|: to view the last cuvette.
 Print: to print the results currently displayed on the screen.
 Exit: to close the Cuvette Status window.
6 Select Exit to close the Cuvette Check window.
8 Mark the Select checkbox in the same row as Cuvette Check.
procedure.
16-28
16 Maintenance
16.6.5 Photometer Check

Decreased light intensity and stability of the lamp will directly influence the accuracy and
repeatability of the results. Check the lamp regularly, or if necessary, replace it. The
Photometer Check procedure provides detection of too strong or too weak light intensity.
The photometer status will be provided through an alarm message or prompt message.
Purpose
To check the light intensity by measuring absorbance of 5 cuvettes and help you
determine whether to replace the lamp.
When to do
You are recommended to perform this procedure on weekly basis or after replacing the
lamp.
System status
Prior to performing the maintenance, make sure that the system has been power on for
over 10 minutes and the system status is Standby.
Precautions
NOTE
Before checking the lamp, perform the Cuvette Check procedure and replace or clean
the dirty cuvettes; otherwise, the photometer check results are unreliable.
To ensure the photometer’s measurement performance, replace the lamp in the case of
weak light intensity.
How to do
2 Choose Photometer Check. The following window appears.
3 Make sure that the lamp has been turned on for over 10 minutes. Select Continue
and then select Start. When finishing the check, the system displays the results and
refreshes the photometer status. To abort the photometer check, select Stop.
On the left of the screen shows the absorbance at each wavelength in the current
photometer check; on the right of the screen shows that of the previous photometer
check. By checking the results of the previous and current photometer check, you
may understand the status of the lamp.
4 If an alarm occurs during the check, operate as follows:

 If the alarm indicates the lamp is off, check if the lamp has been turn on. If not,
execute the Home command; if yes, contact our customer service department or
your local distributor.
 If the alarm indicates light intensity too strong, contact our customer service
 If the alarm indicates light intensity weak, replace the lamp. For more
information, refer to 16.9.1 Replace Lamp (page 16-43).
 Print: to print the photometer check results currently available on the screen.
 Exit: to close the window.
6 Select Done to close the Photometer Check window.
16-29
16 Maintenance
8 Mark the Select checkbox in the same row as Photometer Check.

procedure.
16-30
16 Maintenance
16.7 Monthly Maintenance

16.7.1 Clean Wash Wells
When the system is used for a long time, waste and dust may accumulate in the wash
wells and block them. Clean the wash wells every month to keep them clean and smooth.
Purpose
To remove the waste and dust from the wash wells (of reagent probe, sample probe,
sample mixer and reagent mixer).
When to do
This procedure should be performed on monthly basis.
Materials required
Cotton swabs and sodium hypochlorite solution (NaClO, with 0.5% chlorite)
System status
Precautions
BIOHAZARD
How to do
3 Rotate the same probe, reagent probe and mixers to keep them away from the wash
wells.
4 Use clean cotton swabs moistened with NaClO to clean the wash wells.
6 Select Utility - Commands - Home to reset the probes and mixers, check if the wash
wells have a normal water flow.
7 Select Utility-Maintenance - Maintenance, and then select Scheduled
Maintenance - Monthly.
8 Mark the Select checkbox in the same row as Clean Wash Wells.
procedure.
16.7.2 Clean Wash Station and Tubes

Clean the wash station and tubes regularly to prevent waste from accumulating on it.
Purpose
To clean the cuvette wash station and tubes in order to avoid waste buildup and cross
contamination.
16-31
16 Maintenance
When to do
Materials required
Gauze, ethanol, deionized water, waste container (large beaker)
System status
Precautions
BIOHAZARD
Dispose of the used gauze in accordance with your local or national guidelines for
biohazard waste disposal.
How to do
2 Remove the cuvette wash station and use ethanol-moistened gauze to wipe the wash
probes and wipe blocks.
3 Use gauze moistened with deionized water to clear the ethanol on the wash probes.
4 Restore the wash station.
6 Choose Prime Wash Station. The maintenance guide window shows. Select
Continue.
7 Enter the wash cycle (1~100). The default is 10.
8 Select Continue.
9 When the cleaning and priming are finished, select Done.
11 Select Scheduled Maintenance - Monthly.
12 Mark the Select checkbox in the same row as Clean Cuvette Wash Station and
Tubes.
procedure.
16 Select Utility - Commands, and then select Home to put the instrument into the
Standby status.
16.7.3 Clean Filter Core

Clean the filter core every month to prevent accumulation of foreign matters and improve
the water quality.
Purpose
To clean the filter core in order to prevent accumulation of foreign matters and improve
the water quality.
16-32
16 Maintenance
When to do
Materials required
Tube brush or ultrasound cleaner
System status
How to do
2 Choose Clean Filter/Water Tank, and then select Continue.
3 Open the front door of the analyzer, unscrew the caps of the concentrated wash
solution tank and diluted wash solution tank, and then remove the tanks. The DI
water filter appears in front of you.
4 Put a water container below the filter.
5 Remove the connectors from the DI water tank and the filter.
6 Tilt the filter assembly, loosen the filter cap and remove the filter core. Use a tube
brush to clean the filter core’s surface, or put it in an ultrasound cleaner for 10
minutes.
Figure 16.5 Remove deionized water filter core
Press the
filter Loosen the
filter cap
Filter core
Remove
the filter
core
7 Restore the filter core and filter cap according to the above-mentioned steps in
reversed order.
16-33
16 Maintenance
8 Restore the connectors on the DI water tank and the filter assembly; install the
concentrated wash solution tank and diluted wash solution tank, and tighten the
caps.
9 Select Continue. The system starts priming the tubes with deionized water.
10 When the priming is complete, select Done.
If you perform this procedure while the instrument is off, start it up until the system
status becomes Incubation. Perform Clean Filter/Water Tank to remove air from
the fluidic tubes by priming deionized water.

13 Mark the Select checkbox in the same row as Clean Filter Core.
procedure.
Standby status.
16.7.4 Clean Dust Screens of the Analyzer

Dust may accumulate on the dust screens when the instrument is used for a long time,
influencing the ventilation and heat elimination effects. It is necessary to clean the dust
screens regularly.
Purpose
To clean the dust screens to ensure good ventilation.
When to do
Materials required
Suction cleaner, hair brush and fresh water
System status
Make sure that the analyzer main power is off.
Precautions
NOTE
Use a suction cleaner to clean the dust screens while keeping them uninstalled, or use a
hair brush and fresh water to clean the dust screens after removing them from the
analyzer.
Do not reinstall the dust screens until they are dry completely.
Install the dust screens correctly to avoid gaps.
To clean the dust screens by knocking them at solid ground, find an appropriate place,
and then carefully knock them at the ground.
How to do
1 Switch off the analyzer’s main power.
16-34
16 Maintenance
2 Open the front door of the analyzer and remove the dust screens by lifting in the
middle and pushing outwards.
Figure 16.6 Dust screens
Dust screen Dust screen
3 Use the suction cleaner, or hair brush and fresh water to clean the dust screens, and
then dry them in air.
4 Reinstall the dust screens when they are dry.
6 Power on the analyzer and run the operating software.
7 Make sure that the system status is Incubation or Standby.
Maintenance - Monthly.
9 Mark the Select checkbox in the same row as Clean Dust Screens.
procedure.
16.7.5 Clean Sample Injection Port (For ISE Module)

When the ISE module is used for a period, stains may build up in the sample injection port
and influence the measurement performance. Clean the sample injection port regularly to
keep it clear.
Purpose
To remove the stains accumulating in the sample injection port.
When to do
You are recommended to perform this procedure every month.
Materials required
Deionized water, cotton swabs, and ethanol
System status
Make sure that the status of the ISE module is Standby or Failure.
16-35
16 Maintenance
How to do
3 Choose the Clean Sample Injection Port option.
5 Open the cover of the ISE module.
6 Use clean cotton swab soaked with ethanol to wipe the sample injection port
(interior of the sample injection cup of the ISE module ) until it is clean; then use a
clean cotton swab soaked with DI water to wipe the interior and periphery of the
sample injection port.
7 Select Done.
8 Select Purge A and Purge B to prime the ISE module.
10 Mark the Select checkbox in the same row as Clean Sample Injection Port.
procedure.
14 Restore the cover of the ISE module.
16.7.6 Pump Calibration (For ISE Module)

The peristaltic pump may get aging when used for a long time. It is necessary to calibrate
it regularly.
Purpose
To calibrate the peristaltic pump to ensure accurate test result.
When to do
System status
Make sure that the status of the ISE module is Standby .
How to do
3 Choose Pump Calibration.
4 Place 500μl DI water in W position of the sample carousel.
5 Select Start.
When the calibration is complete, the calibration results are displayed on the screen.
6 Select Done.
7 To view the detailed results, select Pump Calibration Result. The detailed results are
displayed in the data list.
16-36
16 Maintenance
9 Mark the Select checkbox in the same row as Pump Calibration.

procedure.
16.7.7 Air Bubble Detector Calibration (For ISE Module)

The air bubble detector may get aging when used for a long time. It is necessary to
calibrate it regularly.
Purpose
To calibrate the air bubble detector to ensure accurate test result.
When to do
System status
Make sure that the status of the ISE module is Standby .
Precautions
BIOHAZARD
How to do
2 Choose Air Bubble Detector Calibration.
3 Select Start.
When the calibration is complete, the calibration results are displayed on the screen.
4 Select Done.
5 To view the detailed results, select Air Bubble Detector Calibration Result. The
detailed results are displayed in the data list.
7 Mark the Select checkbox in the same row as Air Bubble Detector Calibration.
procedure.
16.7.8 Clean the Dust Screen of the External Vacuum Pump

Dust may accumulate on the dust screens when the vacuum pump is used for a long time,
influencing the ventilation and heat elimination effects. It is necessary to clean the dust
screen monthly.
1 Remove the front dust screen of the external vacuum pump.
 Push the dust screen upward gently along the groove and make its lower end
leave the groove.
16-37
16 Maintenance
 Pull the dust screen out of the groove.
2 Replace it with a clean one.

 Insert the upper end of the dust screen into the groove and push it upward.
 Press the dust screen and make it contact tightly with the groove.
 Push it downward gently and make the lower end inserted into the groove as
well.
16-38
16 Maintenance
3 Wash the removed dust screen with water and dry it.
16-39
16 Maintenance
16.8 Three-Month Maintenance

16.8.1 Clean DI Water Tank
Stains will remain in the deionized water tank when it is used for a long time and may
influence the cleaning effects of the system.
Purpose
To clean the deionized water tank to ensure good cleaning performance of the system.
When to do
You are recommended to perform this procedure every 3 months.
Materials required
Water container
System status
How to do
3 Open the front door of the analyzer. You will see the deionized water tank as shown
in the figure below.
Figure 16.7 Deionized water tank
DI water tank
4 Remove the quick connector from the outlet of the water tank, and then pull the
water tank outwards for a little to expose its opening.
5 Put a water container below the outlet of the DI water tank; insert another normally
open quick connector into the outlet to drain water into the water container. When
the DI water tank is emptied, proceed to the next step. Or you may close the outlet
with a solid plug, take out the water tank completely, and then empty it by inclining it.
Choose this method if there is little water inside the DI water tank.
6 Remove the tubes from the tank inlet, disconnect the liquid level floater signal cable
from the right panel of the water tank, take out the water tank completely, and then
remove the liquid level floater. Perform this step according to the figure below.
16-40
16 Maintenance
Figure 16.8 Remove deionized water tank
Floater signal cable
Outlet connector.
Press to drain water
7 Clean the water tank repeatedly with deionized water.

8 Insert the floater into the connector on rear panel of the water tank, connect the
backflow tube to the water tank, connect the floater signal cable and water supply
tube to the water tank according to the labels on it, and then place the water tank in
the cabinet of the analyzer.
9 Select Continue. The system automatically primes the deionized water tubes.
10 Take away the water container and close the front door of the analyzer.
11 Select Scheduled Maintenance - Three-Month.
12 Mark the Select checkbox in the same row as Clean DI Water Tank.
procedure.
Standby status.
16-41
16 Maintenance
16.8.2 Replace Filter Core

The filter may be blocked after being used for a long time. Replace the filter core every 3
months to ensure good filtering effects.
Purpose
To replace the filter core and ensure good filtering effects.
When to do
Materials required
New filter core
System status
How to do
3 Remove the deionized water filter core according to the Clean Filter Core procedure.
4 Put the new filter core in the filter and reinstall the filter.
5 Select Continue. The system starts priming the deionized water tubes.
6 When the replacement is complete, select Done.
7 Select Scheduled Maintenance - Three-Month.
8 Mark the Select checkbox in the same row as Replace Filter Core.
procedure.
Standby status.
16-42
16 Maintenance
16.9 Six-Month Maintenance

16.9.1 Replace Lamp
An aged lamp will has its energy decreased and influence the measurement accuracy.
Failed lamp will make measurements impossible. To ensure the optimal performance of
the system, replace the lamp regularly. Every time after you replacing the lamp, if the light
intensity is insufficient, replace the lamp immediately. It will take about 10 minutes to
perform this procedure.
Purpose
To ensure that the lamp works normally.
When to do
You are recommended to perform this procedure every 6 months or when you find that
the lamp does not satisfy the requirements after performing the Photometer Check.
Materials required
New lamp
System status
Make sure that the system status is Standby or Stopped.
Precautions
CAUTION
Too hot lamp may burn you. Do not replace the lamp until it gets cool.
Do not touch the light entrance on the lamp housing or the lens in front of the lamp. In
case the light entrance is dirty, use cotton swabs moistened with absolute ethanol to
clean it.
How to do
2 Choose Replace Lamp. The maintenance guide window pops up. Select Continue.
3 Make sure that the lamp has cooled down for 5 minutes, and then select Continue.
4 Remove the cover plate of the lamp.
5 Wear a pair of cotton or antistatic gloves, loosen the nuts on the cable terminals, and
then remove the O-ring connectors from the terminals.
6 Loosen the retaining screw on the left side of the lamp.
7 Remove the lamp from the lamp housing.
CAUTION
Do not hold the lamp by its bulb to prevent contamination and damage.
8 Install the retaining screw, O-ring connectors, cable terminal nuts and lamp cover
plate in the reversed order.
9 Select Continue.
16-43
16 Maintenance
10 When the lamp is incubated, select Done.

Perform the Photometer Check procedure to ensure the system power is normal. For
more information, refer to 16.6.5 Photometer Check (page 16-29).
11 Select Scheduled Maintenance - Six-Month.

12 Mark the Select checkbox in the same row as Replace Lamp.
procedure.
Standby status.
17 Execute the Photometer Check maintenance command to check the lamp.
16.9.2 Replace Water Inlet Filter

When the water inlet filter is used for a long period, it may be blocked, influencing the
filtering effects. Replace the water inlet filter every 6 months.
Purpose
To replace the water inlet filter to ensure the good filtering effects.
When to do
Materials required
New water inlet filter
System status
How to do
1 Check that the system is powered off, or the system status is Incubation or Standby.
2 Turn off the power switch of the water supply module or water unit.
3 Prepare a new water inlet filter with connectors on its two ends.
4 Turn on the ball valve on the water supply module to release the remaining pressure.
When the pressure gauge indicates 0, turn off the ball value.
5 Press the tubing release button to remove the tubing from two ends of the old filter
assembly.
6 Wash the tubing and insert them into the new filter. Make sure that the filter is
installed in the same direction as the water flow.
7 Power on the water supply module, turn on the ball valve on it and wait for 5
minutes. When you see the water supply module is supplying water continuously
which signifies the normal working of the module, turn off its ball valve. Ensure that
the pressure gauge on the water supply module is about 0.25MPa.
Maintenance - Six-Month.
9 Mark the Select checkbox in the same row as Replace Water Inlet Filter.
16-44
16 Maintenance
procedure.
16.9.3 Replace Reference Electrode(For ISE Module)

The reference electrode is a consumable and has a limited life span. When used for a long
period or after measuring a large number of samples, it may have its performance
degraded and should be replaced immediately. It will take about 5 minutes to perform this
procedure.
Purpose
To replace the reference electrode to ensure the optimal measurement performance.
When to do
Replace the electrodes in the following conditions:
 when 10,000 ISE tests are performed, or the instrument is used for 6 months.
 when calibration fails or quality control is abnormal as the result of degraded
electrode performance.
Materials required
Reference electrode
System status
Precautions
BIOHAZARD
How to do
2 Choose Replace Electrode.
3 Select reference electrode, and enter the lot number and expiration date. Select Add
and then select OK.
4 Take out the insert from the new reference electrode, and ensure no crystallized salt
exists in and around it. If needed, clean the electrode with warm water. Meanwhile
make sure the red ball of the reference electrode floats on the internal fluid. Make
sure the O rings of all electrodes remain intact.
5 Select Continue.
6 Open the ISE side door and remove the cover of the shielding box.
7 Open the electrode case, take out the electrode, remove the tapes around its inside,
and then use clean tissue to wipe it.
8 Remove all electrodes from the ISE module.
9 Replace the old electrode and then press the compressor; place the reference
electrode at the bottom of the ISE module and make the rear part of the electrode
contact closely with the internal wall of the ISE module. Loosen the compressor and
ensure the electrodes are fixed tightly.
10 Restore other electrodes in the order of Cl, K, Na and spacer from bottom to top.
16-45
16 Maintenance
NOTE
The Na, K and Cl electrodes are of the same size and shape. Ensure that the
electrodes are inserted in the correct order. If one of the electrodes cannot be
easily pushed into the housing, check the electrode first and then repeat the
installation process.
11 Select Continue.
NOTE
The new electrode can be calibrated successfully only after certain time period (at
least 30 minutes).
12 Select Done.
13 Restore the cover of the shielding box and close the side door of the ISE module.
14 Run ISE calibration.
15 Select Scheduled Maintenance - Other.
16 Mark the Select checkbox in the same row as Replace Reference Electrode.
procedure.
16-46
16 Maintenance
16.10 As-Needed/As-Required Maintenance

16.10.1 Clean Analyzer Panels
The analyzer and computer are often accessed and easily get dirty. To keep a good
operating environment and minimize the biohazards, clean the components that are
often accessed, such as analyzer panel, carousel cover, screen, keyboard, etc.
Purpose
To clean the analyzer panels, carousel covers, screen and keyboard.
When to do
Perform this procedure when dust or other stains are found on the components.
Materials required
Clean gauze, screen wash solution, and deionized water
System status
Precautions
Warning
Do not spill liquid on the analyzer. Liquid ingression may cause equipment damage.
BIOHAZARD
How to do
1 Make sure that the system is not running tests, and then open the protective shield.
2 Use clean gauze moistened with ethanol to clean the analyzer panels and carousel
covers.
3 Use wash solution to clean the screen and keyboard.
4 Restore the protective shield.
6 Mark the Select checkbox in the same row as Clean Analyzer Panels.
procedure.
16.10.2 Clean Sample Compartment

When samples are sprayed into the sample compartment, or dusts accumulate inside the
compartment, clean them immediately in order to minimize the risks of cross
contamination.
16-47
16 Maintenance
Purpose
To clean the sample carousel assembly to ensure clear operating environment and
eliminate the risks of cross contamination.
When to do
Perform this procedure when samples are spilled into the sample compartment or dust is
found inside of it.
Materials required
Clean gauze, deionized water, ethanol, and cotton swabs
System status
Make sure that the system is not running any tests.
Precautions
Warning
Do not spill water or ethanol into the sample compartment to prevent equipment
damage.
BIOHAZARD
How to do
1 Make sure that the system is not running any tests.
2 Remove the sample carousel cover and sample carousel, and then store them
properly.
3 Use clean gauze soaked with deionized water or ethanol to clean the interior of the
sample compartment. If necessary, you can use gauze moistened with neutral wash
solution.
4 Use clean gauze soaked with deionized water or ethanol to clean the sample carousel,
and then use cotton swabs dipped with ethanol to clean the sample positions.
5 Install the sample carousel and the carousel cover.
7 Mark the Select checkbox in the same row as Clean Sample Compartment.
procedure.
16.10.3 Clean Reagent Compartment

When reagents are sprayed into the reagent compartment, or dusts accumulate inside the
compartment, clean them immediately in order to minimize the risks of cross
contamination.
16-48
16 Maintenance
Purpose
To clean the reagent carousel assembly to ensure clear operating environment and
eliminate the risks of cross contamination.
When to do
Perform this procedure when reagents are spilled into the reagent compartment or dust
is found inside of it.
Materials required
System status
Precautions
Warning
Do not spill water or ethanol into the reagent compartment to prevent equipment
damage.
BIOHAZARD
How to do
1 Make sure that the system is not running any tests.
2 Remove the reagent carousel cover and reagent carousel, and then store them
properly.
3 Use clean gauze soaked with deionized water or ethanol to clean the interior of the
reagent compartment. If necessary, you can use gauze moistened with neutral wash
solution.
4 Use clean gauze soaked with deionized water or ethanol to clean the reagent
carousel, and then use cotton swabs dipped with ethanol to clean the reagent
positions.
5 Install the reagent carousel and the carousel cover.
7 Mark the Select checkbox in the same row as Clean Reagent Compartment.
procedure.
16.10.4 Clean Sample Probe Interior

The sample probe, once blocked, cannot aspirate or dispense sample correctly. When you
find that the sample probe is clogged and cannot aspirate or dispense sample, or when
the sample probe is detected with abnormal liquid flow through the Check
Probes/Mixers maintenance, perform this procedure to solve the problems.
16-49
16 Maintenance
Purpose
To clean the interior of the sample probe and avoid clogging.
When to do
Perform this procedure when you find that the sample probe is clogged and cannot
aspirate or dispense sample, or when the sample probe is detected with abnormal liquid
flow through the Check Probes/Mixers maintenance.
Materials required
Unclogging device (or needle), small slot-head screwdriver, small Philips-head screwdriver,
beaker, tweezers, deionized water, and thread syringe
System status
Make sure that the system status is not running any tests.
Precautions
BIOHAZARD
How to do
1 Recall the maintenance logs and check if the sample probe has been removed and
reinstalled for 3 times. If it has, prepare a new washer and moisten it with deionized
water. Store the washer properly to avoid being lost.
3 Loosen the screws on the arm cover and remove the cover from the arm base.
4 Press the circuit board with one hand and unplug the tube connector with the other
hand, and then use a small slot-head screwdriver to loosen the earthing wire on the
sample probe.
5 Use a small screwdriver to remove the retaining screw from the sample probe and
take out the spring.
6 While holding the connector on the sample probe with one hand, unscrew the tube
connector counterclockwise with the other hand until the tube connector is
disconnected. Remove the tube from the sample probe.
Exercise caution to prevent the washer from dropping out. If the washer drops out,
store it in a clear place for later installation. To replace the washer, take it out from
the tube connector.
7 Remove the sample probe.

8 Connect the unclogging device to the sample probe, fill the syringe with deionized
water and then connect it to the unclogging device. Put the sample probe inside the
beaker while keeping the probe tip not contacting the beaker. Push the syringe to
rinse the interior of the sample probe. Repeat this step for 10 times.
If the syringe plunger leaks and the sample probe cannot be unclogged due to serious
blockage, replace the sample probe.
9 When continuous water flow comes out of the sample probe in the same direction
with the probe, it indicates the cleaning procedure is finished successfully. Remove
the unclogging device. If water flow is still abnormal after unclogging, replace the
sample probe with a new one.
16-50
16 Maintenance
10 Insert the sample probe downwards into the hole on the probe arm while aligning
the screw hole on the probe plate to the rod inside the arm.
11 To replace the washer, remove the old one from the tube connector and install the
new one. Connect the tube connector to the sample probe and then tighten it.
12 Fix the earthing wire of the sample probe to the earthing terminal inside the arm;
connect the probe connector to the liquid level detection board.
13 Sleeve the spring on the rod and tighten the retaining screw. Pay attention to the
spring direction and make the thread opening face downwards.
14 Pinch the sample probe by the part near the probe arm. Push the sample probe
upwards and then release it to check if the spring works well.
 If it does, proceed to the next step.
 If not, check if the spring is clamped or fixed too tightly.
15 Switch on the analyzing unit power, and then check if the No.D2 LED indicator on
the circuit board inside the probe arm is lit.
 If it is, the liquid level detection system is normal.
 If not, the liquid level detection system is abnormal. Contact our customer
16 Install the probe arm cover properly until you hear a click, and then tighten the
screws on it.
 It not, it indicates that the arm cover is not installed correctly. Reinstall the arm
cover and check the spring until it can move freely.
18 Execute the Home maintenance command or the Home system command. Check if
the water flow coming out of the sample probe is continuous and in the same
direction as the probe. If it is not, perform the Check Probes/Mixers procedure to
troubleshoot the problems.
Maintenance - Other.
20 Mark the Select checkbox to the right of Clean Sample Probe Interior.
procedure.
Standby status.
16.10.5 Clean Reagent Probe Interior

The reagent probe, once blocked, cannot aspirate or dispense reagent correctly. It is
necessary to clean the reagent probe interior at times.
Purpose
To clean the interior of the reagent probe and avoid clogging.
16-51
16 Maintenance
When to do
Perform this procedure when you find that a reagent probe is clogged and cannot
aspirate or dispense sample, or when a reagent probe is detected with abnormal liquid
flow through the Check Probes/Mixers maintenance.
Materials required
Unclogging device (or needle), small slot-head screwdriver, small Philips-head screwdriver,
beaker, tweezers, deionized water, and thread syringe
System status
Precautions
BIOHAZARD
How to do
1 Recall the maintenance logs and check if the reagent probe has been removed and
reinstalled for 3 times. If it has, prepare a new washer and moisten it with deionized
water. Store the washer properly to avoid being lost.
3 Clean the reagent probe by referring to step 3 to 18 in 16.10.4 Clean Sample Probe
Interior.
5 Mark the Select checkbox to the right of Clean Reagent Probe Interior.
procedure.
Standby status.
16.10.6 Replace Sample Probe

Replace the sample probe when it is damaged and cannot be repaired, or blocked
seriously, or bent.
Purpose
To replace the sample probe.
When to do
Perform this procedure when the sample probe is damaged and cannot be repaired due
to the following causes, such as serious blockage, or bending.
Materials required
Small slot-head screwdriver, small Philips-head screwdriver, tweezers, and new sample
probe
System status
16-52
16 Maintenance
Precautions
Warning
BIOHAZARD
How to do
1 Prepare the new sample probe. Recall the maintenance logs and check if the sample
probe has been removed and reinstalled for 3 times. If it has, prepare a new washer
and moisten it with deionized water. Store the washer properly to avoid being lost.
3 Loosen the screws on the arm cover and remove the cover from the arm base.
4 Press the circuit board with one hand and unplug the tube connector with the other
hand, and then use a small slot-head screwdriver to loosen the earthing wire on the
sample probe.
5 Use a small screwdriver to remove the retaining screw from the sample probe and
take out the spring.
6 While holding the connector on the sample probe with one hand, unscrew the tube
connector counterclockwise with the other hand until the tube connector is
disconnected. Remove the tube from the sample probe.
Exercise caution to prevent the washer from dropping out. If the washer drops out,
store it in a clear place for later installation. To replace the washer, take it out from
the tube connector.
7 Remove the sample probe.
8 Insert the sample probe downwards into the hole on the probe arm while aligning
the screw hole on the probe plate to the rod inside the arm.
9 To replace the washer, remove the old one from the tube connector and install the
new one. Connect the tube connector to the sample probe and then tighten it.
10 Fix the earthing wire of the sample probe to the earthing terminal inside the arm;
connect the probe connector to the liquid level detection board.
11 Sleeve the spring on the rod and tighten the retaining screw. Pay attention to the
spring direction and make the thread opening face downwards.
 If not, check if the spring is clamped or fixed too tightly.
13 Switch on the analyzing unit power, and then check if the No.D2 LED indicator on
the circuit board inside the probe arm is lit.
 If it is, the liquid level detection system is normal.
 If not, the liquid level detection system is abnormal. Contact our customer
14 Install the probe arm cover properly until you hear a click, and then tighten the
screws on it.
16-53
16 Maintenance
15 Execute the Home maintenance command or the Home system command. Check if
the water flow coming out of the sample probe is continuous and in the same
direction as the probe. If it is not, perform the Check Probes/Mixers procedure to
troubleshoot the problems.
17 Mark the Select checkbox in the same row as Replace Sample Probe.
procedure.
Standby status.
16.10.7 Replace Reagent Probes

Replace the reagent probes when they are damaged and cannot be repaired, or blocked
seriously, or bent.
Purpose
To replace the reagent probes.
Materials required
Small slot-head screwdriver, small Philips-head screwdriver, tweezers, and new reagent
probe
System status
Precautions
Warning
BIOHAZARD
How to do
1 Prepare the new reagent probe. Recall the maintenance logs and check if the reagent
probe has been removed and reinstalled for 3 times. If it has, prepare a new washer
and moisten it with deionized water. Store the washer properly to avoid being lost.
3 Replace the reagent probe by referring to step 3 to 15 in 16.10.6 Replace Sample
Probe (page 16-52).
5 Mark the Select checkbox to the right of Replace Probe R1 or Replace Probe R2.
16-54
16 Maintenance
procedure.
Standby status.
16.10.8 Replace Sample Mixer

Replace the sample mixer when they are bent or damaged and cannot be repaired.
Purpose
Replace the sample mixer.
When to do
Perform this procedure when the sample mixer are damaged and cannot be repaired.
Materials required
Ethanol, clean gauze, new sample mixer, mixer wrench
System status
Precautions
Warning
The mixer tips are sharp and may cause puncture wounds. To prevent injury, exercise
caution when working around the mixers.
BIOHAZARD
How to do
2 Gently pull the sample mixer to its highest point and rotate it to a position
convenient to operate.
3 Use one mixer wrench to hold the mixer by the flat area, use the other mixer wrench
to hold the lock nut, unscrew the lock nut counterclockwise to loosen the mixer, and
then pull the mixer downwards to remove it and remove the lock nut.
CAUTION
When trying to pull out the mixer, concentrate your force in the direction of the axis
on the mixer arm. Biased force may damage the mixer and/or the axis.
16-55
16 Maintenance
Figure 16.9 Removing the mixer
4 Align the new mixer to the bigger hole of the retaining nut and gently screw it into
the nut until the end of the mixer is in line with the smaller hole of the nut.
Figure 16.10 Mixer and lock nut
Lock nut
Mixer
5 Pinch the mixer by the flat part and align the hole of the nut to the axis on the mixer
and push the nut onto the mixer until it reaches the end of the mixer. Use one mixer
wrench to hold the mixer by the flat area, use the other mixer wrench to hold the
lock nut, and then screw the lock nut clockwise to tighten the mixer.
CAUTION
When trying to push the mixer into the arm, concentrate your force in the direction
of the axis on the mixer arm. Biased force may damage the mixer and/or the axis.
Ensure the mixer is all the way pushed to the end.
When tightening the lock nut with the mixer wrench, use even force to prevent
beding the mixer rotor.
6 After replacing the bar, visually check whether the mixer is vertical to the bar arm.
 If not, remove the mixer and reinstall it.
 If so, proceed to the next step.
7 Pull the mixer arm to its highest point and rotate it back to a position above its wash
well.
8 Turn on the analyzing unit power switch.
9 Select Utility - Command; Perform the Home maintenance procedure.
16-56
16 Maintenance
11 Mark the Select checkbox in the same row as Replace Sample mixer.
procedure.
16.10.9 Replace Reagent Mixer

Replace the reagent mixer when they are bent or damaged and cannot be repaired.
Purpose
Replace the reagent mixer.
When to do
Perform this procedure when the reagent mixer are damaged and cannot be repaired.
Materials required
Ethanol, clean gauze, new reagent mixer, mixer wrench
System status
Precautions
Warning
The mixer tips are sharp and may cause puncture wounds. To prevent injury, exercise
caution when working around the mixers.
BIOHAZARD
How to do
2 Replace the reagent mixer by referring to step 2 to 9 in 16.10.9 Replace Reagent
Mixer (page 16-57).
3 Select Utility - Command - Home.
5 Mark the Select checkbox in the same row as Replace Reagent mixer.
procedure.
16.10.10 Remove Air Bubbles in Sample Syringe

Purpose
To remove the air bubbles possibly existing inside the tubes and clean/prime the probes,
mixers and wash wells. It will take about 10 minutes to perform this procedure.
16-57
16 Maintenance
When to do
Perform this procedure when you find air bubbles inside the sample syringe.
Materials required
Deionized water and beaker
System status
Precautions
BIOHAZARD
How to do
1 Switch off the analyzing unit power, and open the front door of the analyzer.
2 Loosen counterclockwise the four retaining screws on top of the syringe, and then
remove the screws and the fixing blocks.
3 Loosen counterclockwise the retaining screw at the bottom of the syringe and then
remove it.
4 Hold the T piece with one hand and the syringe connector with the other hand.
Loosen the syringe counterclockwise and then remove the washer.
5 Soak the syringe connector in the deionized water beaker, pull the plunger head to
aspirate half syringe of deionized water, and then push the plunger head to remove
the air. Repeat this pull-push operation until the air bubbles are removed from the
syringe. Fill the syringe with half cylinder of deionized water to prevent new
bubbles.
6 Put the washer in the T piece. Hold the T piece with one hand and the syringe
connector with the other hand, and then screw the T piece clockwise.
7 Install the syringe on the bracket.
8 Install the fixing blocks and 4 retaining screws while having the retaining screws not
tightened.
9 Align the plunger head to the retaining screw at the bottom of the syringe, and then
tighten clockwise the retaining screw.
10 Pinch the plunger guide cap to adjust the syringe height. For the sample syringe,
make the syringe head over the upper fixing block for 7.5 scales; for the reagent
syringes, make the syringe head over the upper fixing block for 15 scales.
11 Tighten the four retaining screws on the fixing blocks.
13 Perform the Home maintenance procedure. Check the new syringe for leak and
bubbles, and if there is, perform the Check Sample/Reagent Syringes procedure.
16 Mark the Select checkbox in the same row as Remove Air Bubbles in Sample
Syringe.
16-58
16 Maintenance
procedure.
16.10.11 Remove Air Bubbles in Reagent Syringe

Purpose
To remove the air bubbles possibly existing inside the tubes and clean/prime the probes,
mixers and wash wells. It will take about 10 minutes to perform this procedure.
When to do
Perform this procedure when you find air bubbles inside the reagent syringe.
Materials required
Deionized water and beaker
System status
Precautions
BIOHAZARD
How to do
1 Switch off the analyzing unit power, and open the front door of the analyzer.
2 Remove the air bubbles in reagent syringe by referring to step 2 to 14 in 16.10.10
Remove Air Bubbles in Sample Syringe (page 16-57).
4 Mark the Select checkbox in the same row as Remove Air Bubbles in Reagent
Syringe.
procedure.
16.10.12 Replace Cuvette

The reaction cuvettes, if contaminated by serum or other stains, or scratched or damaged,
will result in inaccurate photometric measurement. Check the reaction cuvettes regularly,
and if necessary, replace them immediately. It will take about half a minute to replace a
cuvette.
Purpose
To ensure that the cuvettes are normal and not contaminated, scratched or damaged.
When to do
Replacing cuvettes is performed as needed or as required. Replace a cuvette if,
 it is detected abnormal through the Cuvette Check procedure; or
 scratches or cracks are found on the optical surface of the cuvette.
16-59
16 Maintenance
Materials required
Fiber-free gloves, dry cloth or gauze, and reaction cuvettes
System status
Make sure that the system status is Standby or Stopped.
Precautions
Warning
While installing the reaction cuvettes, exercise caution to avoid scratching them. Do not
touch the optical surface of the reaction cuvettes. If the optical surface is polluted, the
obtained absorbance may be inaccurate.
While installing the reaction cuvettes, make sure that the optical surface is confronted
with the outside of the reaction carousel.
Wear gloves free of fibre and powder to avoid polluting the optical surface of the
reaction cuvettes.
BIOHAZARD
CAUTION
NOTE
If a cuvette cannot be removed from the reaction carousel, remove 1 or 2 cuvettes to the
right of the cuvette, use a knife to remove the metal plate next to it, and then use your
hands or tweezers to take out the cuvette.
When serious problems occur such as overflow and require the reaction cuvettes to be
maintained, contact our customer service department or your local distributor.
How to do
2 Choose Replace Cuvette.
3 Select Continue.
4 Remove the reaction carousel cover.
5 Type in the position number of the cuvette you want to replace.
The input range is 1-124. Only one position number can be entered each time.
6 Select Replace.
7 Wear a pair of gloves and remove the specified cuvette by pulling it outwards.
8 Install the provided or cleaned cuvette to the reaction carousel and make sure that
the cuvette bottom can no longer proceed.
9 Restore the reaction carousel cover.
10 Select Done. The system resets mechanically.
11 Perform the Cuvette Check procedure to check if the new cuvettes meet the
requirements.
16-60
16 Maintenance
For more information, refer to 16.6.4 Cuvette Check (page 16-27).

13 Mark the Select checkbox in the same row as Replace Cuvette.
procedure.
16.10.13 Special Wash Probes

Purpose
To eliminate cross contamination among the sample probe and reagent probe, and
prevent waste from leaving in the waste tubes.
When to do
Perform this procedure when the probes are clogged or the carryover result exceeds the
limit.
Materials required
Concentrated wash solution
System status
How to do
2 Place more than 45ml concentrated wash solution in position D of the reagent
carousel, and place more than 3ml concentrated wash solution in position D2 on the
sample carousel.
4 Choose Special Wash Probes.
5 Select Special Wash Reagent Probe R1/R2 and Special Wash Sample Probe, and then
select Continue.
6 Set the wash times (1~100).
7 Set the sample probe wash solution volume as 45μl or 90μl.
8 Select Continue.
The system resets and then cleans the two probes.
9 When the cleaning is finished, select Done.

12 Mark the Select checkbox in the same row as Special Wash Probes.
procedure.
16-61
16 Maintenance
16.10.14 Bar Code Maintenance

This maintenance procedure is used to clean the sample and reagent bar code scanning
windows in order to avoid influencing bar code scanning.
Purpose
To clean the glass of the sample and reagent bar code scanning windows in order to avoid
influencing bar code scanning.
When to do
This maintenance should be performed if the glass of the sample or reagent bar code
scanning window is contaminated and causes bar code scanning failure.
Materials required
System status
Precautions
BIOHAZARD
CAUTION
Exercise caution not to spray water or ethanol or other liquids on the glass of the bar
code scanning window.
How to do
1 Remove the sample/reagent carousel covers and the carousels.
2 Use clean gauze to clean the bar code reader window inside the sample compartment
and reagent compartment. If necessary, you can use gauze soaked with ethanol or
deionized water. Make sure that there is no trace or dust left on the glass.
3 Install the carousels and carousel covers.
5 Mark the Select checkbox in the same row as Bar Code Maint.
procedure.
16.10.15 Clean Probes/Mixers Exterior

It is necessary to clean the probes and mixers exterior after maintaining them as well as
the wash wells, to remove air bubbles from the tubes.
Purpose
To clean the exterior of the probes and mixers to remove air bubbles.
When to do
This procedure should be performed after maintenance of probes, mixers and wash wells.
16-62
16 Maintenance
System status
Precautions
BIOHAZARD
How to do
2 Choose Clean Probes/Mixers Exterior.
3 Input the wash cycle (1~100).
4 Select Continue.
5 Select Done.
16.10.16 Replace ISE Electrode

ISE electrodes are consumables and have a limited life span. When used for a long period
or after measuring a large number of samples, the ISE electrodes may have their
performance degraded and should be replaced immediately. It will take about 10 minutes
to perform this procedure.
Purpose
To replace the ISE electrodes to ensure the optimal measurement performance.
When to do
Replace the electrodes in the following conditions:
 when 10,000 ISE tests are performed, or the instrument is used for 6 months.
 when calibration fails or quality control is abnormal as the result of degraded
electrode performance.
Materials required
ISE electrode
System status
Precautions
BIOHAZARD
NOTE
After performing this procedure, recalibrate the ISE electrodes prior to starting analysis.
How to do
2 Choose Replace Electrode.
3 Select desired electrodes, and enter the lot number and expiration date. Select Add
and then select OK.
16-63
16 Maintenance
4 Select Continue.
6 Open the electrode case, take out the electrode, remove the tapes around its inside,
and then use clean tissue to wipe it.
NOTE
Take out the insert from the reference electrode, and ensure no crystallized salt
exists in and around it. If needed, clean the electrode with warm water. Meanwhile
make sure the red ball of the reference electrode floats on the internal fluid. Make
sure the O rings of all electrodes remain intact.
8 Replace the old electrode and then press the compressor; place the reference
electrode at the bottom of the ISE module and make the rear part of the electrode
contact closely with the internal wall of the ISE module. Loosen the compressor and
ensure the electrodes are fixed tightly.
9 Restore other electrodes in the order of Cl, K, Na and spacer from bottom to top.
10 Select Continue.
NOTE
The new electrode can be calibrated successfully only after certain time period (at
least 30 minutes). Some electrodes need to be activated by serum before
calibration.
11 Select Done.
NOTE
The Na, K and Cl electrodes are of the same size and shape. Ensure that the
electrodes are inserted in the correct order. If one of the electrodes cannot be
easily pushed into the housing, check the electrode first and then repeat the
installation process.
13 Run ISE calibration.
15 Mark the Select checkbox in the same row as Replace ISE Electrode.
procedure.
16.10.17 Remove Reagent Pack (For ISE Module)

When powering off the analyzer for a long time, or storing the electrodes, or replacing the
electrode tubes, remove the reagent pack first.
When to do
Perform this maintenance procedure when powering off the analyzer for a long time, or
storing the electrodes, or replacing the electrode tubes.
16-64
16 Maintenance
System status
How to do
2 Choose Remove Reagent Pack.
3 Remove the tube of pump A and then reinstall the tube by switching the connectors
of the tube. Handle pump B in the same way.
4 Select Continue.
5 Install the tubes of pump A and B in the reverse direction and then select Continue.
The system executes purge A and B each for 30 times.
6 Restore the reversed pump tubes.

7 Install the three red caps on the tube connectors of the reagent pack, and keep the
reagent pack at room temperature away from sunshine.
8 Select Continue.
9 Select Done.
11 Mark the Select checkbox in the same row as Remove Reagent Pack.
procedure.
16.10.18 Store Electrodes (For ISE Module)

Before the analyzer is powered off for a long time or after the reagent pack is removed,
the ISE electrodes cannot be moistened by regular prime, and may be damaged due to lack
of water. It is necessary to store the electrodes properly before powering off the analyzer
for a long period.
Purpose
To store the electrodes separately to prevent them from being damaged due to lack of
water while the analyzer is powered off.
Materials required
Electrode cases and tapes
When to do
Perform this procedure when the analyzer is going to be powered off for over 3 days. If it
will be powered off for no more than 3 days, prime the ISE electrodes to protect them
from being damaged.
System status
Precautions
BIOHAZARD
16-65
16 Maintenance
How to do
1 Remove the reagent pack according to 16.10.17 Remove Reagent Pack (Page 16-64).
3 Choose Store Electrodes.
4 Select Continue.
NOTE
Reference electrode: Put back the insert to the cell of the reference electrode and
prevent the crystallized salt from clogging the cell. And then store the electrode in
an electrode case at the room temperature in a sun-shielding place.
Na, K, Cl electrode: Take out a little calibrator A from the reagent pack, inject it
into the cell of the electrode and seal it with tape. Make sure proper amount of
calibrator is injected into the cell of the electrode. Store the capped electrodes in
an electrode case at the room temperature in a sun-shielding place.
Note the storage temperature should be below 40℃.
7 Select Continue.
9 Select Done.
11 Mark the Select checkbox in the same row as Store Electrodes.
procedure.
16.10.19 Two-Point Calibration (For ISE Module)

The Two-point Calibration option is used to calibrate the ISE module with calibrator A
and B.
2 Choose Two-point Calibration.
When the calibration is finished, the progress box is closed automatically, and the
calibration results are displayed in the data list.
16.10.20 Maintenance (For ISE Module)

The Maintenance option is used during electrode replacement to discharge the calibrator
from the inside of the electrodes. The auto prime for every 30 minutes will stop.
2 Choose Maint.
The maintenance results are displayed in the data list.
16-66
16 Maintenance
16.10.21 Purge A (For ISE Module)

The Purge A option makes the peristaltic pump dispense 100μl calibrator A to the sample
injection port and then to the inside of the electrodes.
2 Choose Purge A.
The purge results are displayed in the data list.
16.10.22 Purge B (For ISE Module)

The Purge B option makes the peristaltic pump dispense 100μl calibrator B to the sample
injection port and then to the inside of the electrodes.
2 Choose Purge B.
The purge results are displayed in the data list.
16.10.23 Replace Pump Tube and Calibrator Tube

Purpose
To replace the aging peristaltic pump tube and calibrator tube.
When to do
This maintenance procedure will be performed by our service personnel every year. The
pump tube will be replaced every 6 months, and the calibrator tube every 12 months.
Materials required
Peristaltic pump tube and calibrator tube
System status
Precautions
BIOHAZARD
How to do
1 Remove the reagent pack according to 16.10.17 Remove Reagent Pack (Page 16-64).
3 Choose Replace Tubes and Pump and Calibrator.
4 Select Continue.
5 Select the tube type that you want to replace and then select OK.
6 Replace the old tube with a new one. Make sure the connectors and tubes are
correctly connected; otherwise ISE module failure may occur.
7 Select Continue.
8 After replacing the tubes, please load the reagent pack. Select Continue.
9 Select Done.
16-67
16 Maintenance
16.10.24 Program Check Instruction (For ISE Module)

The Program Check Instruction option is used to query the software version of the ISE
module.
2 Choose Program Check Instruction.
The query results are displayed in the data list.
16.10.25 Read Dallas Chip (For ISE Module)

The Read Dallas Chip option is used to read information from the reagent pack chip.
2 Choose Read Dallas Chip.
The read information is displayed in the data list.
16.10.26 Write Dallas Chip (For ISE Module)

The Read Dallas Chip option is used to write information to the reagent pack chip.
2 Choose Write Dallas Chip.
The written information is displayed in the data list.
16.10.27 Replace Sample Syringe

The sample syringe has a limited life span, and when due, may have leak or other
phenomena causing inaccurate aspirating/dispensing and resulting in unreliable results.
Purpose
To replace the syringe assembly to ensure optimal measuring performance.
When to do
Perform this procedure when the syringe is used for 100,000 times, or has leak or other
abnormal phenomena.
Materials required
Deionized water, beaker, and syringe assembly
System status
Precautions
BIOHAZARD
How to do
1 Prepare a new syringe assembly and washer, put the plunger head in the deionized
water beaker to remove air from the syringe, and then moisten the washer in the
deionized water.
16-68
16 Maintenance
3 Open the front door of the analyzer. You will see three syringes, reagent syringes to
the left of the water tank and sample syringe to the right.
4 Loosen counterclockwise the four retaining screws on top of the syringe, and then
remove the screws and the fixing blocks.
5 Loosen counterclockwise the retaining screw at the bottom of the syringe and then
remove it.
6 Hold the T piece with one hand and the syringe connector with the other hand.
Loosen the syringe counterclockwise and then remove the washer.
7 Soak the new syringe connector in the deionized water beaker, pull the plunger head
to aspirate half syringe of deionized water, and then push the plunger head to
remove the air.
8 If there is no washer inside the T piece, put the new washer in the T piece. Hold the
T piece with one hand and the syringe connector with the other hand, and then
screw the T piece clockwise.
9 Install the syringe on the bracket.
10 Install the fixing blocks and 4 retaining screws while having the retaining screws not
tightened.
11 Align the plunger head to the retaining screw at the bottom of the syringe, and then
tighten clockwise the retaining screw.
12 Pinch the plunger guide cap to adjust the syringe height. For the sample syringe,
make the syringe head over the upper fixing block for 7.5 scales; for the reagent
syringes, make the syringe head over the upper fixing block for 15 scales.
13 Tighten the four retaining screws on the fixing blocks.
15 Perform the Home maintenance procedure. Check if the new syringe has leak. If it
does, perform the Check Sample/Reagent Syringes procedure to check the syringe.
18 Mark the Select checkbox to the right of Replace Sample Syringe.
procedure.
16.10.28 Replace Reagent Syringes

The reagent syringes have a limited life span, and when due, may have leak or other
phenomena causing inaccurate aspirating/dispensing and resulting in unreliable results.
Purpose
To replace the reagent syringes to ensure optimal measuring performance.
16-69
16 Maintenance
When to do
Perform this procedure when the syringes are used for 300,000 times, or has leak or
other abnormal phenomena.
Materials required
Deionized water, beaker, and syringe assembly
System status
Precautions
BIOHAZARD
How to do
1 Prepare a new syringe assembly and washer, put the plunger head in the deionized
water beaker to remove air from the syringe, and then moisten the washer in the
deionized water.
3 Replace the reagent syringe by referring to step 3 to 16 in 16.10.27 Replace Sample
Syringe(page 16-68).
5 Mark the Select checkbox to the right of Replace R1 Syringe or Replace R2
Syringe.
procedure.
16.10.29 Clean Rotors

Clean the rotors of the sample probe, reagent probe and mixers to eliminate noise and
fraying.
Purpose
Clean the rotors of the probes and mixers to minimize noise and fraying due to
movement in order to extend the service life.
When to do
This procedure should be performed when there are dirty substances or dust on the
rotors.
Materials required
Clean gauze
System status
16-70
16 Maintenance
Precautions
Warning
The probe and mixer tip are sharp and may cause puncture wounds. To prevent injury,
exercise caution when working around the probes and mixers.
BIOHAZARD
How to do
2 Pull the probe/mixer arm to the highest point, and then rotate the arm to move the
probe/mixer to a position convenient to operate.
3 Wipe the rotor with clean gauze.
5 Select Utility - Commands - Home to reset the probes and mixers.
7 Mark the Select checkbox in the same row as Clean Rotors.
procedure.
16.10.30 Clean ISE Waste Tube

Samples containing insoluble substance like fibrin may accumulate in the ISE wand waste
outlet after extended usage and clog the waste tube.
Purpose
Clean the waste tube of ISE module to prevent the sediment inside from clogging the tube.
When to do
When the alarm “No fluid in tube” or “Air in calibrator A” or “Air in calibrator B” occurs
and the waste tube is clogged.
Materials required
Unclogging tool for the ISE waste tube, bleaching agent(Dilution Ratio 1:1) or 50%
sodium hypochlorite and DI water
System status
Make sure that the system is not running test.
Precautions
Warning
Do not spill liquid on the analyzer. Liquid ingression may cause equipment damage.
16-71
16 Maintenance
BIOHAZARD
Note
Excessive bleach and DI water flushed into the ISE reagent pack waste bag may cause
waste bag over expansion and clog the Cal A & Cal B reagent flow.
To prevent this problem, connect to an old used-up reagent pack and follow the
procedures below.
How to do
1 Ensure the analyzer is on idle (standby) condition. Open the ISE cover on the right
side analyzer panel.
2 Remove the electrode housing cover. Remove the waste tube fitting from the bottom
of the right angle adaptor. Remove waste peri-pump tube from the pump bracket.
Refer to pictures below.
Right angle
Waste adaptor
peri-pump
3 Connect the waste tube fitting to a syringe and unclogging tool with 5 mL of
undiluted household bleach. Refer to pictures below.
16-72
16 Maintenance
Tube fitting form right angle adaptor
Unclogging Tool
4 Press the wand release button to remove the wand from the current in use ISE
reagent pack and keep it in a save place. Engage the wand to an old used-up reagent
pack.
5 Inject bleach into the ISE waste tube and soak the tube for 5 minutes. Discharge the
waste into the reagent pack.
Note: When the bleach cannot be injected into the ISE pack, remove the wand and
push down to open the waste valve manually with a sharp object, and then inject
again. If bleach can go through this time, the waste bag was clogged and cannot be
used. If bleach still cannot be injected, replacing the ISE wand is recommended.
Waste valve
6 Repeat this step with 5 mL of DI water without the 5 minutes of soaking time.
7 Remove the wand from the old use-up pack and re-install it back to the current in
use ISE pack. Re-install the waste tube fitting back to the ISE electrode housing right
angle adaptor and waste peri-pump tube back to the pump bracket. Re-install the
housing cover.
8 Calibrate ISE pump to ensure it passes, all reagents and waste flow are normal.
Calibrate all electrodes and run QC test to ensure they all pass within their given
range.
16-73
16 Maintenance
16-74
17 Alarms and Troubleshooting
The following pages describe how to view and edit error logs and edit logs, and how to
locate failure and determine relevant corrective actions. Read this chapter thoroughly to
achieve the best performance of the instrument.
17-1
17.1 Classification of Logs

17.1.1 Introduction
The logs provided by the system are divided into:
 Error log
 Edit log
17.1.2 Error Logs

Error logs record all types of failures occurring on the components.
Classification of failure
Failures are divided into the following types based on component, severity and
processing method:
Table 17.1 Classification of failure based on component
No. Failure by Component
1 Operating system
2 System communication
3 Database
4 Result calculation
5 Sample bar code
6 Reagent bar code
7 Host communication
8 Command execution
9 Sample probe unit
10 Probe R1 unit
11 Probe R2 unit
12 Sample mixer unit
13 Reagent mixer unit
14 Reaction carousel unit
15 Sample carousel unit
16 Reagent carousel unit
17 Wash station
18 Temperature unit
19 ISE unit
20 Light source
21 Cuvette wash station
22 Reagent refrigeration unit
23 Other
24 Home process
17-2
Table 17.2 Classification of failure based on severity

ID Failure by Severity Description
1 Warning Warning errors include:
 Errors to warn user
 Errors to invalidate tests
 Errors to invalidate samples
 Errors to invalidate reagents
2 Error This type of errors includes serious errors
other than warning errors.
Table 17.3 Classification of failure based on processing method

No. Failure by Processing Description
Method
1 Errors to warn user Such errors will not influence the system’s
running, and should be noticed.
2 Errors to invalidate tests Such errors indicate that the current tests are
invalidated due to the unqualified:
 Tests
 Reagents
 Samples
3 Errors to pause Such errors indicate that the failed component
needs to be diagnosed and restored, while other
components are not influenced. The errors may
occur on the following components:
 R1 aspirating and dispensing
 R2 aspirating and dispensing
 Sample carousel 1
 Sample carousel 2
 Sample probe
 Sample mixer
 Reagent mixer
 Wash unit
 Hydropneumatic assembly
 ISE module
4 Errors to stop a Such errors indicate that the failed part cannot
component work normally and should be checked
immediately. The components include:
 ISE module
 Reaction carousel
5 Errors to forbid a Such errors indicate that the failed unit is
component forbidden until it is restored. The components
include:
 LIS
 Sample bar code module
 Reagent bar code module
17-3
No. Failure by Processing Description

Method
6 Errors to exit When such error occurs, it indicates that the
operating software cannot be started, or an error
occurs during the startup.
You are allowed to exit the operating software or
restart it.
Error code
Each error has a unit code used for identification and locating probable causes and
solutions. An error code consists of 6 letters and numbers, such as “C01001”, in which “C”
indicates that the error occurs on the operation unit, “01” is the error description of
instrument connection, and “001” is the serial number of the error. Therefore, “C01001”
is described as “the first error of instrument connection on the operation unit”.
The following tables provide a summary of error codes for the operation unit and
analyzing unit.
Table 17.4 Error code of the operation unit
Error Code Description
C Indicates that the error occurs on the operation unit.
00-99 Indicates the specific component on which the error occurs.
 00-Operating system
 01- System communication
 02-Database
 03-Result calculation
 04-Sample bar code
 05-Reagent bar code
 06-LIS host communication
 07-Other
000-999 Serial number of the error.
Table 17.5 Error code of the analyzing unit

A Indicates that the error occurs on the analyzing unit.
00-99 Indicates the specific component on which the error occurs.
 00-Command execution
 01-Sample probe unit
 02-Probe R1 unit
 03-Probe R2 unit
 04-Sample mixer
 05-Reagent mixer
 06-Reaction carousel unit
 07-Sample carousel unit (including sample bar code module)
 09-Reagent carousel unit (including reagent bar code
module)
17-4

 11-Wash unit
 12-Temperature unit
 14-Reagent refrigeration unit
 15-Other
 21-Probe interior wash unit
 22-Home process or ISE unit
000-999 Serial number of the error.
Help
Every error log is provided with online help information. Select the icon in front of
an error log. The descriptions, possible causes and solutions of the error are displayed.
17.1.3 Edit Logs

Edit logs record all deletions and part of editing actions performed by the user.
The deleting logs record all deleting actions other than the error deletion.
The editing logs include editing of sample results and calibration factors.
17-5
17.2 Viewing and Handling Logs

All error logs and edit logs can be recalled, searched, refreshed, deleted and printed.
17.2.1 Description of Error Log Screen

Select Alarm in the function buttons area of the main screen. The Error Log screen is
displayed by default and shows all errors occurring on the current day.
Figure 17.1 Error Log screen
Every error log contains the event ID, date/time, error description (by processing
method), event class (by subsystem) and symptom.
 Search F1: to search for error logs by date, event ID, symptom, or event class.
 Refresh F2: to refresh the error logs based on the current search conditions.
 Delete F3: to remove specified error logs on the screen.
 Print F7: to print all error logs currently displayed on the screen.
17.2.2 Description of Edit Log Screen

Select Alarm - Edit Log. The Edit Log screen is displayed and shows all editing actions
occurring on the current day.
17-6
Figure 17.2 Edit Log screen
Every edit log contains the serial number, date/time, operator, event type and description.
 Search F1: to search for edit logs based on the occurring date.
 Refresh F2: to refresh the edit logs based on the current search conditions.
 Delete F3: to remove specified edit logs on the screen.
 Print F7: to print all edit logs currently displayed on the screen.
17.2.3 Recalling Logs

Error logs and edit logs can be recalled by all users in any system status. Error logs can be
recalled by date, event ID, symptom and event class, while edit logs can only be recalled by
occurring date.
Perform the following steps to recall desired event logs:
1 Select Alarm - Error Log or Edit Log.
2 Select Search F1.
3 Enter one or more of the following conditions:
 Date
 Event ID (available for error logs only)
 Symptom (available for error logs only)
 Event class (available for error logs only)
4 Select OK. The event logs satisfying the conditions are displayed on the screen.
 Refresh F2: to refresh the logs based on the current search conditions.
 Delete F3: to remove specified logs on the screen.
 Print F7: to print all logs currently displayed on the screen.
17-7
17.2.4 Refreshing Logs

To refresh the event logs, perform the following procedure:
2 Select Refresh F2.
3 The system refreshes the logs based on the previous search conditions.
 New error logs are displayed chronologically and highlighted by different colors.
Yellow indicates a warning, and red indicates a serious error.
 New edit logs are displayed chronologically on the front-most of the log list.
 Delete F3: to remove specified logs on the screen.
 Print F7: to print all logs currently displayed on the screen.
17.2.5 Clearing Logs

Since the system has a limited storage capacity, you should clear and manage the event
logs regularly to ensure that the most-recent and important logs are kept.
Only users with sufficient permissions are allowed to delete event logs. For more
information about user permissions, refer to 11.4.4 Assigning/Modifying Permissions
(page 11-6).
Perform the following steps to clear event logs:
2 Select event logs you desire to delete.
3 Select Delete F3.
4 Select OK. To abort the deleting, select Cancel.
When you confirm the deleting, the system removes the selected event logs from the
screen.
17.2.6 Printing Logs

After searching for desired logs on the Error Log or Edit Log screen, select Print F7. The
event logs currently displayed are printed out in the same format as shown on the screen.
Printing logs will take a long time and requires a great number of papers. Think twice
before printing logs.
To terminate the printing, select Utility - Commands - Stop Print.
17-8
17.3 Error Troubleshooting

17.3.1 Introduction
When an error occurs, it will be indicated in many ways. The following pages describe
how to troubleshoot errors and help you determine solutions to such errors.
Generally, troubleshooting is divided into the following steps:
 An error occurs and is indicated in various ways.
 Check the error logs and component status.
 Identify the error and determine relevant solutions.
 Implement the solutions.
 Check and evaluate the implementation of the solutions.
17.3.2 Error Indications

Errors may occur on hardware, software and the entire system. When an error occurs, it
will be indicated in many ways to help identify it and determine the possible causes and
solutions. Errors can be indicated by alarm tone, alarm message, color, alarm message box,
result flag and error log, through which you will obtain detailed information about errors
and find the relevant solutions.
Alarm tone
When an error occurs, the buzzer gives alarm tone reminding you to notice the error and
take corrective actions. Alarm tone can be adjusted manually or silenced.
Perform the following steps to adjust the alarm tone:
2 Adjust the alarm tone in the Alarm Volume field.
3 Test the alarm tone until it is satisfied.
4 To silence the alarm tone, drag the slider to the leftmost position of the scale.
5 Select Save F8 to save the adjustment.
Alarm message
When an error occurs, the system gives an alarm and displays the alarm message in the
second line of the prompt message area. For details of troubleshooting, refer to 17.5 Error
Messages and Corrective Actions (page 17-28).
Color highlight
An error will be indicated by highlighting relevant buttons and screen texts with different
colors. Yellow indicates a warning, and red indicates a serious warning or error.
 Reagent button
 Utility button
 Alarm button
Select a button to access relevant function page, check for abnormities and take corrective
actions. When the problem is solved, the alarm indication disappears.
17-9
Alarm message box

An error can also be shown in an alarm message box, which contains the date/time, event
ID, time(s) and help icon.
Errors that are indicated through an alarm message box are divided into the following
types:
 Common error: including those that are indicated by warning the user, and by
invalidating tests, reagents and samples. When such error occurs, the alarm message
box shows with the title bar highlighted in yellow.
 Serious error: including those except for the common error. When such error occurs,
the alarm message box shows with the title bar highlighted in red, and you are only
allowed to reboot or exit the system.
When an alarm message box appears, select the Alarm button to view the new error logs,
analyze the possible causes and determine relevant corrective actions.
Flag
Flag is also called data alarm. When calibration error or failure, or sample result error
occurs due to the sample, reagent or system failure, a flag will appear near the
corresponding calibration result or sample results.
Error log
All alarms are recorded in the error logs. By recalling the error logs you are enabled to
master the current status of the system and troubleshoot errors.
17.3.3 Identifying Errors

To identify errors, understand the error indication thoroughly, check the error logs and
system status, and then determine relevant solutions.
The table below shows the error types that may occur on the system. Find relevant
corrective actions according to the description.
Table 17.6 Error types
Error Type Description
Instrument failure and Instrument failure and error may be detected on all
error subsystems and processed in different ways. Such errors
are shown in the Error messages and corrective actions
table, and can be identified through the event ID.
Data alarm Data alarm is a flag indicating biochemistry or ISE
chemistry result error. The flags are included in the Result
flags table, and can be identified through the flag symbol.
17-10
17.4 Data Alarm

17.4.1 Introduction
Data alarm is a result flag indicating that an error or abnormity occurs to a result. By
identifying results flags can evaluate if the results are reliable and acceptable. Data alarm is
not necessarily an error but will definitely influence the result and should be considered
carefully.
The system provides monitoring of biochemistry results and ISE chemistry results. When
calibration error or failure, or sample result error occurs due to the sample, reagent or
system failure, a flag will appear near the corresponding calibration result or sample
results. The following pages summary the result flags of the system.
17-11
17-12
17.4.2 Result Flags

Table 17.7 Result flags and corrective actions
Flag Alarm Type Description Probable Causes Corrective Actions
< Result related Exceeds linearity range The result exceeds the low limit of the Take no actions, or rerun the
low linearity range. test for confirmation.
< ISE result Exceeds measurement Sample or control result exceeds the low limit Take no actions, or rerun the
related range low of the measurement range. test for confirmation.
> Result related Exceeds linearity range The result exceeds the high limit of the Rerun the test with sample
high linearity range. diluted or decreased.
> ISE result Exceeds measurement Sample or control result exceeds the high limit Rerun the test with sample
related range high of the measurement range. diluted or decreased.
▲ Result related Sample volume is Sample volume is Increased one No actions are required.
Increased one
▼ Result related Sample volume is Sample volume is decreased one No actions are required.
decreased one
^ Result related Exceeds reference range The result exceeds the high limit of the No actions are required.
high reference range.
^! Result related Exceeds critical range The result exceeds the high limit of the No actions are required.
high critical range.
v Result related Exceeds reference range The result exceeds the low limit of the No actions are required.
low reference range.
v! Result related Exceeds critical range The result exceeds the low limit of the critical No actions are required.
low range.
10-x Result related 10-x Results of five runs (10 results), or 10 Check if the reagent is
continuous results of a control are on the qualified, control sample is
same side. normal, and the instrument is
working correctly.
1-2s Result related 1-2s The current QC result is between ±2 and ±3 No actions are required.
standard deviations from the assigned mean
concentration.
17-13

1-3s Result related 1-3s The current QC result is greater than ±3 Check if the reagent is
standard deviations from the assigned mean qualified, control sample is
concentration. normal, and the instrument is
working correctly.
2-2s Result related 2-2s Results of two controls in the same run or two Check if the reagent is
continuous results of a control are on the qualified, control sample is
same side and greater than ±2 standard normal, and the instrument is
deviations from the assigned mean working correctly.
concentration.
4-1s Result related 4-1s Results of two runs (4 results), or 4 continuous Check if the reagent is
results of a control are on the same side and qualified, control sample is
greater than ±1 standard deviation from the normal, and the instrument is
assigned mean concentration. working correctly.
ABS Result related Absorbance out of range The absorbance of primary or secondary Check the sample for foreign
wavelength used for calculating results is matters or interferents; check
greater than 3.4A. if the reagent is qualified and
placed in the correct position;
check the cuvette is clean;
check if the photometric
system is working normally.
BLK Calibration Blank response out of The reagent goes wrong; insufficient reagent Check if the cuvette is not
related range is dispensed; the cuvette contains air bubbles; overflowed, the reagent is
the light drifts; or the cuvette is overflowed. sufficient without air bubbles,
the light does not drift and
the chemistry parameters are
reasonable. If yes, replace
the reagent and then rerun
the test.
BOE Result related Substrate depletion The sample concentration is too high, and Check the reaction curve and
substrate depletion occurs during fixed-time the substrate depletion limit.
measurements. Rerun the test with diluted
sample.
17-14

CalcE Result related Chemistries of the special Chemistries of the special calculation Check if the sample contains
calculation exceeding the exceeding the linear range. foreign matters such as clot
linear range. and if sample probe is
clogged. Check if the reagent
is expired. If there are no
above mentioned problem,
please rerun the test or run
the HbA1c test by manually
pretreating the sample.
CALE Result related Edited calibration factor The calibration factors are edited. No actions are required.
CALF Result related Calibration failed.(for The calibration fails. Recalibrate.
biochemistries)
CALF Result related No fluid in tubing 1. Waste pump tube is aging, blocked, or 1. Replace the reagent pack
broken； with a new one
2. Sample injection port and fluidic path are 2. Perform purge B to remove
blocked or leaking. bubbles
3. Air bubble detector failed. 3. /4. Replace the pump tube
5. Clean the sample injection
port and reinstall electrodes.
6. Replace the bubble
detector.
1. Place sufficient ISE wash

solution.
2. Replace the pump tube
detector.
17-15

CALF Calibration No fluid in tubing 1. Waste pump tube is aging, blocked, or 1. Replace the reagent pack
related broken； with a new one
2. Sample injection port and fluidic path are 2. Perform purge B to remove
blocked or leaking. bubbles
3. Air bubble detector failed. 3. /4. Replace the pump tube
detector.
1. Place sufficient ISE wash

solution.
2. Replace the pump tube
detector.
CALJ Calibration Rejected calibration The calibration factors are rejected. No actions are required.
related factor
CALM Result related Air in segment 1. Waste pump tube is aging, blocked, or 1. Replace the pump tube
broken； 2. Clean the sample injection
2. Sample injection port and fluidic path are port and reinstall electrodes.
blocked or leaking. 3. Replace the bubble
3. Air bubble detector failed. detector.
CALM Calibration Air in segment 1. Waste pump tube is aging, blocked, or 1. Replace the pump tube
related broken； 2. Clean the sample injection
2. Sample injection port and fluidic path are port and reinstall electrodes.
blocked or leaking. 3. Replace the bubble
3. Air bubble detector failed. detector.
CALR Result related Recalculated calibration The calibration factors are recalculated. No actions are required.
factor
17-16

COV Calibration Calibration curve not For nonlinear calibration, a satisfying base Check that the reagent and
related convergent cannot be calculated and no calibration curve calibrator are normal, and
is drawn. then recalibrate. If the error
remains, contact our
customer service department.
CSD Calibration Calibration curve The calculated standard deviation of the Check if the acceptance limit
related standard deviation out of calibration curve exceeds the specified limit. is reasonable and the reagent
range and calibrator are normal,
and then recalibrate.
DEL Calibration Deleted QC result The QC result has been deleted. No actions are required.
related
DET Calibration Calibration The calculated determination coefficient of Check if the acceptance limit
related determination coefficient the calibration curve exceeds the specified is reasonable and the reagent
out of range limit. and calibrator are normal,
DEP Calibration Saving calibration result 1. ISE communication cable failure. 1. Replace the ISE
related error 2. Communication interface or pins failure communication cable.
3. Main control board of the ISE module goes 2. Replace the interface or
wrong. pins.
4. Software error. 3. Replace the main control
board of the ISE module.
4. Upgrade the operating
software or reinstall it.
DTGL Result related Insufficient probe wash The probe wash solution is insufficient during Fill more probe wash solution.
solution measurement.
DUP Calibration Calibration repeatability The difference between the maximum and Check if the acceptance limit
related error minimum response of the calibrator exceeds is reasonable, troubleshoot
the specified limit. the error, and then
recalibrate.
EDT Result related Edited result The result has been edited. No actions are required.
17-17

EDT Calibration Edited calibration factor The calibration factors have been edited. No actions are required.
related
ENC Result related No calculation interval The sample concentration is too high, and Check the reaction curve and
substrate depletion occurs within the lag time the substrate depletion limit.
of rate check measurements. Rerun the test with diluted
sample.
EXP Result related Enzyme linearity range The high-concentration sample leads to Rerun the test with diluted
extension substrate depletion during the reaction time, sample.
and the result is calculated by using measuring
points within the lag time.
EXT Result related Extended calibration The result is obtained by extending the Take no actions, or
factor calibration time. recalibrate.
FAC Calibration Calibration slope The slope difference is applicable to linear Check if the acceptance limit
related difference out of range calibration only and refers to the K factor is reasonable and the reagent
(slope) difference between two adjacent and calibrator are normal,
calibrations. It exceeds the specified limit. and then recalibrate.
ICA Result related The response is normal, The chemistry has not been calibrated. Rerun it after calibration.
but results cannot be
calculated.
17-18

L! Result related Water blank fluctuation is 1. The cuvette is overflowing. 1. Check if the cuvette is
out of range. 2. The lamp has been replaced incorrectly. overflowing.
3. Cuvette check is not performed after 2. Check if the Replace Lamp
maintenance. command is executed during
4. The cable connectors are not tightened. lamp replacement.
5. The retaining screw is not tightened. 3. Check if the cable
connectors and retaining
6. Cleaning liquid inside the cuvette is little.
screw of the lamp have been
7. The lamp is aged. tightened.
8. The photometer goes wrong. 4. Check if the cleaning liquid
inside the cuvette is no less
than half of the cuvette.
5. Check if the reaction curve
fluctuates irregularly. If yes,
replace the lamp.
6. If the error remains,
contact our customer service
department.
LIN Result related Non-linear The measuring points for result calculation are Check the reaction curve and
nonlinear, because the sample concentration the substrate depletion limit.
is too high, or the substrate depletion limit is Rerun the test with diluted
not specified or unreasonable. The lamp is sample. If the alarm occurs
aged. for more than one chemistry,
and the reaction curve
fluctuates irregularly, replace
the lamp.
LOW Result related Response less than that of The sample concentration is lower than the For ascending calibration
the sensitivity indicated on the reagent pack, curve, rerun the test with
minimum-concentration making response less than that of the standard or increased sample
calibrator lowest-concentration calibrator. volume; for descending
calibration curve, rerun the
test with diluted sample.
17-19

MBK Calibration Mixed blank absorbance The reagent goes wrong; the cuvette is not Check if the cuvette is clear
related out of range clear; the reaction cuvette is overflowed; or and not overflowed, the
insufficient reagent is dispensed. reagent is sufficient without
air bubbles, and the chemistry
parameters are reasonable. If
yes, replace the reagent and
then rerun the test.
MON Calibration Calibration curve not The calibration data and calibration curve are Check if the calibrator is
related monotonic not monotonic. defined and placed correctly,
NLN Result related No linear interval The high-concentration sample leads to less Rerun the test with diluted
than 3 valid measuring points within the sample.
reaction time of rate check measurements.
NOIS Result related Electrode voltage noise 1. Electrode failure. 1. Replace the electrode.
2. Environment interference. 2. Relocate the instrument.
3. ISE main control board failure. 3. Replace the main control
4. Salt buildup around electrodes or tubes board of the ISE module.
due to fluidic leaks. 4. Clean the tubes and
electrodes.
NOIS Calibration Electrode voltage noise 1. Electrode failure. 1. Replace the electrode.
related 2. Environment interference. 2. Relocate the instrument.
3. ISE main control board failure. 3. Replace the main control
4. Salt buildup around electrodes or tubes board of the ISE module.
due to fluidic leaks. 4. Clean the tubes and
electrodes.
OVE Result related Overridden calibration The result is obtained by overriding a failed Take no actions, or
factor calibration. recalibrate.
17-20

PUGA Result related Air in calibrator A 1. Calibrator A is exhausted. 1. Replace the reagent pack
2. Bubbles exist in calibrator tube A with a new one
3. Pump tube A is aging, blocked, or broken. 2. Perform purge B to remove
4. Waste pump tube is aging, blocked, or bubbles
broken； 3. /4. Replace the pump tube
5. Sample injection port and fluidic path are 5. Clean the sample injection
blocked or leaking. port and reinstall electrodes.
6. Air bubble detector failed. 6. Replace the bubble
detector.
PUGA Calibration Air in calibrator A 1. Calibrator A is exhausted. 1. Replace the reagent pack
related 2. Bubbles exist in calibrator tube A with a new one
detector.
PUGB Result related Air in calibrator B 1. Calibrator B is exhausted. 1. Replace the reagent pack
2. Bubbles exist in calibrator tube B with a new one
detector.
17-21

PUGB Calibration Air in calibrator B 1. Calibrator B is exhausted. 1. Replace the reagent pack
related 2. Bubbles exist in calibrator tube B with a new one
detector.
PRO Result related Prozone check error Antibody excess occurs due to too high sample Check the reaction curve and
concentration. the prozone check
parameters. Rerun the test
with diluted sample.
R Result related Rerun result The result is obtained by rerunning the test. No actions are required.
R4S Result related R4S One result of a run is greater than +2 standard Check if the reagent is
deviations from the assigned mean and the qualified, control sample is
other greater than -2SDs. normal, and the instrument is
working correctly.
RBK Result related R1 blank absorbance out The reagent goes wrong; the cuvette is not Check if the cuvette is clear
of range clear; the reaction cuvette is overflowed; or and not overflowed, the
insufficient reagent is dispensed. reagent is sufficient without
air bubbles, and the chemistry
parameters are reasonable. If
yes, replace the reagent and
then rerun the test.
RCE Result related Response calculation Absorbance data for calculation is incomplete, Rerun the test. If the error
error or the dividend is 0. remains, contact our
REC Result related Recalculated result The sample result is recalculated manually /
with the latest calibration factors.
17-22

RESP Result related ISE response check code 1. ISE communication cable failure. 1. Replace the ISE
error 2. Communication interface or pins failure communication cable
Command format or 3. Main control board of the ISE module goes 2. Replace the interface or
execution error wrong. pins.
software or reinstall it.
RESP Calibration ISE response check code 1. ISE communication cable failure. 1. Replace the ISE
related error 2. Communication interface or pins failure communication cable.
Command format or 3. Main control board of the ISE module goes 2. Replace the interface or
execution error wrong. pins.
software or reinstall it
RGTE Result related Expired reagent The result is based on an expired reagent. Replace the reagent.
RGTL Result related Insufficient reagent The result is based on insufficient reagent. Replace the reagent.
RGTL Calibration Insufficient reagent The calibration result is based on insufficient Replace the reagent.
related reagent.
RRN Result related Response greater than The sample concentration exceeds the high Rerun the test with diluted
that of the limit of the calibrator concentration. sample.
maximum-concentration
calibrator
SEN Calibration Calibration sensitivity The difference of final response of the Check if the acceptance limit
related error maximum and minimum concentration is reasonable and the reagent
calibrators exceeds the specified limit. and calibrator are normal,
SJAM Result related Sample probe is clogged Probe clogging is detected during sampling or Sample treatment.
the sample probe is clogged during sampling.
17-23

SLDR Calibration Electrode slope drift 1. Electrode or reagent pack fails. 1. Replace the problematic
related 2. Electrode is unsteady. electrode and reagent pack.
3. New reagent pack is unsteady. 2. New electrode will become
4. Reference electrode has been used for over steady after 15 minutes since
66 months. installed.
5. ISE main control board failure. 3. Run a couple of calibrations
after installing new reagent
6. Ambient temperature fluctuates drastically
pack.
4. Replace the reference
electrode.
5. Replace the ISE main
control board.
6. Control the ambient
temperature to make the
fluctuation within +/-4℃.
SLEX Calibration Slope out of range 1. Electrode is not installed correctly. 1. Reinstall the electrode
related 2. Calibrator expired. 2. Replace the calibrator.
3. Electrode degenerated 3. Replace the problematic
4. Bubbles in reference electrode electrode and rerun.
5. Reference electrode has been used for a 4. Remove the electrode and
long time clap on it to eliminate
6. Electrodes interfered. bubbles. Reinstall the
electrode and run calibration.
7. Module or tubing temperature above 32℃.
5. Replace reference
electrode and rerun.
6. Troubleshoot the
electrodes by replacing them
in different groups.
7. Monitor temperature, if too
high, relocate equipment.
SLP Result related Corrected result The result is adjusted with calculation factors. No actions are required.
17-24

SLP Result related The results are produced Calibration factors instead of the default ones No actions are required.
when the calibration are configured for the second time
factors instead of the calibration.
default ones are
configured for the second
time calibration.
SMPA Result related Air in sample 1. Sample is insufficient or contains many 1. Increase the sample
bubbles after dispensing. volume. At least 90μl sample
2. No or insufficient sample has been should be prepared.
dispensed into the sample injection port. 2. Electrode is not installed
3. The electrodes are not properly installed, correctly. Reinstall it.
causing leakage. 3. Check the waste tube, and
4. The waste pump tube is aging or broken. if necessary, replace it.
SMPE Result related Expired sample The sample is expired. Replace the sample.
SMPL Result related Insufficient sample The sample is insufficient during analysis. Refill the sample.
SMPL Calibration Insufficient sample The sample is insufficient during analysis. Refill the sample.
related
17-25

VDRF Result related Electrode voltage drift 1. Electrode or reagent pack fails. 1. Replace the problematic
2. Electrode is unsteady. electrode and reagent pack.
6. Ambient temperature fluctuates drastically.
pack.
electrode.
control board.
6. Control the ambient
temperature to make the
fluctuation within +/-4℃
VOUT Result related Electrode Voltage 1. Electrode or reagent pack fails. 1. Replace the problematic
Overflow 2. Electrode is unsteady. electrode and reagent pack.
pack.
electrode.
control board.
17-26

VOUT Calibration Electrode Voltage 1. Electrode or reagent pack fails. 1. Replace the problematic
related Overflow 2. Electrode is unsteady. electrode and reagent pack.
pack.
electrode.
control board.
T1 Result related Reaction disk 1. The ambient temperature is out of range. 1. Check if the error is
temperature error 2. The temperature sensor goes wrong. accidental.
(component error and cable error) 2. If not, contact our
3. The temperature protection switch goes customer service department.
wrong. (component error and cable error)
4. The heater goes wrong. (component error
and cable error)
5. PCB error
6. Parameters are lost.
7. Electromagnetic interference exists.
17-27
17.5 Error Messages and Corrective Actions

Table 17.8 Error messages and corrective actions
Event Component Event Error Message and Flag Probable Causes Corrective Actions
ID class Event Log
A00006 Instruction error Error Equipment / E2PROM read/write error Switch off the analyzing unit power
configuration cannot and switch on it again. Recover
be read or saved failure by performing the Home
Error: maintenance procedure. If this
message appears for 3 times, contact
our customer service department or
A01006 Sample probe Error Sample probe vertical / Sample probe vertical movement error Recover failure by performing the
unit movement error 1. Sensor status error: Home maintenance procedure. If this
Position: The sample probe assembly is probably forced message appears for 3 times, contact
Error: to move vertically. our customer service department or
2. Failed to find the zero position:
Or The sample probe assembly is probably
jammed.
Sample probe 3. Collision occurs during operation other than
horizontal movement aspirating:
error The sample probe collides with other object.
Position: 4. Collision error:
Error: The collision remains.
5. Moving vertically is not allowed in current
Or position:
The sample probe moves vertically in an
Sample syringe unknown position.
movement error. Sample probe horizontal movement error
Position: 1. Sensor status error:
The sample probe assembly is probably forced
17-28
ID class Event Log
Error: to move horizontally.
The sample probe assembly is obstructed
when rotating.
3. Collision occurs during horizontal
movement:
The sample probe assembly is obstructed
when rotating.
4. Moving horizontally is not allowed in current
position:
The sample probe assembly is probably forced
to move vertically.
Sample syringe movement error.
1. Sensor status error:
The syringe assembly is probably forced to
move.
The syringe assembly is probably jammed.
A01007 Sample probe Warning Sample probe collides / 1. Collision occurs during aspirating: 1. Collision occurs during aspirating:
unit with an obstacle when The sample probe collides with other object. Remove the obstacle, and then
aspirating recover failure by performing the
Sample position: Home maintenance procedure.
Sample ID/bar code:
Specific position:
A01021 Sample probe Error Clog detection board / Clog detection board communication error. Recover the failure. If this message
unit communication error. appears for 3 times, contact our
customer service department or your
local distributor.
A01022 Sample probe Warning Sample syringe / The aspirate volume is beyond the range of Define the aspirate volume correctly.
unit aspirates too much the syringe.
17-29
ID class Event Log
Sample ID/bar code:
Position:
A01023 Sample probe Warning Sample syringe / The dispense volume is beyond the range of Define the dispense volume
unit dispenses too much the syringe. correctly.
Cuvette No.:
Sample ID/bar code:
Chemistry:
A01024 Sample probe Warning Insufficient sample / There is no sample or insufficient sample on 1. Check if the sample is sufficient,
unit Sample position: the designated position. and then try again.
Sample ID/bar code: 2. If the error remains, contact our
or customer service department or your
local distributor.
Sample probe level
detection failed.
A01027 Sample probe Error Sample is insufficient / There is no sample or insufficient sample on 1. Check if the sample is sufficient,
unit or contains air bubbles the designated position. and then try again.
Position: 2. If the error remains, contact our
Sample ID/bar code: customer service department or your
or local distributor.
Sample probe level
detection failed
Position:
Sample ID/bar code:
A01028 Sample probe Error Sample probe fails to / There is no deionized water, or the deionized 1. Check if the water supply is
unit detect liquid level water is not supplied normally. normal.
during cleaning 2. Recover the failure for 3 times. If
the error remains, contact our
Customer Service Department or
A01029 Sample probe Warning Sample is insufficient / 1. The sample contains clots, or is too thick or 1. Check that the sample is
17-30
ID class Event Log
unit or contains fibrins and insufficient. preprocessed correctly; or check if
clots 2. The sample probe is clogged. the sample contains foreign matters
Position: such as clot. If it does, change the
Sample ID/bar code: sample.
or 2. Check if the sample is sufficient.
Sample probe clog 3. Clean the sample probe with wash
detection failed. solution. If the problem remains,
remove the sample probe and unclog
Position:
it, and then continue with the
Sample ID/bar code: measurement.
A01030 Sample probe Error Sample probe is / The sample probe is clogged. 1. Clean the sample probe with wash
unit clogged during solution. Remove the sample probe
cleaning and unclog it.
Sample ID/bar code: 2. If the problem remains, contact
Position: the manufacturer.
or
Sample probe clog
detection failed.
Sample ID/bar code:
Position:
A01033 Sample probe Warning Sample probe fails to / There is no reagent or insufficient reagent in 1. Check if R1 volume is sufficient
unit detect liquid level on the reaction cuvette. and the reagent bottle is free of air
reaction carousel bubbles, and then try again.
when dispensing. 2. If the problem remains, contact
Cuvette No.: the manufacturer.
Sample ID/bar code:
Chemistry:
or
Sample probe level
detection failed.
17-31
ID class Event Log
Cuvette No.:
Sample ID/bar code:
Chemistry:
A01036 Sample probe Error Sample probe level / Level detection board communication error Recover the failure. If this message
unit detection board appears for 3 times, contact our
communication error customer service department or your
local distributor.
A01037 Sample probe Error Sample probe level / 1. The sample probe is not installed correctly 1. Check if the sample is installed
unit detection board or goes wrong. correctly or damaged.
self-calibrating failed 2. Level detection board communication error 2. Recover the failure. If your
attempt fails, contact our customer
service department or your local
distributor.
A01038 Sample probe Error Sample probe interior / Sample probe interior wash is abnormal. Contact our customer service
unit wash is abnormal. department or your local distributor.
A02006 Probe R2 unit Error Probe R2 vertical / Probe R2 vertical movement error Switch off the analyzing unit power
movement error 1. Sensor status error: and switch on it again. Recover
Position: The probe R2 assembly is probably forced to failure by performing the Home
Error: move vertically. maintenance procedure. If this
Or The probe R2 assembly is probably jammed. your local distributor.
3. Collision occurs during operation other than
Probe R2 horizontal aspirating:
movement error The probe R2 collides with other object.
Or position:
The probe R2 moves vertically in an unknown
R2 syringe movement position.
17-32
ID class Event Log
error Probe R2 horizontal movement error
Error: The probe R2 assembly is probably forced to
move horizontally.
The probe R2 assembly is obstructed when
rotating.
movement:
rotating.
position:
The probe R2 assembly is probably forced to
move vertically.
R2 syringe movement error.
move.
A02007 Probe R2 unit Warning Probe R2 collides with / 1. Collision occurs during aspirating: 1. Collision occurs during aspirating:
an obstacle when The probe R2 collides with other object. Remove the obstacle and then
aspirating recover the failure.
Reagent position:
Specific position:
A02021 Probe R2 unit Warning R2 syringe aspirates / The aspirate volume is beyond the range of Define the aspirate volume correctly.
too much the syringe.
Chemistry:
Position:
17-33
ID class Event Log
A02022 Probe R2 unit Warning R2 syringe dispenses / The dispense volume is beyond the range of Define the dispense volume
too much the syringe. correctly.
Cuvette No.:
Sample ID/bar code:
Chemistry:
A02023 Probe R2 unit Warning Insufficient reagent / There is no reagent or insufficient reagent on 1. Check if the reagent is sufficient,
Chemistry: the designated position. and then try again.
Or customer service department or your
local distributor.
Probe R2 level
detection failed.
Chemistry:
Position:
A02025 Probe R2 unit Warning Probe R2 dispenses / 1. The probe R2 aspirates nothing. 1. Check if the reagent satisfies the
insufficient reagent requirement and is sufficient in
Cuvette No.: volume, and then try again.
Sample ID/bar code: 2. Recover the failure. If this
Chemistry: message appears for 3 times, contact
A02026 Probe R2 unit Error Probe R2 fails to / There is no deionized water, or the deionized 1. Check if the water supply is
detect liquid level water is not supplied normally. normal.
during cleaning. 2. If the error remains, contact our
local distributor.
A02030 Probe R2 unit Error Probe R2 level / Level detection board communication error Recover the failure. If this message
detection board appears for 3 times, contact our
local distributor.
A02031 Probe R2 unit Error Probe R2 level / Level detection board communication error 1. Check if the reagent probe is
17-34
ID class Event Log
detection board installed correctly and intact.
self-calibrating failed 2. Recover the failure. If this
A02032 Probe R2 unit Warning Reagent is insufficient / 1. Air bubbles exist in the reagent bottle. 1. Check if the reagent bottle
or contains air bubbles 2. The reagent bottle does not meet the contains air bubbles, and then try
Chemistry: requirements. again.
Position: 2. Check if the reagent bottle meets
the requirements.
3. If the error remains, contact our
local distributor.
A03006 Probe R1 unit Error Probe R1 vertical / Probe R1 vertical movement error Switch off the analyzing unit power
movement error 1. Sensor status error: and switch on it again. Recover
Position: The probe R1 assembly is probably forced to failure by performing the Home
Error: move vertically. maintenance procedure. If this
Or The probe R1 assembly is probably jammed. your local distributor.
3. Collision occurs during operation other than
Probe R1 horizontal aspirating:
movement error The probe R1 collides with other object.
Or position:
The probe R1 moves vertically in an unknown
R1 syringe movement position.
error Probe R1 horizontal movement error
17-35
ID class Event Log
Error: The probe R1 assembly is probably forced to
move horizontally.
rotating.
movement:
rotating.
position:
The probe R1 assembly is probably forced to
move vertically.
R1 syringe movement error.
move.
A03007 Probe R1 unit Warning Probe R1 collides with / 1. Collision occurs during aspirating: 1. Collision occurs during aspirating:
an obstacle when The probe R1 collides with other object. Remove the obstacle and then
aspirating recover the failure.
Reagent position:
Specific position:
A03021 Probe R1 unit Warning R1 syringe aspirates / The aspirate volume is beyond the range of Define the aspirate volume correctly.
too much the syringe.
Chemistry:
Position:
A03022 Probe R1 unit Warning R1 syringe dispenses / The dispense volume is beyond the range of Define the dispense volume
too much the syringe. correctly.
17-36
ID class Event Log
Cuvette No.:
Sample ID/bar code:
Chemistry:
A03023 Probe R1 unit Warning Insufficient reagent / There is no reagent or insufficient reagent on 1. Check if the reagent is sufficient,
Chemistry: the designated position. and then try again.
Or customer service department or your
local distributor.
Probe R1 level
detection failed.
Chemistry:
Position:
A03025 Probe R1 unit Warning Probe R1 dispenses / 1. The probe R1 aspirates nothing. 1. Check if the reagent satisfies the
insufficient reagent requirement and is sufficient in
Cuvette No.: volume, and then try again.
Sample ID/bar code: 2. Recover the failure. If this
Chemistry: message appears for 3 times, contact
A03026 Probe R1 unit Error Probe R1 fails to / There is no deionized water, or the deionized 1. Check if the water supply is
detect liquid level water is not supplied normally. normal.
during cleaning. 2. If the error remains, contact our
local distributor.
A03027 Probe R1 unit Warning Water residues exist in / There is deionized water left in the reaction Recover the failure. If this message
the cuvette cuvette. appears for 3 times, contact our
Cuvette No.: customer service department or your
Sample ID/bar code: local distributor.
Chemistry:
Or
Probe R1 level
17-37
ID class Event Log
detection failed.
Cuvette No.:
Sample ID/bar code:
Chemistry:
A03030 Probe R1 unit Error Probe R1 level / Level detection board communication error Recover the failure. If this message
detection board appears for 3 times, contact our
local distributor.
A03031 Probe R1 unit Error Probe R1 level / Level detection board communication error 1. Check if the reagent probe is
detection board installed correctly and intact.
self-calibrating failed 2. Recover the failure. If this
A03032 Probe R1 unit Warning Reagent is insufficient / 1. Air bubbles exist in the reagent bottle. 1. Check if the reagent bottle
or contains air bubbles 2. The reagent bottle does not meet the contains air bubbles, and then try
Chemistry: requirements. again.
Position: 2. Check if the reagent bottle meets
the requirements.
local distributor.
A03033 Probe R1 unit Warning Insufficient reagent is / The reagent is insufficient, or air bubbles exist 1. Check if the reagent is sufficient
dispensed or air in the reagent bottle. and the reagent bottle contains air
bubbles exist bubbles, and then try again.
Cuvette No.: 2. If the problem remains, contact
Sample ID/bar code: the manufacturer.
Chemistry:
Position:
Or
17-38
ID class Event Log
Probe R1 level
detection failed.
A04006 Sample mixer Error Sample mixer vertical / Sample mixer vertical movement error Switch off the analyzing unit power
unit movement error 1. Sensor status error and switch on it again. Recover
Position: The sample mixer assembly is probably forced failure by performing the Home
Error: to move vertically. maintenance procedure. If this
2. Failed to find the zero position
Or The sample mixer assembly is probably your local distributor.
jammed.
Sample mixer 3. Moving vertically is not allowed in current
horizontal movement position
error The sample mixer moves vertically in an
Position: unknown position.
Error: Sample mixer horizontal movement error
1. Sensor status error
The sample mixer assembly is probably forced
to move horizontally.
The sample mixer assembly is obstructed when
rotating.
position
The sample mixer moves vertically in an
unknown position.
A04015 Sample mixer Error Sample mixer rotation / The mixer is obstructed by other object or Recover failure by performing the
unit error interfered by the reaction cuvette. Home maintenance procedure. If this
Rotation speed: message appears for 3 times, contact
Position: our customer service department or
A05006 Reagent mixer Error Reagent mixer vertical / Reagent mixer vertical movement error Switch off the analyzing unit power
17-39
ID class Event Log
unit movement error 1. Sensor status error and switch on it again. Recover
Position: The reagent mixer assembly is probably forced failure by performing the Home
Error: to move vertically. maintenance procedure. If this
2. Failed to find the zero position message appears for 3 times, contact
Or The reagent mixer assembly is probably
jammed.
Reagent mixer 3. Moving vertically is not allowed in current
horizontal movement position
error The reagent mixer moves vertically in an
Position: unknown position.
Error: Reagent mixer horizontal movement error
1. Sensor status error
The reagent mixer assembly is probably forced
to move vertically.
The reagent mixer assembly is obstructed
when rotating.
position
The reagent mixer moves vertically in an
unknown position.
A05016 Reagent mixer Error Reagent mixer / The mixer is obstructed by other object or Recover failure by performing the
unit rotation error interfered by the reaction cuvette. Home maintenance procedure. If this
Rotation speed: message appears for 3 times,
Position: contact our customer service
A06006 Reaction Error Reaction carousel / Reaction carousel movement error Switch off the analyzing unit power
carousel unit movement error 1. Failed to find the home position and switch on it again. Recover
Error: The reaction carousel is obstructed or failure by performing the Home
blocked. maintenance procedure. If this
17-40
ID class Event Log
2. The coder missed steps our customer service department or
The reaction carousel is obstructed or your local distributor.
blocked.
3. The reaction carousel missed steps when
moving to the home position.
The reaction carousel is obstructed or
blocked.
A07006 Sample carousel Error Sample carousel / Sample carousel movement error Recover the failure. If this message
unit movement error 1. Failed to find the home position appears for 3 times, contact our
Error: The sample carousel is obstructed or blocked. customer service department or your
local distributor.
2. The coder missed steps
The sample carousel is obstructed or blocked.
3. The sample carousel missed steps when
The sample carousel is obstructed or blocked.
A07009 Sample carousel Error Sample bar code / The sample bar coder reader goes wrong due Recover the failure. If the error still
unit reader error to system failure. remains, contact our Customer
Service Department or your local
distributor.
A07010 Sample carousel Warning Sample bar code error / Sample bar coder reader does not work Try again. If your attempt fails,
unit Position: normally due to communication error. contact our customer service
A07011 Sample carousel Error Sample bar code / Sample bar coder sending buffer is full due to Recover the failure or reboot the
unit sending buffer is full communication error. analyzing unit.
A09006 Reagent Error Reagent carousel / Reagent carousel movement error Recover the failure. If this message
carousel unit movement error 1. Failed to find the zero position appears for 3 times, contact our
Error: The reagent carousel is obstructed or blocked. customer service department or your
local distributor.
2. The coder missed steps
The reagent carousel is obstructed or blocked.
17-41
ID class Event Log
3. The reagent carousel missed steps when
The reagent carousel is obstructed or blocked.
A09011 Reagent Error Reagent bar code / The reagent bar coder reader goes wrong due Recover the failure. If the error still
carousel unit reader does not work to system failure. remains, contact our Customer
normally Service Department or your local
distributor.
A09012 Reagent Warning Reagent bar code error / Reagent bar coder sending buffer is full due to Try again. If your attempt fails,
carousel unit Position: communication error. contact our customer service
A09014 Reagent Error Reagent bar code / Reagent bar coder reader does not work Recover the failure or reboot the
carousel unit sending buffer is full normally due to communication error. analyzing unit.
Position:
A11005 Wash station Error Wash station / Wash station movement error Switch off the analyzing unit power
movement error 1. Sensor status error and switch on it again. Recover
Error: The wash station assembly is probably forced failure by performing the Home
to move. maintenance procedure. If this
2. Failed to find the home position
The wash station assembly is obstructed by your local distributor.
other object.
3. The wash station collides with an obstacle
when moving.
The wash station collides with other object, or
the wash probes then collide with the reaction
carousel.
A11010 Wash station Error Releasing vacuum / 1. Solenoid valves SV23, SV25 or SV27 go 1. Check if the error is accidental.
failed wrong. 2. If the error is not accidental,
2. The vacuum pump goes wrong. contact our customer service
3. The vacuum pressure sensor goes wrong. department or your local distributor.
A11012 Wash station Warning Water supplying is too / 1. The water unit goes wrong. 1. Check the water unit.
17-42
ID class Event Log
slow 2. The water supply valve goes wrong. 2. Check if the water supply tube is
3. The low-level floater of the water tank goes smooth.
wrong. 3. Check if the water level inside the
4. The water supply tube is bent. water tank is low (at the scale of 5L).
5. The outlet filter of the water supply tube is 4. Check if the error is accidental.
clogged. 5. If the error is not accidental,
A11013 Wash station Error Water tank is empty / 1. The water unit goes wrong. 1. Check the water unit.
2. The water supply valve goes wrong. 2. Check if the water supply tube is
3. The low-level floater of the water tank goes smooth.
wrong. 3. Check if the water level inside the
4. The water supply tube is bent. water tank is low (at the scale of 5L).
5. The outlet filter of the water supply tube is 4. Check if the error is accidental.
clogged. 5. If the error is not accidental,
A11014 Wash station Warning Filling diluted wash / 1. The solenoid valve SV06 goes wrong. 1. Check if the deionized water
solution tank is too 2. The restrictor ring is clogged. pump is opened and the pressure
slow 3. The inlet filter at the front panel is clogged. gauge reads between 25kPa-45kPa.
4. The deionized water circulating pump goes 2. Check the floater of the deionized
wrong. water tank.
5. The water tank is empty. 3. Check the floater of the diluted
wash solution tank.
6. The concentrated wash solution tank is
empty. 4. Check the floater of the
concentrated wash solution tank.
7. The concentrated wash solution pump goes
wrong. 5. Check if the error is accidental.
8. The low-level floater of the diluted wash 6. If the error is not accidental,
solution tank goes wrong. contact our customer service
17-43
ID class Event Log
A11015 Wash station Error Insufficient diluted / 1. The solenoid valve SV06 goes wrong. 1. Check if the deionized water
wash solution 2. The restrictor ring is clogged. pump is opened and the pressure
3. The inlet filter at the front panel is clogged. gauge reads between 25kPa-45kPa.
4. The deionized water circulating pump P03 2. Check the floater of the deionized
goes wrong. water tank.
wash solution tank.
7. The concentrated wash solution pump P05
goes wrong. 5. Check if the error is accidental.
A11016 Wash station Warning Insufficient / 1. The solenoid valve SV06 goes wrong. 1. Check if the deionized water
concentrated wash 2. The restrictor ring is clogged. pump is opened and the pressure
solution 3. The inlet filter at the front panel is clogged. gauge reads between 25kPa-45kPa.
4. The deionized water circulating pump P03 2. Check the floater of the deionized
goes wrong. water tank.
wash solution tank.
7. The concentrated wash solution pump P05
goes wrong. 5. Check if the error is accidental.
A11017 Wash station Error Liquid accumulates in / 1. The solenoid valves SV21, SV22 or SV27 go 1. Check if the error is accidental.
primary vacuum wrong. 2. If the error is not accidental,
container 2. The low-concentration waste drain tube is contact our customer service
bent. department or your local distributor.
3. The degasser goes wrong.
17-44
ID class Event Log
A11018 Wash station Error High concentration / 1. The waste pump P07 goes wrong. 1. Check if the error is accidental.
waste collector is full 2. The high-concentration waste drain tube is 2. If the error is not accidental,
bent. contact our customer service
A11019 Wash station Error Low concentration / 1. The low-concentration waste drain tube is 1. Check if the error is accidental.
waste collector is full bent. 2. If the error is not accidental,
2. The low-concentration waste discharge contact our customer service
outlet is too high. department or your local distributor.
A11020 Wash station Error High concentration / 1. The high concentration waste tank is full 1. Check the high-concentration
waste tank is full 2. The floater of the high concentration waste waste tank. If it is full, replace the
tank goes wrong. waste tank, close the full tank and
dispose of the waste properly.
2. Check if the error is accidental.
3. If the error is not accidental,
A11027 Wash station Error Insufficient vacuum. / 1. The primary vacuum pump P08 goes wrong. 1. Check if the error is accidental.
Cleaning failed 2. The primary vacuum pressure sensor goes 2. If the error is not accidental,
wrong. contact our customer service
3. The connectors and tubes go wrong. department or your local distributor.
4. The primary vacuum container goes wrong.
5. Solenoid valves SV23, SV25 or SV27 go
wrong.
A11028 Wash station Error Water tank floater / 1. Water tank high level and low level floater 1. Check if the error is accidental.
logic error go wrong 2. If the error is not accidental,
A11029 Wash station Error Diluted wash solution / 1.High level and low level floater of diluted 1. Check if the error is accidental.
tank floater logic error wash solution container go wrong. 2. If the error is not accidental,
17-45
ID class Event Log
A11030 Wash station Error External Drain / 1. The drainage module is not turned on. Check if the drainage module is
Canister Overflow 2. The pump of the drainage module goes turned on.
wrong. 2. Check if the error is accidental.
3. High level and low level floater of the 3. If the error is not accidental,
drainage module go wrong. contact our customer service
4. The board of the drainage module go wrong. department or your local distributor.
5. The low-concentration waste tube is
twisted.
A11031 Wash station Error Insufficient vacuum / 1. The primary vacuum pump P08 goes wrong. 1. Check if the error is accidental.
degree of the primary 2. The primary vacuum pressure sensor goes 2. If the error is not accidental,
vacuum container wrong. contact our customer service
3. The connectors and tubes go wrong. department or your local distributor.
5. Solenoid valves SV21, SV22, SV23, SV25 or
SV27 go wrong.
A11034 Wash station Error Cuvette wash syringe / The assembly is jammed or damaged. Switch off the analyzing unit power
movement error. and switch on it again. Recover
Error: failure by performing the Home
maintenance procedure. If this
A11035 Wash station Error Vacuum pressure is / 1. The primary vacuum pump P08 goes wrong. 1. Check if the error is accidental.
insufficient when the 2. The primary vacuum pressure sensor goes 2. If the error is not accidental,
wash station is wrong. contact our customer service
aspirating. 3. The connectors and tubes go wrong. department or your local distributor.
5. Solenoid valve SV21, SV22, SV23, SV25 or
SV27 goes wrong.
17-46
ID class Event Log
A11036 Wash station Error Vacuum pressure / 1. The primary vacuum pump P08 goes wrong. 1. Check if the error is accidental.
change is too small 2. The primary vacuum pressure sensor goes 2. If the error is not accidental,
when the wash station wrong. contact our customer service
is aspirating. 3. The connectors and tubes go wrong. department or your local distributor.
5. Solenoid valve SV21, SV22, SV23, SV25 or
SV27 goes wrong.
A12005 Temperature Warning Reaction carousel T1 1. The ambient temperature is out of range. 1. Check if the error is accidental.
unit temperature is out of 2. The temperature sensor goes wrong. 2. If the error is not accidental,
range (component error and cable error) contact our customer service
TDISP temperature: 3. The temperature protection switch goes department or your local distributor.
TS01: wrong. (component error and cable error)
TS02: 4. The heater goes wrong. (component error
TS03:(Adjusted and cable error)
temperature ∆T for 3 5. PCB error
Pt1000 sensors) 6. Parameters are lost.
A12006 Temperature Warning Temperature of wash / 1. The ambient temperature is out of range. 1. Check the temperature of the
unit solution for cleaning 2. The temperature sensor goes wrong. deionized water for cleaning the
cuvettes is out of (component error and cable error) whole unit.
range 3. The temperature protection switch goes 2. Check if the water supply is
Temperature: wrong. (component error and cable error) normal and has the temperature
4. The heater goes wrong. (component error between 15°C-30°C.
and cable error) 3. Check if the error is accidental.
5. PCB error 4. If the error is not accidental,
6. Parameters are lost. contact our customer service
A12007 Temperature Warning Temperature of / 1. The ambient temperature is out of range. 1. Check the temperature of the
unit deionized water for 2. The temperature sensor goes wrong. deionized water for cleaning the
cleaning cuvettes is whole unit.
17-47
ID class Event Log
out of range (component error and cable error) 2. Check if the water supply is
Temperature: 3. The temperature protection switch goes normal and has the temperature
wrong. (component error and cable error) between 15°C-30°C.
4. The heater goes wrong. (component error 3. Check if the error is accidental.
and cable error) 4. If the error is not accidental,
5. PCB error contact our customer service
6. Parameters are lost. department or your local distributor.
A12008 Temperature Warning Temperature of / 1. The ambient temperature is out of range. 1. Check the temperature of the
unit deionized water for 2. The temperature sensor goes wrong. deionized water for cleaning the
cleaning the whole (component error and cable error) whole unit.
unit is out of range. 3. The temperature protection switch goes 2. Check if the water supply is
Real-time wrong. (component error and cable error) normal and has the temperature
Temperature: 4. The heater goes wrong. (component error between 15°C-30°C.
and cable error) 3. Check if the error is accidental.
5. PCB error 4. If the error is not accidental,
6. Parameters are lost. contact our customer service
A12009 Temperature Warning Internal temperature / 1. The ambient temperature is out of range. 1. Check if the air vent is blocked.
unit of the whole unit is 2. The cooling fan goes wrong. Clean the dust screen if it is blocked.
out of range 3. The dust screen is blocked. 2. Check if enough space is reserved
Temperature: 4. The air vent is blocked in the specified between the air vent and the wall. If
range. not, reallocate the instrument.
4. If the error is not accidental,
A14006 Reagent Warning Reagent refrigeration / 1. The ambient temperature is out of range. 1. Check if the error is accidental.
refrigeration temperature is out of 2. The temperature sensor goes wrong. 2. If the error is not accidental,
unit range (component error and cable error) contact our customer service
17-48
ID class Event Log
3. The temperature protection switch goes department or your local distributor.
wrong. (component error and cable error)
4. The cooler goes wrong. (component error
and cable error)
5. The fan goes wrong. (component error and
cable error)
6. The recycle pump goes wrong. (component
error and cable error)
7. The refrigerant goes wrong.
8. PCB error
9. Parameters are lost.
A14011 Reagent Warning Reagent refrigerating / 1. The fan is blocked. 1. Check if the error is accidental.
refrigeration fan 1 is abnormal 2. The fan is damaged. 2. If the error is not accidental,
unit 3. The power supply goes wrong. contact our customer service
A14012 Reagent Warning Reagent refrigerating / 1. The fan is blocked. 1. Check if the error is accidental.
refrigeration fan 2 is abnormal 2. The fan is damaged. 2. If the error is not accidental,
A14013 Reagent Error Light source fan is / 1. The fan is blocked. 1. Check if the error is accidental.
refrigeration abnormal 2. The fan is damaged. 2. If the error is not accidental,
A14014 Reagent Warning Vacuum pump fan is / 1. The fan is blocked. 1. Check if the error is accidental.
refrigeration abnormal 2. The fan is damaged. 2. If the error is not accidental,
A21001 Probe Interior Error Probe interior wash / The assembly is jammed or damaged. Switch off the analyzing unit power
Wash Unit syringe movement and switch on it again. Recover
17-49
ID class Event Log
error. failure by performing the Home
Error: maintenance procedure. If this
A22001 ISE unit Error Slope out of range, SLEX 1. Electrode installation incorrect. 1. Reinstall the electrode.
electrode: 2. Calibrator expired. 2. Replace the calibrator.
3. Electrode degenerated. 3. Replace the problematic electrode
4. Bubbles in reference electrode. and rerun.
5. Reference electrode has been used for a 4. Remove the electrode and clap on
long time. it to eliminate bubbles. Reinstall the
6. Electrodes interfered. electrode and run calibration.
7. Module or tubing temperature above 32℃. 5. Replace reference electrode and
rerun.
6. Troubleshoot the electrodes by
replacing them in different groups.
7. Monitor temperature, if too high,
relocate equipment.
A22002 ISE unit Error Air in sample. SMPA 1. Sample is insufficient or contain much 1.&2. Increase the sample volume.
Position: bubbles after dispensing. At least 90μl sample should be
2. No or insufficient sample has been prepared.
dispensed into the sample injection port. 3. Electrode is not installed
3. Liquid leakage due to that the electrodes correctly. Reinstall it.
are not properly installed. 4. Check the waste tube, and if
4. The waste pump tube is aging or broken. necessary, replace it.
A22004 ISE unit Error ISE unit cannot be / 1. ISE power supply failure. 1. Replace the 24V power supply
connected. 2. ISE communication cable failure. board.
3. Communication interface or pins failure. 2. Replace the ISE communication
4. ISE main control board failure. cable.
3. Replace the interface or pins.
4. Replace the ISE main control
board.
17-50
ID class Event Log
A22005 ISE unit Error ISE unit response error / 1. ISE communication cable failure. 1. Replace the ISE communication
2. Communication interface or pins failure. cable.
3. ISE main control board failure. 2. Replace the interface or pins.
4. Software failure. 3. Replace the ISE main control
board.
4. Upgrade the operating software or
reinstall it.
A22006 ISE unit Error Purge A and B failed. / 1. Leaks exist due to improperly-installed 1. Reinstall the electrode and check
electrode or missing O ring. for O ring.
2. Sample injection port or electrode inside is 2. Use warm water to clean and
clogged. unclog the sample injection port
3. Calibrator is exhausted. with fresh water and unclog the
4. Prime combinations are not enough. electrode tube. Check the reference
5. Pump tube is aging, blocked, or broken. electrode for crystallized salt.
6. Calibrator cannot be dispensed normally 3. Replace the reagent pack.
due to clogged reagent pack tube. 4. Increase the prime cycle.
5. Replace the pump tube.
6. Unclog the reagent pack tube with
warm water.
A22007 ISE unit Warning ISE reagent is going to / Calibrator is exhausted. Replace the reagent pack with a new
be exhausted. one.
A22008 ISE unit Error Voltage overflow, VOUT 1. Electrode or reagent pack failed. 1. Replace the problematic electrode
electrode: 2. Electrode is unsteady. and reagent pack.
3. New reagent pack is unsteady. 2. New electrode will become steady
4. Reference electrode has been used for over after 15 minutes since installed.
6 months. 3. Run a couple of calibrations after
5. ISE main control board failure. installing new reagent pack.
4. Replace the reference electrode.
board.
A22009 ISE unit Error Electrode slope drift. VDRF/ 1. Electrode or reagent pack failed. 1. Replace the problematic electrode
(during calibration) SLDR 2. Electrode is unsteady. and reagent pack.
17-51
ID class Event Log
Or 3. New reagent pack is unsteady. 2. New electrode will become steady
Electrode voltage 4. Reference electrode has been used for over after 15 minutes since installed.
drift. (during sample 6 months. 3. Run a couple of calibrations after
analysis) 5. ISE main control board failure. installing new reagent pack.
Electrode: 6. Ambient temperature fluctuates drastically. 4. Replace the reference electrode.
board.
6. Control the ambient temperature
to make the fluctuation within
+/-4℃.
A22010 ISE unit Error Voltage noise, NOIS 1. Electrode failure. 1. Replace the electrode.
electrode: 2. Environment interference. 2. Relocate the instrument.
3. ISE main control board failure. 3. Replace the ISE main control
4. Salt buildup around electrodes or tubes due board.
to fluidic leaks. 4. Clean the tubes and electrodes.
A22011 ISE unit Error Air in calibrator B PUGB 1. Calibrator B is exhausted. 1. Replace the reagent pack with a
2. Bubbles exist in calibrator tube B. new one.
3. Pump tube B is aging, blocked, or broken. 2. Perform purge B to remove
4. Waste pump tube B is aging, blocked, or bubbles.
broken. 3.&4. Replace the pump tube.
5. Sample injection port and fluidic path are 5. Clean the sample injection port
blocked or leaking. and reinstall electrodes.
6. Air bubble detector fails. 6. Replace the air bubble detector.
A22012 ISE unit Error Air in calibrator A PUGA 1. Calibrator A is exhausted. 1. Replace the reagent pack with a
2. Bubbles exist in calibrator tube A. new one.
3. Pump tube B is aging, blocked, or broken. 2. Perform purge A to remove
4. Waste pump tube B is aging, blocked, or bubbles.
broken. 3.&4. Replace the pump tube.
A22013 ISE unit Error ISE pump calibrating / 1. Pump tube is aging. 1. Replace the pump tube.
17-52
ID class Event Log
failed! 2. Sample probe aspiration/dispensing failure. 2. Replace the sample probe.
A22014 ISE unit Error Air bubble detector / 1. Air bubble detector board is eroded due to Replace the bubble detector.
failure the leaks at the joint of sample injection port
and bubble detector.
2. Air bubble detector fails.
A22015 ISE unit Error Reading reagent pack / 1. Reagent pack is not installed. 1. Install reagent pack.
chip error 2. Reagent pack wand fails. 2. Replace the wand.
A22016 ISE unit Error Reagent pack chip / 1. Reagent pack is not installed. 1. Install reagent pack.
writing error. Unload 3. Reagent pack wand fails. 3. Replace the wand.
the reagent pack and
load it again.
A22017 ISE unit Error Air in ISE wash solution / 1. ISE wash solution is insufficient. 1. Place sufficient ISE wash solution.
2. Waste pump tube B is aging, blocked, or 2. Replace the pump tube.
broken. 3. Clean the sample injection port
3. Sample injection port and fluidic path are and reinstall electrodes.
blocked or leaking. 4. Replace the air bubble detector.
4. Air bubble detector fails.
A22018 ISE unit Error No fluid in tubing CALF 1. Waste pump tube B is aging, blocked, or 1. Place sufficient ISE wash solution.
broken. 2. Replace the pump tube.
A22019 ISE unit Error Saving calibration DEP 1. ISE communication cable failure. 1. Replace the ISE communication
result error 2. Communication interface or pins failure. cable.
board.
reinstall it.
A22021 ISE unit Error Command format or RESP 1. ISE communication cable failure. 1. Replace the ISE communication
execution error 2. Communication interface or pins failure. cable.
17-53
ID class Event Log
board.
reinstall it.
A22022 ISE unit Error No fluid in tubing / 1. Waste pump tube B is aging, blocked, or 1. Place sufficient ISE wash solution.
broken. 2. Replace the pump tube.
A22023 ISE unit Error No reagent module has / 1. Reagent pack is not installed. 1. Install reagent pack.
been loaded. 2. Reagent pack wand fails. 2. Replace the wand.
A22024 ISE unit Error ISE response check RESP 1. The communication wire between ISE and 1.Replace the communication wire
code error the middle-layer unit goes wrong. 2.Change the interface or the pin.
2. Communication interface or pin error. 3.Change the main control board.
3.Main control board does not function.
4.Upgrade the software or reinstall
4.Software error the software.
A22025 / Error Equipment cannot be / 1. The serial port wire is not connected 1. Check the connection of the serial
connected 2. The power supply of the analyzer is off. port wire.
Unit: 2. Remove and replug in the serial
port wire.
3. Check whether the power supply
of the analyzer is on.
4. Perform the Home procedure.
5. Reboot the PC and the analyzer.
6. If the error still remains for
continuous three times after the
above procedures have been
performed, please contact our
customer service or your local
distributor.
17-54
ID class Event Log
A22026 / Error Configuring key / Key parameters are not configured 1. Turn off the analyzing unit power
parameters failed. and reswitch it on.
Unit: %s 2. If the error occurs for continuous
three times, please contact our
distributor.
A22027 / Error Fluidic prime failed. / Fluidic is not primed. 1. Turn off the analyzing unit power
and reswitch it on.
2. If the error occurs for continuous
distributor.
A22028 / Error Downloading key / 1.Downloading key parameters failed. 1. Turn off the analyzing unit power
parameters failed. 2. Reading the parameters from E2ROM failed. and reswitch it on.
Unit: 3.Configuring the parameters of the smart 2. If the error occurs for continuous
module failed. three times, please contact our
distributor.
A22029 / Error Collecting dark / Collecting dark current failed. 1. Turn off the analyzing unit power
current failed. and reswitch it on.
distributor.
A22030 / Error Discharging primary / Discharging primary vacuum waste failed. 1. Turn off the analyzing unit power
vacuum waste failed. and reswitch it on.
distributor.
A22031 / Error Establishing vacuum / Establishing vacuum failed. 1. Turn off the analyzing unit power
17-55
ID class Event Log
failed. and reswitch it on.
distributor.
A22032 / Error Floater status error: / 1. Low level floater status of the water tank is 1. Check the water unit and the
Floater: empty. water supply tubes.
2. The low level floater status of the diluted 2. Check the floater status of the
wash solution container is empty. water tank, diluted wash solution
3. The floater status of the concentrated wash container, concentrated wash
solution container is empty. solution container, high
4. The floater status of the high concentration concentration waste container, low
waste container is full. concentration waste container and
the high concentration waste
5. The floater status of the low concentration
container
waste container is full.
3. Check the status of the primary
6. The status of the primary vacuum container
vacuum container.
is full.
7. The status of the high concentration waste
container is full. 5. If the error is not accidental,
A22033 / Error Resetting probe / Resetting probe interior wash syringe failed. 1. Turn off the analyzing unit power
interior wash syringe and reswitch it on.
failed. 2. If the error occurs for continuous
distributor.
A22034 / Error Resetting auto wash / Resetting auto wash syringe failed. 1. Turn off the analyzing unit power
syringe failed. and reswitch it on.
17-56
ID class Event Log
distributor.
A22035 / Error Releasing vacuum / 1.Electromagnetic valve SV23, SV25, or SV27 1. Turn off the analyzing unit power
failed. failure and reswitch it on.
2. Vacuum pump P08 failure 2. If the error occurs for continuous
3. Vacuum pressure sensor failure three times, please contact our
distributor.
A22036 / Error Initializing sample bar / Sample bar code reader failed due to system 1. Recover failure by performing the
code reader failed. error. Home maintenance procedure.
2. If this error remains
A22037 / Error Initializing reagent bar / Reagent bar code reader failed due to system 1. Recover failure by performing the
code reader failed. error. Home maintenance procedure.
2. If this error remains
A22038 / Error Scanning reagent bar / Scanning reagent bar code failed. 1. Turn off the analyzing unit power
code failed. and reswitch it on.
distributor.
A22039 / Error Unmatched software / 1.Version inquiry instruction failed. 1. Turn off the analyzing unit power
version. 2. The version information of the control and reswitch it on.
software does not match the one stored in the 2. If the error occurs for continuous
operating software. three times, please contact our
distributor.
17-57
ID class Event Log
C00007 Operating Error CPU performance low / The CPU is too busy. Reboot the computer and operating
system software. If this message appears for
3 times, contact our customer
distributor.
C00008 Operating Warning Printer cannot be / The printer is not powered on; the printer Check the printer connection; check
system connected cable is not connected; or no driver is if the printer is powered on and if
installed. the driver and default printer have
been installed.
C00011 Operating Error The last abnormal exit / The operating software is abnormal, or the Restart the operating software, and
system may cause carryover instrument power is cut off unexpectedly. execute the Special Wash
not handled. Execute maintenance command before
the Special Wash starting analysis.
maintenance
command before
starting analysis to
ensure accurate
results.
C00012 Operating Warning Sound card failure / No sound card is installed. Sound card failure. Reinstall the sound card or the sound
system Incorrect sound card driver. card driver.
C01001 Instrument Error Equipment cannot be / The serial cable is not connected; or the Check the serial port connection.
connection connected analyzing unit power is switched off. Replug the cable. Check if the
analyzing unit is powered on. Start
the initialization again. Restart the
computer and analyzing unit. If three
continuous attempts are failed,
C02001 Database Error Database initialing / The database file is damaged or lost. Reboot the computer and analyzing
failed unit. If three continuous attempts
are failed, contact our customer
17-58
ID class Event Log
distributor.
C02002 Database Error Database upgrade / The database file is damaged or lost. Reboot the computer and analyzing
distributor.
C02004 Database Warning Database backup / The database file is damaged or lost. Reboot the computer and analyzing
distributor.
C02005 Database Warning Reading/Writing / The database does not work normally. Reboot the computer and analyzing
database failed unit. If three continuous attempts
distributor.
C03001 Result Warning Result cannot be RCE Absorbance data for calculation is incomplete, Rerun the test. If the error remains,
calculation calculated or the dividend is 0. contact our customer service
Sample ID/bar code: department or your local distributor.
Position:
Chemistry:
C03002 Result Warning Absorbance out of ABS 1. Probe R1 dispenses insufficient reagent, or 1. Observe the reaction curve. If the
calculation range air bubbles exist in the reagent. absorbance of R1 is too high, check
Sample ID/bar code: 2. The reagent is placed in an incorrect the reagent for air bubbles and the
Position: position or is abnormal. syringe for leaking.
Chemistry: 3. The sample concentration is too high, 2. Check if the reagent has been
resulting in great response. placed in the correct position.
4. The absorbance data used for calculation is 3. Rerun the test after dilution.
incomplete (due to photoelectric data loss), or 4. Contact our customer service
the error of division by zero occurs. department or your local distributor.
17-59
ID class Event Log
C03003 Result Warning R1 blank absorbance RBK The reagent goes wrong; the cuvette is not Check if the reagent is sufficient
calculation out of range clear; the reaction cuvette is overflowed; or without air bubbles and the
Sample ID/bar code: insufficient reagent is dispensed. chemistry parameters are
Position: reasonable. If yes, replace the
reagent and then rerun the test.
Chemistry:
Check if the cuvette is normal. If the
error remains, contact our customer
distributor.
C03004 Result Warning Substrate depletion BOE The sample concentration is too high, and Check the reaction curve and the
calculation Sample ID/bar code: substrate depletion occurs during fixed-time substrate depletion limit. Rerun the
Position: measurements. test with diluted sample.
Chemistry:
C03005 Result Warning Result cannot be ENC The sample concentration is too high, and Check the reaction curve and the
calculation calculated substrate depletion occurs within the lag time substrate depletion limit. Rerun the
Sample ID/bar code: of rate check measurements. test with diluted sample.
Position:
Chemistry:
C03006 Result Warning Linearity limit out of LIN The measuring points for result calculation are Check the reaction curve and the
calculation range nonlinear, because the sample concentration substrate depletion limit. Rerun the
Sample ID/bar code: is too high, or the substrate depletion limit is test with diluted sample.
Position: not specified or unreasonable.
Chemistry:
C03007 Result Warning Prozone check error PRO Antibody excess occurs due to too high sample Check the reaction curve and the
calculation Sample ID/bar code: concentration. prozone check parameters. Rerun
Position: the test with diluted sample.
Chemistry:
C03008 Result Warning Sample concentration RRN The sample concentration exceeds the high Rerun the test with diluted sample.
calculation is higher than that of limit of the calibrator concentration.
the highest-level
17-60
ID class Event Log
calibrator
Sample ID/bar code:
Position:
Chemistry:
C03009 Result Warning Mixed blank MBK The reagent goes wrong; the cuvette is not Check if the reagent is sufficient
calculation absorbance out of clear; the reaction cuvette is overflowed; or without air bubbles and the
range insufficient reagent is dispensed. chemistry parameters are
Chemistry: reasonable. Check if the cuvette is
normal. Replace the reagent and
then rerun the test. If the error
remains, contact our customer
distributor.
C03010 Result Warning Blank response out of BLK The reagent goes wrong; insufficient reagent Check if the reagent is sufficient
calculation range is dispensed; the cuvette contains air bubbles; without air bubbles and the
Chemistry: the light drifts; or the cuvette is overflowed. chemistry parameters are
reasonable. Check if the cuvette is
normal. Replace the reagent and
then rerun the test. If the error
remains, contact our customer
distributor.
C03011 Result Warning Calibration DUP The difference between the maximum and Check if the acceptance limit is
calculation repeatability exceeds minimum response of the calibrator exceeds reasonable, troubleshoot the error,
limit. Chem: the specified limit. and then recalibrate.
C03012 Result Warning Calibration sensitivity SEN The difference of final response of the Check if the acceptance limit is
calculation exceeds limit. Chem: maximum and minimum concentration reasonable and the reagent and
calibrators exceeds the specified limit. calibrator are normal, and then
recalibrate.
C03013 Result Warning Calibration curve SD CSD The calculated standard deviation of the Check if the acceptance limit is
calculation exceeds limit, Chem: calibration curve exceeds the specified limit. reasonable and the reagent and
17-61
ID class Event Log
calibrator are normal, and then
recalibrate.
C03014 Result Warning Calibration DET The calculated determination coefficient of Check if the acceptance limit is
calculation determination the calibration curve exceeds the specified reasonable and the reagent and
coefficient exceeds limit. calibrator are normal, and then
limit, Chem: recalibrate.
C03015 Result Warning Calibration slope FAC The slope difference is applicable to linear Check if the acceptance limit is
calculation difference out of calibration only and refers to the K factor reasonable and the reagent and
range. Chem: (slope) difference between two adjacent calibrator are normal, and then
calibrations. It exceeds the specified limit. recalibrate.
C03016 Result Warning Calibration curve is MON The calibration data and calibration curve are Check if the calibrator is defined and
calculation not monotonic, Chem: not monotonic. placed correctly, and then
recalibrate.
C03017 Result Warning Calibration curve is COV For nonlinear calibration, a satisfying base Check that the reagent and
calculation not convergent, Chem: cannot be calculated and no calibration curve calibrator are normal, and then
is drawn. recalibrate. If the error remains,
C03018 Result Warning Chemistry: 1-2s The QC result is between ±2 and ±3 standard No actions are required.
calculation Control: 1-2s warning deviations from the assigned mean
concentration.
C03019 Result Warning Chemistry: 1-3s The QC result is greater than ±3 standard Check if the reagent is qualified and
calculation Control: 1-3s out of deviations from the assigned mean control is normal. If the error
control concentration. remains, contact our customer
distributor.
C03020 Result Warning Chemistry: 2-2s Results of two controls or two results of one Check if the reagent is qualified and
calculation Control: 2-2s out of control within a run are simultaneously control is normal. If the error
control greater than +2 or -2 standard deviations from remains, contact our customer
the assigned mean. service department or your local
distributor.
17-62
ID class Event Log
C03021 Result Warning Chemistry: R-4s One result of a run is greater than +2 standard Check if the reagent is qualified and
calculation Control: R-4s out of deviations from the assigned mean and the control is normal. If the error
control other greater than -2SDs. remains, contact our customer
distributor.
C03022 Result Warning Chemistry: 4-1s Results of two runs in two-control evaluation Check if the reagent is qualified and
calculation Control: 4-1s out of or four continuous results of a control are control is normal. If the error
control greater than +1 or -1 standard deviation from remains, contact our customer
the assigned mean concentration. service department or your local
distributor.
C03023 Result Warning Chemistry: 10-x Results of five runs in two-control evaluation Check if the reagent is qualified and
calculation Control: 10-x out of or ten continuous results of a control that are control is normal. If the error
control being compared are on the same side. remains, contact our customer
distributor.
C03024 Result Error Biochemistry test / 1. Software error Rerun the test. Reboot the operating
calculation period time out. 2. Operating system error software, analyzing unit and
Cannot continue computer. If the error remains,
C03026 Result Warning Photoelectric data is / Communication error. If the error persists, contact our
calculation lost customer service department or your
local distributor.
C03030 Result Error Photoelectric / 1. Software error 1. Rerun the operating software.
calculation measurement period is 2. Reboot the operation unit.
out of range 3. If the error remains, contact our
Position: local distributor.
Chemistry:
C03031 Result Error Multiple consecutive / 1. Software error 1. Rerun the operating software.
calculation photoelectric
17-63
ID class Event Log
measurements are 2. Reboot the operation unit.
time out 3. If the error remains, contact our
Position: local distributor.
Chemistry:
C04001 Sample bar code Warning Duplicate sample bar / Duplicate bar code is used. Replace the duplicate sample bar
code. code label.
Sample ID/bar code:
Position 1:
Position 2:
C04002 Sample bar code Warning Bar code has no / The sample of the bar code has not been Program the sample of the bar code.
corresponding programmed.
programming.
Sample ID/bar code:
Position:
C04006 Sample bar code Warning Sample is expired / The sample is loaded after its shelf life is The sample is expired. Replace the
Sample ID/bar code: exceeded. sample and program it again. Reject
Position: the expired sample. If the sample
shelf life is too short, change it to a
reasonable one.
C04008 Sample bar code Warning Sample bar code too / The bar code length is greater than the Redefine the bar code with no more
long. Position: maximum value of 27 digits. than 27 digits.
C04009 Sample bar code Warning Sample bar code is less / The sample bar code is too short, less than the Reprint the bar code and ensure it is
than 3 digits. minimum range of 3 digits. no less than 3 digits.
position:
C04012 Sample bar code Warning Sample bar code / Barcode information does not conform with Reset the barcode format or reprint
analysis error the barcode format the barcode and scan it.
Sample bar code:
Position:
17-64
ID class Event Log
C05001 Reagent bar Warning Duplicate reagent bar / Incorrect reagent or reagent bar code is being Reprint the reagent bar code, or
code code used, or an invalid reagent bar code is being replace the reagent bottle with an
Reagent: used. Bar code is aligned with reagents, and invalid bar code.
Position 1: cannot be used again for new reagent when a
reagent is exhausted.
Position 2:
C05002 Reagent bar Warning Reagent bar code / Incorrect reagent bar code is being used, or Print the new reagent bar code with
code information error. reagent bar code is not configured reasonably. correct settings and check the bar
Position: The reagent bar code contains incomplete or code against the settings. Replace
incorrect reagent information, such as the reagent bottle, or contact the
expiration date, reagent volume, etc. reagent supplier.
C05003 Reagent bar Warning Reagent bar code / Incorrect reagent bar code is being used, or Check the reagent bar code settings,
code analysis error reagent bar code settings are incorrect. The or reprint the reagent bar code
Position: system fails to extract reagent information against the settings. Contact the
from the bar code. reagent supplier.
C05006 Reagent bar Error Wash solution position / Reagent rather than wash solution is placed in Reposition the reagent, or remove it
code on reagent carousel is the fixed wash solution position (D) on reagent from the fixed reagent position.
occupied by another carousel.
reagent
Position:
C05008 Reagent bar Error Physiological saline / Reagent rather than physiological saline is Reposition the reagent, or remove it
code position on reagent placed in the fixed physiological saline from the fixed wash solution
carousel is occupied position (W) on reagent carousel. position.
by another reagent
Position:
C06001 Host Error LIS initialization error / Host file is damaged or does not exist. Reinstall the operating software.
communication
C06002 Host Error LIS communication / Host parameters error Re-set or modify the host
communication parameter error communication parameters.
C06003 Host Error LIS communication / Communication error If the error occurs accidentally, send
communication error or receive the instruction again. If
17-65
ID class Event Log
the error still remains, contact our
local distributor.
C06004 Host Error LIS host cannot be / Abnormal network connection or the LIS host Check LIS connection and network
communication connected is not started. cable. Check if LIS host and LIS
station can start normally.
C06005 Host Warning Sending sample results / Communication error If the error occurs accidentally, send
communication failed. or receive the instruction again. If
Sample ID/bar code: the error still remains, contact our
Position: customer service department or your
local distributor.
C06006 Host Warning Sending sample / Communication error If the error occurs accidentally, send
communication information failed. or receive the instruction again. If
Sample ID/bar code: the error still remains, contact our
Position: customer service department or your
local distributor.
C06007 Host Warning Inquiring sample / LIS host failure. If the error occurs accidentally,
communication information failed. neglect it. If the error occurs
Sample ID/bar code: frequently, contact the
Position: manufacturer of LIS or contact our
local distributor.
C06008 Host Warning Downloading sample / Incorrect channel settings or insufficient or Check and re-set the chemistry
communication failed. redundant chemistries on the LIS host. correspondence between the
Sample ID/bar code: operating software and the LIS host.
Position:
C07003 Light source Error Light intensity is too / 1. The lamp is not installed correctly. 1. Check if the lamp is installed
weak 2. The cuvette is contaminated. correctly.
3. The lamp is aging. 2. Perform the diluted wash
4. The wash station dispenses liquid procedure and then the lamp check
procedure.
17-66
ID class Event Log
incorrectly. 3. Replace the lamp.
5. The photoelectric collection board goes 4. Check if the wash station
wrong. dispenses liquid with correct volume
to reaction cuvettes.
5. If your attempt fails, contact our
local distributor.
C07004 Light source Warning Cuvette blank out of / 1. The cuvette is contaminated. 1. Open the reaction carousel and
range 2. The lamp is aging. check if the lamp is turned on. If it is
Cuvette No.: 3. The lamp is not installed correctly. not, rerun the operating software.
4. The wash station dispenses liquid 2. Check if the lamp is installed
incorrectly. correctly.
5. The photoelectric collection board goes 3. Perform the diluted wash
wrong. procedure and then the cuvette
check procedure.
4. Replace or clean the failed
cuvette.
5. Replace the lamp.
6. Check if the wash station
dispenses liquid with correct volume
to reaction cuvettes.
7. If your attempt fails, contact our
local distributor.
C07005 Light source Error Lamp is not turned on / 1. The lamp is damaged. 1. Open the reaction carousel and
2. The lamp cable is not connected properly. check if the lamp is turned on. If it is
3. The power board of the lamp is not not, rerun the operating software.
connected properly. 2. Check if the lamp cable is
4. The power supply of the analyzing unit is tightened.
disconnected. 3. Replace the lamp.
5. The photoelectric collection board goes 4. If your attempt fails, contact our
17-67
ID class Event Log
wrong. customer service department or your
local distributor.
C07006 Light source Error Light intensity is too / 1. A cuvette position has no cuvette installed. 1. Check if all cuvette positions have
strong 2. The circuit gain is too high and beyond the cuvettes installed.
measurement range. 2. Contact our customer service
department or your local distributor
to adjust the gain.
C07007 Light source Error Dark current is too / 1. The circuit gain is too high and beyond the If three continuous attempts are
high measurement range. failed, contact our customer service
Channel: 2. The photoelectric collection board goes department or your local distributor.
AD: wrong.
C07008 Light source Warning Lamp has exceeded its / 1. The lamp has been used for over 2000 1. Replace the lamp.
life span. Replace it hours. 2. Perform the Replace Lamp
immediately. 2. The lamp has been replaced incorrectly. maintenance procedure again.
C07009 Light source Error Water blank out of L! 1. The cuvette wash station is overflowing. 1. Check if the cuvette is
range (10X) 2. The lamp has been replaced incorrectly. overflowing.
3. Cuvette check is not performed after 2. Check if the Replace Lamp
maintenance. command is executed during lamp
4. The cable connectors are not tightened. replacement.
5. The retaining screw is not tightened. 3. Check if the Cuvette Check
command is executed after
6. The wash station dispenses insufficient
maintenance.
fluid.
4. Check if the cleaning liquid inside
7. The lamp is aged.
the cuvette is no less than half of the
8. The photometer goes wrong. cuvette.
5. Check if the cable connectors and
retaining screw of the lamp have
been tightened.
6. Check if the reaction curve
fluctuates irregularly. If yes, replace
the lamp.
17-68
ID class Event Log
C07012 Other error of Warning Storage device error. / No U disk is inserted. No file is found in the U Check if a U disk is inserted or full.
operation unit Cannot import data disk, or file error, or file is damaged. The U Check if the storage device is
disk is locked or damaged. damaged.
C07013 Other error of Warning Storage device error. / No U disk is inserted. Insufficient disk space. Check if a U disk is inserted or full.
operation unit Cannot export data The U disk is locked or damaged. Check if the storage device is
damaged.
C07014 Other error of Warning Reagent exhausted / All reagents of the reagent type for the Refill or replace the reagent.
operation unit Chemistry: chemistry are less than the minimum limit. All
Position: reagents of the type are too little to be
detected.
C07016 Other error of Warning Insufficient wash / Insufficient wash solution on the reagent Refill the wash solution on the
operation unit solution carousel. reagent carousel.
Position:
C07017 Other error of Warning Wash solution is / The wash solution on the reagent carousel is Refill the wash solution on the
operation unit exhausted exhausted. reagent carousel.
Position:
C07022 Other error of Warning Less than X tests are / All reagents of the reagent type for the Refill or replace the reagent.
operation unit left in biochemistry chemistry are less than the minimum limit. All
reagent. Chemistry: reagents of the type are too little to be
detected.
C07023 Other error of Warning Chemistry: %s, 30 / The calibration factors will be expired. Recalibrate the chemistries.
operation unit minutes left for next
calibration.
C07027 Other error of Warning Calibrator %s has been / The calibrator is expired. Replace the calibrator.
operation unit expired
C07028 Other error of Warning Chemistry: %s, lot / The reagent is expired. Replace the reagent.
operation unit No.: %s, position: %s,
has been expired
17-69
ID class Event Log
C07029 Other error of Warning Chemistry: %s, lot / The on-board stability time of the reagent Replace the reagent.
operation unit No.: %s, pack is too long.
position: %s, has
exceeded the
on-board stability time
C07034 Other error of Warning Insufficient / Insufficient physiological saline. Refill the physiological saline on the
operation unit physiological saline reagent carousel.
Position:
C07035 Other error of Warning Physiological saline is / Physiological saline is exhausted. Refill the physiological saline on the
operation unit exhausted reagent carousel.
Position:
C07036 Other Warning Chemistry: %s. / The calibration factors have been expired. Recalibrate the chemistry.
Calibration factors are
expired
C07037 Other Warning Reagent bottle / Serial number of the reagent is changed. Recalibrate the chemistry.
number of %s
chemistry is changed.
Please recalibrate
C07038 Other Warning Reagent lot number / Lot number of the reagent is changed. Recalibrate the chemistry.
of %s chemistry is
changed. Please
recalibrate
C07039 Other Warning Calibration factors / The calibration factors are expired. Recalibrate the chemistry.
of %s chemistry are
expired. Recalibrate
C07040 Other Warning Reagent exhausted / 1. The reagent is running out. Refill or replace the reagent.
Chemistry: 2. The reagent is too little to be detected.
C07041 Other Error ISE reagent is less / ISE reagent inventory is below the alarm limit Check the inventory. If the reagent is
than %s insufficient, load the reagent.
17-70
ID class Event Log
C07042 Other Warning %s, lot number: %s, / One or more special reagents have been Replace them with new reagents.
position: %s, has been expired.
expired
17-71
17-72
18 Template Modifying Software
The Template Modifying Software is affiliated with the Operating Software and used to
create or edit print templates, which illustrate the contents and format of patient reports.
The Template Modifying Software can be started separately or together with the
Operating Software. To start the Template Modifying Software, select the Edit button on
the Print page of the operating software.
The following sections introduce the Template Modifying Software by menus and
toolbars.
18-1
18.1 Main Screen

18.1.1 Main Screen
The following figure shows the main screen of the Template Modifying Software.
Figure 18.1 Main screen
18.1.2 File (F)

The File menu is used to create, save, import/export and print out the templates. Select
File on upper-left corner of the main screen. The File menu is displayed.
The following table explains the menu in detail.
Option Description
New Select New to create a template. The type of the template is
determined by the report that is currently selected on the report
window.
You can also use the shortcut key Ctrl+N instead.
After changing the currently-displayed template, select New to
display the following dialog box.
18-2
Option Description
 Select Yes to save the changes and create a template.

 Select No to cancel the changes and create a template.
 Select Cancel to abort creating and return to the previous
screen.
Save Select Save to save the newly-created template or the changes to a
template.
You can also use the shortcut key Ctrl+S instead.
To save a new template, you should define the template name:
 Enter the name in the edit box.

 Select OK to save the template and add the name to the
template list on the report window.
 Select Cancel to abort saving and return to the previous screen.
If a template with the same name already exists, a dialog box pops
up.
 Select Yes to overwrite the template.
 Select No to cancel saving and return to the previous screen.
Save As Save the current template with another name.
If a template with the same name already exists, a dialog box
appears to ask for your confirmation.
Delete Delete a template. Not availabel.
Import Import a template. Not availabel.
Template
Export Export a template. Not availabel.
Template
Import Import BMP, GIF, JPEG, PNG, TIFF, and EMF images from a storage
Image device to the picture folder.
Print Print the current template. Not availabel.
Preview Select this option to view the template exactly as it will be printed
18-3
Option Description
out.
The main screen will be hidden when you preview a template.
The tool bar on the Preview window is as follows.
 If the template has more than one page, and are

available.
 : Go to the first page.

 : Go to the previous page.
 : Go to the specified page.

 : Go to the next page.
 : Go to the last page.
 : Select to expand the template view among 25%, 50%, 75%

and 100%. The default is 100%.
 : Select to shrink the template view.
 : Print out the template. It is equivalent to the Print option in

the File menu.
 : Select to exit the preview window and return to the

template.
Exit Select this option to close the Template Modifying Software.
You can use the shortcut key Alt+F4 instead.
If the template is changed, the following dialog box pops up.
 Select Yes to save the changes and exit the software.

 Select No to exit the software without saving the changes.
 Select Cancel to abort exiting and return to the previous screen.
18.1.3 Edit (E)

The Edit menu provides the functions like cut, copy, paste and delete. Select Edit on the
menu bar of the main screen. The Edit menu is displayed.
18-4
NOTE
The control(s) you have cut or copied can only be pasted on the current Template
Modifying Software rather than another one or other software.
Option Description
Cut Select this option to copy and delete single or multiple controls.
You can use the shortcut key Ctrl+X instead.
This option is available only when a control(s) is selected.
Copy Select this option to copy single or multiple controls.
You can use the shortcut key Ctrl+C instead.
Paste Select this option to paste the controls that are previously cut or
copied at the same place as where the controls are from.
You can use the shortcut key Ctrl+P instead.
This option is available only when a control(s) is cut or copied.
Delete Select this option to delete single or multiple controls
You can use the shortcut key Ctrl+D instead.
18.1.4 View (V)

The View menu is used to enable or disable the toolbars and to set up the displaying
proportion. Select View on the menu bar of the main screen. The View menu is displayed.
18-5
Option Description
Common Enable or disable the common toolbar.
Tool
Draw Tool Enable or disable the draw toolbar.
Property Enable or disable the property window.
Window
Report Enable or disable the report window.
Window
Status Bar Enable or disable the status bar.
25%-200% Select a proportion to display the template. The default is 100%.
NOTE
You are recommended to select 100% when saving a template.
18.1.5 Insert (I)

The Insert menu is used to create controls in the editing page. Select Insert on the menu
bar of the main screen. The Insert menu is displayed.
Only one option on the Insert menu can be selected simultaneously.
Option Description
Select
Select this option to change the mouse pointer to a .
When the mouse pointer changes to a , you can select single or

multiple controls in the editing area.
NOTE
Selecting a control while holding the Ctrl key copies the control.
Line Select this option to insert a line in the editing area. The mouse
pointer changes into a +. Click once in the editing area and drag
the mouse to draw a line.
Rectangle Select this option to insert a rectangle in the editing area. The
mouse pointer changes into a +. Click once in the editing area and
drag the mouse to draw a rectangle.
Label Select this option to insert a label in the editing area. The mouse
the mouse to draw a label.
Label is a type of text control and the contents on a label will not
change when printed.
18-6
Option Description
Text Select this option to insert a text control in the editing area. The
mouse pointer changes into a +. Click once in the editing area and
drag the mouse to create a text.
The contents in a text control will be replaced by the actual test
data when printed.
Title Select this option to insert a title in the editing area. The mouse
the mouse to create a title.
Title is a type of text control. The “%s” will be replaced by a
hospital name when printed. Please note “%s” is added by user and
not produced automatically.
Image Select this option to insert an image in the editing area. The mouse
the mouse to create an image.
The image on the template is for illustration only and will be
replaced by corresponding curve graph when printed.
18.1.6 Format (M)

The Format menu is used to arrange the controls on a template. Select Format on the
menu bar of the main screen. The Format menu is displayed.
Option Description
Left Align the specified controls with the left of the lastly-selected
control.
Right Align the specified controls with the right of the lastly-selected
control.
Top Align the specified controls with the top side of the
lastly-selected control.
Bottom Align the specified controls with the bottom side of the
Center H Align one or multiple controls to the horizontal center of current
template.
Center V Align one or multiple controls to the vertical center of current
template.
18-7
Option Description
Even Space Arrange three or more controls with same space horizontally.
H
Even Space Arrange three or more controls with same space vertically.
V
Same Width Adjust the specified controls to the same width as the
Same Height Adjust the specified controls to the same height as the
Same Size Adjust the specified controls to the same width and height as the
18.1.7 Set(S)
The Set menu only includes an option, Print ID. See the figure below.
Select Print ID. The Set Print ID dialog box is displayed. You can enable or disable the
print fields and view the corresponding ID of each field.
18.1.8 Language (L)

Select Language on the menu bar of the main screen. The Language menu is displayed.
Option Description
Chinese Switch the screen language to Chinese. Not available.
18-8
Option Description
English Switch the screen language to English. Not available.
18.1.9 Help (H)

Select Help on the menu bar of the main screen. The Help menu is displayed.
Option Description
Version Select this option to view the version information of the
template modifying software.
18-9
18.2 Common Tools

The common toolbar provides the shortcut buttons that enables you to perform an
operation quickly.
The following table shows the correspondence between the shortcut buttons and menu
options.
Button Menu Option
New File/New
Save File/Save (not enabled)

Save As File/Save As
Import File/Import
Export File/Export
Delete File/Delete
Print File/Print
Preview File/Preview
Cut Edit/Cut
Copy Edit/Copy
Paste Edit/Paste
Delete Edit/Delete
Zoom View/25%-200%
Property View/Property Window
Rpt List View/Report Window
Print ID Set/Print ID
18-10
18.3 Draw Tools

The draw toolbar provides the shortcut buttons that enables you to create and draw
controls quickly.
The following table shows the correspondence between the shortcut buttons and menu
options.
Button Menu Option

Insert/Select
Insert/Line
Insert/Rectangle
Insert/Label
Insert/Text
Insert/Title
Insert/Image
Format/Left
Format/Right
Format/Top
Format/Bottom
Format/Center H
Format/Center V
Format/Even Space H
Format/Even Space V
Format/Same Width
18-11
Button Menu Option

Format/Same Height
Format/Same Size
18-12
18.4 Property Window

The property window enables you to view and edit the properties of the selected control.
If no control is selected in the window, the properties of the current template are
displayed.
18.4.1 Page
When no control is selected, the property window shows the properties of the current
template, such as paper, print type, etc.
The following table explains the template properties in detail.
Paper Define the paper type of the template. There are 9 common types
available.
If the paper width and height you defined are beyond the specified
range, Custom is displayed in the Paper field.
Paper Width Define the width of the template.
Paper Define the height of the template.

Height
Grid Point Enable or disable grid points on the template.
Print Type Includes Paginal and Serial. Not available.
Combination Whether to print two reports on one piece of paper. Merging reports
Type is now not permitted. Not available.
18.4.2 Line
When a line control is selected, the property window shows the properties of the line.
18-13
The following table explains the line properties in detail.
ID Print ID of the line. The ID is 2.
Start X Set the X-coordinate value of the start point.
NOTE
The control coordinate originates from the upper-left corner of
the editing area, from which the X axis (positive) is extended
horizontally to the right and the Y axis (positive) vertically to the
bottom. The unit is mm.
Start Y Set the Y-coordinate value of the start point.
End X Set the X-coordinate value of the end point.
End Y Set the Y-coordinate value of the end point.
Line Width Set the width of the line. The unit is mm.
Group No. A group gathers multiple controls that will be used frequently on
the template. e.g. a line of controls constitutes a group. The
group No. is 0 if not defined.
Line Color Set the color of the line.
Print Enable or disable printing the line on actual reports.
18.4.3 Rectangle
When a rectangle control is selected, the property window shows the properties of the
rectangle.
18-14
The following table explains the rectangle properties in detail.
ID Print ID of the line. The ID is 1.
Start X Set the X-coordinate value of the start point (upper-left corner).
Start Y Set the Y-coordinate value of the start point (upper-left corner).
Width Set the width of the rectangle.
Height Set the height of the rectangle.
Frame Width Set the frame width of the rectangle.
Frame Color Set the color of the frame.
Print Enable or disable printing the rectangle on actual reports.
18.4.4 Label
When a label control is selected, the property window shows the properties of the label.
18-15
The following table explains the label properties in detail.
ID Print ID of the label. The ID is 4.
Text Set the text on the label. It will be printed unchanged on actual
reports.
Width Set the width of the label.
Height Set the height of the label.
Bk Color Set the background color of the label.
Font Set the font of the label text.
Text Place Set the aligning mode of label text. It includes Left, Center and
Right.
Print Frame Enable and disable printing frame.
Frame Width Set the width of the label frame.
Frame Color Set the color of the label frame.
Print Enable or disable printing the label on actual reports.
Text ID Set text ID for the control. When it is edited, the template is
refreshed.
18-16
Replace text Choose whether to use the defined text ID to replace the text of
the control.
18.4.5 Text
When a text control is selected, the property window shows the properties of the text.
The following table explains the text properties in detail.
ID Print ID of the text. The default is 0 and means unknown ID.
Print ID indicates the meaning of the text. Correct printout can
be ensured only when print ID is set properly.
Name Set the contents to be displayed on the text control. It varies
from different IDs.
Text Set the contents displayed on the text control. It will be
replaced by actual data when printed.
Show Detail Enable or disable printing the control in group.
Width Set the width of the text.
Height Set the height of the text.
Text Type Reserved parameter. The default is 0.
18-17
Bk Color Set the background color of the text.
Font Set the font of the text.
Text Place Set the aligning mode of the text. It includes Left, Center and
Right.
Frame Width Set the width of the text frame.
Frame Color Set the color of the label frame.
Print Enable or disable printing the text on actual reports.
18.4.6 Title
When a title control is selected, the property window shows the properties of the title.
The following table explains the title properties in detail.
ID Print ID of the title. The ID is 5.
Text Set the contents to be displayed on the title. “%s” will be

replaced by a hospital name and can be displayed in any
place of the title.
Start X Set the X-coordinate value of the start point (upper-left
corner).
Width Set the width of the title.
Height Set the height of the title.
18-18
Bk Color Set the background color of the title.
Font Set the font of the title text.
Text Place Set the aligning mode of title text. It includes Left, Center
and Right.
Frame Width Set the width of the title frame.
Frame Color Set the color of the title frame.
Print Enable or disable printing the title on actual reports.
Text ID Set text ID for the control. When it is edited, the template
is refreshed.
Replace text Choose whether to use the defined text ID to replace the
text of the control.
18.4.7 Image
When an image control is selected, the property window shows the properties of the
image.
The following table explains the image properties in detail.
ID Print ID of the image. The ID is 3.
Start X Set the X-coordinate value of the start point (upper-left

corner).
Width Set the width of the image.
Height Set the height of the image.
Group No. A group gathers multiple controls that will be used

frequently on the template. e.g. a line of controls
constitutes a group. The group No. is 0 if not defined.
Print Enable or disable printing the image on actual reports.
File Name Name of image file. Specify it in the picture folder and
draw it on the image control.
18-19
18.5 Report Window

The report window locates on the lower-right corner of the main screen and shows all
the templates of a selected report type.
Report type
Template list
18-20
Electronic Interface
Description Serial interface Network interface

Interface RS232 standard communication RJ45 interface standard
Standard Serial interface. The RXD and
TXD signal level meets the RS232
interface standard.
Interface The baud rate is 115200bps. The communication rate is
Specifications 100Mbps
Interface The host receives and executes The analyzer sends an

Purpose instructions from the PC through instruction to wake up the
this interface, and returns the PC through this interface.
execution results to the PC
through this interface.
Intended User Operator and service personnel Operator and service
personnel
Electronic Interface-1
Electronic Interface
Electronic Interface-2
Vocabulary
Absorbance
The difference between the amount of light entering a solution (incident light) and the
amount of light passing through the solution (transmitted light) without being absorbed,
to determine the concentration of the substance in the solution.
Analyzing unit
The analyzing unit, the analyzer, determines various clinical chemistries in samples and
displays the test results. It consists of the sample handling system, reagent handling
system, reaction system, cuvette wash station, photometric system, and mixer assembly.
Auto rerun
When a result is beyond the defined range or satisfies the defined conditions, the
chemistry will be run again.
Auto serum index
When the Auto Serum Index function is enabled, the system will select the SI chemistry
automatically for serum or plasma samples. The SI chemistry will also be requested
automatically when you program routine samples manually or by using the LIS host, or
program STAT samples, or program routine samples with the default panels.
Bar code reader
Fixed laser beam scanner. It scans the bar code label on sample tubes to identify samples
and match the obtained programming information with the scanned samples.
Batch program
Batch program is to program a group of samples with identical programming information,
with the exception of the sample ID.
Blank time
Blank time refers to the period between dispensing of the second reactant (reagent or
sample) in reversed order and of the last reactant (reagent or sample).
Bottle type
Volume of the reagent bottle.
Calibration curve
A calibration curve reflects the mathematical relation between calibrator concentration
and response. It is drawn based on the obtained response and the multiple values
between the minimum and maximum concentrations of the calibrator.
Calibration factor
Calibration factor is obtained based on the equation of calibrator concentration (known)
and response (calibration math model).
Vocabulary-1
Vocabulary
Calibration math model

Calibration math model is used to calculate calibration factors and create calibration
curves. It includes single-point K factor, two-point linear, multi-point linear, Logit-Log4P,
Logit-Log5P, Exponential5P, Polynomial5P, Parabola and Spline.
Calibration trend
Calibration trend summarizes a chemistry’s calibrations during a period of time and
reflect the trends of the calibrations.
Carryover
Carryover is the interference of certain substance contained in a reagent. It can influence
measurement of another chemistry or the reaction of other mixture, resulting in
inaccurate results.
Chemistry configuration
Chemistry configuration is applicable to all chemistries other than ISE chemistry and SI,
and used to enable or disable chemistries that have been defined correctly.
Closed-reagent chemistry
Closed-reagent chemistry is run by using the reagents provided by the analyzer
manufacturer. Closed-reagent chemistries cannot be modified or deleted.
Concentrated wash solution
Concentrated wash solution is CD80 alkaline concentrated wash solution. It is placed in
the front cabinet of the analyzer and used to clean the reaction cuvettes during the 8
phases.
Critical range
An allowable result range from the perspective of clinical diagnosis. If the test result is
beyond the critical range, the patient may need immediate treatment. You may enable the
auto rerun function for a chemistry, which will be rerun automatically once the test result
is beyond the critical range.
Current results
Current results include those that are in Incomplete status until the current system time
and those programmed and analyzed on the current day.
Cuvette wash station
The cuvette wash station consists of the wash probes, elevating motor and related tubing,
and is used to clean the reaction cuvettes with the eight wash probes when a test is
finished.
Database
A collection of data arranged for quick search and retrieval.
Decreased
Decreased indicates the sample volume required for analysis and can be defined on the
Define/Edit Chemistries window.
Diluent
Liquid used to dilute other liquids.
Dilution factor
User-defined dilution ratio, to be multiplied with sample result to obtain the final result.
Vocabulary-2
Vocabulary
Download
To obtain sample programming information from the LIS host and match it with the
scanned samples. The system supports real-time and manual downloading of sample
programming information.
EMF
EMF stands for Electromotive Force. The ISE module determines the concentration of ion
by measuring the electromotive force of ion with ion selective electrodes. A calibrator with
constant concentration should have electromotive force within certain range.
Endpoint
The endpoint method, also called equilibrium method, is most ideal for measurements. In
endpoint measurements, the reaction reaches equilibrium after a period of time. Since
the equilibrium constant is quite high, it can be considered that all substrates (analytes)
have changed into products, and the absorbance of the reactant will not change any more.
The absorbance change is directly proportional to the analytes’ concentration.
Fixed-time
In fixed-time measurements, namely, rate measurements, the reaction velocity (v) is
directly proportional to the substrate concentration [S] within a specific period, that is,
v=k[S].
Flag
Flag is a manufacturer-defined symbol, which appears on patient reports or result list
when a result is beyond the user-defined reference range or exceeds the defined limits.
High-concentration waste
High-concentration waste is produced during the 1st-3rd phase of cuvette cleaning and
includes the ISE waste. It can be drained in a waste tank or to the sewer according to your
local or national regulations on waste liquid disposal.
History results
Stored results are those programmed and analyzed before the current day.
Increased
Increased indicates the sample volume required for analysis and can be defined on the
Define/Edit Chemistries window.
Initialization
Initialization is a series of operations automatically performed by the system during the
startup procedure. It includes parameters check, reset, testing, cleaning and priming.
Inventory check
Used to check the remaining volume of the biochemistry reagents, sample probe wash
solution and reagent probe wash solution and refresh the tests left and wash solution
volume on the Reagent/Calibration screen.
ISE
ISE is the abbreviation of Ion Selective Electrode. It consists of the Na electrode, K electrode,
Cl electrode, reference electrode, sampling and measuring channel, syringe, heat stabilizer,
degassing unit and waste discharger. The ISE module measures the concentration of Na, K
and Cl in serum, plasma and diluted urine.
Vocabulary-3
Vocabulary
K factor
C  K  ( R  R0 )
K factor is manually input for single-point linear calibration formula
and used to calculate results.
Lamp
Lamp is located on the photometer assembly and used to measure the absorbance of
mixture in a reaction cuvette. It should be replaced regularly.
Linearity
Degree of linearity for a reaction curve or calibration curve. Reaction curve linearity is
available in fixed-time measurements, while calibration curve linearity specifies the
allowable concentration range for result calculation.
LIS
LIS stands for Laboratory Information System. It is a host computer and communicates
with chemistry analyzers through the internet interface.
L-J chart
A Levey-Jennings (L-J) chart, drawn based on the QC date (X) and test results (Y), shows
the QC result trend of a chemistry during the specified period. The graphical trends of up
to 3 controls can be displayed on one L-J chart and distinguished with different colors.
Lot number
Lot number is assigned to controls, calibrators or wash solutions of the same lot for
identifying manufacture date, quality, expiration date and other related information.
Low-concentration waste
Low-concentration waste is produced during the 4th-8th phase of cuvette cleaning. It can
be drained to the sewer of your laboratory.
Mask/Unmask chemistries
Used when a chemistry needs to be disabled temporarily due to abnormal result or
reagent exhaustion. The masked chemistry will have a symbol appearing on its
upper-left corner, and will still be displayed on the Sample, Quality Control and
Reagent/Calibration screens but not run for sample analysis. Masked chemistries
cannot be requested until they are unmasked.
Mixer
The system provides sample mixer and reagent mixer, which stir the mixture inside a
reaction cuvette when sample/R3 and R2/R4 are respectively dispensed.
Multi-sample report
Containing the results of multiple samples, and can be printed out on the Current Results
and History Results screens.
Off-line dilution
Prior to analysis, samples are diluted manually based on specific ratio.
Offset
Offset is a value added or subtracted to compensate a result. It is often used along with
the slope in the equation y=kx+b, in which k is the slope and b is the offset.
Off-system chemistry
All the chemistries that are not run by the analyzer are referred to as the off-system
chemistries.
Vocabulary-4
Vocabulary
Online help
Online help provides you with help information about the screens. If you do not
understand a parameter or an operation on a screen, you can go to the online help for
relevant information. Access the online help from the following screens:
 Select the icon on the upper right corner to display the help topic related to the
current screen.
 Select the button in front of each maintenance instruction or item to display the
relevant operating instructions.
 Select the button in front of each error log to display the corresponding topic.
 Click the button on a warning message window to display the corresponding
 Press the shortcut combination key Alt+F1 to display the topics related to the
current screen or window.
Open-reagent chemistry
Open-reagent chemistry, an opposite of the closed-reagent chemistry, can be measured by
using the reagents provided by other manufacturers. It can be user-defined, edited and
deleted.
Operation unit
The operation unit, a computer configured with the operating software, controls the
analyzing unit to finish tests and produce test results.
Output unit
A printer used to print out test results and other data.
Panel
Consists of a couple of chemistries combined together for certain clinical purposes, such
as liver function, kidney function, etc. Panels can help fast programming of samples.
Patient demographics
Patient demographics contain information related to the patient and sample, such as
patient name, age, gender, collection date/time, etc.
Physiological saline
0.9% sodium chloride solution, used for reagent blank and sample dilution.
Predilution
Prior to analysis, samples are diluted automatically based on the defined dilution factor.
Primary wavelength
The primary wavelength is chosen based on the light absorption features of the reactant
and used to measure the absorbed light intensity. Options for primary wavelength include:
340nm, 380nm, 412nm, 450nm, 505nm, 546nm, 570nm, 605nm, 660nm, 700nm,
740nm and 800nm
Prime
Prime is an action to replace the reagents in tubing of the ISE module. A prime is required
to replace the reagents in tubing with new ones during the startup procedure or when a
reagent is changed.
Vocabulary-5
Vocabulary
Print name
Print name appears on a patient report representing a chemistry, and if left blank, will be
replaced by the short name of the chemistry.
Prozone check
Prozone check is intended to checking samples with quite different concentrations, which
may generate the equivalent amount of insoluble antigen/antibody compound and can
have the same test results. The Prozone check can be performed in two ways: rate check
and antigen addition.
Pull-down list
A control of the software screen or window. Select the down-triangle button on the right of
a pull-down list to show multiple options.
QC panel
Used for analysis of control samples.
QC rule
A set of rules to evaluate if the QC results are under control and the analyzing system is
stable. Examples of QC rule are 1-2s, 1-3s, etc.
QC summary
Contains the mean values and standard deviations of controls analyzed within the
specified period, as well as the set mean and SD value. The obtained results are compared
with the set values to judge if the system is working normally.
Qualitative analysis
Qualitative analysis is used to analyze every sample for the detection of lipemia,
hemolysis and icterus and calculate the numeric values of the index. If the volume of the
interferents contained in a sample is beyond the set range, a flag will be added to the
patient report.
Random error
An alarm of quality control monitoring. A random error may occur when the lowest and
highest values of QC results respectively exceed -2SD/-3SD and +2SD/+3SD.
Reaction carousel
Reaction carousel is a turntable, and used to hold reaction cuvettes and transmit each of
them to the photometric position for signal detecting and absorbance calculation.
Reaction curve
A reaction curve reflects the relationship of the absorbance measured at the primary
wavelength, secondary wavelength and primary-secondary wavelength. It is drawn based
on the absorbance of the sample-reagent mixture measured within the reaction period.
The system provides 4 types of reaction curves: calibration reaction curve, QC reaction
curve, sample blank reaction curve, and sample reaction curve.
Reaction cuvette
Reaction cuvette is a carrier in which reagents and samples react with each other and
then carried to the photoelectric position for signal detecting and response calculation.
Reaction direction
Reaction direction refers to the change trend of absorbance during the reaction process.
It includes positive and negative.
Vocabulary-6
Vocabulary
Reaction time
For endpoint analysis, the reaction time refers to the time span from the start point of the
reaction to the end point; for fixed-time and Kinetic analysis, it refers to the period from
reaction equilibrium to the end of monitoring.
Reagent blank
In the reagent blank test, the reagents react with the physiological saline, and the blank
absorbance is calculated to correct the calibration factors. Only the reagents that are in
Calibrated, Cal Time Out or Cal Required status can be requested for reagent blank.
Reagent carousel
The reagent carousel is located on left side of the analyzer panel. It holds reagent bottles
and carries each of them to the reagent aspirate position for aspirating.
Reagent carryover
Cross contamination between the reagent probe and the mixers. When the number of
tests between the contaminating chemistry and the contaminated is less than or equal to
the defined number (N), and no concentrated wash is inserted between the two
chemistries, it indicates that the reagents underlie the risk of carryover.
Reagent inventory alarm limit
Alarm limit of reagents and wash solutions. When the reagent inventory is lower than the
alarm limits during or before the analysis, the system will give an alarm and display the
reagent or wash solution name in yellow on the Reagent/Calibration screen.
Reagent probe
The reagent probe aspirates the specified amount of reagent from a reagent bottle and
then dispenses it into a cuvette for reaction and analysis. The system has one reagent
probe.
Reagent probe wash solution
CD80 alkaline concentrated wash solution. It is placed in position D of the reagent
carousel inner ring, and used for special cleaning the two reagent probes, sample mixer,
reagent mixer, and cuvettes, in order to prevent cross contamination.
Reference range
Reference range is a user-defined range consisting of low limit and high limit. When a
result is beyond the reference range, a flag will appear near the result.
Release
Used to clear the specified sample position or all positions on the current sample carousel.
When a sample is released, its results and programming information can be still recalled.
The released position can be used for programming of new samples.
Replicates
Number of times to run a test, to ensure accurate results.
Result statistics
Result statistics option can summarize the total chemistries and the distribution trend of
its results and provide the test data and graph.
Sample blank
readings.
Vocabulary-7
Vocabulary
Sample carousel
The sample carousel is located on right side of the analyzer panel. It holds sample tubes
and carries each of them to the sample aspirate position for aspirating.
Sample comments
Remarks for some special samples, such as, ** sample has hemolysis; ** sample needs to
be analyzed immediately, etc.
Sample log
Contains the controls and patient samples that are not complete within the recent 24
hours due to certain reasons. Based on the sample log you are allowed to rerun the
samples or take other actions for the controls and samples.
Sample panel
Used for analysis of patient samples.
Sample probe
The sample probe aspirates the specified amount of sample from a sample tube and then
dispenses it into a cuvette for reaction and analysis.
Sample probe wash solution
CD80 alkaline concentrated wash solution. It is placed in position D2 of the sample
carousel, and used for special cleaning the sample probe, sample mixer, reagent mixer,
and cuvettes, in order to prevent cross contamination.
Sample type
Type of sample. The sample type options include serum, plasma, urine, CSF and other.
Screen
Screen is a part of the software interface. It is rectangular and contains various controls,
such as edit box, function button, etc.
Secondary wavelength
The secondary wavelength is used to remove the interference in primary wavelength
values and eliminate the influence of noise, such as light flash and drift, and scratches on
cuvettes, etc. It cannot be the same as the primary wavelength.
Serial number
Sequence number of the reagent bottle.
Slope
Multiplied with the test result to make it consistent with that obtained on other
instruments. It is often used along with the offset in the equation y=kx+b, in which k is
the slope and b is the offset.
Special calculation
Special calculation is derived from calculation of certain chemistries and has specific
clinical purposes, such as A/G, TBil-DBil, etc.
Special wash
Special wash is to clean the sample probe, reagent probes, mixers and reaction cuvettes
by using the probe wash solution, with the aim of eliminating carryover and preventing
waste from leaving in the waste tubes.
Vocabulary-8
Vocabulary
Standard deviation (SD)

Standard deviation is the mean of deviations from the mean value. It is an index to judge
the measurement accuracy under specific conditions. In this manual, SD refers to the
standard deviation of control concentration.
Standby
Standby is one of the system statuses. When the system status is Standby, it indicates that
all tests are finished and all actions of the system have stopped.
STAT
STAT means emergent, including common STAT and quick STAT program. STAT sample
program allows emergent samples to be programmed and analyzed with high priority.
Common STAT program is used in daytime to run emergent samples with higher priority
than routine samples. Quick STAT program is mainly used in nighttime and weekends to
program emergent samples quickly with higher priority than routine and common STAT
samples.
Symbology
Symbology is a set of rules for encoding and decoding information contained in a bar code
label. The system provides a couple of symbologies, such as Codabar, ITF, code128, code39,
UPC/EAN, and Code93.
Systematic error
An alarm of quality control monitoring. A systematic error may occur when both the
lowest value and highest value of a QC result are on the same side.
Transmit
Transmit is an action sending specified sample results or QC results to the LIS host.
Twin chemistries
Twin chemistries are run with the same reagents and calculated through the same test.
For two twin chemistries, the sample volume, volume of shared reagent, calibration
replicates, and auto calibration conditions should be the same. When either of the two
chemistries is requested for calibration, quality control or sample analysis, the other
chemistry will be automatically requested, and finally results of both chemistries will be
calculated.
Twin-Plot chart
A twin-plot chart, drawn based on the results of control X and control Y in the same run, is
used to detect systematic errors and random errors. It shows the recent 10 QC results of a
chemistry and excludes those that have been deleted.
Two-control evaluation
In two-control evaluation, two results are obtained: Xn and Yn, which are used to define a
point on the Twin-plot chart. In this way, a complete twin-plot chart is drawn based on all
the QC results and used for detecting systematic errors and random errors.
Unpositioned samples
Samples without positions assigned or with positions not assigned successfully, including
those:
 downloaded from the LIS host and not positioned yet.
 that are in Incomplete status when their positions are assigned for new samples.
 that are incomplete when their positions are released.
Vocabulary-9
Vocabulary
Wash solution
All wash solution used by the instrument is CD80 alkaline concentrated wash solution.
According to usage, it can be divided into three types: concentrated wash solution (in the
front cabinet) for cleaning cuvettes, sample probe wash solution (in D2 of the sample
carousel) for special cleaning the sample probe, sample mixer, reagent mixer and cuvettes,
and reagent probe wash solution (in D of the reagent carousel) for special cleaning the
reagent probes, sample mixer, reagent mixer and cuvettes.
Westgard rule
Westgard rule is used for monitoring of quality control. In the Westgard rule, single rules
such as 12S, 13S, 22S and 41S are combined to evaluate results of single or multiple
controls.
Test statistics
On the Tests screen, you can view test requests and reagent application for each
chemistry during a period, and sample requests and the quantity of its chemistries
Vocabulary-10
Index
Calibration status, 2-8, 2-10, 2-24, 2-42, 6-3, 6-6, 6-7,

A 6-11, 6-12, 6-18, 8-30, 8-32, 12-13
absorbance, 4-4 calibration trends, 6-10, 6-16, 6-23, 12-12, 12-15
Absorbance, 3-18, 4-4, 4-9, 4-10, 4-15, 4-16, 6-6, 17-14, Calibration trends, 6-10, 6-16, 6-23, 12-12, 12-15
17-22, 17-59, 1 calibrator, 4-12
Analyzing unit, 1 calibrator acceptance limits, 3-25
Antibody, 17-22, 17-60 Calibrator acceptance limits, 3-25
Antigen, 3-19, 4-15 calibrator dilution, 6-4
antigen addition, 3-19, 4-15, 6 Carryover, 10-1, 10-18, 10-19, 2
Antigen addition, 3-19, 4-15, 6 CAUTION, 8-16
antigen excess, 4-15, 4-16 Check before powering on, 2-1, 2-2
Antigen excess, 4-15, 4-16 Check concentrated/diluted wash solution, 2-47, 16-11
auto calibration, 2-24, 3-29, 3-30, 6-2, 6-11, 6-12 Check deionized water connection, 2-47, 16-11
Auto calibration, 2-24, 3-30, 6-2, 6-11, 6-12 Check sample/reagent syringes, 2-47, 16-11
auto quality control, 2-28, 7-7 Check waste, 2-47, 16-11
Auto quality control, 2-28, 7-7 Checking system status, 2-1, 2-2
auto rerun, 3-15, 3-22, 3-23, 8-4, 8-9, 2 chemistries left, 2-10, 2-42, 5-5
Auto rerun, 3-15, 3-22, 3-23, 8-4, 8-9, 2 Chemistries left, 2-10, 2-42
auto serum index, 3-3, 8-21 chemistry list, 2-27, 3-10, 3-11, 8-1, 8-2, 8-32, 10-16
Auto serum index, 3-3 Chemistry list, 2-27, 3-10, 3-11, 8-2, 8-32, 10-16
Auto sleep and startup, 11-1 Clean analyzer panels, 16-11
Clean mixers, 16-11
B Clean rotors, 16-12
Clean sample probe interior, 16-11
Background, 18-16, 18-18, 18-19 Cleaning the dust screen, 16-5
Bar code reader, 1-40, 1 Cleaning the filter core, 16-5
Batch program, 2-29, 2-32, 2-37, 1 Cleaning the wash wells, 16-5
biochemistry maintenance, 16-6, 16-7 clearing samples, 8-22
Biochemistry maintenance, 16-6, 16-7 Clog detection, 1-12, 17-29
blank time, 2-22, 3-14, 3-15, 3-19, 4-8, 4-10 closed-reagent chemistry, 5
Blank time, 2-22, 3-14, 3-15, 3-19, 4-8, 4-10 Closed-reagent chemistry, 5
Bottle type, 2-15, 2-18, 2-20, 2-21, 13-7, 13-9, 1 concentrated wash solution, 4, 2-16, 2-17, 5-15, 16-22,
16-23, 16-26, 16-27, 16-61, 17-17, 17-43, 17-44, 8
C Concentrated wash solution, 4, 2-16, 2-17, 5-15, 16-22,
16-23, 16-26, 16-27, 16-61, 8
calibration curve, 4-13 Control, 4, 12, 1-27, 2-2, 2-26, 2-27, 2-28, 3-6, 3-8, 3-32,
Calibration curve, 6-7, 17-17, 17-20, 1 3-33, 3-35, 7-1, 7-2, 7-3, 7-5, 7-7, 7-8, 7-9, 7-14, 7-15,
Calibration factors, 2-24, 6-11, 6-13, 6-17 7-16, 7-17, 7-18, 9-2, 9-11, 10-14, 10-22, 12-18, 4
calibration math model, 3-30, 4-12, 4-13, 4-14, 6-7, 1 control status, 2-26, 3-33, 7-3
Calibration math model, 3-29, 3-30, 4-12, 4-13, 4-14, 1 Control status, 7-3
calibration reports, 3-30 critical range, 3-11, 3-22, 3-23, 3-24, 8-4, 8-9, 17-13, 2
Calibration reports, 3-30 Critical range, 3-11, 3-22, 3-23, 8-4, 8-9, 2
calibration rules, 2-22, 3-25, 3-29 Current, 8-50
Calibration rules, 2-22, 3-25, 3-29 Current results, 8-36
calibration status, 2-8, 2-10, 2-24, 2-30, 2-41, 2-42, 5-2, Cuvette check, 10-18, 16-6, 16-11
5-3, 5-5, 6-2, 6-3, 6-6, 6-7, 6-11, 6-12, 6-13, 6-18, cuvette wash station, 1-18, 1-19, 2-12, 16-11, 16-31,
6-21, 8-30, 8-32, 9-5, 12-13, 12-17 16-32, 1, 2
Index-1
Index
Cuvette wash station, 1-18, 1-19, 16-31, 16-32, 1, 2 I

Increased, 3-15, 8-7, 8-8, 8-10, 8-13, 3
D Initialization, 3
daily maintenance, 2-47 Installation environment, 1-2
Data alarm, 17-10, 17-11 Installation requirements, 1-1
Database, 17-2, 17-4, 17-58, 17-59, 2 Inventory check, 3
Decreased, 3-15, 8-7, 8-8, 8-10, 8-13, 16-29, 2 ISE chemistry parameters, 12-5
default panel, 2-43, 8-21, 10-1, 10-20, 13-6, 1 ISE maintenance, 16-8, 16-9
Default panel, 8-21, 10-1, 10-20, 13-6, 1 ISE module, 11, 1-29, 2-8, 2-22, 3-7, 10-14, 10-15, 11-2,
defining a chemistry, 3-11, 6-6, 8-12 11-13, 11-14, 12-1, 12-2, 12-5, 12-11, 12-21, 12-22,
Defining a chemistry, 3-11, 6-6 12-23, 16-3, 16-8, 16-9, 16-23, 16-24, 16-35, 16-36,
Delete/edit logs, 17-1, 17-7, 17-8 16-37, 16-45, 16-63, 16-66, 16-68, 17-2, 17-3, 17-5, 3,
Demographics, 2-33, 8-39 5
Diluent, 6-5, 2 ISE startup primes, 3-4
Diluted wash, 3-3, 16-11, 16-26, 8
Dilution factor, 2 K
dispenser assembly, 1-12, 1-16
Dispenser assembly, 1-10, 1-12, 1-16 K factor, 3-29, 4-4, 4-12, 6-7, 6-9, 6-16, 6-17, 6-21,
Download, 14-8, 14-9, 3 6-22, 9-5, 17-18, 17-62, 2, 4
Kinetic, 4-8
dust screens, 16-5, 16-11, 16-34, 16-35, 16-37
Dust screens, 16-5, 16-34, 16-35, 16-37
L
E Lamp check, 16-6, 16-11
Light source, 1-20, 1-36, 17-66, 17-67, 17-68
endpoint, 4-4
Light transmission component, 1-20
Endpoint, 1-35, 3-13, 3-14, 4-3, 4-4, 4-5, 3
Linear, 4-12, 4-13
endpoint measurements, 4-4, 4-5, 3
Linearity limit, 3-6
Endpoint measurements, 4-4, 4-5, 3
linearity range, 3-15, 3-17, 4-8, 4-9, 4-10, 4-11, 8-4, 8-9,
Equilibrium, 4-6
8-45, 17-13, 17-18
error detection limits, 3-10, 3-11, 3-16, 9-2, 9-3, 9-4
Linearity range, 3-6, 3-15, 3-17, 4-8, 4-9, 4-10, 4-11, 8-4,
Error detection limits, 3-10, 3-11, 3-16, 3-17, 9-2
8-9, 8-45
error logs, 1-30, 11-3, 17-1, 17-6, 17-7, 17-8, 17-9, 17-10
LIS, 1-28, 1-29, 1-40, 2-8, 3-7, 7-9, 8-21, 8-23, 8-35, 8-36,
Error logs, 1-30, 11-3, 17-1, 17-6, 17-7, 17-8, 17-9, 17-10
8-37, 8-38, 8-42, 8-43, 8-47, 9-2, 9-6, 10-20, 13-2,
13-4, 13-6, 14-1, 14-2, 14-3, 14-4, 14-5, 14-6, 14-7,
F 14-8, 14-10, 14-11, 14-12, 17-3, 17-4, 17-65, 17-66,
filter core, 16-11, 16-32, 16-33, 16-42 1, 3, 4, 9
Filter core, 16-5, 16-11, 16-32, 16-33, 16-42 L-J chart, 7-9, 7-11, 7-12, 4
Fixed-time, 3-13, 3-14, 4-3, 4-6, 3 Lot number, 2-15, 2-16, 2-17, 2-18, 2-21, 3-28, 5-3,
fixed-time measurements, 4-6, 17-14, 17-60, 3, 4 7-17, 13-7, 13-9, 4
Fixed-time measurements, 4-6, 3, 4 Low limit, 3-5
Full width at half maximum, 1-20 low-concentration waste, 1-19, 2-3, 16-21, 17-44, 17-45
Function buttons area, 1-28, 1-29 Low-concentration waste, 1-19, 2-3, 16-21
Function window, 1-28, 1-30
M
H Main screen, 1-28, 18-2
High limit, 3-5 Measuring point, 3-6, 4-6, 4-8, 4-9, 4-10
high-concentration waste, 1-19, 2-2, 2-3, 2-49, 16-21, Microtube, 1-13, 2-26, 3-2, 8-13, 8-17
17-45 mixed blank absorbance range, 6-6
High-concentration waste, 1-19, 2-2, 2-3, 2-49, 16-21 Mixed blank absorbance range, 6-6
History, 8-50 Mixer, 1-7, 1-20, 1-36, 4
History results, 3 Mixer arm, 16-55, 16-56
Holographic concave flat-field gratings, 1-20, 1-36 mixer assembly, 1-20, 1-21, 1-36, 16-6, 17-39, 17-40, 1
Host, 3-9, 7-9, 8-35, 8-36, 8-37, 8-38, 8-42, 9-6, 14-3, Mixer assembly, 1-20, 1-21, 1-36, 16-6, 1
14-4, 14-6, 14-7, 14-10, 17-2, 17-65, 17-66 Mouse, 1-31, 1-40
host communication, 3-9, 14-3, 17-4, 17-65 multi-sample report, 9-12, 11-3
Multi-sample report, 9-12, 11-3
Host communication, 3-9, 14-3, 17-4
N
Noise and fuse, 1-41
Index-2
Index
non-linear calibrations, 4-12 R

Non-linear calibrations, 3-31, 4-12
random error, 7-3, 7-4, 7-5, 7-6, 7-13, 6, 9
Random error, 7-3, 7-4, 7-5, 7-6, 7-13, 6, 9
O Reaction carousel, 1-18, 1-36, 17-2, 17-3, 17-4, 17-40,
off-line dilution, 2-31, 2-32, 2-36, 2-37, 2-39, 8-7, 8-11, 17-47, 6
8-13 Reaction curve, 4-11, 4-15, 4, 6
Off-line dilution, 2-31, 2-32, 2-36, 2-37, 2-39, 8-7, 8-13 Reaction cuvette, 1-18, 1-20, 1-36, 6
off-line load of reagents, 5-11 reaction direction, 2-22
Off-line load of reagents, 5-11 Reaction direction, 2-22
Offset, 3-11, 3-21, 3-22, 4 reaction system, 1-36, 1
Online help, 1-30, 16-7, 16-9, 5 Reaction system, 1-36, 1
on-line load of reagents, 5-10 reaction time, 2-22, 3-14, 3-15, 3-17, 3-19, 4-4, 4-8, 4-9,
On-line load of reagents, 5-10 4-10, 4-11, 4-15, 17-18, 17-20, 7
Operating software, 18-1 Reaction time, 2-22, 3-14, 3-15, 3-17, 3-19, 4-4, 4-8, 4-9,
Operation unit, 5 4-10, 4-11, 4-15, 9-4, 7
Output unit, 5 reagent blank, 3-18, 3-27, 4-12, 6-2, 6-6, 6-7, 6-8, 6-9,
6-16, 5, 7
P Reagent blank, 2-19, 3-18, 4-12, 6-1, 6-2, 6-6, 6-7, 6-8,
6-9, 6-16, 5, 7
Panels, 2-34, 10-9, 10-10, 10-11, 10-12, 10-14, 10-20, Reagent carousel, 1-14, 1-15, 1-36, 17-2, 17-4, 17-41,
16-14, 16-47, 5 17-42, 7
patient report, 10-11 Reagent carryover, 7
Patient report, 18-1 reagent handling system, 1-14, 1-36, 1
Photometric system, 1-7, 1-36, 16-6 Reagent handling system, 1-14, 1-36, 1
physiological saline, 2-19, 3-15, 3-27, 5-2, 5-9, 6-6, Reagent inventory alarm limit, 3-4, 5-2, 7
8-14, 8-25, 17-65, 17-70, 7 Reagent probe, 1-16, 1-17, 1-36, 2-17, 17-32, 17-33,
Physiological saline, 3-15, 5-9, 8-14, 7 17-35, 7
powering off, 2-1, 2-2, 16-66 Reagent probe wash solution, 2-17, 2-18, 7
Powering off, 2-2, 16-66 Reagent syringe, 1-17, 17-33, 17-36
powering on, 2-4 reagent volume, 11, 2-22, 3-16, 8-20, 17-65
Powering on, 2-2, 2-4 Reagent volume, 11, 2-22, 3-16, 8-20
Predilution, 2-31, 2-32, 2-37, 2-39, 8-8, 5 Reference range, 3-22, 7
Primary tube, 1-13, 1-14 reference range flags, 3-24
Primary wavelength, 9-4, 5 Reference range flags, 3-24
Prime, 3-4, 12-4, 12-21, 16-32, 5 reference/critical range, 3-22, 3-23, 3-24
print name, 3-12, 8-20, 9-2, 10-6 Reference/critical range, 3-22, 3-23, 3-24
Print name, 3-12, 8-20, 10-6 Replace cuvette, 16-12
print setup, 9-1 Replace lamp, 16-6, 16-11
Print setup, 9-1 Replace reagent mixer, 16-11, 16-14
Probe arm, 16-72 Replace sample mixer, 16-11, 16-14
Probe rotor, 16-72
Replace sample probe, 16-11
processing parameters, 3-10, 3-11, 9-3, 9-4
Replicates, 2-31, 2-32, 2-37, 2-39, 7
Processing parameters, 3-10, 3-11 response, 4-12, 4-13
programming control samples, 2-26 Result flag, 3-4, 3-24, 6-16, 17-10, 17-13
Programming routine samples, 2-1, 2-2 result transmission, 14-1
Prompt message area, 1-28, 1-30 results recall, 6-1, 7-1, 8-1, 12-18
prozone check, 17-22, 17-60 Results recall, 12-18
Pull-down list, 6
RMS, 14-1, 14-2, 14-3, 14-12, 14-13
Q S
QC alarms, 2-22, 7-2 Safety classification, 1-41
QC panel, 6
sample blank, 12, 2-19, 2-22, 3-15, 4-5, 4-6, 6-20, 7-10,
QC reports, 7-2, 11-3
7-16, 8-14, 8-41, 9-11, 6
QC rules, 3-32, 3-34, 3-35, 7-2
Sample blank, 12, 3-15, 4-5, 4-6, 6-20, 7-10, 7-16, 8-14,
QC summary, 7-18, 6
8-41, 9-11, 6
Qualitative, 10-11
sample blanked response, 4-5
Quality control, 2-1, 3-1, 7-2
Sample blanked response, 4-5
Quantitative, 10-11
Sample carousel, 1-10, 1-11, 1-35, 17-2, 17-3, 17-4, 17-41,
8
Sample carousel assembly, 1-10
Index-3
Index
Sample carousel outer ring, 17-41 Statistics, 8-54, 10

sample comments, 2-30, 2-32, 2-36, 2-37 Status display area, 1-28, 1-29
Sample comments, 2-30, 2-32, 2-36, 2-37 Substrate, 3-6, 4-6, 4-8, 4-9
Sample cup, 8-17 substrate depletion, 3-17, 3-18, 4-6, 4-8, 4-9, 4-10, 4-11,
Sample dispenser assembly, 1-10, 1-12 17-14, 17-18, 17-19, 17-60
sample handling system, 1-10, 1-35, 1 Substrate depletion, 3-17, 3-18, 4-6, 4-8, 4-9, 4-10, 4-11
Sample handling system, 1-10, 1-35, 1 symbology, 13-3, 13-4, 13-7, 13-8
sample list, 2-27, 2-34, 7-11, 8-30, 8-38, 8-39, 8-42, 8-43, Symbology, 13-3, 13-4, 13-8
8-44, 8-45, 8-47, 8-48, 9-11, 9-14, 14-10 syringe plunger assembly, 16-69, 16-70, 16-71
Sample list, 2-27, 2-34, 7-11, 8-30, 8-38, 8-39, 8-42, 8-43, Syringe plunger assembly, 16-69, 16-70, 16-71
8-44, 8-45, 8-47, 8-48, 9-11, 9-14 System relocation, 1-6
sample logs, 8-1, 8-27 systematic error, 7-3, 7-4, 7-5, 7-6, 7-13, 9
Sample logs, 8-27 Systematic error, 7-3, 7-4, 7-5, 7-6, 7-13, 9
Sample panel, 8
Sample probe, 16, 1-8, 1-12, 1-13, 1-35, 2-18, 17-2, 17-3,
T
17-4, 17-28, 17-29, 17-30, 17-31, 17-32, 8
Sample probe wash solution, 2-18, 8 Technical parameters, 1-20
Sample probe wash well, 16, 1-12 Technical specifications, 1-1
sample status, 2-29, 8-30, 8-31, 10-22 temperature, 4-4
Sample status, 8-30, 8-31 Template Modifying Software, 18-1, 18-2, 18-4, 18-5
Sample syringe, 1-13, 17-28, 17-29, 17-29, 17-30 Troubleshooting, 2-8, 12-23, 13-12, 14-11, 14-13, 17-1,
Sample type, 2-34, 3-12, 8-11, 8-12, 13-2, 14-8, 8 17-9
Scheduled maintenance, 12-22, 16-10 Twin-Plot chart, 3-7, 9
Screen operation logs, 17-1 Two-control evaluation, 3-35, 7-5, 7-6, 9
Secondary wavelength, 9-4, 8
Serial number, 2-15, 2-16, 2-17, 2-18, 2-20, 13-7, 13-9, U
17-4, 17-5, 8
Shortcut icons area, 1-28, 1-30 unpositioned samples, 8-1, 8-23, 8-30
single-point linear calibration, 4-12, 4 Unpositioned samples, 8-23, 8-30
Single-point linear calibration, 4-12, 4 user-defined chemistries, 3-10, 3-11, 3-16
Slope, 3-11, 3-21, 3-22, 8 User-defined chemistries, 3-10, 3-11, 3-16
software version, 3-7, 11-13, 11-15, 16-10
Software version, 3-7, 11-13, 16-10 W
special calculation, 9-2, 10-6, 10-8
Special calculation, 10-6 WARNING, 6
Standard deviation, 7-17, 9 water inlet filter, 16-44
Standby, 1-29, 2-7, 2-8, 2-13, 2-14, 2-16, 2-17, 2-18, Water inlet filter, 16-44
2-19, 2-20, 2-48, 3-6, 3-33, 5-7, 8-4, 8-17, 9-2, 11-2, water supply module, 17, 1-24, 1-25, 2-2, 2-3, 2-5,
11-4, 11-8, 12-10, 12-11, 13-9, 14-7, 14-8, 16-18, 16-21
16-20, 16-21, 16-22, 16-23, 16-24, 16-27, 16-28, Water supply module, 17, 1-24, 1-25
16-29, 16-32, 16-33, 16-35, 16-36, 16-37, 16-40, Wavelength, 1-20, 1-35, 3-13
16-42, 16-43, 16-44, 16-45, 16-48, 16-49, 16-58, Wavelength accuracy, 1-20
16-59, 16-60, 16-61, 16-63, 16-66, 16-68, 16-69,
16-71, 16-72, 9 Z
STAT, 1-30, 2-1, 2-2, 2-33, 2-34, 2-36, 2-37, 2-38, 5-10, Zero-order reaction, 4-8
8-2, 8-4, 8-5, 8-11, 8-12, 8-21, 8-35, 8-37, 10-14,
14-8, 1, 9
Index-4
Bibliography
1. Burtis C.A., Ashwood E.R. and Bruns D.E. Tietz Fundamentals of Clinical Chemistry. 6th
Ed. Saunders/Elseviser, St. Louis, Missouri, 2008, 63-262.
2. Burtis C.A., Ashwood E.R. and Bruns D.E. Tietz Textbook of Clinical Chemistry and
Molecular Diagnostics. 5th Ed., Saunders/Elseviser, St. Louis, Missouri, 2012, 7-59.
3. Gauglitz G. and Vo-Dinh T. Handbook of Spectroscopy. WILEY-VCH Verlag GmbH & Co.
KGaA, Weinheim, 2003, 37-162.
4. Gottschalk P.G. and Dunn J.R. The five-parameter logistic: A characterization and
comparison with the four-parameter logistic. Analytical Biochemistry, 2005; 343: 54–65.
5. Levey S. and Jennings E.R. The use of control charts in the clinical laboratory. Am J Clin
Pathol, 1950; 20: 1059-1066.
6. Madsen K., Nielsen H.B. and Tingleff O. Methods for Non-Linear Least Squares Problems.
2nd Ed., Informatics and Mathematical Modelling, Technical University of Denmark,
Lyngby, Denmark, 2004.
7. Westgard J.O. and Barry P.L. Cost-Effective Quality Control: Managing the quality and
productivity of analytical processes. AACC Press, Washington DC, 1986.
8. Westgard J.O., Barry P.L., Hunt M.R. and Groth T. A multi-rule Shewhart chart for quality
control in clinical chemistry. Clin Chem 1981; 27: 493-501.
Bibliography-1
Bibliography
Bibliography-2
P/N: 046-006925-00(8.0)

BS-600 Operation Manual V8.0 en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BS-600 Operation Manual V8.0 en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

BS-600 Operation Manual V8.0 en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BS-600

1.0 2015-01 First version

2.0 2015-03 Modified the maintenance steps of

5.0 2020-09 Added HbA1c function

6.0 2020-10 1. Added result flag REE

Customer service department

Electric Shock Hazards

Moving Parts Hazards

Photometer Lamp Hazards

Laser Beam Hazards

Sample, Calibrator and Control Hazards

Reagent and Wash Solution Hazards

System Disposal Hazards

Fire and Explosion Hazards

Removal of Analyzer from Use for Repair or Disposal

Cleaning and Decontamination

Software and Cybersecurity

Notification of Adverse Events

Electromagnetic Noise Precautions

Safety Information -10

Maintenance and Servicing Precautions

Chemistry Parameter Configuration Precautions

ISE Module Precautions

Reagent, Calibrator and Control Precautions

Data Archiving Precautions

Safety Information -12

External Equipment Precautions

External Vacuum Pump Precautions

Tube and Liquid Container Precautions

Labels and Silkscreen

Mandatory Blue White White

Warning Yellow Black Black

Warning Yellow Black Black

Labels and Silkscreen

Unique device identifier

Authorized Representative in the European

Safety Information -14

Caution: hot surface

Caution: Laser radiation

“ON” for a part of equipment

“OFF” for a part of equipment

Protective conductor terminal

Moving parts warning

Photometer lamp warning

Probe collision warning

Safety Information -16

Vacuum pump connection warning

Water supply/drainage/external vacuum module warning

Non-Warning Labels and Silkscreen

HIGH CONC. WASTE HIGH CONC. WASTE SENSOR

LOW CONC. WASTE SENSOR

LOW CONC. WASTE DEIONIZED WATER

The fluidic interfaces for optional configuration are shown as follows:

Safety Information -18

Publication Information ........................................................................................................................................................... ii

Safety Information ··································································································· 1

Safety Symbols .............................................................................................................................................................................. 2

Chemistry Parameter Configuration Precautions ........................................................................................ 11

Volume I - Contents ··································································································· I